Service Manual: Model PX-50XM4 Series PX-50XR4 Series Plasma Monitor

CONFIDENTIAL
No.P B 2 4 - 0 4 - B 0 0 3
Empowered by Innovation
SERVICE MANUAL
PLASMA MONITOR
MODEL PX-50XM4 series

PX-50XR4 series
This service manual provides the technical materials for maintenance servicing, programmed for
the technical personnel in charge of repair services. Prior to starting maintenance servicing, read
through the [SAFETY SERVICE (P3-1)] without fail and observe the caution notes described
therein.
External appearance and specifications are subject to change without notice, for reasons of qual-
ity and performance improvements and others.
In order to maintain safety, quality, and performance, use the genuine parts, without fail, at the
time of maintenance servicing.
NEC Plasma Display Corporation

TOKYO, JAPAN
Copyright (C) 2004 NEC Plasma Display Corporation ALL rights reserved.
NEC and NEC logo are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation.
This document contains confidential information. Unauthorized copying,
duplication, distribution, or republication is strictly prohibited.
CONFIDENTIAL
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................ 2-1

SAFETY SERVICE..................................................................................................................... 3-1
USER’S MANUAL ...................................................................................................................... 4-1
TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................................................... 5-1
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS .................................................................................................. 6-1
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY ................................................................................................... 7-1
METHOD OF PACKAGING ....................................................................................................... 8-1
PARTS LIST ............................................................................................................................... 9-1
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ..................................................................................................... 10-1
CONNECTION PIN EXPLANATION ........................................................................................ 11-1
BLOCK DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................................. 12-1
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS............................................................................................................... 13-1
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................... 14-1
1-1
CONFIDENTIAL
INTRODUCTION
The merchandise listed in this Service Manual is categorized as shown below. All the items are applicable to
HDCP.
■ PX-50XM4 Series (Cabinet color: gray, Filter: AR filter provided with a loop-out feature)
1. Destination
(1) For Japan PX-50XM4J
(2) For North America PX-50XM4A
(3) For European countries PX-50XM4G
(4) For countries other than the above areas PX-50XM4W
2. EMI standards
(1) CLASS A PX-50XM4J,PX-50XM4A,PX-50XM4W,PX-50XM4G
(2) CLASS B No applicable model
■ PX-50XR4 Series (Cabinet color: Silver, Filter: AR filter without a loop-out feature)
1. Destination
(1) For Japan No applicable model
(2) For North America PX-50XR4A
(3) For European countries PX-50XR4G
(4) For countries other than the above areas PX-50XR4W
2. EMI standards
(1) CLASS A No applicable model
(2) CLASS B PX-50XR4A,PX-50XR4W,PX-50XR4G
2-1
CONFIDENTIAL
SAFETY SERVICE
■Safety cautions
The matters to be observed without fail are explained below. These matters are indispensable for the
prevention of an accident during the maintenance servicing, the “security of products” after the completion of
servicing work, and the “prevention of the repeated occurrence of similar fault.”
(1) The degree of danger and material damage, caused as a result of wrong use by disregarding the contents
of the display” is distinguished and explained in the table below.
If this display is disregarded and equipment is handled
WARNING wrongly, this can be a cause of physical injury and a

fire, thus leading a person to death or serious injury.
If this display is disregarded and equipment is

CAUTION handled wrongly, this may lead to personal injury or
material damage.
(2) Kinds of the matters to be observed are classified and explained in the icons shown below.
This icon indicates a dangerous place where an electric shock is anticipated.
This icon indicates the contents of “caution” that must be borne in mind, without fail.
This icon indicates the contents of “caution” that must be practiced, without fail.
WARNING
• Observe the caution matter, without fail.
• In the place where a particular caution is needed during maintenance servicing, such a
caution note is displayed with a label or a stamp that is given to the cabinet, chassis,
PWB, etc. These caution notes and also the caution matters of WARNING given in
the instruction manuals, etc., must be observed, without fail.
• Be careful of an electric shock or a burn.

• The power block or the PDP module involves the sections where high voltage or high
temperature is prevalent. When equipment is energized, use working gloves in order to
prevent an electric shock or a burn. At the time of transportation, disassembly,
reassembly, and the replacement of parts, such a servicing job must be done after pulling
out the power plug.
• Modification of equipment is absolutely prohibited. Use the specified parts at all times.
• If any modification is performed, the validity of the manufacturer’s warranty is lost at that
moment. The personnel who did this modification is responsible for the physical injury or
the like, if it should occur as a result of the modification. The parts used are given the
safety-based characteristics, such as non-flammability or sufficient withstand voltage. The
parts to be replaced shall be those which are specified in the list of replacement
parts.(Example: The lithium battery (circuit symbol BA9501 in the MAIN PWB) will give
rise to explosion if its polarity is wrongly treated.
• The replaced parts and wiring must be arranged in the original conditions.
• For safety reasons, insulation materials like tubes and tapes may be used or some parts
may be mounted clear of the PWB. The internal wiring and the fastening with the
clampers for separation from high-heat and high-voltage parts shall be returned to their
original conditions, without fail.
3-1
http://getMANUAL.com
CONFIDENTIAL
• For the maintenance servicing, safety inspection is needed in accordance with the check list.
• Inspection should be carried out according to the check list shown below, in regard to
safety inspection before and after repairing, authentic repair, and explanation to the
user.
(Method of insulation check)
Mount a PDP module on the product to complete it. After the completion of aging and
others, pull out the power plug from the wall outlet, remove the cable, and turn on the
power switch. Use a 500V megger (Note 1) and confirm that the insulation resistance is
50M. or more between each terminal (except for the 3-core earth terminal) of the power
plug (Note 2) and the external exposed metallic parts (Note 3). If the insulation
resistance is found to be below the specified value, recover the faulty section and make
another insulation check again.
(Note 1) If a 500V megger is not available at that time, use a circuit tester or the like.
(Note 2) In the case of a 3-core terminal, the earth resistance shall be 1Ω or less
between the earth terminal and the earth side of each input terminal.
(Note 3) Head phone jack, speaker terminals, remote control terminals, each I/O
terminals, control terminals, screws, etc.
Check item Check column
Is there any influence by high temperatures (due to direct sunlight, etc.), moisture (steam, etc.), oil
Safety inspection before
Installation
fume, dust, and dew condensation?

conditions
Is the condition of ventilation acceptable (distance to the wall, ventilation holes, etc.)?
Is the condition of the antenna acceptable (reach to the wire, bend, tilt, etc.)?
repairing
Is the condition of power supply acceptable (regular outlet, adequate earthing, concentrated wiring, etc.)?
Is the condition of installation acceptable (unstability, height, tilt, falling preventive materials, etc.)?
Are the power plug and the power cord free from damage or the attachment of dust?
main body
Product
Is the product free from unusual sound, unusual odor, or unusually high temperature?
Are the knobs, handles, and back cabinet free from abnormality (rattling, drop off, etc)?
Is equipment free from any abnormality in daily use?
Is the symptom examined according to the user’s statement?
shooting
Trouble-
Is the product disassembled to the grade where troubleshooting is possible?

Is the symptom reproduced, the faulty part located as a result of fault diagnosis, and replaced?
Is the normal condition confirmed after aging?
Is the part, specified in the list of parts, used for the power unit?
Specified parts
Authentic repair
Is the part, specified in the list of parts, used for the insulation material (material, thickness, etc)?
Is the part, specified in the list of parts, used for the power plug and the power cord?
Is the part, specified in the list of parts, used for the internal cabling and the high voltage lead wires?
Is the part, specified in the list of parts, used for the PDP module?
Are the rest of replaced parts those specified in the list of parts?
Is the part version correct?
Are the part mounting position, fixing method, and the distance the same as those of original?
mounted
Wires
Is the wiring layout the same as the original (connector, clamper, distance from a heat generating part, etc)?
Is the soldering condition acceptable (whisker, too much solder, tunnel, failure in winding, etc)?
Is the insulation material the same as the original (tubes, tapes, fiber, etc.)?
Are the repaired section and its peripheral parts free from abnormality?
Is there any intrusion of foreign substances (solder chips, wire chips, screw chips, screws, etc.)?
Safety inspection after repairing
Is everything free from danger due to deterioration (discoloration, damage, leakage, etc.)?
Is the safety protection circuit in normal operation?
Are contamination and dust removed after final finish?
Is there any failure in mounting and tightening (back cabinet, falling preventive materials, etc.)?
Is there any influence by high temperatures (direct sunlight, stove, etc.), moisture (steam, etc.), oil fume,
dust, and dew condensation?
Is the condition of ventilation acceptable (distance to the wall, ventilation holes, etc.)?
Is the condition of the antenna acceptable (reach to the wire, bend, tilt, etc.)?
Is the condition of power supply acceptable (regular outlet, adequate earthing, concentrated wiring, etc.)?
Is the condition of installation acceptable (unstability, height, tilt, falling preventive materials, etc.)?
Is the insulation check finished with a circuit tester or the like? (Refer to the above description, “Method of
insulation check.”)
Are the contents and actual treatment of repairing and safety inspection services duly explained?
To use equipment after reading through the instruction manual.
Explanation to the user
Explanation of use
Not to dislodge the back cabinet.

Not to insert anything in ventilation holes and clearances.
To pull out the power plug if the product is not used for a long time.
To ask an NEC’s authorized maintenance service company for the cleaning of the product interior
for the removal of dust.
To turn off the power switch when cleaning the panel surface and the cabinet.
To turn off the power switch of the main unit for the product provided with a remote control, in case
of going out or sleeping.
Are explanations given to pull out the power plug in case of abnormality and to contact the dealer or an
NEC’s authorized maintenance service company.
3-2
CONFIDENTIAL
CAUTION
• Observe the caution matter, without fail
• The caution matters of CAUTION given in the instruction manuals, etc., must be
observed, without fail.
• Do not give shocks and vibration.

• The panel surface (display plane) of the filter and the PDP module is made of glass. If
any shocks or vibration is applied, it may be broken and the scattered glass chips will
be a cause of injury.
• Do not put anything.

• Do not put anything on the product. Otherwise, this can be a cause of injury as a result
of falling down or dropping caused by imbalance.
• Transportation must be done by enough personnel.

• The product is heavy. In the case of transportation, unpacking, or packing, more than
two persons should do it (four persons for a product of 50-inch or larger) by supporting
the top and the bottom of the product.
■Miscellaneous caution matters

(1) This product uses highly integrated semiconductor parts. Since these parts are fragile to
electrostatic charges, earth bands should be used for handling. The product should be handled
where measures have been taken against electrostatic charges.
(2) For this product, the PDP modules and the PWBs are repaired by replacement in a unit.
Therefore, the units of the PDP modules and the PWBs must not be repaired or disassembled.
Otherwise, the validity of warranty will be lost.
(3) If this product is used for the fixed character display or the like as in the case of a character
display board, a phenomenon of burning (not warranted) will occur. Burning is a phenomenon
that the unevenness in the brightness is caused in the display. In such a case, the brightness in
the section where the integrated display time is longer becomes lower than the brightness in
another section where the integrated display time is shorter. This phenomenon is in proportion
to the integrated display time and the brightness. For this reason, to relieve this difficulty during
servicing, do not use any still picture, but use a display by motion pictures of a video or the like.
In addition, use “FULL” for the screen mode and avoid using any display by “NORMAL”,
“TRUE”, or MULTI SCREEN like side by side etc. If it is necessary to use only a still picture for
unavoidable reasons, use a burning relief function such as “PLE LOCK”, “ORBITER”,
“SCREEN WIPER”, etc.
(4) When a PDP module is operated after a long time of storage, it may encounter a difficulty like a
failure in displaying a screen or unstability according to the condition of storage. In such a case,
the PDP module should be incorporated in the product and aging treatment should be carried
out for about two hours (all screen display).
(5) Sulfides will deteriorate the PDP module and this is a cause of malfunction. Therefore, it is
absolutely prohibited to put any vulcanized rubber or a material containing sulfur in the vicinity
of the PDP module.
(6) When taking out a PDP module from the maintenance package box, do it slowly so that the
3-3
CONFIDENTIAL
panel surface does not get any shock or stress.
(7) If one touches the connector of the flexible cable exposed to the rear side of the PDP module,
there is danger of causing a poor contact. As such, it must be handled with utmost care. In
addition, the flexible cable is very weak in mechanical strength. Therefore, this cable must not
be touched during handling.
(8) The panel surface of the filter and the PDP module is easy to be hurt. These components
should be handled very carefully not to press or rub them with a hard thing. Never put them on
a hard thing with the panel surface faced downwards.
(9) When the panel surface of the PDP module is contaminated, gently wipe off the contaminant
with a piece of soft dry cloth. Liquid-state contamination can be removed by lightly pressing it,
without rubbing it. If it is difficult to remove the contamination, use a piece of cloth soaked with
a neutral detergent. The cloth for wiping off should be clean. Never use the same cloth
repeatedly. If a cleansing detergent or water drops should enter the module interior or be
attached to the module surface other than the display plane at the time of cleaning, this will
give rise to the destruction of the product when the product is energized.
(10) Refer to the “Instruction Manual” in regard to contamination in the filter and the cabinet.
(11) When transporting this product, use the packing materials specified in the list of parts. Once
used, such packing materials should not be used again.
(12) This product is composed of a variety of parts, such as those made of materials like glass,
metal, plastics, etc., and those like a lithium battery (circuit symbol of the MAIN PWB: BA9501),
etc. Therefore, when abandoning this product, this should be done in accordance with the
relevant law of the nation or an autonomous body.
CAUTION: Risk of Explosion if Battery is replaced by an Incorrect Type. Dispose of Used
Batteries According to above the Instructions.
3-4
CONFIDENTIAL
USER' S MANUAL
PlasmaSync Plasma Monitor
Model Information
For the operation of your plasma monitor,
refer to “Operation Manual”.
NEC Solutions (America), Inc.
4-1
CONFIDENTIAL
2
4-2
CONFIDENTIAL
Important Information
Warning NOTE:
Not for use in a computer room as defined in the Standard
When you connect a computer to this monitor, use an RGB
for the Protection of Electronic Computer/ Data Processing
Equipment ANSI/NFPA 75.
cable including the ferrite core on both ends of the cable.
And regarding DVI and power cable, attach the supplied
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with ferrite cores. If you do not do this, this monitor will not
the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of conform to mandatory FCC standards.
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide Attaching the ferrite cores:
reasonable protection against harmful interference when Set the ferrite cores on both ends of the DVI cable (not
the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. supplied), and both ends of the power cable (supplied).
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio Close the lid tightly until the clamps click.
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in Use the band to fasten the ferrite core (supplied) to the
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful DVI cable.
interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful DVI cable (not supplied)
interference in which case the user will be required to correct band band Connector
the interference at his own expense.
core (small) core (small)
Power cable (supplied)

core (large)
core (large)
3
4-3
CONFIDENTIAL
Recommandations importantes
Avertissement REMARQUE:
Ne pas utiliser dans une salle d’ordinateurs telle que définie Pour raccorder un ordinateur à ce moniteur, procéder à
dans la Norme pour la protection des ordinateurs
l’aide d’un câble RGB à âme de ferrite aux deux
électroniques/appareils de traitement des données ANSI/
extrémités. Sur les câbles DVI et les câbles d’alimentation
NFPA75.
électrique, fixer les âmes de ferrite fournies aux extrémités.
Si vous ne le faîtes, le moniteur ne sera pas en
DOC avis de conformation conformité avec les exigences des standards FCC.
Cet appareil numérigue de la Classe A respecte toutes les
Fixation des noyaux en ferrite.
exigences du Réglement sur le Matériel Brouilleur du Canada.
Monter les tores en ferrite aux deux extrêmités du câble
DVI (non fourni) et aux deux extrêmités du câble
d’alimentation électrique (fourni).
Fermez doucement le couvercle jusqu’à ce que les crans
se clipsent.
Fixer le tore en ferrite (fourni) au câble DVI à l’aide d’un
collier.
Câble DVI (non fourni) Connecteur
Collier Collier
noyau (petit) noyau (petit)
Câble d'alimentation
électrique (fourni) noyau (grande)
noyau (grande)
4
4-4
CONFIDENTIAL
Specifications
Screen Size 43.5"(H)⳯24.5"(V) inches
1106(H)⳯622(V) mm 1.5"
diagonal 50" 48.1" (1222) (38) 2.3"
(58)
Aspect Ratio 16 : 9
Resolution 1365(H)⳯768(V) pixels
Pixel Pitch 0.032"(H)⳯0.032"(V) inches 43.5" (1106)
0.81(H)⳯0.81(V) mm
Color Processing 4,096 steps, 68.7 billion colors
Signals
24.5" (622)
30" (736)
Synchronization Range Horizontal : 15.5 to 110 kHz
(automatic : step scan)
Vertical : 50.0 to 120 Hz
(automatic : step scan) 3.8"
Input Signals RGB, NTSC (3.58/4.43), PAL (B,G,M,N), (96)
PAL60, SECAM, HD*1 , DVD*1 , DTV*1 Units are in inch
Bezel color is gray. (mm)
Input Terminals (VIDEO1 and RGB1 can also be used as OUTPUT terminals)
RGB The features and specifications may be subject to change without
Visual 1 (Analog) mini D-sub 15-pin⳯1 notice.
Visual 2 (Analog) BNC (R, G, B, H/CS, V)⳯1*2
Visual 3 (Digital) DVI-D 24-pin⳯1*3 *1 HD/DVD/DTV input signals supported on this system
480P (60 Hz) 480I (60 Hz) 525P (60 Hz)
Video
525I (60 Hz) 576P (50 Hz) 576I (50 Hz)
Visual 1 BNC⳯1
625P (50 Hz) 625I (50 Hz) 720P (60 Hz)
Visual 2 RCA-pin⳯1
1035I (60 Hz) 1080I (50 Hz) 1080I (60 Hz)
Visual 3 S-Video: DIN 4-pin⳯1
*2 The 5-BNC connectors are used as RGB/PC2 and HD/DVD2 input.
DVD/HD/DTV Select one of them under “BNC INPUT”.
Visual 1 RCA-pin (Y, PB[CB], PR[CR])⳯1*1 *3 Compatible with HDCP.
Visual 2 BNC (Y, PB[CB], PR[CR])⳯1*1, *2 Supported Signals
Visual 3 DVI-D 24-pin⳯1*3 • 640ⴒ480P @ 59.94/60Hz • 1920ⴒ1080I @ 50Hz
Audio Stereo RCA⳯3 (Selectable) • 1280ⴒ720P @ 59.94/60Hz • 720ⴒ576P @ 50Hz
External Control D-sub 9-pin⳯1 (RS-232C) • 1920ⴒ1080I @ 59.94/60Hz • 1440 (720)ⴒ576P @ 50Hz
Sound output 9W+9W at 6 ohm • 720ⴒ480P @ 59.94/60Hz
Power Supply AC100-240V 50/60Hz • 1440 (720)ⴒ480I @ 59.94/60Hz
Note: In some cases a signal on the plasma monitor may not be displayed
Current Rating 7.6A (maximum)
properly. The problem may be an inconsistency with standards from
Power Consumption 435W (typical) the source equipment (DVD, Set-top box, etc...). If you do experience
Dimensions 48.1 (W)⳯30 (H)⳯3.8 (D) inches such a problem please contact NEC Solutions (America), Inc. and also
1222 (W)⳯736 (H)⳯96(D) mm the manufacturer of the source equipment.
Weight 97 lbs / 44 kg (without stand)
Environmental Considerations
Operating Temperature 0°C to 40°C / 32°F to 104°F
Humidity 20 to 80% (no condensation)
Altitude 0 to 9180 feet / 0 to 2800 m
Storage Temperature -10°C to 50°C / 14°F to 122°F
Front Panel User Controls Power on/off, Input source select,
Volume up/down/ OSM control
Remote Control Functions Power on/off, Input source select, OSM Other Features Motion compensated 3D Scan Converter (NTSC,
control,Volume up/down, Cursor (UP, PAL, 480I, 576I, 525I, 625I, 1035I, 1080I), 2-3
DOWN,LEFT, RIGHT), Pointer, Zoom up/ pull down Converter (NTSC, 480I, 525I, 1035I,
down, Off timer, Wireless/ Wired remote 1080I (60Hz)), 2-2 pull down Converter (PAL,
control, Split screen buttons 576I, 625I, NTSC, 480I, 525I), Digital Zoom
OSM Functions Picture (Contrast/Brightness/Sharpness/ Color/Tint/ Function (100-900% Selectable), Video Wall 4-25
Picture mode/Noise reduction/Color temperature/ multi screen, Self Diagnosis, Image Burn
White balance/Gamma/Low tone/Color tune), reduction tools (PLE LOCK1~3, INVERSE,
Audio (Bass/Treble/Balance/Audio input), Image WHITE, ORBITER (Auto1,2/Manual), SCREEN
Adjust (Aspect mode/V-Position /H-Position/V- WIPER), Color Temperature select (high/mid/mid
Height /H-Width/Auto Picture/Fine picture/Picture low/low, user has 4 memories), Control lock
adjustment), Option1 (OSM/BNC Input/D-Sub (Except power SW), Auto Picture, Input Skip,
Input/RGB Select/HD Select/Input Skip/All Reset), Color Tune, Low Tone (3 mode), Auto ID,
Option2 (Power management/Cinema mode/Long Programmable Timer, Gamma Correction (4
life [PLE, Orbiter, Inverse, White, Screen wiper, Soft mode), Loop through interface, Plug and play
focus]/Gray level/S1/S2/Picture size/DVI Set up/ (DDC1, DDC2b, RGB3: DDC2b only), Split
CloseCaption/Caption cont), Option3 (Timer/Power screen operations
on mode/Control lock/IR Remote/Loop out/ID Accessories Remote control with two AAA batteries, Power
number/Video wall [Divider, Position, Disp. mode, cord, Manuals, Safety metal fittings, Ferrite cores,
Auto ID, Image adjust, Power on delay, PLE link, Bands, Cable clamps
Timer]), Option4 (Sub. P detect/Zoom nav/Pic
Regulations UL Approved (UL 60950-1, CAN/CSA C22.2
freeze/Seamless SW), Advanced OSM, Language*,
No.60950-1)
Color system, Source information
DOC Canada requirements
*English, German, French, Italian, Spanish,
Meets FCC Class A requirements
Swedish, Chinese, Russian 5
4-5
CONFIDENTIAL
6
4-6
CONFIDENTIAL
Table of Signals Supported

Supported resolution
• When the screen mode is NORMAL, each signal is converted to a 1024 dots⳯768 lines signal. (Except for *2, 3, 4)
• When the screen mode is TRUE, the picture is displayed in the original resolution.
• When the screen mode is FULL, each signal is converted to a 1365 dots⳯768 lines signal. (Except for *3)
Computer input signals supported by this system
Vertical Horizontal Sync Polarity Presence Screen mode RGB
Model Dots ⳯ lines
frequency frequency Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical NORMAL TRUE FULL select*5 DVI Memory
Signal Type (Hz) (kHz) (4:3) (16:9)
640⳯400 70.1 31.5 NEG NEG YES YES YES*2 YES YES –– NO 4
640⳯480 59.9 31.5 NEG NEG YES YES YES YES YES STILL YES 5
72.8 37.9 NEG NEG YES YES YES YES YES –– YES 7
75.0 37.5 NEG NEG YES YES YES YES YES STILL YES 8
848⳯480 60.0 31.0 POS POS YES YES –– YES YES WIDE2 YES 19
852⳯480*1 60.0 31.7 NEG NEG YES YES –– YES YES WIDE1 YES 17
800⳯600 56.3 35.2 POS POS YES YES YES YES YES STILL YES 11
60.3 37.9 POS POS YES YES YES YES YES STILL YES 12
72.2 48.1 POS POS YES YES YES YES YES –– YES 13
IBM PC/AT*8 99.8 63.0 POS POS YES YES YES YES YES –– YES 43
compatible 120.0 75.7 POS POS YES YES YES YES YES –– YES 44
computers 1024⳯768 60.0 48.4 NEG NEG YES YES YES*3 –– YES STILL YES 24
70.1 56.5 NEG NEG YES YES YES*3 –– YES –– YES 25
75.0 60.0 POS POS YES YES YES*3 –– YES STILL YES 26
85.0 68.7 POS POS YES YES YES*3 –– YES –– YES 27
1152⳯864 75.0 67.5 POS POS YES YES YES –– YES STILL YES 51
1280⳯768 56.2 45.1 POS POS YES YES –– –– YES WIDE1 NO 52
59.8 48.0 POS NEG YES YES –– –– YES WIDE3 YES 80
1280⳯768*9 69.8 56.0 NEG POS YES YES –– –– YES WIDE1 YES 66
1280⳯800*9 60.0 49.7 NEG NEG YES YES –– –– YES WIDE1 YES 21
1360⳯765 60.0 47.7 POS POS YES YES –– – – YES*3 WIDE1 NO 22
1360⳯768 60.0 47.7 POS POS YES YES –– – – YES*3 WIDE1 YES 22
1376⳯768 59.9 48.3 NEG POS YES YES –– –– YES WIDE2 YES 53
1280⳯1024 60.0 64.0 POS POS YES YES YES*4 –– YES STILL YES 29
100.1 108.5 POS POS YES YES YES*4 –– YES –– NO 47
1600⳯1200 60.0 75.0 POS POS YES YES YES –– YES –– YES 54
65.0 81.3 POS POS YES YES YES –– YES –– NO 55
1920⳯1200*9 60.0 74.6 NEG NEG YES YES –– –– YES WIDE2 –– 81
1920⳯1200RB*9 60.0 74.0 NEG NEG YES YES –– –– YES WIDE3 YES 88
Apple 640⳯480 66.7 35.0 Sync on G Sync on G –– –– YES YES YES –– NO 6
Macintosh*6 *8 832⳯624 74.6 49.7 Sync on G Sync on G –– –– YES YES YES –– NO 16
1024⳯768 74.9 60.2 Sync on G Sync on G –– –– YES*3 –– YES WIDE1 NO 28
1152⳯870 75.1 68.7 Sync on G Sync on G –– –– YES –– YES WIDE1 NO 39
1440⳯900*9 60.0 56.0 NEG NEG YES YES –– –– YES –– YES 89
Work Station 1280⳯1024 60.0 64.6 NEG NEG YES YES YES*4 –– YES –– YES 29
(EWS4800)*8 71.2 75.1 NEG NEG YES YES YES*4 –– YES –– YES 48
Work Station(HP)*8 1280⳯1024 72.0 78.1 –– –– –– –– YES*4 –– YES –– YES 59
Work Station 1152⳯900 66.0 61.8 C Sync C Sync –– –– YES –– YES –– YES 60
(SUN)*8 76.0 71.7 C Sync C Sync –– –– YES –– YES –– YES 61
1280⳯1024 76.1 81.1 C Sync C Sync –– –– YES*4 –– YES –– YES 30
Work Station 1024⳯768 60.0 49.7 –– –– –– –– YES*3 –– YES –– YES 62
(SGI) 1280⳯1024 60.0 63.9 –– –– –– –– YES*4 –– YES –– YES 29
IDC-3000G
PAL625P 768⳯576 50.0 31.4 NEG NEG YES YES YES*7 –– YES*7 –– NO 31
NTSC525P 640⳯480 59.9 31.5 NEG NEG YES YES YES*7 –– YES*7 MOTION NO 32
7
4-7
CONFIDENTIAL
*1 Only when using a graphic accelerator board that is capable of displaying 852⳯480.
*2 This signal is converted to a 1024 dots ⳯ 640 lines signal.
*3 The picture is displayed in the original resolution.
*4 The aspect ratio is 5:4. This signal is converted to a 960 dots⳯768 lines signal.
*5 Normally the RGB select mode suite for the input signals is set automatically. If the picture is not displayed properly, set the RGB mode
prepared for the input signals listed in the table above.
*6 To connect the monitor to Macintosh computer, use the monitor adapter (D-Sub 15-pin) to your computer's video port.
*7 Other screen modes (ZOOM and STADIUM) are available as well.
*8 When viewing a moving picture at a vertical frequency greater than 65Hz, the picture may sometimes be unstable (jumpy). If this occurs,
please set the refresh rate of the external equipment to 60Hz.
To view 480I@60Hz (480 interlaced lines, 60Hz refresh rate) or 576I@50Hz (567 interlaced lines, 50Hz refresh rate) when sync polarity
is “Sync on Green”, set “RGB SELECT” to “MOTION”.
*9 CVT standard compliant.
NOTE:
• While the input signals comply with the resolution listed in the table above, you may have to adjust the position and size of the picture or
the fine picture because of errors in synchronization of your computer.
• When a 1280 dots ⳯ 1024 lines signal or 1600 dots ⳯ 1200 lines signal is input to the monitor, the picture will be compressed.
• This monitor has a resolution of 1365 dots ⳯ 768 lines. It is recommended that the input signal should be XGA, wide XGA, or equivalent.
• With digital input some signals are not accepted.
• The sync may be disturbed when a nonstandard signal other than the aforementioned is input.
• If you are connecting a composite sync signal, use the HD terminal.
What is HDCP/HDCP technology?

HDCP is an acronym for High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection. High bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP) is a system for
preventing illegal copying of video data sent over a Digital Visual Interface (DVI).
If you are unable to view material via the DVI input, this does not necessarily mean the PDP is not functioning properly. With the implementation
of HDCP, there may be cases in which certain content is protected with HDCP and might not be displayed due to the decision/intention of the
HDCP community (Digital Content Protection, LLC).
• “IBM PC/AT” and “XGA” are registered trademarks of International Business Machines, Inc. of the United States.
• “Apple Macintosh” is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. of the United States.
Copyright © by NEC Plasma Display Corporation

NEC and the NEC logo are registered trademarks of
NEC Corporation
1250 N. Arlington Heights Road, Suite 400 Printed on recycled paper
Itasca, Illinois 60143-1248
Printed in Japan
7S801361
8
4-8
CONFIDENTIAL
Operation Manual
(Enhanced split screen Model)
For the specifications of your plasma monitor,

refer to “Model Information”.
4-9
CONFIDENTIAL
Precautions 3. Do not expose the unit to water or moisture.
Please read this manual carefully before using your plasma 4. Avoid damage to the power cord, and do not attempt to
monitor and keep the manual handy for future reference. modify the power cord.
5. Unplug the power cord during electrical storms or if
the unit will not be used over a long period.
CAUTION 6. Do not open the cabinet which has potentially dangerous
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK high voltage components inside. If the unit is damaged in
DO NOT OPEN this way the warranty will be void. Moreover, there is a
serious risk of electric shock.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC 7. Do not attempt to service or repair the unit. The
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER. NO manufacturer is not liable for any bodily harm or damage
USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. caused if unqualified persons attempt service or open
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED the back cover. Refer all service to authorized Service
SERVICE PERSONNEL. Centers.
This symbol warns the user that uninsulated To avoid damage and prolong operating life:
voltage within the unit may have sufficient 1. Use only with 100-240V 50/60Hz AC power supply.
magnitude to cause electric shock. Continued operation at line voltages greater than 100-
Therefore, it is dangerous to make any kind 240 Volts AC will shorten the life of the unit, and might
of contact with any part inside of this unit. even cause a fire hazard.
This symbol alerts the user that important 2. Handle the unit carefully when installing it and do not
literature concerning the operation and drop.
maintenance of this unit has been included. 3. Set the unit away from heat, excessive dust, and direct
Therefore, it should be read carefully in sunlight.
order to avoid any problems. 4. Protect the inside of the unit from liquids and small
metal objects. In case of accident, unplug the power
cord and have it serviced by an authorized Service
WARNING Center.
TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARDS, DO NOT EXPOSE 5. Do not hit or scratch the panel surface as this causes
THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. ALSO DO NOT USE
flaws on the surface of the screen.
THIS UNIT’S POLARIZED PLUG WITH AN EXTENSION CORD
RECEPTACLE OR OTHER OUTLETS, UNLESS THE
6. For correct installation and mounting it is strongly
PRONGS CAN BE FULLY INSERTED. REFRAIN FROM recommended to use a trained, authorized dealer.
OPENING THE CABINET AS THERE ARE HIGH-VOLTAGE 7. As is the case with any phosphor-based display (like a
COMPONENTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED CRT monitor, for example) light output will gradually
SERVICE PERSONNEL. decrease over the life of a Plasma Display Panel.
8. To avoid sulfurization it is strongly recommended not to
Warnings and Safety Precaution place the unit in a dressing room in a public bath or hot
This plasma monitor is designed and spring bath.
manufactured to provide long, trouble-free service. 9. Do not use in a moving vehicle, as the unit could drop or
No maintenance other than cleaning is required. topple over and cause injuries.
Please see the section “Plasma monitor cleaning 10. Do not place the unit on its side, upside-down or with the
procedure” on the next page. screen facing up or down, to avoid combustion or electric
The plasma display panel consists of fine picture shock.
elements (cells) with more than 99.99 percent active
cells. There may be some cells that do not produce Plasma monitor cleaning procedure:
light or remain lit. 1. Use a soft dry cloth to clean the front panel and bezel
For operating safety and to avoid damage to the unit, area. Never use solvents such as alcohol or thinner to
read carefully and observe the following instructions. clean these surfaces.
To avoid shock and fire hazards: 2. Clean plasma ventilation areas with a vacuum cleaner
with a soft brush nozzle attachment.
1. Provide adequate space for ventilation to avoid internal 3. To ensure proper ventilation, cleaning of the ventilation
heat build-up. Do not cover rear vents or install the unit areas must be carried out monthly. More frequent cleaning
in a closed cabinet or shelves. may be necessary depending on the environment in which
If you install the unit in an enclosure, make sure there the plasma monitor is installed.
is adequate space at the top of the unit to allow hot air
to rise and escape. If the monitor becomes too hot, the Recommendations to avoid or minimize phosphor burn-in:
overheat protector will be activated and the monitor will Like all phosphor-based display devices and all other gas
be turned off. If this happens, turn off the power to the plasma displays, plasma monitors can be susceptible to
monitor and unplug the power cord. If the room where phosphor burn under certain circumstances. Certain
the monitor is installed is particularly hot, move the operating conditions, such as the continuous display of a
monitor to a cooler location, and wait for 60 minutes to static image over a prolonged period of time, can result in
cool the monitor. If the problem persists, contact your phosphor burn if proper precautions are not taken. To protect
dealer for service. your investment in this plasma monitor, please adhere to the
2. Do not use this unit’s polarized plug with extension cords following guidelines and recommendations for minimizing
or outlets unless the prongs can be completely inserted. the occurrence of image burn:
4-10
CONFIDENTIAL
* Always enable and use your computer’s screen saver * Display an image with many colors and color gradations
function during use with a computer input source. (i.e. photographic or photo-realistic images).
* Display a moving image whenever possible. * Create image content with minimal contrast between light
* Change the position of the menu display from time to time. and dark areas, for example white characters on black
* Always power down the monitor when you are finished backgrounds. Use complementary or pastel color whenever
using it. possible.
* Avoid displaying images with few colors and distinct,
If the plasma monitor is in long term use or continuous sharply defined borders between colors.
operation take the following measures to reduce the
likelihood of phosphor burn: * Note: Burn-in is not covered by the warranty.
* Lower the Brightness and Contrast levels as much as Contact your dealer for other recommended procedures that
possible without impairing image readability. will best suit your particular application needs.
Précautions Mises en garde et précautions de
Veuillez lire avec attention ce manuel avant d’utiliser le sécurité
moniteur à plasma et le conserver accessible pour s’y référer Ce moniteur à plasma a été conçu et fabriqué pour
ultérieurement. une utilisation fiable et durable. Il ne nécessite aucun
entretien en dehors du nettoyage. Voir la section
“Méthode de nettoyage du moniteur à plasma” plus loin.
ATTENTION Le panneau à affichage plasma est constitué de fines
RISQUE D’ELECTROCUTION particules d’images (cellules) dont plus de 99,99%sont
NE PAS OUVRIR actives. Certaines d’entre elles ne produisent pas de
lumière ou restent allumées.
MISE EN GARDE: AFIN DE REDUIRE LES RISQUES Pour des raisons de sécurité et pour éviter
D’ELECTRO-CUTION, NE PAS d’endommager l’appareil, lire attentivement les
DEPOSER LE COUVERCLE, IL N’Y A instructions suivantes.
AUCUNE PIECE UTILISABLE A
L’INTERIEUR DE CET APPAREIL. NE Pour éviter les risques d’éléctrocution et d’incendie:
CONFIER LES TRAVAUX D’ENTRETIEN 1. Laisser suffisament d’espace autour de l’appareil pour
QU’A UN PERSONNEL QUALIFIE. la ventilation et éviter toute augmentation excessive de
la température interne. Ne pas couvrir les évents ou
Ce symbole a pour but de prévenir l’utilisateur
de la présence d’une tension dangereuse, non l’installer dans un endroit trop exigu.
isolée se trouvant à l’intérieur de l’appareil. Si vous installez l’appareil dans un espace clos,
Elle est d’une intensité suffisante pour assurezvous qu’il y ait suffisamment d’espace au dessus
constituer un risque d’électrocution. Eviter le pour permettre à l’air chaud de s’élever et de s’évacuer.
contact avec les pièces à l’intérieur de cet Si la température du moniteur devient excessive, la
appareil. protection contre les surchauffes entrera en action et
coupera l’alimentation. Dans ce cas, éteindre l’appareil
Ce symbole a pour but de prévenir l’utilisateur et débrancher le câble d’alimentation. Si la température
de la présence d’importantes instructions de la pièce dans laquelle se trouve le moniteur est
concernant l’entretien et le fonctionnement de particulièrement élevée, déplacer celui-ci dans un endroit
cet appareil. Par conséquent, elles doivent être plus frais et attendre environ 60 minutes qu’il refroidisse.
lues attentivement afin d’éviter des problèmes. Si le problème persiste, prendre contact avec votre
revendeur.
2. Ne pas raccorder la prise d’alimentation polarisée de ce
AVERTISSEMENT
périphérique à une rallonge ou une prise murale si les
AFIN DE REDUIRE LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE OU
D’ELECTROCUTION, NE PAS EXPOSER CET fiches ne peuvent pas être complètement insérées.
APPAREIL A LA PLUIE OU A L’HUMIDITE. AUSSI, NE 3. Ne pas exposer à L’eau ou à l’humidité.
PAS UTILISER LA FICHE POLARISEE AVEC UN 4. Eviter d’endommager le cordon d’alimentation, et ne pas
PROLONGATEUR OU UNE AUTRE PRISE DE modifier le cordon d’alimentation.
COURANT SAUF SI CES LAMES PEUVENT ETRE
5. Débrancher le câble d’alimentation électrique pendant les
INSEREES A FOND. NE PAS OUVRIR LE COFFRET,
DES COMPOSANTS HAUTE TENSION SE TROUVENT orages ou les longues périodes d’inactivité.
A L’INTERIEUR. LAISSER A UN PERSONNEL 6. Ne pas ouvrir le coffret. Des composants de haute
QUALIFIE LE SOIN DE REPARER CET APPAREIL. tension se trouvent à l’intérieur. Si l’appareil est
endommagé de cette manière, la garantie devient
3 caduque. De plus, il y a risque d’électrocution.
4-11
CONFIDENTIAL
7. Ne pas essayer d’intervenir ou de réparer l’appareil. Le Pour éviter les risques de brûlage du luminophore, les
fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de blessure mesures suivantes sont recommandées:
corporelle ou de dégâts matériels résultant d’une opération Comme tous les périphériques d’affichage à base luminophore
d’entretien quelconque effectuée par des personnes non et tous les autres affichages gaz plasma, les moniteurs plasma
qualifiées ou résultant de l’ouverture du couvercle arrière. peuvent être sujets au brûlage du luminophore dans certaines
S’adresser aux services après-vente autorisés. circonstances. Certaines conditions d’utilisation, telles que
l’affichage continu d’une image statique pour une durée
Pour éviter des dommages et prolonger la durée de prolongée, peuvent causer le brûlage du luminophore si
service de l’appareil: aucune précaution n’est prise. Pour protéger votre
1. N’utiliser qu’une source d’alimentation de 100-240 V investissement dans ce moniteur à plasma, veuillez suivre
50/60 Hz CA. Le fait d’utiliser l’appareil en continu à les directives et les conseils suivantes pour minimiser
des tensions de ligne supérieures à 100-240 Volts CA l’occurence le marquage de l’écran:
réduit sa durée de vie et risque de provoquer un incendie.
2. Manipuler l’appareil avec soin pendant son • Assurez-vous de mettre en marche et d’utliser
déplacement et ne pas le faire tomber. l’économisateur d’écran chaque fois que c’est possible
3. Eloigner l’appareil des endroits chauds, très poussiéreux lorsque vous l’utilisez avec une source d’entrée
et exposés en plein soleil. d’ordinateur.
4. Eviter que des liquides et des petits objets métalliques • Affichez une image en mouvement aussi souvent que
pénètrent à l’intérieur de l’appareil. En cas d’incident de possible.
ce genre, débrancher le câble d’alimentation électrique • Changer la position de l’affichage de menu de temps à
et confier le moniteur à un service après-vente agréé. autre.
5. Ne pas frapper ou rayer la surface de la écran plasma, • Coupez toujours l’alimentation lorsque vous avez terminé
car des défauts risquent de se produire sur la surface d’utiliser la moniteur.
de la écran plasma.
6. Pour un montage et une installation correcte, il est Si le moniteur est en usage continu ou longue durée, prenez
fortement recommandé de faire appel à un revendeur les mesures suivantes afin d’éviter l’occurence le brûlage
agréé et qualifié. du luminophore:
7. Comme c’est le cas pour tout affichage à base de
phosphore (comme un moniteur CRT, par exemple), la • Abaissez le niveau de l’image (contraste, luminosité)
puissance de lumière baisse graduellement au cours de autant que possible, sans faire perdre la lisibilité de
la vie du Panneau d’Affichage à Plasma. l’image.
8. Pour éviter tout risque de sulfuration, il est fortement • Affichez une image avec de nombreuses couleurs et
conseillé de ne pas installer l’appareil dans un vestiaire, graduations de couleur (par ex. des images
un bain public ou un bain de source thermale. photographiques ou photo-réalistes).
9. Ne pas utiliser dans un véhicule en marche car l’unité • Créez un contenu d’image avec un contraste minimal
pourrait tomber ou glisser et provoquer des blessures. entre les zones sombres et les zones claires, par exemple,
10. Pour éviter l ‘inflammation ou les chocs électriques, ne des caractères blancs sur un fond noir. Utilisez des
pas placer l’unité sur la tranche, à l’envers ou avec l’écran couleurs complémentaires ou pastels le plus souvent
vers le bas ou vers le haut. possible.
• Évitez d’afficher des images avec peu de couleurs et des
Méthode de nettoyage du moniteur à plasma: limites nettes et clairement définies entre les couleurs.
1. Nettoyer le panneau avant et le cadre en procédant à l’aide
d’un chiffon doux et sec. Ne jamais utiliser de solvents * Remarque: Le brûlage de l’écran n’est pas couvert
du type alcool ou diluant pour le nettoyage de ces surfaces. par la garantie.
2. Nettoyer les prises d’aération du plasma en procédant à
l’aide d’une brosse à poils doux fixée à un aspirateur. Contactez un revendeur agréé ou un revendeur de marque
3. Pour garantir la bonne ventilation du moniteur, nettoyer pour d'autres procédures qui conviendront le mieux à vos
les prises d’air tous les mois. Un nettoyage plus fréquent besoins particuliers.
peut s’avérer nécessaire selon les conditions
environnantes dans lesquelles le moniteur à plasma est
utilisé.
4
4-12
CONFIDENTIAL
Contents
Installation ...................................................... 6 Option2 Settings Menu ........................................... 25
Ventilation Requirements fo enclosure mounting ........... 6 Setting the power management for computer images ..... 25
How to use the safety metal fittings and the screws for POWER/STANDBY indicator ................................... 25
safety metal fittings ................................................ 6 Setting the picture to suit the movie ........................... 25
Creating a video wall ............................................... 7 Reducing burn-in of the screen .................................. 25
Cable Management .................................................. 7 Setting the gray level for the sides of the screen ......... 27
Caution on when the plasma monitor is installed vertically ... 8 Setting the screen size for S1/S2 video input .............. 28
How to use the remote control .................................... 8 Setting the picture size for RGB input signals ............ 28
Battery Installation and Replacement ........................... 8 Setting the signal and black level for DVI signal ........ 28
Using the wired remote control mode .......................... 8 Setting CloseCaption ................................................. 28
Operating Range .......................................................... 8 Setting the contrast of CloseCaption .......................... 28
Handling the remote control ......................................... 8 Option3 Settings Menu ........................................... 29
Using the timer .......................................................... 29
Part Names and Function .................................. 9 Setting the power on mode ......................................... 30
Front View .............................................................. 9 Enabling/disabling the front panel controls ................ 30
Rear View/ Terminal Board ..................................... 10 Enabling/disabling remote control wireless transmission .... 31
Remote Control ...................................................... 11 Loop Out setting ........................................................ 31
Basic Operations ............................................. 12 ID number setting ...................................................... 31
POWER ................................................................ 12 Video Wall setting ...................................................... 31
To turn the unit ON and OFF: .................................... 12 Option4 Settings Menu ........................................... 34
VOLUME .............................................................. 12 Erasing the sub screen image when there is no input signal ..... 34
To adjust the sound volume: ....................................... 12 Displaying the entire image during DIGITAL ZOOM
MUTE ................................................................... 12 operations ................................................................ 34
Displaying still images in the sub screen .................... 35
To mute the audio: ..................................................... 12
Switching the input source quickly ............................ 35
DISPLAY ................................................................ 12
Advanced OSM Settings Menu ................................ 36
To check the settings: ................................................. 12
Setting the menu mode .............................................. 36
DIGITAL ZOOM ..................................................... 12
Language Settings Menu ......................................... 36
AUTO ADJUST ...................................................... 12
Setting the language for the menus ............................. 36
To adjust the size or quality of the picture automatically: .... 12
Color System Settings Menu .................................... 36
OFF TIMER ............................................................ 12
Setting the video signal format ................................... 36
To set the off timer: .................................................... 12
Source Information Menu ........................................ 36
To check the remaining time: ..................................... 12
To cancel the off timer: .............................................. 12 Checking the frequencies, polarities of input signals,
and resolution .......................................................... 36
WIDE Operations ............................................. 13
Wide Screen Operation (manual) ............................ 13
External Control ............................................. 37
Application ........................................................... 37
When viewing videos or digital video discs ............... 13
Wide Screen Operation with Computer Signals ......... 14 Connections .......................................................... 37
Type of connector: D-Sub 9-pin male ........................ 37
When “PICTURE SIZE” is set to “OFF” ................... 14
Communication Parameters ..................................... 37
SPLIT SCREEN Operations ................................. 15 External Control Codes (Reference) .......................... 37
Showing a couple of pictures on the screen at the same time .... 15
Operations in the Side-by-side mode .......................... 15 Pin Assignments ............................................. 37
Operations in the Picture-in-picture mode .................. 16 mini D-Sub 15-pin connector (Analog) ..................... 37
Selecting the input signals to be displayed ................. 16 DVI-D 24-pin connector (Digital) .............................. 37
Zooming up pictures .................................................. 16 Troubleshooting .............................................. 38
Adjusting the OSM controls ....................................... 16
OSM (On Screen Menu) Controls ....................... 17
Menu Operations ................................................... 17
Contents of the Package
Menu Tree ............................................................. 18 䡺 Plasma monitor
Picture Settings Menu .............................................. 20 䡺 Power cord
Adjusting the picture .................................................. 20 䡺 Remote control with two AAA Batteries
Setting the picture mode according to the brightness
䡺 Manuals (Model Information and Operation)
of the room .............................................................. 20
Reducing noise in the picture ..................................... 20 䡺 Safety metal fittings*
Setting the color temperature ..................................... 20 䡺 Ferrite cores, bands
Adjusting the color to the desired level ...................... 21 䡺 Cable clamps
Changing the Gamma Curve ...................................... 21
Making the Low Tone adjustments ............................ 21 * Contents will differ according to the model.
Adjusting the colors ................................................... 21 * These are fittings for fastening the unit to a wall to prevent
Audio Settings Menu .............................................. 22 tipping due to external shock when using the stand
Adjusting the treble, bass and left/right balance (optional). Fasten the safety fittings to the holes in the
and audio input select .............................................. 22 back of the monitor using the safety fitting mount screws
Setting the allocation of the audio connectors ............ 22
(see page 6).
Image Adjust Settings Menu .................................... 22
Adjusting the Position, Size, Fine Picture, Picture Adj ..... 22
Option1 Settings Menu ........................................... 23 Options
Setting the on-screen menu ........................................ 23 • Wall mount unit
Setting the BNC connectors ....................................... 23 • Ceiling mount unit
Checking the signal being transmitted to RGB1 terminal .... 23 • Tilt mount unit
Setting a computer image to the correct RGB select screen ...... 23
• Stand
Setting high definition images to the suitable screen size .... 24
Setting the Input Skip ................................................. 24 • Attachable speakers
5
Resetting to the default values .................................... 24
4-13
CONFIDENTIAL
Installation
You can attach your optional mounts or stand to the plasma monitor in one of the following two ways:
* While it is upright. (See Drawing A)
* As it is laid down with the screen face down (See Drawing B). Lay the protective sheet, which was wrapped around the
monitor when it was packaged, beneath the screen surface so as not to scratch the screen face.
* Do not touch or hold the screen face when carrying the unit.
• This device cannot be installed on its own. Be sure to use a stand or original mounting unit. (Wall
mount unit, Stand, etc.)
* See the inside of the cover page.
• For correct installation and mounting it is strongly recommended to use a trained, authorized
dealer.
Failure to follow correct mounting procedures could result in damage to the equipment or injury
to the installer.
Product warranty does not cover damage caused by improper installation.
* Use only the mounting kit or stand provided by manufacturer and listed under Options.
Drawing A Drawing B
When installing or carrying, use the
handles attached to the upper back
of the display.
Ventilation Requirements for How to use the safety metal fittings

enclosure mounting and the screws for safety metal
To allow heat to disperse, leave space between surrounding fittings
objects as shown on the diagram below when installing. These are fittings for fastening the unit to a wall to prevent
tipping due to external shock when using the stand
(optional). Fasten the safety fittings to the holes in the
Wall
back of the monitor using the safety fitting mount screws.
* Safety metal fittings will differ according to the model.
50mm (2") 50mm (2")
50mm (2")
Screw hole
Wall
Screw or Hook etc.

(Not supplied)
Safty metal fittings
50mm (2")
Screw for Safty metal
Wall
50mm (2")
fittings
Metal chain
(Not supplied)
Table Top
6
4-14
CONFIDENTIAL
Creating a video wall

With built-in matrix display capability, you can create a 4-25 video wall.
• Connect signal cables and remote cables as shown below.
Video signal RGB/DVD/HD signal
BNC connector
Cr/Pr
R/
BNC connector OUT
VIDEO
VIDEO 1
( I N / OUT)
G/
Y
RGB2 / DVD2 / HD2

VIDEO Signal IN
RGB signal/
Cb/Pb
VIDEO 3
VIDEO 2
B/
IN RCA phono plug DVD/HD signal
VIDEO Signal
HD
AUDIO 1
(MONO)
L
VD
Y
DVD1
OUT
(IN / OUT)
RGB signal/
RGB 1
IN DVD/HD signal
IN
Remote REMOTE
control OUT Remote

control
OUT
Remote IN
IN
REMOTE
control OUT Remote
control
OUT
Note:
1. The VIDEO1 and RGB1 terminals can be used for either INPUT or OUTPUT.
When LOOP OUT is ON, do not connect an OUTPUT signal from another unit, that will place an extraordinary load on
the other unit and may damage it.
2. LOOP OUT can not be turned ON while signals are input to the RGB1 terminal.
3. LOOP OUT can be turned ON while signals are input to the RGB1 terminal if the POWER is switched ON.
Information
• To loop signals out to another plasma display, set the LOOP OUT to ON.
• To create a video wall, set the VIDEO WALL menu items properly.
• To connect monitors, please use a 1~2m (3.3~6.6 feet) BNC cable (any commercially available cable).
• If the image quality is poor, do not use the monitor’s out terminal. Use a distribution amplifier (any commercially
available distribution amplifier) to connect the split signals to the respective monitor INPUT terminals.
• Being used as a video wall function, maximaly 4-screen is rough-standard with lower than 1024768, 60Hz
signal.
• A distribution amplifier is particularly recommended when using 9-screen and over video wall.
• From the second monitor onward, connections require a BNC-RCA conversion cable or connector, a mini D-Sub
15 pin cable-BNC (5) cable or a conversion connector.
Cable Management
Using the cable clamps provided with the plasma display, Back of the unit
bundle at the back of the unit the signal and audio cables
connected to the display.
mounting holes
To attach To detach
1. 2.
clamp
cables
mounting hole
7
4-15
CONFIDENTIAL
Caution on when the plasma monitor is installed vertically Top side
• Use the optional unit. Contact your store of purchase when installing. OPTION1
MENU/ ENTER
OSM
DOWN
VOLUME
BNC INPUT
• Rotate 90° clockwise as seen from the front when installing.
UP
: RGB
LEFT/-
D-SUB INPUT
RIGHT/+
90°
: RGB
INPUT SELECT
/ EXIT
RGB SELECT
: AUTO
HD SELECT
• After installing, check with the NEC logo mark as seen : 1080B
INPUT SKIP
: OFF
ALL RESET
: OFF
1024768
from the front. SEL. MENU/ENTER OK

EXIT RETURN
• Be sure to set “OSM ANGLE” to “V” when using.

* Failure to heed the above cautions may lead to malfunction.
How to use the remote control
Battery Installation and Replacement
Insert the 2 “AAA” batteries, making sure to set them in MENU/ ENTER DOWN
VOLUME
UP LEFT/- RIGHT/ +
INPUT SELECT
/ EXIT
with the proper polarity. Bottom side

1.Press and open the cover.
Operating Range
* Use the remote control within a distance of about 7 m/
23ft. from the front of the monitor’s remote control sensor
and at horizontal and vertical angles of up to approximately
30°.
* The remote control operation may not function if the
monitor’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct
2.Align the batteries according to the (+) and (–) indication sunlight or strong artificial light, or if there is an obstacle
inside the case. between the sensor and the remote control.
Approx.
7m / 23ft
3.Replace the cover.
Using the wired remote control mode

Connect the remote cable* to the remote control’s remote
jack and the “REMOTE IN” terminal on the monitor.
When the cable is connected, the mode automatically Handling the remote control
switches to wired remote control. When the wired remote • Do not drop or mishandle the remote control.
control mode is used, the remote control can be operated • Do not get the remote control wet. If the remote control
even if no batteries are loaded. gets wet, wipe it dry immediately.
• Avoid heat and humidity.
External Control
• When not using the remote control for a long period,

remove the batteries.
IN
REMOTE
• Do not use new and old batteries together, or use different

OUT
types together.
• Do not take apart the batteries, heat them, or throw them
Remote Control into a fire.
Cable*
• When using the remote control in the wireless condition,
be sure to unplug the remote cable from the REMOTE
To Remote Jack
IN terminal on the monitor.
* The 1/8 Stereo Mini cable must be purchased separately. 8

4-16
CONFIDENTIAL
Part Names and Function
Front View
VOLUME INPUT SELECT

MENU/ ENTER DOWN UP LEFT/- RIGHT/+ / EXIT
VOLUME INPUT SELECT

MENU/ENTER DOWN UP LEFT/ - RIGHT/+ /EXIT
7 6 5 4 1 3 2
q Power t LEFT/– and RIGHT/+

Turns the monitor’s power on and off. Enlarges or reduces the image. Functions as the
CURSOR ( / ) buttons in the On-Screen Menu
w Remote sensor window (OSM) mode.
Receives the signals from the remote control.
y VOLUME DOWN and UP
e POWER/STANDBY indicator Adjusts the volume. Functions as the CURSOR (▲/
When the power is on ............................. Lights green. ▼) buttons in the On-Screen Menu (OSM) mode.
When the power is in the standby mode ... Lights red.
u MENU/ENTER
r INPUT SELECT / EXIT Sets the On-Screen Menu (OSM) mode and displays
Switches the input. the main menu.
The available inputs depend on the setting of “BNC
INPUT”, “RGB SELECT” and “DVI SET UP”.
Functions as the EXIT buttons in the On-Screen Menu
WARNING
(OSM) mode.
The Power on/off switch does not disconnect the plasma
display completely from the supply mains.
9
4-17
http://getMANUAL.com CONFIDENTIAL
Rear View/ Terminal Board
VIDEO
VIDEO 1
C VIDEO 3
VIDEO 2
AUDIO 1
D
(MONO)
L
R
Y
DVD1 / HD1
E
Cb/Pb
Cr/Pr
AUDIO 2
(MONO)
L
R
Cr/Pr
R/
G/
Y
RGB2 / DVD2 / HD2
F
Cb/Pb
B/
HD
VD
G
RGB 1
AUDIO 3
(MONO)
L
R
DV I ( Digital RGB )
H
RGB 3
External Control
I A B
IN
J
REMOTE
OUT
A AC IN G RGB1 (mini D-Sub 15pin)

Connect the included power cord here. Connect an analog RGB signal from a computer, etc.
here. This input can be used for Input or Output. (see
B EXT SPEAKER L and R page 7)
Connect speakers (optional) here. Maintain the correct
polarity. Connect the (positive) speaker wire to the H RGB3 (DVI 24pin)
EXT SPEAKER terminal and the (negative) Connect a digital signal (TMDS) from a source with a
speaker wire to the EXT SPEAKER terminal on DVI output.
both LEFT and RIGHT channels. This input can be set for use with an RGB/PC3 (see
Please refer to your speaker’s owner’s manual. page 28).
C VIDEO1, 2, 3 (BNC, RCA, S-Video) I EXTERNAL CONTROL

Connect VCR’s, DVD’s or Video Cameras, etc. here. This terminal is used when operating and controlling
VIDEO1 can be used for Input or Output (see page 7). the monitor externally (by external control).
D AUDIO1, AUDIO2, AUDIO3 J REMOTE IN

These are audio input terminals. Connect the remote cable* to the remote control’s
The input is selectable. Set which video image to allot remote jack to obtain wired remote control.
them from the audio menu screen.
K REMOTE OUT
E DVD1 / HD1 Connect the remote cable* to the REMOTE IN jack of
Connect DVD’s, High Definition or Laser Discs, etc. the other display monitor to obtain wired remote
here. control.
F RGB2/ DVD2/ HD2

RGB2: You can connect an analog RGB signal * The 1/8 Stereo Mini cable must be purchased separately.
and the syncronization signal.
DVD2/ HD2: You can connect DVDs, High
Definition sources, Laser Discs, etc.
here.
This input can be set for use with an
RGB or component source (see page
23).
10
4-18
CONFIDENTIAL
Remote Control u EXIT

Press this button to exit the OSM controls in the main
menu. Press this button during the display of the sub
menu to return to the previous menu.
i POINTER
Press this button to display the pointer.
o ZOOM (+ /–)
Enlarges or reduces the image.
!0 VOLUME (+ /–)
Adjusts the audio volume.
!1 MUTE
Mutes the audio.
!2 WIDE
Automatically detects the signal and sets the aspect ratio.
Wide button is not active for all signals.
!3 DISPLAY
Displays the source settings on the screen.
!4 OFF TIMER
Activates the off timer for the unit.
!5 SIDE BY SIDE
Press this button to show a couple of pictures in the
side-by-side mode.
!6 PICTURE IN PICTURE
picture-in-picture mode.
!7 SINGLE
Cancels the split screen mode.
!8 SELECT/FRREZE
Press this button to select the active picture in a split
screen mode.
When the PIC FREEZE function is operating, this button
can be used to display still images on the sub screen.
q POWER ON/STANDBY !9 AUTO ADJUST
Switches the power on/standby. Press this button to adjust Fine Picture, Picture ADJ,
(This does not operate when POWER/STANDBY Position, and Contrast automatically, or to switch the
indicator of the main unit is off.) screen size to ZOOM mode automatically with the
w RGB/PC superimposed caption displayed fully only when the
Press this button to select RGB/PC as the source. picture contains dark areas above and below the picture.
RGB/PC can also be selected using the INPUT @0 ID SELECT
SELECT button on the monitor. Set the ID number in the remote control. The remote
e DVD / HD control can then be used only for a display with the
Press this button to select DVD/HD as the source. same ID number. When several displays are used
DVD/HD can also be selected using the INPUT together they can be controlled individually.
SELECT button on the monitor. @1 CLEAR/SEAMLESS SW
r VIDEO Clears the number set by the ID SELECT button.
Press this button to select VIDEO as the source. When the SEAMLESS SW function is operating, this
→ VIDEO1 → VIDEO2 → VIDEO3
button can be used to switch the input source quickly.
@2 Remote control signal transmitter
VIDEO can also be selected using the INPUT SELECT Transmits the remote control signals.
button on the monitor. @3 Remote Jack
t MENU/ENTER Insert the plug of the remote cable (The 1/8 Stereo
Press this button to access the OSM controls. Mini cable) here when using the supplied remote
Press this button during the display of the main menu control in the wired condition.
to go to the sub menu.
y CURSOR (▲ / ▼ / / )
Use these buttons to select items or settings and to
adjust settings or switch the display patterns.
11
4-19
CONFIDENTIAL
Basic Operations
POWER OFF TIMER
To turn the unit ON and OFF: To set the off timer:
1. Plug the power cord into an active AC power outlet. The off timer can be set to turn the power off after 30, 60,
2. Press the Power button (on the unit). 90 or 120 minutes.
The monitor’s POWER/STANDBY indicator turns red 1. Press the OFF TIMER button to start the timer at 30
and the standby mode is set. minutes.
3. Press the POWER ON button (on the remote control) to 2. Press the OFF TIMER button to the desired time.
turn on the unit. 3. The timer starts when the menu turns off.
The monitor’s POWER/STANDBY indicator will light → 30 → 60 → 90 → 120 → 0
up (green) when the unit is on.
4. Press the POWER STANDBY button (on the remote control) OFF TIMER 30
or the Power button (on the unit) to turn off the unit.
The monitor’s POWER/STANDBY indicator turns red
and the standby mode is set (only when turning off the
unit with the remote control).
VOLUME
To adjust the sound volume:
1. Press and hold the VOLUME button (on the remote To check the remaining time:
control or the unit) to increase to the desired level. 1. Once the off timer has been set, press the OFF TIMER
2. Press and hold the VOLUME button (on the remote button once.
control or the unit) to decrease to the desired level. 2. The remaining time is displayed, then turns off after a few
MUTE seconds.
To mute the audio: 3. When five minutes remain the remaining time appears
Press the MUTE button on the remote control to cancel until it reaches zero.
the sound; press again to restore.
DISPLAY OFF TIMER 28
To check the settings:

1. The screen changes each time the DISPLAY button is
pressed.
2. If the button is not pressed for approximately three seconds,
the menu turns off.
DIGITAL ZOOM To cancel the off timer:
Digital zoom specifies the picture position and enlarges 1. Press the OFF TIMER button twice in a row.
the picture.
2. The off timer is canceled.
1. (Be sure ZOOM NAV is off.)
Press the POINTER button to display the pointer. ( ) OFF TIMER 0
To change the size of the picture:

Press the ZOOM+ button and enlarge the picture.
The pointer will change to resemble a magnifying glass.
( )
A press of the ZOOM- button will reduce the picture
and return it to its original size.
To change the picture position:
Select the position with the ▲▼ buttons. Note:
2. Press the POINTER button to delete the pointer. After the power is turned off with the off timer ...
A slight current is still supplied to the monitor. When you
AUTO ADJUST are leaving the room or do not plan to use the system for a
To adjust the size or quality of the picture long period of time, turn off the power of the monitor.
automatically:
Press the AUTO ADJUST button.
Information
AUTO ADJUST ON setting
When RGB (still picture) input is selected:
Fine Picture, Picture ADJ, Position, and Contrast will
be adjusted automatically.
When RGB (motion picture), VIDEO, or Y/Pb/Pr
(component) input is selected:
The screen size switches to ZOOM mode automatically
with the superimposed caption displayed fully only
when the picture contains dark areas above and below
the picture.
12
4-20
CONFIDENTIAL
WIDE Operations
Wide Screen Operation (manual) 2.35:1 size screen
With this function, you can select one of six screen sizes.
When viewing videos or digital video discs

1. Press the WIDE button on the remote control.
2. Within 3 seconds ... Original image
Press the WIDE button again. Information is lost on both sides.
The screen size switches as follows: The squeezed film image is expanded to fulfill the entire
→ NORMAL → FULL → STADIUM → ZOOM → 2.35:1 → 14:9 screen at a ratio of 2.35:1. Black bands do not appear at
the top and bottom but information is lost on the left and
When a 720P or 1080I signal is input: right margins.
FULL ↔ 2.35:1
• This feature is available when the input signal is video,
component (480I, 480P, 576I, 576P, 720P, 1080I) or RGB
When displaying enhanced split screen:
(525P or 625P signal from a scan converter).
NORMAL ↔ FULL
* If black bands appear on the top and bottom in the full size
screen, select the 2.35:1 size screen to avoid phosphor burn-
NORMAL size screen (4:3) in.
14:9 size screen
The normal size screen is displayed.

* The picture has the same size as video pictures with a 4 : 3
aspect ratio. The image is displayed at a 14:9 aspect ratio.
* This feature is available when the input signal is video,
FULL size screen component (480I, 480P, 576I, 576P) or RGB (525P or 625P
signal from a scan converter).
Note:
Do not allow the displayed in 4:3 mode for an extended
period. This can cause a phosphor burn-in.
The image is expanded in the horizontal direction.
* Images compressed in the horizontal direction (“squeezed
images”) are expanded in the horizontal direction and
displayed on the entire screen with correct linearity.
(Normal images are expanded in the horizontal direction.)
STADIUM size screen
The picture is expanded in the horizontal and vertical

directions at different ratios.
* Use this for watching normal video programs (4:3) with a
wide screen.
ZOOM size screen

direction, maintaining the original proportions.
* Use this for theater size (wide) movies, etc.
13
4-21
CONFIDENTIAL
Wide Screen Operation with FULL size screen

Computer Signals
Switch to the wide screen mode to expand the 4 : 3 image
to fill the entire screen.
2. Within 3 seconds ...
The image is expanded in the horizontal and vertical
Press the WIDE button again.
direction.
The screen size switches as follows:
→ NORMAL → FULL → ZOOM
ZOOM size screen
NORMAL ↔ FULL
NORMAL size screen (4:3 or SXGA 5:4)
When wide signals are input.
TRUE
The picture has the same size as the normal computer image.
FULL size screen
The image is true resolution.
FULL
ZOOM size screen
Information
When wide signals are input. See page 7 of Model Information for details on the
display output of the various VESA signal standards
FULL size screen supported by the monitor.
“PICTURE SIZE” setting
When the setting of “PICTURE SIZE” is OFF, the size
of RGB-input pictures will be TRUE in place of
NORMAL.
When 852 (848) dot 480 line wide VGA*
signals with a vertical frequency of 60 Hz and
When “PICTURE SIZE” is set to “OFF” horizontal frequency of 31.7 (31.0) kHz are in-
* This cannot be set in some models. “TRUE size” will not put
be displayed in such cases. Select an appropriate setting for RGB SELECT mode
The screen size switches as follows: referring to the“Table of Signals Supported” on page 7
→ TRUE → FULL → ZOOM of Model Information.
* “VGA”, “SVGA” and “SXGA” are registered
TRUE size screen (VGA, SVGA 4:3) trademarks of IBM, Inc. of the United States.
Note:
14
4-22
CONFIDENTIAL
SPLIT SCREEN Operations
Showing a couple of pictures on the Operations in the Side-by-side mode
screen at the same time To change the picture size, press the cursor or
* An RGB-input picture may not be displayed in these modes, button.

depending on the input signal specifications. VIDEO1 RGB/PC2
button VIDEO1 RGB/PC2
1. Press the button to select a screen mode from among single

mode, side-by-side, and picture-in-picture.
A
B A B A B

button button
Side-by-Side2-R Side-by-Side1 Side-by-Side2-L
VIDEO1
button button button button button button

SINGLE
A SINGLE
button
A
B A B
A B

SIDE BY SIDE PICTURE IN PICTURE button button
button button Side-by-Side4-R Side-by-Side3 Side-by-Side4-L
SIDE BY SIDE
To swap the picture on the right and the left, press the
VIDEO1 RGB/PC1
button
VIDEO1 RGB/PC1
cursor button.
A B
Sub
Main screen VIDEO1 RGB/PC1
screen
PICTURE IN
PICTURE
button A B
Note:
Picture A and B on the above screen are not always of the button
same height.
RGB/PC1 VIDEO1
Information
Split screen operations may not function depending on B A
the combination of input signals. In the table below,
“ ” means Yes, “” means No.
Pictures displayed on the right/main screen (Select1)
VIDEO1 VIDEO2 VIDEO3 HD/DVD1 HD/DVD2 RGB/PC1 RGB3 To make the desired picture active, press the SELECT/
RGB2
Pictures VIDEO1
FREEZE button.
displayed on VIDEO2
the left/sub VIDEO3
screen HD/DVD1
VIDEO1 RGB/PC1
(Select2) HD/DVD2
RGB2
RGB/PC1
RGB3 A B
Split screen operations may not function
depending on the type of the RGB signals.
SELECT/FREEZE
button
VIDEO1 RGB/PC1
A B
15
4-23
CONFIDENTIAL
Operations in the Picture-in-picture mode Selecting the input signals to be displayed

To move the position of the sub screen, press the cursor 1. Press the SELECT/FREEZE button to make the desired
or button. picture active.
2. Press the RGB/PC, VIDEO, or DVD/HD button.

button
Each press of the button changes the selection of the input
A A
signal.
B
B The INPUT SELECT button on the monitor can also be
VIDEO1 RGB/PC2
button
VIDEO1 RGB/PC2 used to change the selection.
Top Left Top Right
button button button button Zooming up pictures
1. Press the SELECT/FREEZE button to make the desired
button
VIDEO1 RGB/PC2 VIDEO1 RGB/PC2
picture active.
A
B B A
2. Use the POINTER button and the ZOOM
/ button to
enlage the picture.

button For details, see “DIGITAL ZOOM” on page 12.
Bottom Left Bottom Right
Adjusting the OSM controls

To change the size of the sub screen, press the button. 1. Press the SELECT/FREEZE button to make the desired
VIDEO1 RGB/PC1
picture active.
2. Press the MENU/ENTER button to display the MAIN
A
B MENU.
VIDEO1 RGB/PC1 3. Adjust the setting to your preference.
For details, see “OSM (On Screen Menu) Controls” on
A
B page 17.
Note:
A
B During enhanced split screen, some functions of OSM
controls are not available.
A
B
button button
To make the desired picture active, press the SELECT/

FREEZE button.
A
B SELECT/ A
B
FREEZE
button
16
4-24
CONFIDENTIAL
OSM (On Screen Menu) Controls
Menu Operations Note: The main menu disappears by pressing the EXIT
The OSM window is displayed with respect to the button.
screen as shown on the diagram.
* Depending on the screen’s mode, the OSM may be Information

displayed differently. Advanced menu mode
In the explanation, the OSM section is shown close up. When “ADVANCED OSM” is set to “ON” in the main
PICTURE
MAIN MENU 1/2 menu (1/2), full menu items will be shown.
AUDIO
IMAGE ADJUST
OPTION1
MAIN MENU 1/2
PICTURE
ADVANCED OSM : OFF
NEXT PAGE AUDIO
SEL. MENU/ENTER OK EXIT EXIT
IMAGE ADJUST
OPTION1
OPTION2
OPTION3
OPTION4
ADVANCED OSM : ON
NEXT PAGE
The following describes how to use the menus and the SEL. MENU/ENTER OK EXIT EXIT
selected items.
1. Press the MENU/ENTER button on the remote control to
display the MAIN MENU.
MAIN MENU 1/2
PICTURE
AUDIO
IMAGE ADJUST
OPTION1
ADVANCED OSM : OFF

NEXT PAGE
MAIN MENU 2/2

PREVIOUS PAGE
LANGUAGE
COLOR SYSTEM
SOURCE INFORMATION
2. Press the cursor buttons ▲ ▼ on the remote control to

highlight the menu you wish to enter.
select a sub menu or item.
PICTURE 1/2
CONTRAST
BRIGHTNESS
SHARPNESS
COLOR
TINT
PICTURE MODE : NORMAL
NR : OFF
NEXT PAGE
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
4. Adjust the level or change the setting of the selected item

by using the cursor buttons on the remote control.
5. The adjustments or the settings that are stored in memory.
The change is stored until you change it again.
6. Repeat steps 2 – 5 to adjust an additional item, or press
the EXIT button on the remote control to return to the
main menu.
* When adjusting using the bar at the bottom of the screen,
press the or button within 5 seconds. If not, the
current setting is set and the previous screen appears.
17
4-25
CONFIDENTIAL
Menu Tree
:Shaded areas indicate the default value.
←→ : Press the or button to adjust. The default value is at the center.
:Menu items in a ruled box are available when the ADVANCED OSM is set to ON.
Main menu Sub menu Sub menu 2 Sub menu 3 Sub menu 4 RESET REFERENCE
PICTURE CONTRAST ←→ (0–72) YES 20
BRIGHTNESS ←→ (0–64) YES 20
SHARPNESS ←→ (0–32) YES 20
COLOR ←→ (0–64) YES 20
TINT R←→G (0–64) YES 20
PICTURE MODE BRIGHT/NORMAL/THEAT.1/THEAT.2/DEFAULT YES 20
NR OFF/NR-1/NR-2/NR-3 YES 20
COLOR TEMP LOW/MID LOW/MID/HIGH YES 20
WHITE BALANCE GAIN RED ←→ (0–70) YES 21
GAIN GREEN ←→ (0–70) YES 21
GAIN BLUE ←→ (0–70) YES 21
BIAS RED ←→ (0–70) YES 21
BIAS GREEN ←→ (0–70) YES 21
BIAS BLUE ←→ (0–70) YES 21
RESET OFF←→ON YES 21
GAMMA 1←→2←…→4 YES 21
LOW TONE AUTO←→1←…→3 YES 21
COLOR TUNE RED Y←→M (0–64) YES 21
GREEN C←→Y (0–64) YES 21
BLUE M←→C (0–64) YES 21
YELLOW G←→R (0–64) YES 21
MAGENTA R←→B (0–64) YES 21
CYAN B←→G (0–64) YES 21
AUDIO BASS ←→ (0–26) YES 22
TREBLE ←→ (0–26) YES 22
BALANCE L←→R (-22–+22) YES 22
AUDIO INPUT1 VIDEO 1-3 / HD/DVD 1-2 / RGB 1-3 YES 22
IMAGE ADJUST ASPECT MODE NORMAL/FULL/STADIUM/ZOOM/2.35:1/14:9 — 22
V-POSITION ←→ (-64–+64) YES 22
H-POSITION ←→ (-128–+127) YES 22
V-HEIGHT ←→ (0–64) YES 22
H-WIDTH ←→ (0–64) YES 22
AUTO PICTURE OFF←→ON*2 NO 22
FINE PICTURE*1 ←→ *2 (0–64) YES 22
PICTURE ADJ.*1 ←→ *2 (0–128) YES 22
OPTION1 OSM DISPLAY OSM OFF←→ON YES 23
OSM ADJ. 1←…→6 YES 23
OSM ANGLE H←→V YES 23
OSM ORBITER OFF←→ON YES 23
OSM CONTRAST LOW←→NORMAL YES 23
BNC INPUT RGB←→COMP. YES 23
D-SUB INPUT RGB — 23
RGB SELECT AUTO/STILL/MOTION/WIDE1/WIDE2/WIDE3/DTV YES 23
HD SELECT 1080B/1035I/1080A NO 24
INPUT SKIP OFF←→ON YES 24
ALL RESET OFF←→ON — 24
18
4-26
CONFIDENTIAL
OPTION2 PWR. MGT. OFF←→ON YES 25
CINEMA MODE OFF←→ON YES 25
LONG LIFE PLE AUTO/LOCK 1/LOCK 2/LOCK 3 YES 25
ORBITER AUTO 1 YES 26
AUTO 2 YES 26
MANUAL H-DOT/V-LINE/TIME YES 26
OFF YES 26
INVERSE OFF YES 26
ON WORKING TIME/WAITING TIME YES 26
WHITE YES 26
SCREEN WIPER OFF YES 27
ON WORKING TIME/WAITING TIME/SPEED YES 27
SOFT FOCUS OFF/1/2/3/4 YES 27
GRAY LEVEL 0←…→3←…→15 YES 27
S1/S2 AUTO←→OFF YES 28
PICTURE SIZE OFF←→ON YES 28
DVI SET UP PLUG/PLAY PC←→STB/DVD NO 28
BLACK LEVEL LOW←→HIGH NO 28
CLOSECAPTION OFF←→CC1~4←→TEXT1~4 YES 28
CAPTION CONT LOW←→NORMAL YES 28
OPTION3 TIMER PRESENT TIME DAYLIGHT SAIVING TIME OFF←→ON NO 29
DAY/HOUR/MINUTES NO 29
PROGRAM OFF YES 29
ON DATE/ON/OFF(HOUR, MINUTE)/INPUT/FUNCTION YES 29
MULTI REPEAT OFF YES 30
ON MULTI MODE/WORK TIME/INPUT MODE YES 30
PWR. ON MODE LAST /MULTI/ VIDEO 1-3 / HD/DVD 1-2 / RGB 1-3 YES 30
CONTROL LOCK OFF←→ON YES 30
IR REMOTE OFF←→ON YES 31
LOOP OUT OFF←→ON YES 31
ID NUMBER ALL←→1←…→256 YES 31
VIDEO WALL DIVIDER OFF/1/4/9 YES 32
POSITION No.1←…→No.4/No.7←…→No.15/No.16←…→No.31/No.32←…→No.56 — 32
DISP. MODE SPLIT←→BLANK YES 32
AUTO ID OFF←→ON YES 32
IMAGE ADJUST ASPECT MODE NORMAL/FULL/STADIUM/ZOOM/2.35:1/14:9 — 33
V-POSITION ←→ (-64–+64) YES 33
H-POSITION ←→ (-128–+127) YES 33
V-HEIGHT ←→ (0–64) YES 33
H-WIDTH ←→ (0–64) YES 33
AUTO PICTURE OFF←→ON*2 NO 33
FINE PICTURE*1 ←→ *2 (0–64) YES 33
PICTURE ADJ.*1 ←→ *2 (0–128) YES 33
P. ON DELAY OFF/ON/MODE1/MODE2 YES 33
PLE LINK OFF←→ON YES 33
REPEAT TIMER OFF YES 34
ON DIVIDER/SOURCE/WORK TIME YES 34
OPTION4 SUB. P DETECT OFF←→AUTO YES 34
ZOOM NAV OFF←→S BY S←→BTM LFT←→BTM RGT←→TOP RGT←→TOP LFT YES 34
PIC FREEZE OFF←→S BY S1←→S BY S2←→BTM LFT←→BTM RGT←→TOP RGT←→TOP LFT YES 35
SEAMLESS SW OFF YES 35
ON SELECT1/SELECT2 YES 35
ADVANCED OSM OFF←→ON YES 36
LANGUAGE ENGLISH/DEUTSCH/FRANÇAIS/ESPAÑOL/ITALIANO/SVENSKA/ /У NO 36
COLOR SYSTEM AUTO/3.58NTSC/4.43 NTSC/PAL/PAL 60/PAL-N/PAL-M/SECAM NO 36
SOURCE INFORMATION — — 36
*1 Only when AUTO PICTURE is OFF

*2 RGB/PC only
Information
Restoring the factory default settings
Select “ALL RESET” under the OPTION1 menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults.
19
4-27
Picture Settings Menu Reducing noise in the picture

Use these settings if the picture has noise due to poor
Adjusting the picture
reception or when playing video tapes on which the picture
The contrast, brightness, sharpness, color and tint can be
quality is poor.
adjusted as desired.
Example: Setting “NR-3”
Example: Adjusting the contrast
On “NR” of “PICTURE” menu, select “NR-3”.
On “CONTRAST” of “PICTURE” menu, adjust the contrast.
PICTURE 1/2
PICTURE 1/2 CONTRAST
CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS
BRIGHTNESS SHARPNESS
SHARPNESS COLOR
COLOR TINT
TINT PICTURE MODE : NORMAL
PICTURE MODE : NORMAL NR : OFF
NR : OFF NEXT PAGE NR : NR-3
NEXT PAGE CONTRAST 52 SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
Note: If “CAN NOT ADJUST” appears ... Information

When trying to enter the PICTURE submenu, make sure NR
PICTURE MODE is not set to DEFAULT. * “NR” stands for Noise Reduction.
Information * This function reduces noise in the picture.
Picture adjustment screen Types of noise reduction
CONTRAST: Changes the picture’s white level. There are three types of noise reduction. Each has a
BRIGHTNESS: Changes the picture’s black level. different level of noise reduction.
SHARPNESS: Changes the picture’s sharpness. The effect becomes stronger as the number increases
Adjusts picture detail of VIDEO display. (in the order NR-1 → NR-2 → NR-3).
COLOR: Changes the color density. OFF: Turns the noise reduction function off.
TINT: Changes the picture’s tint. Adjust for natural Setting the color temperature
colored skin, background, etc. Use this procedure to set color tone produced by the plasma
Adjusting the computer image display.
Only the contrast and brightness can be adjusted when Example: Setting “HIGH”
a computer signal is connected.
On “COLOR TEMP.” of “PICTURE” menu, select “HIGH”.
PICTURE 2/2
Select “DEFAULT” under the “PICTURE MODE” PREVIOUS PAGE
settings. COLOR TEMP. : HIGH
GAMMA : 2
LOW TONE : AUTO
Setting the picture mode according to the COLOR TUNE
brightness of the room
There are four picture modes that can be used effectively
according to the environment in which you are viewing SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
the display.
Example: Setting the “THEAT. 1” mode Information
Setting the color temperature
On “PICTURE MODE” of “PICTURE” menu, select
“THEAT. 1”. LOW: Redder
MID LOW: Slightly red
PICTURE 1/2
CONTRAST MID: Standard (slightly bluer)
BRIGHTNESS
SHARPNESS HIGH: Bluer
COLOR
TINT
NR : OFF
NEXT PAGE PICTURE MODE : THEAT. 1
Information
Types of picture modes
THEAT. 1, 2: Set this mode when watching video in a
dark room.
This mode provides darker, finer pictures, like the
screen in movie theaters.
For a darker image, select THEAT. 2.
NORMAL: Set this mode when watching video in a bright
room.
This mode provides dynamic pictures with distinct
differences between light and dark sections.
BRIGHT: This mode provides brighter pictures than
NORMAL.
DEFAULT: Use this to reset the picture to the factory
default settings.
20
4-28
CONFIDENTIAL
Adjusting the color to the desired level Making the Low Tone adjustments
Use this procedure to adjust the white balance for each This feature allows more detailed tone to be reproduced
color temperature to achieve the desired color quality. especially in the dark area.
Example: Adjusting the “GAIN RED” of “HIGH” color Example: Setting “2”
temperature Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the MAIN MENU
Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/ (1/2), then perform the following operations.
2), then perform the following operations. On “LOW TONE” of “PICTURE” menu, select “2”.
On “COLOR TEMP.” of “PICTURE” menu, select “HIGH”, PICTURE 2/2
then press the MENU/ENTER button. PREVIOUS PAGE
COLOR TEMP. : MID
The “WHITE BALANCE” screen appears. GAMMA : 2
On “GAIN RED”, adjust the white balance. LOW TONE : 2
COLOR TUNE
WHITE BALANCE
COLOR TEMP. HIGH
GAIN RED
GAIN GREEN
GAIN BLUE
BIAS RED
BIAS GREEN
BIAS BLUE
RESET : OFF
Information
GAIN RED 70
LOW TONE settings
AUTO: Will automatically appraise the picture and
Information make adjustments.
Adjusting the white balance 1: Will apply the dither method suitable for still pictures.
GAIN R/G/B: White balance adjustment for white level 2: Will apply the dither method suitable for motion
BIAS R/G/B: White balance adjustment for black level pictures.
RESET: Resets settings to the factory default values. 3: Will apply the error diffusion method.
Use and buttons to select “ON”, then press the
MENU/ENTER button. Adjusting the colors
Restoring the factory default settings Use this procedure to adjust hue and color density for red,
Select “RESET” under the WHITE BALANCE menu. green, blue, yellow, magenta and cyan.
You can accentuate the green color of trees, the blue of
Changing the Gamma Curve the sky, etc.
This feature adjusts the brightness of the midtone areas
Example: Adjusting the color tune for blue
while keeping shadows and highlights unchanged.
Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the MAIN MENU
Example: Setting “3”
(1/2), then perform the following operations.
On “PICTURE” menu, select “COLOR TUNE”, then press
the MENU/ENTER button.
On “GAMMA” of “PICTURE” menu, select “3”. The “COLOR TUNE” screen appears.
PICTURE 2/2 On “BLUE” of “COLOR TUNE”, adjust the color tune.
PREVIOUS PAGE
COLOR TEMP. : MID COLOR TUNE
GAMMA : 3 RED
LOW TONE : AUTO GREEN
COLOR TUNE BLUE
YELLOW
MAGENTA
CYAN
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN RESET : OFF

Information
GAMMA settings Information
The picture becomes darker as the number increases COLOR TUNE settings
(in the sequence of 1, 2, 3, 4).
RED: Makes red’s adjustment
GREEN: Makes green’s adjustment
BLUE: Makes blue’s adjustment
YELLOW: Makes yellow’s adjustment
MAGENTA: Makes magenta’s adjustment
CYAN: Makes cyan’s adjustment
RESET: Resets settings to the factory default value.
MENU/ENTER button.
21
4-29
CONFIDENTIAL
Audio Settings Menu Image Adjust Settings Menu

Adjusting the treble, bass and left/right Adjusting the Position, Size, Fine Picture, Picture Adj
balance and audio input select The position of the image can be adjusted and flickering
The treble, bass and left/right balance can be adjusted to of the image can be corrected.
suit your tastes. Example: Adjusting the vertical position in the normal
Example: Adjusting the bass mode
On “BASS” of “AUDIO” menu, adjust the bass. On “V-POSITION” of “IMAGE ADJUST” menu, adjust the
AUDIO
position.
BASS The mode switches as follows each time the or button is
TREBLE
BALANCE
pressed:
AUDIO INPUT1 : VIDEO1 NORMAL ↔ FULL
AUDIO INPUT2 : HD/DVD1
AUDIO INPUT3 : RGB1 * The mode can also be switched by pressing the WIDE
button on the remote control.
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN * The settings on the IMAGE ADJUST menu are not preset
at the factory.
Note : If “CAN NOT ADJUST” appears...
IMAGE ADJUST
Set “AUDIO INPUT” on the AUDIO menu correctly. ASPECT MODE : NORMAL
V-POSITION
Information H-POSITION
V-HEIGHT
Audio settings menu

H-WIDTH
AUTO PICTURE : OFF
FINE PICTURE
BASS: Controls the level of low frequency sound. PICTURE ADJ. V-POSITION +64
TREBLE: Controls the level of high frequency sound.
BALANCE: Controls the balance of the left and right
channels. Information
When “AUTO PICTURE” is “OFF”
Setting the allocation of the audio connectors
IMAGE ADJUST
Setting the AUDIO 1, 2, and 3 connectors to the desired ASPECT MODE : FULL
input. V-POSITION
H-POSITION
Example: Setting “AUDIO INPUT1” to “VIDEO 2” V-HEIGHT
H-WIDTH
On “AUDIO INPUT1” of “AUDIO” menu, select AUTO PICTURE : OFF
FINE PICTURE
“VIDEO2”. PICTURE ADJ.
The available sources depend on the settings of input.
AUDIO When Auto Picture is off, the Fine Picture and the
BASS
TREBLE
Picture ADJ. items are displayed so that you can adjust
BALANCE them.
Adjusting the Auto Picture
AUDIO INPUT1 : VIDEO2
AUDIO INPUT3 : RGB1
ON: The Picture ADJ., Fine Picture and Position
adjustments are made automatically.
Not available for digital ZOOM.
OFF: The Picture ADJ., Fine Picture and Position
Information adjustments are made manually.
AUDIO INPUT * If FINE PICTURE can’t be adjusted, set Auto Picture
A single audio input cannot be selected as the audio to OFF and adjust manually.
channel for more than one input terminal. Adjusting the position of the image
V-POSITION: Adjusts the vertical position of the
image.
H-POSITION: Adjusts the horizontal position of the
image.
V-HEIGHT: Adjusts the vertical size of the image.
(Except for STADIUM mode)
H-WIDTH: Adjusts the horizontal size of the image.
FINE PICTURE*: Adjusts for flickering.
PICTURE ADJ.*: Adjusts for striped patterns on the
image.
* The Picture ADJ. and Fine Picture features are available
only when the “Auto Picture” is off.
* The AUTO PICTURE, FINE PICTURE and PICTURE
ADJ. are available only for RGB signals.
But, these features are not available for moving pictures
on VIDEO, HD/DVD or RGB.
22
4-30
CONFIDENTIAL
Option1 Settings Menu Setting the BNC connectors

Setting the on-screen menu Select whether to set the input of the 5 BNC connectors to
This sets the position of the menu, the display format RGB and component.
(horizontal or vertical) etc. Example: Set the BNC INPUT mode to “COMP.”
Example: Turning the DISPLAY OSM off On “BNC INPUT” of “OPTION1” menu, select “COMP.”.
On “OPTION1” menu, select “OSM”, then press the MENU/ OPTION1 1/4
OSM
ENTER button. BNC INPUT : COMP.
The “OSM” menu appears. D-SUB INPUT : RGB
RGB SELECT : AUTO
On “DISPLAY OSM” of “OSM” menu, select “OFF”. HD SELECT : 1080B
INPUT SKIP : OFF
OSM ALL RESET : OFF
DISPLAY OSM : OFF NEXT PAGE
OSM ADJ. : 1 SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
OSM ANGLE : H
OSM ORBITER : OFF
OSM CONTRAST : LOW
Information
BNC INPUT Settings
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN RGB: Use the 5BNC terminals for RGB input.
COMP.: Use the 3BNC terminals for component input.
Information
Checking the signal being transmitted to
DISPLAY OSM settings RGB1 terminal
ON: The on-screen menu appears. Use this to confirm the signal being transmitted to the
OFF: The on-screen menu does not appear. RGB1 terminal.
If you press the DISPLAY button on the remote control It is set to RGB and can not be adjusted.
for more than 3 seconds the main menu will appear
OPTION1 1/4
and can be set (although it is not ON). OSM
OSM ADJUST settings BNC INPUT
D-SUB INPUT
:
:
RGB
RGB
Adjusts the position of the menu when it appears on RGB SELECT : AUTO
HD SELECT : 1080B
the screen. INPUT SKIP : OFF
The position can be set between 1 to 6. ALL RESET : OFF
NEXT PAGE
CAN NOT ADJUST
Setting a computer image to the correct RGB

select screen
With the computer image, select the RGB Select mode
for a moving image such as (video) mode, wide mode or
digital broadcast.
OSM ANGLE settings Example: Setting the “RGB SELECT” mode to
Sets the display format (landscape “H” or portrait “V”). “MOTION ”
When the unit is installed vertically set the OSM On “RGB SELECT” of “OPTION1” menu, select
ANGLE at “V”. “MOTION”.
“H” “V” OPTION1 1/4
OPTION1 1/4 OPTION1
OSM OSM OSM
BNC INPUT : RGB
D-SUB INPUT : RGB BNC INPUT
: RGB
BNC INPUT : RGB
RGB SELECT : AUTO
HD SELECT
INPUT SKIP
: 1080B
: OFF
D-SUB INPUT
: RGB
D-SUB INPUT : RGB
ALL RESET
NEXT PAGE
: OFF RGB SELECT
: AUTO RGB SELECT : MOTION
SEL. MENU/ENTER OK EXIT RETURN HD SELECT
: 1080B HD SELECT : 1080B
INPUT SKIP
: OFF INPUT SKIP : OFF
ALL RESET
: OFF
1024768
ALL RESET : OFF
SEL. MENU/ENTER OK
EXIT RETURN NEXT PAGE
Information
RGB SELECT modes
One of these 6 modes must be selected in order to
display the following signals correctly.
AUTO: Select the suitable mode for the specifications
OSM ORBITER settings of input signals as listed in the table “Computer input
ON: The position of the menu will be shifted by eight signals supported by this system” on page 7 of Model
dots each time OSM is displayed. Information.
OFF: OSM will be displayed at the same position. STILL: To display VESA standard signals. (Use this
OSM CONTRAST settings mode for a still image from a computer.)
NORMAL: OSM brightness is set to normal. MOTION: The video signal (from a scan converter)
LOW: OSM brightness is set to lower. will be converted to RGB signals to make the picture
more easily viewable. (Use this mode for a motion
image from a computer.)
23
4-31
CONFIDENTIAL
WIDE1: When an 852 dot 480 line signal with a Resetting to the default values
horizontal frequency of 31.7kHz is input, the image may Use these operations to restore all the settings (PICTURE,
be compressed horizontally. To prevent this, set RGB AUDIO, IMAGE ADJUST, OPTION1~4, etc) to the
SELECT to WIDE1. factory default values.
WIDE2: When an 848 dot 480 line signal with a Refer to page 18 for items to be reset.
horizontal frequency of 31.0 kHz is input, the image
may be compressed horizontally. To prevent this, set On “ALL RESET” of “OPTION1” menu, select “ON”, then
RGB SELECT to WIDE2. press the MENU/ENTER button.
OPTION1 1/4
WIDE3: When an 1920 dot 1200 line signal with a OSM
ALL RESET
horizontal frequency of 74.0 kHz is input, the image BNC INPUT

D-SUB INPUT
: RGB
: RGB
may be compressed horizontally. To prevent this, set RGB SELECT
HD SELECT
: AUTO
: 1080B
SETTING NOW
RGB SELECT to WIDE3. INPUT SKIP : OFF

ALL RESET : ON
DTV: Set this mode when watching digital broadcasting NEXT PAGE
SEL. MENU/ENTER OK EXIT RETURN
(480P).
See page 7 of Model Information for the details of the When the “SETTING NOW” screen disappears, then all the
above settings. settings are restored to the default values.
Setting high definition images to the suitable
screen size
Use this procedure to set whether the number of vertical
lines of the input high definition image is 1035 or 1080.
Example: Setting the “1080B” mode to “1035I”
On “HD SELECT” of “OPTION1” menu, select “1035I”.
OPTION1 1/4
OSM
BNC INPUT : RGB
D-SUB INPUT : RGB
RGB SELECT : AUTO
HD SELECT : 1035 I
INPUT SKIP : OFF
ALL RESET : OFF
NEXT PAGE
Information
HD SELECT modes
These 3 modes are not displayed in correct image
automatically.
1080B: Standard digital broadcasts
1035I: Japanese “High Vision” signal format
1080A: Special Digital broadcasts (for example :
DTC100)
Setting the Input Skip
When this is ON, signals which are not present will be
skipped over and only pictures whose signals are being
transmitted will be displayed.
This setting is valid only for the INPUT SELECT button
on the unit.
Example: Set to “ON”
On “INPUT SKIP” of “OPTION1” menu, select “ON”.
OPTION1 1/4
OSM
BNC INPUT : RGB
D-SUB INPUT : RGB
RGB SELECT : AUTO
HD SELECT : 1080B
INPUT SKIP : ON
ALL RESET : OFF
NEXT PAGE
Information
INPUT SKIP settings
OFF: Regardless of the presence of the signal, scan
and display all signals.
ON: If no input signal is present, skip that signal.
* “SETTING NOW” will appear during the input search.
24
4-32
CONFIDENTIAL
Option2 Settings Menu Setting the picture to suit the movie

Setting the power management for computer The film image is automatically discriminated and
images projected in an image mode suited to the picture.
This energy-saving (power management) function [NTSC, PAL, PAL60, 480I (60Hz), 525I (60Hz), 576I
automatically reduces the monitor’s power consumption (50Hz), 625I (50Hz), 1035I (60Hz), 1080I (60Hz) only]
if no operation is performed for a certain amount of time. Example: Setting the “CINEMA MODE” to “OFF”
Example: Turning the power management function on Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/
Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/ 2), then perform the following operations.
2), then perform the following operations. On “CINEMA MODE” of “OPTION2” menu, select “OFF”.
On “PWR. MGT.” of “OPTION2” menu, select “ON”. OPTION2 2/4
PREVIOUS PAGE
OPTION2 2/4 PWR. MGT. : OFF
PREVIOUS PAGE CINEMA MODE : OFF
PWR. MGT. : ON LONG LIFE
CINEMA MODE : ON GRAY LEVEL : 3
LONG LIFE S1/S2 : OFF
GRAY LEVEL : 3 PICTURE SIZE : ON
S1/S2 : OFF DVI SETUP
PICTURE SIZE : ON CLOSECAPTION : OFF
DVI SETUP CAPTION CONT : LOW
CLOSECAPTION : OFF NEXT PAGE
CAPTION CONT : LOW SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
NEXT PAGE
Information
Information 䡵 CINEMA MODE
䡵 Power management function ON: Automatic discrimination of the image and
* The power management function automatically reduces projection in cinema mode.
the monitor’s power consumption if the computer’s OFF: Cinema mode does not function.
keyboard or mouse is not operated for a certain amount Reducing burn-in of the screen
of time. This function can be used when using the The brightness of the screen, the position of the picture,
monitor with a computer. positive/negative mode and screen wiper are adjusted to
* If the computer’s power is not turned on or if the reduce burn-in of the screen.
computer and selector tuner are not properly connected, Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/
the system is set to the off state. 2), then perform the following operations.
* For instructions on using the computer’s power On “OPTION2” menu, select “LONG LIFE”, then press the
management function, refer to the computer’s operating MENU/ENTER button.
instructions. The “LONG LIFE” screen appears.
䡵 Power management settings LONG LIFE
ON: In this mode the power management function is PLE : AUTO
ORBITER : OFF
turned on. INVERSE : OFF
OFF: In this mode the power management function is SCREEN WIPER : OFF
SOFT FOCUS : OFF
turned off.
䡵 Power management function and POWER/
STANDBY indicator SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
The POWER/STANDBY indicator indicates the status PLE (Peak Luminance Enhancement)
of the power management function. See below for
Use this to activate the brightness limiter.
indicator status and description.
Example: Setting “PLE” to “LOCK1”
POWER/STANDBY indicator On “PLE” of “LONG LIFE” menu, select “LOCK1”.
Power POWER/ Power Description Turning the picture
management STANDBY management back on LONG LIFE
mode indicator operating status PLE : LOCK1
ORBITER : OFF
On Green Not activated. Horizontal and vertical Picture already on. INVERSE : OFF
synchronizing signals SCREEN WIPER : OFF
are present from the SOFT FOCUS : OFF
computer.
Off Red Activated. Horizontal and/or Operate the keyboard or

vertical synchronizing mouse. The picture
signals are not sent reappears. SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
from the computer.
Information
䡵 PLE settings
AUTO: The brightness of the screen is adjusted
automatically to suit the picture quality.
LOCK1, 2, 3: Sets maximum brightness.
The brightness level decreases in the order of LOCK
1, 2, 3. LOCK 3 provides minimum brightness.
25
4-33
CONFIDENTIAL
ORBITER INVERSE
Use this to set the picture shift. Use this to set the inverse mode or to display a white
Example: Setting “ORBITER” to “AUTO1” screen.
On “ORBITER” of “LONG LIFE” menu, select “AUTO1”. Example: Setting “INVERSE” to “WHITE”
LONG LIFE
On “INVERSE” of “LONG LIFE” menu, select “WHITE”.
PLE : AUTO
LONG LIFE
ORBITER : AUTO1
PLE : AUTO
INVERSE : OFF
ORBITER : OFF
SCREEN WIPER : OFF
INVERSE : WHITE
SOFT FOCUS : OFF
SCREEN WIPER : OFF
SOFT FOCUS : OFF
Information
䡵 ORBITER settings Information
OFF: Orbiter mode does not function. 䡵 INVERSE Settings
This is the default setting when RGB is input. ON: The picture is displayed alternately between
AUTO1: The picture moves around the screen positive image and negative image.
intermittently, making the picture smaller. This is the You can set the time by pressing the MENU/ENTER
default setting when a Video or a DVD/HD/DTV signal button while “ON” is set.
is input. Set to “OFF” when these signals are not used. OFF: Inverse mode does not function.
AUTO2: The picture moves around the screen WHITE: The entire screen turns white.
intermittently, making the picture bigger. You can set the time by pressing the MENU/ENTER
MANUAL: User can adjust the orbiter function button while “ON” is set.
(Horizontal Dot, Vertical Line and Time) manually.
See the following explanation. Setting the time for INVERSE/WHITE
* When a Video or a DVD/HD/DTV signal is input, the Set a time duration.
AUTO1 and 2 functions will affect only the moving Example: Setting to that the INVERSE mode starts
picture and will not make the screen smaller or bigger. in 2 hours and proceeds for one hour and a half.
On “INVERSE” of “LONG LIFE” menu, select “ON”, then
Adjust the ORBITER function manually press the MENU/ENTER button.
Set the amount of shift and the time between movement. THE “INVERSE/WHITE” screen appears.
Example: Setting so that the picture moves 2 dots Adjust the times.
horizontally and 3 lines vertically every 3 minutes. INVERSE/WHITE
WORKING TIME : 01H30M
On “ORBITER” of “LONG LIFE” menu, select WAITING TIME : 02H00M
“MANUAL”, then press the MENU/ENTER button.
THE “ORBITER” screen appears.
Adjust the items.
ORBITER
H-DOT : 2 DOT
V-LINE : 4 LINE
TIME : 3M
Information
䡵 Setting the time
WORKING TIME: Set the time duration for
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN “INVERSE/WHITE”.
When the WORKING TIME is set to “ON” the mode
Information will stay on.
䡵 ORBITER Function settings WAITING TIME: Set the standby time until the
“INVERSE/WHITE” mode starts.
H-DOT: Moves from 1 to 20 dots in the horizontal
direction. * The “WAITING TIME” can not be set when the
V-LINE: Moves from 1 to 20 lines in the vertical “WORKING TIME” is ON.
direction. * THE “WORKING TIME” and “WAITING TIME” can be
TIME: Interval of 1~5 minutes (1 horizontal dot or 1 set for up to 12 hours and 45 minutes in units of 3 minutes.
vertical line per interval). * Ending a WORKING TIME function, the monitor will
be STAND BY.
[Example]
WORKING TIME: 01H30M
WAITING TIME: 02H00M
←−−−− 2 H −−−−→←−− 1.5 H −−→←−−−−
Start INVERSE/WHITE Start STAND BY
䡵 To select “ON” for the “WORKING TIME”...

Set the hours of the working time to 0H and the minutes
26 to 0M. “ON” will be displayed.
4-34
CONFIDENTIAL
SCREEN WIPER SOFT FOCUS

When this is set to ON, a white vertical bar moves Reduces edges and softens the image.
repeatedly from the left and of the screen to the right end Example: Setting “SOFT FOCUS” to “2”
at a constant speed.
On “SOFT FOCUS” of “LONG LIFE” menu, select “2”.
Example: Setting “SCREEN WIPER” to “ON”
LONG LIFE
On “SCREEN WIPER” of “LONG LIFE” menu, select PLE : AUTO
ORBITER : OFF
“ON”. INVERSE : OFF
SCREEN WIPER : OFF
LONG LIFE SOFT FOCUS : 2
PLE : AUTO
ORBITER : OFF
INVERSE : OFF
SCREEN WIPER : ON SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
SOFT FOCUS : OFF
Information
䡵 SOFT FOCUS settings
OFF: Turns the SOFT FOCUS function off.
Information 1, 2, 3, 4: Activates the SOFT FOCUS setting. The
䡵 SCREEN WIPER higher numbers create a softer image.
ON: The white vertical bar appears. “SHARPNESS” can not be adjusted in the “PICTURE”
You can set the time by pressing the MENU/ENTER menu.
button while “ON” is set.
OFF: Screen wiper mode does not function. Setting the gray level for the sides of the
screen
Setting the time for SCREEN WIPER Use this procedure to set the gray level for the parts on the
Set a time duration and the speed. screen on which nothing is displayed when the screen is
set to the 4:3 size.
Example: Setting so that the SCREEN WIPER mode
starts in 30 minutes and proceeds for one and a half Example: Setting “GRAY LEVEL” to “5”
hours. Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/
On “SCREEN WIPER” of “LONG LIFE” menu, select 2), then perform the following operations.
“ON”, then press the MENU/ENTER button. On “GRAY LEVEL” of “OPTION2” menu, select “5”.
THE “SCREEN WIPER” screen appears. OPTION2 2/4
PREVIOUS PAGE
Adjust the times and speed. PWR. MGT. : OFF
CINEMA MODE : ON
SCREEN WIPER LONG LIFE
WORKING TIME : 01H30M GRAY LEVEL : 5
WAITING TIME : 00H30M S1/S2 : OFF
SPEED : 3 PICTURE SIZE : ON
DVI SETUP
CLOSECAPTION : OFF
CAPTION CONT : LOW
NEXT PAGE
Information
Information 䡵 GRAY LEVEL settings
䡵 Setting the time This adjusts the brightness of the black (the gray level)
WORKING TIME: Set the time duration for “SCREEN for the sides of the screen.
WIPER”. The standard is 0 (black). The level can be adjusted
When the WORKING TIME is set to “ON” the mode from 0 to 15. The factory setting is 3 (dark gray).
will stay on.
WAITING TIME: Set the standby time until the
“SCREEN WIPER” mode starts.
SPEED: Set the moving speed for the “SCREEN
WIPER”. The speed decreases as the number increases.
* The “WAITING TIME” can not be set when the
“WORKING TIME” is ON.
* THE “WORKING TIME” and “WAITING TIME” can
be set for up to 12 hours and 45 minutes in units of 3
minutes.
to 0M. “ON” will be displayed.
27
4-35
CONFIDENTIAL
Setting the screen size for S1/S2 video input

Information
If the S-video signal contains screen size information, the
image will be automatically adjusted to fit the screen when 䡵 PLUG/PLAY settings
this S1/S2 is set to AUTO. PC: When connected to the PC signal.
This feature is available only when an S-video signal is BLACK LEVEL is set to “LOW” automatically.
input via the VIDEO3 terminal. STB/DVD: When connected to the SET TOP BOX, DVD etc.
BLACK LEVEL is set to “HIGH” automatically.
Example: Setting “S1/S2” to “AUTO”
䡵 BLACK LEVEL settings
Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/
LOW: When connected to the PC signal.
2), then perform the following operations.
HIGH: When connected to the SET TOP BOX, DVD etc.
On “S1/S2” of “OPTION2” menu, select “AUTO”. Change “HIGH” into “LOW” if the black level appears gray.
OPTION2 2/4
PREVIOUS PAGE Setting CloseCaption
PWR. MGT. : OFF
CINEMA MODE : ON Choose the closed caption mode that allows text to be
LONG LIFE superimposed on display.
GRAY LEVEL : 3
S1/S2 : AUTO Example: Setting “CLOSECAPTION” to “CC2”
PICTURE SIZE : ON
DVI SETUP Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/
CLOSECAPTION : OFF
CAPTION CONT : LOW 2), then perform the following operations.
NEXT PAGE
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN On “CLOSECAPTION” of “OPTION2” menu, select
“CC2”. OPTION2 2/4
Information PREVIOUS PAGE
PWR. MGT. : OFF
䡵 S1/S2 settings CINEMA MODE : ON
LONG LIFE
AUTO: Adjusts the screen size automatically according GRAY LEVEL : 3
to the S1/S2 video signal. S1/S2
PICTURE SIZE
:
:
OFF
ON
OFF: Turns the S1/S2 function off. DVI SETUP
CLOSECAPTION : CC2
CAPTION CONT : LOW
Setting the picture size for RGB input signals NEXT PAGE
Use this procedure to switch the setting to “ON” or “OFF”. SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
Example: Setting the “PICTURE SIZE” mode to

“OFF” Information
䡵 CLOSECAPTION settings
2), then perform the following operations. OFF: This exits the closed caption mode.
CC1~4: Text is superimposed.
On “PICTURE SIZE” of “OPTION2” menu, select “OFF”.
TEXT1~4: Text is displayed in full screen.
OPTION2 2/4
PREVIOUS PAGE
A closed caption signal may not be decoded in the
PWR. MGT. : OFF following signature;
CINEMA MODE : ON
LONG LIFE 1. when a video tape has been dubbed.
GRAY LEVEL : 3 2. when the signal reception is weak.
S1/S2 : OFF
PICTURE SIZE : OFF 3. when the signal reception is nonstandard.
DVI SETUP
CLOSECAPTION : OFF
When using closed captioned channel or the text mode,
CAPTION CONT : LOW the text screen always appears.
NEXT PAGE
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN When there is no signal, however, the text screen will
not display text characters.
Setting the signal and black level for DVI
signal Setting the contrast of CloseCaption
Choose the signal for the DVI connector (PC or STB/ Choose the brightness of the closed caption.
DVD) and set the black level. Example: Setting “CAPTION CONT” to “NORMAL”
Example: Setting the “PLUG/PLAY” mode to “STB/ Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/
DVD” 2), then perform the following operations.
Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/ On “CAPTION CONT” of “OPTION2” menu, select
2), then perform the following operations. “NORMAL”. OPTION2 2/4
PREVIOUS PAGE
On “OPTION2” menu, select “DVI SET UP”, then press the PWR. MGT. : OFF
MENU/ENTER button. CINEMA MODE : ON
LONG LIFE
The “DVI SET UP” screen appears. GRAY LEVEL : 3
S1/S2 : OFF
On “PLUG/PLAY” of “DVI SET UP” menu, select “STB/ PICTURE SIZE : ON
DVD”. DVI SETUP
CLOSECAPTION : OFF
DVI SET UP CAPTION CONT : NORMAL
PLUG/PLAY : STB/DVD NEXT PAGE
BLACK LEVEL : HIGH
Information
䡵 CAPTION CONT settings
NORMAL: Closed Caption brightness is set to normal.
28 LOW: Closed Caption brightness is set to lower.
4-36
CONFIDENTIAL
Option3 Settings Menu PROGRAM TIMER

Using the timer This sets the day and time at which the power will be
This function sets the monitor to turn ON/OFF switched ON/OFF as well as the input mode.
automatically at a set time. Example: Setting so that the power will be switched
Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/ on at 8:30 A.M., Monday, displaying RGB2 source,
2), then perform the following operations. and switched off at 10:30 A.M.
On “OPTION3” menu, select “TIMER”, then press the On “PROGRAM” of “TIMER” menu, select “ON”, then
MENU/ENTER button. press the MENU/ENTER button.
The “TIMER” screen appears. The “PROGRAM TIMER” screen appears.
TIMER
PRESENT TIME
Adjust the items.
PROGRAM : OFF Each mode switches each time the ZOOM Ⳮ/ⳮ button is
MULTI REPEAT : OFF
pressed.
PROGRAM TIMER
DATE ON OFF INPUT FUNCTION
MON 08 : 30 10 : 30 RGB2 INVERSE
SEL. MENU/ENTER OK EXIT RETURN — --:-- --:-- — —
— --:-- --:-- — —
— --:-- --:-- — —
PRESENT TIME — --:-- --:-- — —
— --:-- --:-- — —
This sets the day of the week and present time. — --:-- --:-- — —
Example: Setting “WEDNESDAY”, “22:05” SEL. ZOOM ADJ. EXIT RETURN
On “TIMER” menu, select “PRESENT TIME”, then press

Information
The “PRESENT TIME” screen appears. 䡵 PROGRAM TIMER settings
Adjust the items. DATE: Set the day of the week (e.g. Sunday).
ON (hour, minutes): Set the time at which the power
PRESENT TIME will be turned on in the 24-hour format.
RETURN
DAYLIGHT
OFF (hour, minutes): Set the time at which the power
SAVING TIME : OFF will be turned off in the 24-hour format.
WEDNESDAY
INPUT: Set the input mode that will be displayed when
22 : 05 : 00 the timer is on.
FUNCTION: Set the LONG LIFE function.
䡵 To reset the program
Select “SET”, then press the MENU/ENTER button. Align the cursor with the DATE field that you wish to
The adjustments are stored and return to the TIMER menu. reset, then press the CLEAR/SEAMLESS SW button.
* If you press the EXIT button instead of the MENU/ENTER 䡵 To reset the data
button, the settings can not be made. Align the cursor with the field (ON/OFF/INPUT/
FUNCTION) that you wish to reset, then press the
PRESENT TIME
RETURN CLEAR/SEAMLESS SW button.
DAYLIGHT
SAVING TIME : OFF
䡵 Special characters in the PROGRAM TIMER
screen
WEDNESDAY
22 : 05 : 00 PROGRAM TIMER
DATE ON OFF INPUT FUNCTION
SET MON 08 : 30 10 : 30 RGB2 INVERSE
SEL. MENU/ENTER OK EXIT RETURN TUE - - : - - 18 : 15 — —
SAT 08 : 30 12 : 15 VIDEO1 WHITE
*FRI 08 : 30 10 : 00 HD/DVD1 —
Information — --:-- --:-- — —
䡵 PRESENT TIME settings * 15 : 30 16 : 00 RGB1 —
SEL. ZOOM ADJ. EXIT RETURN
DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME: Use to set DAYLIGHT
SAVING TIME. • An asterisk “*” in the DATE field
ON: The present time + 1 hour. An asterisk “*” means “every”. For example, “*FRI”
OFF: Cancelled means every Friday and “*” means everyday.
Day: Set the day of the week (e.g. Sunday). • A hyphen “-” in the ON field or OFF field
Hour: Set the hour in the 24-hour format (range 00 to If any hyphen remains in the ON field or OFF field, the
23). FUNCTION can not be set.
Minutes: Set the minutes (range 00 to 59). • A hyphen “-” in the FUNCTION field
A hyphen “-” means last mode (the mode that was last
selected at the time the power was switched off).
䡵 To set MULTI INPUT
• Set the INPUT button to “MULTI”, then press the
MENU/ENTER button.
The “MULTI SCREEN SETTING” will appear on
the screen.
29
4-37
• Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select “MULTI MODE”, Setting the power on mode
then use the 䊴 and 䊳 buttons to choose from This function sets the input mode at the time the power is
“SINGLE”, “SIDE BY SIDE1~3” and “PICTURE switched on.
IN PICTURE (BOTTOM LEFT~TOP LEFT)”. Example: Setting “VIDEO2”
• Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select “MAIN”/ “SUB”
and “LEFT”/“RIGHT”, then use the 䊴 and 䊳 buttons
to choose from “VIDEO1~3”, “HD/DVD1~2” and
“RGB1~3”. On “PWR. ON MODE” of “OPTION3” menu, select
“VIDEO2”.
PROGRAM TIMER
DATE ON OFF INPUT FUNCTION The available inputs depend on the setting of input.
MON 08 : 30 10 : 30 MULTI INVERSE
TUE - - : - - 18 : 15 — — OPTION3 3/4
SAT 08 : 30 12 : 15 VIDEO1 WHITE PREVIOUS PAGE
*FRI 08 : 30 10 : 00 HD/DVD1 — TIMER
— --:-- --:-- — — PWR. ON MODE : VIDEO2
SAT 08 : 30 12 : 15 VIDEO1 WHITE CONTROL LOCK : OFF
* 15 : 30 16 : 00 RGB1 — IR REMOTE : ON
SEL. ZOOM ADJ. EXIT RETURN LOOP OUT : OFF
ID NUMBER : ALL
VIDEO WALL
PICTURE IN PICTURE SIDE BY SIDE NEXT PAGE
PROGRAM TIMER PROGRAM TIMER SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
MULTI SCREEN SETTING MULTI SCREEN SETTING
MULTI MODE
MULTI MODE
: BOTTOM LEFT : SIDE BY SIDE1 Information
INPUT MODE
䡵 PWR. ON MODE settings
INPUT MODE
MAIN : RGB/PC1 LEFT : RGB/PC1
SUB : VIDEO1 RIGHT : VIDEO1
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN

LAST: Last mode (the input that was last selected at
the time the power was switched off).
MULTI REPEAT VIDEO1, 2, 3: VIDEO input mode.
RGB1, 2, 3: RGB input mode.
Two repeat timers are available.
HD/DVD1, 2: HD/DVD input mode.
Each timer has MULTI MODE, WORK TIME and INPUT
MULTI: Multi screen mode.
MODE functions.
Follow the procedure used for PROGRAM TIMER. See
Example: page 29.
TIMER1 is set to display RGB1 (MAIN) and VIDEO1
(SUB) for 4 hours in picute-in-picture mode. Enabling/disabling the front panel controls
TIMER2 is set to display RGB3 (LEFT) and HD/DVD1 This function enables/disables the front panel controls.
(RIGHT) for 2.5 hours in side-by-side mode. Example: Setting “ON”
On “MULTI REPEAT” of “TIMER”, select “ON”, then Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/
press the MENU/ENTER button. 2), then perform the following operations.
The “MULTI REPEAT TIMER” screen appears. On “CONTROL LOCK” of “OPTION3” menu, select
Adjust the items. “ON”, then press the MENU/ENTER button.
TIMER MULTI REPEAT TIMER
OPTION3 3/4
PRESENT TIME 1 MULTI MODE : BTM LFT
PREVIOUS PAGE
PROGRAM : OFF WORK TIME : 04H00M
MULTI REPEAT : OFF INPUT MODE TIMER
MAIN : RGB/PC1 PWR. ON MODE : LAST
SUB : VIDEO1 CONTROL LOCK : ON
2 MULTI MODE : S BY S1 IR REMOTE : ON
WORK TIME : 02H30M
LOOP OUT : OFF
INPUT MODE
LEFT : RGB/PC3
ID NUMBER : ALL
RIGHT : HD/DVD1 VIDEO WALL
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN NEXT PAGE
Information
Information
䡵 MULTI REPEAT settings
䡵 CONTROL LOCK settings
MULTI MODE: Set the input mode to be displayed
while the timer is on. ON: Disables the buttons on the front panel.
WORK TIME: Set the time duration of the display. OFF: Enables the buttons on the front panel.
Time range is from 1 minutes to 4 hours and 15 minutes. * Even when the CONTROL LOCK is set, the POWER
INPUT MODE: Set the signal that will be displayed switch will not be locked.
within the selected screen. * This becomes effective when the on-screen menu goes
Select “MAIN” or “SUB” for “PICTURE IN PICTURE out.
(BTM LFT~TOP LFT)” and “LEFT” or “RIGHT” for
“S BY S1~3”. Only one signal is selected for
“SINGLE”.
* The two repeat timers run consecutively, i.e., Timer1–
Timer2–Timer1–Timer2.
* When both PROGRAM TIMER and MULTI REPEAT
TIMER are set, priority is given to PROGRAM TIMER.
30
4-38
CONFIDENTIAL
Enabling/disabling remote control wireless ID number setting

transmission When using more than one of these displays, this function
This function enables/disables remote control wireless sets ID numbers so that operation of the remote control
transmission. does not cause multiple monitors to operate at the same
Example: Setting “OFF” time.
Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/ Example: Setting “2”
2), then perform the following operations. Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/
On “IR REMOTE” of “OPTION3” menu, select “OFF”, then 2), then perform the following operations.
press the MENU/ENTER button. On “ID NUMBER” of “OPTION3” menu, select “2”.
OPTION3 3/4 OPTION3 3/4
PREVIOUS PAGE PREVIOUS PAGE
TIMER TIMER
PWR. ON MODE : LAST PWR. ON MODE : LAST
CONTROL LOCK : OFF CONTROL LOCK : OFF
IR REMOTE : OFF IR REMOTE : ON
LOOP OUT : OFF LOOP OUT : OFF
ID NUMBER : ALL ID NUMBER : 2
VIDEO WALL VIDEO WALL
NEXT PAGE NEXT PAGE
* To reset back to ALL

Information
Press the CLEAR/SEAMLESS SW button.
䡵 IR REMOTE settings
ON: Enables remote control wireless transmission. Information
OFF: Disables remote control wireless transmission. 䡵 ID NUMBER settings
Set “OFF” to avoid unwanted control from other remote ALL: ID NUMBER will not be set.
controls. 1 to 256: ID NUMBER will be set.
䡵 When the ID NUMBER have been set
Loop Out setting
You can also set ID NUMBER for each remote control
When this feature is set to ON, the received signal will be
to operate the plasma display individually. To do so,
looped out.
see below.
Example: Setting “ON”
Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/ To set the ID number for the remote control
2), then perform the following operations. Example: Setting “2”
On “LOOP OUT” of “OPTION3” menu, select “ON”. Press the ID SELECT button on the remote control.
OPTION3 3/4 The “ID SELECT” screen appears.
PREVIOUS PAGE
TIMER On “ID NUMBER” of “ID SELECT” menu, select “2”.
PWR. ON MODE : LAST
CONTROL LOCK : OFF ID SELECT
IR REMOTE : ON POSITION : 1
LOOP OUT : ON
ID NUMBER : ALL ID NUMBER : 2
VIDEO WALL
NEXT PAGE
Information ADJ. EXIT RETURN
䡵 LOOP OUT settings

* To reset back to ALL
ON: The received signal will be looped out via PC1 Press the CLEAR/SEAMLESS SW button.
terminal or VIDEO1 terminal.
OFF: The received signal will not loop out. Video Wall setting
* Even if LOOP OUT is ON, signals won’t be sent out if When creating a video wall, use a distribution amplifier
POWER is being turned off. (any commercially available distribution amplifier) to
䡵 To connect another display... connect the split signals to the respective monitor INPUT
See page 7. terminals.
Use this feature to configure a 4-25 video wall.
䡵 If the RGB/PC1 signal is present at the time
the power switched on... Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/
The RGB/PC1 input will be displayed regardless of the
setting of LOOP OUT. On “OPTION3” menu, select “VIDEO WALL”, then press
The “VIDEO WALL” screen appears.
VIDEO WALL
DIVIDER : 1
POSITION
DISP. MODE : SPLIT
AUTO ID : OFF
IMAGE ADJUST
P. ON DELAY : OFF
PLE LINK : OFF
REPEAT TIMER : OFF
31 SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
4-39
CONFIDENTIAL
Note: A contingency method of shutting off the electric DISP. MODE

power should be used in cases of emergency during video Select the screen mode from between two options
wall setup. (Splitting, Blanking).
Example: Setting “BLANK”
DIVIDER
Set the 4-25 video wall. On “DISP. MODE” of “VIDEO WALL” menu, select
“BLANK”.
VIDEO WALL
On “DIVIDER” of “VIDEO WALL” menu, select “4”. DIVIDER : 1
POSITION
VIDEO WALL DISP. MODE : BLANK
DIVIDER : 4 AUTO ID : OFF
POSITION IMAGE ADJUST
DISP. MODE : SPLIT P. ON DELAY : OFF
AUTO ID : OFF PLE LINK : OFF
IMAGE ADJUST REPEAT TIMER : OFF
P. ON DELAY : OFF SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
PLE LINK : OFF
REPEAT TIMER : OFF
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN Information
䡵 DISP. MODE settings
Information SPLIT: Combines enlarged screens and creates
䡵 DIVIDER settings multiple screens.
OFF, 1: 1 Screen (Matrix display function does not work) BLANK: Corrects misalignment of combined screen
4: 4 Screens (2×2 video wall) portions and creates multiple screens
9: 9 Screens (3×3 video wall)
16: 16 Screens (4×4 video wall) AUTO ID
25: 25 Screens (5×5 video wall) This feature automatically sets the ID numbers of multiple
* When you select 4-25, set the VIDEO WALL displays connected to each other.
POSITION. Example: Setting “ON”
VIDEO WALL POSITION Set the ID number for the No. 1 display on ID NUMBER
menu.
Set the position of each display.
On “AUTO ID” of “VIDEO WALL” menu, select “ON”,
Example: Setting “4” then press the MENU/ENTER button.
On “VIDEO WALL” menu, select “POSITION”, then press AUTO ID
the MENU/ENTER button. AUTO ID : ON
The “VIDEO WALL POSITION” screen appears. 1 2 1 2 3
Select “NO. 4” of “POSITION NO.”. 4 3 8 9 4
7 6 5
VIDEO WALL POSITION
WIRED CABLE
CONNECTION TURN
POSITION NO. 4
ADJ. EXIT RETURN
Information
䡵 AUTO ID settings
ADJ. EXIT RETURN
ON: Enables Auto ID function. In the case shown below,
display 1 will be set as ID 1, display 2 as ID2, etc.
Information This can be set only when a 2×2 or 3×3 video wall is
䡵 VIDEO WALL POSITION settings selected.
1 Screen: There is no need to set POSITION. REMOTE
OUT
No.1 No.2 No.1 No.2 REMOTE
REMOTE
4 Screens 9 Screens IN No.4 No.3 REMOTE
No.4 No.3 OUT
IN
NO. 7 NO. 8 NO. 9 Display 1 Display 2
NO. 1 NO. 2
NO. 10 NO. 11 NO. 12 REMOTE

OUT
REMOTE No.1 No.2 No.1 No.2
NO. 4 NO. 3 OUT
REMOTE
NO. 13 NO. 14 NO. 15 No.4 No.3 REMOTE
No.4 No.3 IN
IN
Display 4 Display 3
16 Screens 25 Screens
NO. 16 NO. 17 NO. 18 NO. 19 NO. 32 NO. 33 NO. 34 NO. 35 NO. 36
NO. 37 NO. 38 NO. 39 NO. 40 NO. 41

OFF: Disables Auto ID function.
NO. 20 NO. 21 NO. 22 NO. 23
NO. 42 NO. 43 NO. 44 NO. 45 NO.46
NO. 24 NO. 25 NO. 26 NO. 27
NO. 47 NO. 48 NO. 49 NO. 50 NO. 51
32
4-40
CONFIDENTIAL
IMAGE ADJUST PLE LINK

The position of the image can be adjusted and flickering Use this function to set a uniform brightness for each
of the image can be corrected. display.
Example: Adjusting the vertical position Turn on the AUTO ID and set the DIVIDER (at 1, 4 or 9)
before the following operations.
On “VIDEO WALL” menu, select “IMAGE ADJUST”, then
press the MENU/ENTER button. Example: Setting “ON”
The “IMAGE ADJUST” screen appears. On “PLE LINK” of “VIDEO WALL” menu, select “ON”,
On “V-POSITION” of “IMAGE ADJUST” menu, adjust the then press the MENU/ENTER button.
position.
VIDEO WALL
IMAGE ADJUST DIVIDER : 1
ASPECT MODE : NORMAL
POSITION
V-POSITION
H-POSITION DISP. MODE : SPLIT
V-HEIGHT AUTO ID : OFF
H-WIDTH IMAGE ADJUST
AUTO PICTURE : OFF P. ON DELAY : OFF
FINE PICTURE
PLE LINK : ON
PICTURE ADJ. V-POSITION +64
REPEAT TIMER : OFF
Information
䡵 IMAGE ADJUST settings Information
These are the same functions as the IMAGE ADJUST 䡵 PLE LINK settings
menu on page 22. ON: Sets a uniform brightness for each screen in a video
wall. This can be set only when a 2×2 or 3×3 video
P. ON DELAY (Power on delay) wall is selected.
Use this function to activate power-on delay. OFF: Sets the individual screen brightness for each
Turn on the AUTO ID before the following operations. screen in a video wall.
Example: Setting “ON” * When this function is set “ON”, connect your plasma
On “P. ON DELAY” of “VIDEO WALL” menu, select displays with the remote cable (optional) in the order of
“ON”. the position numbers for the 2×2 video wall. See the
drawing below.
VIDEO WALL
DIVIDER : 1
* If there are changes in the DIVIDER or POSITION,
POSITION the PLE LINK will automatically turn OFF.
DISP. MODE : SPLIT
AUTO ID : OFF REMOTE
OUT
IMAGE ADJUST No.1 No.2 No.1 No.2 REMOTE
REMOTE
P. ON DELAY : ON IN No.4 No.3 No.4 No.3 OUT
REMOTE
PLE LINK : OFF IN
REPEAT TIMER : OFF Display 1 Display 2
REMOTE
OUT
No.1 No.2 No.1 No.2
Information REMOTE
OUT No.4 No.3 No.4 No.3
REMOTE
IN
REMOTE
䡵 P. ON DELAY settings IN
Display 3
Display 4
ON: Turns on the main power of each display after a
delay time. * With the 3×3 video wall, connect the final display to
OFF: Turns on the main power of all displays at the the first display the same way as with 2×2 video wall.
same time.
(Only for 16 and 25 screens) Note: The remote control can be operated unless the
MODE1: Turns on the main power of each display IR REMOTE is set to “OFF”.
delayed.
MODE2: Turns on the main power of each display more
delayed.
* Once this function has been set to “ON”, the POWER
ON/OFF button on the remote control does not function
except for the No.1 monitor.
By pressing the POWER ON button on the remote
control the No.1 monitor will turn on and the others
will be turned on one by one automatically.
* From the second monitor onward, neither the POWER
button on the unit nor the POWER ON button on the
remote control works. However, by pressing and holding
the POWER ON button for more than 3 seconds, the
monitor will be turned on.
33
4-41
CONFIDENTIAL
REPEAT TIMER Option4 Settings Menu

Use this to set two timers. Each timer can use the Erasing the sub screen image when there is
DIVIDER, SOURCE and WORK TIME functions. no input signal
Turn on the AUTO ID and set the DIVIDER (at 1, 4 or 9) This function automatically erases the black frame of the
before the following operations. sub screen when there is no sub screen input signal.
Example: This feature is available only when the picuture-in-picuture
mode is selected.
TIMER1...VIDEO1 will be displayed for 3 minutes.
TIMER2...RGB1 will be displayed for 6 minutes in a Example: Set to “OFF”
2×2 video wall. Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/
On “REPEAT TIMER” of “VIDEO WALL” menu, select 2), then perform the following operations.
“ON”, then press the MENU/ENTER button. On “SUB. P DETECT” of “OPTION4” menu, select
The “REPEAT TIMER” screen appears. “OFF”.
Adjust the items. OPTION4 4/4
PREVIOUS PAGE
REPEAT TIMER SUB. P DETECT : OFF
1 DIVIDER : 1 ZOOM NAV : BTM LFT
SOURCE : VIDEO1 PIC FREEZE : S BY S
WORK TIME : 00H03M SEAMLESS SW : OFF
SELECT1 : —
2 DIVIDER : 4 SELECT2 : —
SOURCE : RGB1
WORK TIME : 00H06M SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
Information
Information 䡵 SUB. P DETECT Function
䡵 REPEAT TIMER settings * The sub screen disappears when the input signal is lost.
DIVIDER: Divide the screen into 1, 4 or 9 sections. * Loss of the input signal means a condition in which the
SOURCE: Set the input mode to be displayed. video signal and the sync signal are not present.
WORK TIME: Can be set to up to 4 hours 15 minutes * Under conditions in which the sub screen has
in units of 1 minute. disappeared, the ZOOM NAV, PIC FREEZE, and
If you set both timers, Timer 1 and Timer 2 run SEAMLESS SW functions will not work. The WIDE
consecutively. button will not function either.
In the case of the Video wall, timer No.1 can be used to 䡵 SUB. P DETECT settings
control all the displays simultaneously. AUTO: The black frame disappears 3 seconds after the
* This becomes effective when the on-screen menu goes input signal is lost.
out. OFF: Turns off the SUB. P DETECT function.
Displaying the entire image during DIGITAL
ZOOM operations
Use this function to display the entire image within the
sub screen together with an enlarged image on the main
screen.
Example: Setting “ZOOM NAV” to “S BY S”
On “ZOOM NAV” of “OPTION4” menu, select “S BY S”.
OPTION4 4/4
PREVIOUS PAGE
SUB. P DETECT : AUTO
ZOOM NAV : S BY S
PIC FREEZE : S BY S
SEAMLESS SW : OFF
SELECT1 : —
SELECT2 : —
Information
䡵 ZOOM NAV Function
* This feature is available only for RGB1 or RGB2 input
signals.
* This feature does not function during multi screen mode.
* This feature does not function while PIC FREEZE is
operating.
* Providing a 2-screen display will cancel this function.
34
4-42
CONFIDENTIAL
䡵 ZOOM NAV settings Side-by-Side Picture-in-Picture

OFF: Will not show the entire image on the sub screen. RGB/PC1 RGB/PC1
S BY S: Will show the entire image on the sub screen
of side-by-side mode.
BTM LFT~TOP LFT: Will show the entire image on
the sub screen of picture-in-picture mode.
Side-by-Side Picture-in-Picture SELECT/ SELECT/
FREEZE FREEZE
RGB/PC1 RGB/PC1 button button
S BY S1 RGB/PC1 RGB/PC1
RGB/PC1 RGB/PC1
POINTER button
or
Zoom+/- button
or
S BY S2
RGB/PC1 RGB/PC1
POINTER button
Switching the input source quickly

This feature enables quick input selection.
After setting ON, press the CLEAR/SEAMLESS SW
button for quick switching between the two selected input
signals.
Displaying still images in the sub screen Example: Set to switch quickly between RGB1 and
This feature enables display in the sub screen of still images RGB2.
captured by pressing the SELECT/FREEZE button. Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/
Example: Setting “PIC FREEZE” to “BTM LFT” 2), then perform the following operations.
Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/ On “SEAMLESS SW” of “OPTION4” menu, select “ON”.
2), then perform the following operations. Select “RGB1” and “RGB2”.
On “PIC FREEZE” of “OPTION4” menu, select “BTM OPTION4 4/4
PREVIOUS PAGE
LFT”. SUB. P DETECT : AUTO
ZOOM NAV : BTM LFT
OPTION4 4/4
PIC FREEZE : S BY S
PREVIOUS PAGE
SEAMLESS SW : ON
SELECT1 : RGB1
ZOOM NAV : BTM LFT
SELECT2 : RGB2
PIC FREEZE : BTM LFT
SEAMLESS SW : OFF SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
SELECT1 : —
SELECT2 : —
* The available sources depend on the setting of input.
Information
Information 䡵 SEAMLESS SW Function
䡵 PIC FREEZE Function * This feature will not function for certain input
* This feature is available only for RGB1 or RGB2 input combinations. See the table on page 15.
signals. * After switching to the selected input, please operate this
* This feature does not function during split screen mode. function.
* Digital zoom is not available while this function is * This feature will not function during split screen mode.
operating. * When SEAMLESS SW is first turned on, or when
* A further press of the SELECT/FREEZE button while signals being transmitted are changed, there may be a
this function is operating will cancel this function. slight delay due to signal analysis.
* Providing a 2-screen display will cancel this function. 䡵 SEAMLESS SW settings
䡵 PIC FREEZE settings OFF: Turns off the SEAMLESS SW function.
OFF: Will not show the still image. ON: When the CLEAR/SEAMLESS SW button is
S BY S1, 2: The still images captured by pressing the pressed, input signals will switch quickly according to
SELECT/FREEZE button will be shown on the sub the setting of SELECT1 and SELECT2.
screen of side-by-side mode.
BTM LFT~TOP LFT: The still images captured by
pressing the SELECT/FREEZE button will be shown
on the sub screen of picture-in-picture mode.
35
4-43
CONFIDENTIAL
Advanced OSM Settings Menu Color System Settings Menu

Setting the menu mode Setting the video signal format
This allows you to access full menu items. Use these operations to set the color systems of composite
When P. ON DELAY or PLE LINK is ON, this won’t be video signals or Y/C input signals.
turned OFF. Example: Setting the color system to “3.58 NTSC”
Example: Setting “ON” On the MAIN MENU, select “COLOR SYSTEM”, then press
On “ADVANCED OSM” of “MAIN MENU”, select “ON”. the MENU/ENTER button.
MAIN MENU 1/2
MAIN MENU 1/2
PICTURE
The “COLOR SYSTEM” screen appears.
PICTURE
AUDIO
AUDIO
IMAGE ADJUST
On “COLOR SYSTEM”, select “ 3.58NTSC ”.
IMAGE ADJUST
OPTION1
OPTION1
OPTION2 COLOR SYSTEM
OPTION3
OPTION4
COLOR SYSTEM
ADVANCED OSM : ON
ADVANCED OSM : OFF
NEXT PAGE
: 3.58NTSC
NEXT PAGE
SEL. ADJ. EXIT EXIT
SEL. ADJ. EXIT EXIT
Information
䡵 ADVANCED OSM settings ADJ. EXIT RETURN
ON: All of the main menu items are available for

advanced users. Information
OFF: Some of the main menu items are not available 䡵 Video signal formats
(e.g. OPTION2, OPTION3 and OPTION4). Different countries use different formats for video
Language Settings Menu signals. Set to the color system used in your current
Setting the language for the menus country.
The menu display can be set to one of eight languages. AUTO: The color systems are automatically identified
and the format is set accordingly.
Example: Setting the menu display to “DEUTSCH” PAL: This is the standard format used mainly in the
On “MAIN MENU”, select “LANGUAGE”, then press the United Kingdom and Germany.
MENU/ENTER button. SECAM: This is the standard format used mainly in
The “LANGUAGE” screen appears. France and Russia.
On “LANGUAGE”, select “ DEUTSCH”, then press the 4.43 NTSC, PAL60: This format is used for videos in
MENU/ENTER button. countries using PAL and SECAM video signals.
3.58 NTSC: This is the standard format used mainly
LANGUAGE
in the United States and Japan.
LANGUAGE
: DEUTSCH
PAL-M: This is the standard format used mainly in
Brazil.
PAL-N: This is the standard format used mainly in
Argentina.
ADJ. MENU/ENTER OK EXIT RETURN
Source Information Menu
The “LANGUAGE” is set to “DEUTSCH” and return to the Checking the frequencies, polarities of input
main menu. signals, and resolution
Use this function to check the frequencies and polarities
Information of the signals currently being input from a computer, etc.
䡵 Language settings On “MAIN MENU”, select “SOURCE INFORMATION”,
ENGLISH ........ English ITALIANO ........ Italian then press the MENU/ENTER button.
DEUTSCH ....... German SVENSKA ....... Swedish
The “SOURCE INFORMATION” is displayed.
FRANÇAIS ...... French ................... Chinese
ESPAÑOL ....... Spanish У ............ Russian SOURCE INFORMATION
H. FREQ : 48.4KHZ
V. FREQ : 60.0HZ
H. POLARITY : NEG.
V. POLARITY : NEG.
MEMORY : 24
RESOLUTION : 1024×768
EXIT RETURN
PC: MEMORY will be displayed.

Others: MODE will be displayed.
36
4-44
CONFIDENTIAL
External Control Pin Assignments
Application mini D-Sub 15-pin connector
These specifications cover the communications control of (Analog)
the plasma monitor by external equipment.
Connections RGB 1
Connections are made as described below. 5 4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6
External equipment 15 14 13 12 11
e.g., Personal computer
Pin No. Signal (Analog)

1 Red
2 Green or sync-on-green
3 Blue
4 No connection
5 Ground
6 Red ground
7 Green ground
8 Blue ground
Display 9 No connection
Connector on the plasma monitor side: EXTERNAL 10 Sync signal ground
CONTROL connector. 11 No connection
Use a crossed (reverse) cable. 12 Bi-directional DATA (SDA)
Type of connector: D-Sub 9-pin male 13 Horizontal sync or Composite sync
14 Vertical sync
Pin No. Pin Name Pin No. Pin Name 15 Data clock
1 No Connection 6 DSR (DCE side ready)
2 RXD (Receive data) 7 RTS (Ready to send)
3 TXD (Transmit data) 8 CTS (Clear to send)
4 DTR (DTE side ready) 9 No connection
DVI-D 24-pin connector (Digital)
5 GND The unit is equipped with a type of connector commonly
used for digital.
1 2 3 4 5 (This cannot be used for an analog input.)
6 7 8 9 (TMDS can be used for one link only.)
Communication Parameters RGB 3

(1) Communication system Asynchronous
(2) Interface RS-232C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(3) Baud rate 9600 bps 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
(4) Data length 8 bits 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
(5) Parity Odd

(6) Stop bit 1 bit
(7) Communication code Hex Pin No. Signal (Digital)
1 T.M.D.S Data 2 -
External Control Codes (Reference) 2 T.M.D.S Data 2 +
3 T.M.D.S Data 2 Shield
FUNCTION CODE DATA
Power ON 9FH 80H 60H 4EH 00H CDH
4 No connection
OFF 9FH 80H 60H 4FH 00H CEH 5 No connection
Input Switch Video1 (BNC) DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 01H 08H
6 DDC Clock
Video2 (RCA) DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 02H 09H 7 DDC Data
Video3 (S-Video) DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 03H 0AH
DVD1/HD1 (RCA) DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 05H 0CH
8 No connection
DVD2/HD2 (BNC) DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 06H 0DH 9 T.M.D.S Data 1 -
RGB1 (mini D-sub 15-pin) DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 07H 0EH
RGB2 (5BNC) DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 08H 0FH
10 T.M.D.S Data 1 +
RGB3 (DVI) DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 0CH 13H 11 T.M.D.S Data 1 Shield
12 No connection
Audio Mute ON 9FH 80H 60H 3EH 00H BDH
OFF 9FH 80H 60H 3FH 00H BEH 13 No connection
14 +5V Power
Picture Mode NORMAL DFH 80H 60H OAH 01H 01H CBH
THEAT. 1 DFH 80H 60H OAH 01H 02H CCH 15 Ground
THEAT. 2 DFH 80H 60H OAH 01H 03H CDH 16 Hot Plug Detect
DEFAULT DFH 80H 60H OAH 01H 04H CEH
BRIGHT DFH 80H 60H OAH 01H 05H CFH 17 T.M.D.S Data 0 -
18 T.M.D.S Data 0 +
Screen Mode STADIUM DFH 80H 60H 51H 01H 02H 13H
ZOOM DFH 80H 60H 51H 01H 03H 14H 19 T.M.D.S Data 0 Shield
NORMAL DFH 80H 60H 51H 01H 04H 15H 20 No connection
FULL DFH 80H 60H 51H 01H 05H 16H
14 : 9 DFH 80H 60H 51H 01H 09H 1AH 21 No connection
2.35 : 1 DFH 80H 60H 51H 01H 0AH 1BH 22 T.M.D.S Clock Shield
Auto Picture ON DFH 80H 60H 7FH 03H 03H 09H 00H 4DH 23 T.M.D.S Clock +
OFF DFH 80H 60H 7FH 03H 03H 09H 01H 4EH 24 T.M.D.S Clock -
Cinema Mode ON DFH 80H 60H C1H 01H 01H 82H
OFF DFH 80H 60H C1H 01H 02H 83H
Note: Contact your local dealer for a full list of the

External Control Codes if needed.
37
4-45
CONFIDENTIAL
Troubleshooting
If the picture quality is poor or there is some other problem, check the adjustments, operations, etc., before requesting service.
Symptom Checks Remedy
Mechanical sound is heard. • Maybe the sound from the cooling fans used to prevent over heating.
The unit emits a crackling sound. • Are the image and sound normal? • If there are no abnormalities in the image and sound,
the noise is caused by the cabinet reacting to
changes in temperature. This will not affect
performance.
Picture is disturbed. • Is a connected component set directly in front or at • Leave some space between the display and the
Sound is noisy. the side of the display? connected components.
Remote control operates erroneously.
The remote control does not work. • Are the remote control’s batteries worn out? • Replace both batteries with new ones.
• Is IR REMOTE set to ON? • Set IR REMOTE OFF on OPTION3 menu.
• Has an ID number been set for the main unit? • Set an ID number with the ID SELECT button, or set
the ID number to ALL.
Monitor’s power does not turn on when the • Is the monitor’s power cord plugged into a power • Plug the monitor’s power cord into a power outlet.
remote control’s power button is pressed. outlet?
• Are all the monitor’s indicators off? • Press the power button on the monitor to turn on the
power.
• Are the remote control’s batteries worn out? • Replace both batteries with new ones.
• Is IR REMOTE set to OFF? • Set IR REMOTE ON.

Monitor does not operate when the remote • Is the remote control pointed at the monitor, or is • Point the remote control at the monitor’s remote
control’s buttons are pressed. there an obstacle between the remote control and control sensor when pressing buttons, or remove the
the monitor? obstacle.
• Is direct sunlight or strong artificial light shining on • Eliminate the light by closing curtains, pointing the
the monitor’s remote control sensor? light in a different direction, etc.
• The remote cable is plugged into the REMOTE IN • Unplug the remote cable from the monitor.
terminal (Wired).
The front panel buttons of the main unit do • The front panel buttons do not function during • Set the Control Lock to OFF.
not function. Control Lock.
No sound or picture is produced. • Is the monitor’s power cord plugged into a power • Plug the monitor’s power cord into a power outlet.
outlet?
Picture appears but no sound is produced. • Is the volume set at the minimum? • Increase the volume.
• Is the mute mode set? • Press the remote control’s MUTE button.
• Are the speakers properly connected? • Connect the speakers properly.
• Is AUDIO INPUT set correctly? • Set AUDIO INPUT on the AUDIO menu correctly.
Poor picture with VIDEO signal input. • Improper control setting. • Adjust picture control as needed.
Local interference. Try another location for the monitor.
Cable interconnections. Be sure all connections are secure.
Input impedance is not correct level.
Poor picture with RGB signal input. • Improper control setting. • Adjust picture controls as needed.
Incorrect 15 PIN connector pin connections. Check pin assignments and connections.
Tint is poor or colors are weak. • Are the tint and colors properly adjusted? • Adjust the tint and color (under PICTURE).
Nothing appears on screen. • Is the computer’s power turned on? • Turn on the computer’s power.
• Is a source connected? • Connect source to the monitor.
• Is the power management function in the standby • Operate the computer (move the mouse, etc.).
or off mode?
• Is LOOP OUT set to ON? • Set LOOP OUT OFF.
Part of picture is cut off or picture is not • Is the position adjustment appropriate? • Adjust the IMAGE ADJUST properly.
centered.
Image is too large or too small. • Is the screen size adjustment appropriate? • Press the WIDE button on the remote control and
adjust properly.
Picture is unstable. • Is the computer’s resolution setting appropriate? • Set to the proper resolution.
POWER/STANDBY indicator is lighted in red. • Horizontal and / or vertical sync signal is not • Check the input signal.
present when the Intelligent Power Manager
control is on.
POWER/STANDBY indicator is blinking in • The temperature inside the main unit has become • Promptly switch off the power of the main unit and
red. too high and has activated the protector. wait until the internal temperature drops. See*1.
POWER/STANDBY indicator is blinking in • Prompty switch off the power of the main unit. See
green and red, or green. —————— *2.
*1 Overheat protector
If the monitor becomes too hot, the overheat protector will be activated and the monitor will be turned off. If this happens, turn off the power to the monitor
and unplug the power cord. If the room where the monitor is installed is particularly hot, move the monitor to a cooler location and wait for the monitor
to cool for 60 minutes. If the problem persists, contact your dealer.
*2 In the following case, power off the monitor immediately and contact your dealer or authorized Service Center.
The monitor turns off 5 seconds after powering on and then the POWER/STANDBY indicator blinks. It indicates that the power supply circuit, plasma
display panel, temperature sensor, or one or more fans have been damaged.
38
4-46
CONFIDENTIAL
Limited Warranty Plasma Monitors
NEC Solutions, Inc. (hereinafter NEC Solutions) warrants HOW YOU CAN GET WARRANTY SERVICE
this product to be free from defects in material and 1. To obtain service on your product, consult the dealer from whom
workmanship under the following terms and, subject to you purchased the product.
the conditions set forth below, agrees to repair or replace 2. Whenever warranty service is required, the original dated invoice
(at NEC Solutions’ sole option) any part of the enclosed (or a copy) must be presented as proof of warranty coverage.
Please also include in any mailing your name, address and a
unit which proves defective. Replacement parts or products
description of the problem(s).
may be new or refurbished and will meet specifications of
3. For the name of the nearest NEC Solutions authorized service
the original parts or products. center, call NEC Solutions at 800-836-0655.
HOW LONG IS THE WARRANTY? LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY

Parts and labor are warranted for (1) one year from the Except for the obligations specifically set forth in this
date of the first customer purchase. warranty statement, we will not be liable for any direct,
indirect, special, incidental, consequential, or other types
WHO IS PROTECTED? of damages, whether based on contract, tort, or any other
This warranty may be enforced only by the first purchaser. legal theory, whether or not we have been advised of the
possibility of such damages. This warranty is in lieu of all
WHAT IS COVERED AND WHAT IS NOT COVERED other warranties expressed or implied, including, but not
Except as specified below, this warranty covers all defects limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability or
in material or workmanship in this product. The following fitness for a particular purpose.
are not covered by the warranty:
1. Any product which is not distributed in the U.S.A. or Canada by
EXCLUSION OF DAMAGES
NEC Solutions or which is not purchased in the U.S.A. or Canada
NEC Solutions’ liability for any defective product is
from an authorized NEC Solutions dealer.
2. Any product of which the serial number has been defaced, limited to the repair or replacement of the product at our
modified or removed. option. NEC Solutions shall not be liable for:
3. Damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from: 1. Damage to other property caused by any defects in this
a. Accident, misuse, abuse, neglect, fire, water, lightning or other product, damages based upon inconvenience, loss of use of
acts of nature, unauthorized product modification, or failure the product, loss of time, commercial loss; or
to follow instructions supplied with the product. 2. Any other damages whether incidental, consequential or
b. Repair or attempted repair by anyone not authorized by NEC otherwise. Some states do not allow limitation on how long
Solutions. an implied warranty lasts and/or do not allow the exclusion
c. Any shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the
carrier). above limitations and exclusions may not apply to you.
d. Removal or installation of the product.
e. Any other cause which does not relate to a product defect. HOW STATE LAW RELATES TO THE WARRANTY
f. Burns or residual images upon the phosphor of the panel. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may
4. Cartons, carrying cases, batteries, external cabinets, magnetic also have other rights which vary from state to state.
tapes, or any accessories used in connection with the product.
5. Service outside of the U.S.A. and Canada. FOR MORE INFORMATION,
TELEPHONE 800-836-0655
WHAT WE WILL PAY FOR AND WHAT WE WILL NEC SOLUTIONS (AMERICA), INC.
NOT PAY FOR 1250 N. Arlington Heights Road, Suite 400
We will pay labor and material expenses for covered items, Itasca, Illinois 60143-1248
but we will not pay for the following:
1. Removal or installation charges. Note: All products returned to NEC Solutions (America),
Inc. for service MUST have prior approval. To get
2. Costs of initial technical adjustments (set-up), including approval, call NEC Solutions (America), Inc. at 800-836-
adjustment of user controls. These costs are the 0655.
responsibility of the NEC Solutions dealer from whom
the product was purchased.
3. Shipping charges.

NEC and the NEC logo are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation
4-47

Printed in Japan
7S801381
4-48
CONFIDENTIAL
USER' S MANUAL
PlasmaSync 50XM4
PX-50XM4G
Model Information
Modell-Informationen
Informations modèle
Información del modelo
Informazioni sul modello
нформация о модели
4-1
CONFIDENTIAL
Specifications For the operation of your plasma monitor, refer to

“Operation Manual”.
Screen Size 1106(H)622(V) mm 38

58
1222 (48.1") (1.5")
43.5"(H)24.5"(V) inches (2.3")
diagonal 50"
Aspect Ratio 16 : 9
1106 (43.5")
Resolution 1365(H)768(V) pixels
Pixel Pitch 0.81(H)0.81(V) mm
0.032"(H)0.032"(V) inches
622 (24.5")
736 (30")
Signals
Vertical : 50.0 to 120 Hz 96
(3.8")
Input Signals RGB, NTSC (3.58/4.43), PAL (B,G,M,N), Bezel color is gray. Units are in mm
PAL60, SECAM, HD*1, DVD*1, DTV*1 (inch)
Input Terminals (VIDEO1 and RGB1 can also be used as OUTPUT terminals) The features and specifications may be subject to change without
RGB notice.
Visual 1 (Analog) mini D-sub 15-pin1
Visual 2 (Analog) BNC (R, G, B, H/CS, V)1*2 *1 HD/DVD/DTV input signals supported on this
Visual 3 (Digital) DVI-D 24-pin1*3 system
Video 480P (60 Hz) 480I (60 Hz)
Visual 1 BNC1 525P (60 Hz) 525I (60 Hz)
Visual 2 RCA-pin1
576P (50 Hz) 576I (50 Hz)
Visual 3 S-Video: DIN 4-pin1
625P (50 Hz) 625I (50 Hz)
DVD/HD/DTV
Visual 1 RCA-pin (Y, PB[CB], PR[CR])1*1 720P (60 Hz) 1035I (60 Hz)
Visual 2 BNC (Y, PB[CB], PR[CR])1*1, *2 1080I (50 Hz) 1080I (60 Hz)
Visual 3 DVI-D 24-pin1*3 *2 The 5-BNC connectors are used as RGB/PC2 and
Audio Stereo RCA3 (Selectable) HD/DVD2 input. Select one of them under “BNC
External Control D-sub 9-pin1 (RS-232C) INPUT”.
Sound output 9W+9W at 6 ohm 3
Power Supply AC100-240V 50/60Hz
* Compatable with HDCP.
Current Rating 7.6 A (maximum)
Supported Signals
• 640480P @ 59.94/60Hz • 19201080I @ 50Hz
Power Consumption 435W (typical) • 1280720P @ 59.94/60Hz • 720576P @ 50Hz
Dimensions 1222 (W)736 (H)96(D) mm • 19201080I @ 59.94/60Hz • 1440 (720)576P @ 50Hz
48.1 (W)30 (H)3.8 (D) inches • 720480P @ 59.94/60Hz
Weight 44 kg / 97 lbs (without stand) • 1440 (720)480I @ 59.94/60Hz
Environmental Considerations Note: In some cases a signal on the plasma monitor may not be displayed
Operating Temperature 0°C to 40°C / 32°F to 104°F properly. The problem may be an inconsistency with standards from
Humidity 20 to 80% (no condensation) the source equipment (DVD, Set-top box, etc...). If you do experience
Altitude 0 to 2800 m / 0 to 9180 feet such a problem please contact your dealer and also the manufacturer of
Storage Temperature -10°C to 50°C / 14°F to 122°F the source equipment.
Altitude 0 to 3000 m / 0 to 9840 feet
Front Panel User Controls Power on/off, Input source select, Other Features Motion compensated 3D Scan Converter (NTSC,
Volume up/down/ OSM control PAL, 480I, 576I, 525I, 625I, 1035I, 1080I), 2-3
Remote Control Functions Power on/off, Input source select, OSM pull down Converter (NTSC, 480I, 525I, 1035I,
control,Volume up/down, Cursor (UP, 1080I (60Hz)), 2-2 pull down Converter (PAL,
DOWN,LEFT, RIGHT), Pointer, Zoom up/ 576I, 625I, NTSC, 480I, 525I), Digital Zoom
down, Off timer, Wireless/Wired remote Function (100-900% Selectable), Video Wall 4-25
control, Split screen buttons multi screen, Self Diagnosis, Image Burn
OSM Functions Picture (Contrast/Brightness/Sharpness/ Color/Tint/ reduction tools (PLE LOCK1~3, INVERSE,
Picture mode/Noise reduction/Color temperature/ WHITE, ORBITER (Auto1,2/Manual), SCREEN
White balance/Gamma/Low tone/Color tune), Audio WIPER), Color Temperature select (high/mid/mid
(Bass/Treble/Balance/Audio input), Image Adjust low/low, user has 4 memories), Control lock
(Aspect mode/V-Position /H-Position/V-Height /H- (Except power SW), Auto Picture, Input Skip,
Width/Auto Picture/Fine picture/Picture adjustment), Color Tune, Low Tone (3 mode), Auto ID,
Option1 (OSM/BNC Input/D-Sub Input/RGB Select/ Programmable Timer, Gamma Correction (4
HD Select/Input Skip/All Reset), Option2 (Power mode), Loop through interface, Plug and play
management/Cinema mode/Long life [PLE, Orbiter, (DDC1, DDC2b, RGB3: DDC2b only),
Inverse, White, Screen wiper, Soft focus]/Gray level/ Split screen operations
S1/S2/Picture size/DVI Set up), Option3 (Timer/ Accessories Remote control with two AAA batteries, Power
Power on mode/Control lock/IR Remote/Loop out/ cord, Manuals, Safety metal fittings,
ID number/Video wall [Divider, Position, Disp. mode, Ferrite cores, Bands, Cable clamps
Auto ID, Image adjust, Power on delay, PLE link, Regulations Meets EMC Directive
Timer]), Option4 (Sub. P detect/Zoom nav/Pic freeze/ (EN55022 Class A, EN55024, EN61000-3-2,
Seamless SW), Advanced OSM, Language*, Color EN61000-3-3)
system, Source information Meets Low Voltage Directive
*English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Swedish, (EN60950-1, IEC60950-1, SEMKO Approved)
Chinese, Russian Meets AS/NZS CISPR 22:2002 Class A
E-1
4-2
CONFIDENTIAL

• When the screen mode is NORMAL, each signal is converted to a 1024 dots768 lines signal. (Except for *2, 3, 4)
• When the screen mode is FULL, each signal is converted to a 1365 dots768 lines signal. (Except for *3)
Model Dots lines
640400 70.1 31.5 NEG NEG YES YES YES*2 YES YES –– NO 4
640480 59.9 31.5 NEG NEG YES YES YES YES YES STILL YES 5
848480 60.0 31.0 POS POS YES YES –– YES YES WIDE2 YES 19
852480*1 60.0 31.7 NEG NEG YES YES –– YES YES WIDE1 YES 17
800600 56.3 35.2 POS POS YES YES YES YES YES STILL YES 11
computers 1024768 60.0 48.4 NEG NEG YES YES YES*3 –– YES STILL YES 24
1152864 75.0 67.5 POS POS YES YES YES –– YES STILL YES 51
1280768 56.2 45.1 POS POS YES YES –– –– YES WIDE1 NO 52
1280768*9 69.8 56.0 NEG POS YES YES –– –– YES WIDE1 YES 66
1280800*9 60.0 49.7 NEG NEG YES YES –– –– YES WIDE1 YES 21
1360765 60.0 47.7 POS POS YES YES –– – – YES*3 WIDE1 NO 22
1360768 60.0 47.7 POS POS YES YES –– – – YES*3 WIDE1 YES 22
1376768 59.9 48.3 NEG POS YES YES –– –– YES WIDE2 YES 53
12801024 60.0 64.0 POS POS YES YES YES*4 –– YES STILL YES 29
16001200 60.0 75.0 POS POS YES YES YES –– YES –– YES 54
19201200*9 60.0 74.6 NEG NEG YES YES –– –– YES WIDE2 –– 81
19201200RB*9 60.0 74.0 NEG NEG YES YES –– –– YES WIDE3 YES 88
Apple 640480 66.7 35.0 Sync on G Sync on G –– –– YES YES YES –– NO 6
Macintosh*6 *8 832624 74.6 49.7 Sync on G Sync on G –– –– YES YES YES –– NO 16
1024768 74.9 60.2 Sync on G Sync on G –– –– YES*3 –– YES WIDE1 NO 28
1152870 75.1 68.7 Sync on G Sync on G –– –– YES –– YES WIDE1 NO 39
1440900*9 60.0 56.0 NEG NEG YES YES –– –– YES –– YES 89
Work Station 12801024 60.0 64.6 NEG NEG YES YES YES*4 –– YES –– YES 29
Work Station(HP)*8 12801024 72.0 78.1 –– –– –– –– YES*4 –– YES –– YES 59
Work Station 1152900 66.0 61.8 C Sync C Sync –– –– YES –– YES –– YES 60
12801024 76.1 81.1 C Sync C Sync –– –– YES*4 –– YES –– YES 30
Work Station 1024768 60.0 49.7 –– –– –– –– YES*3 –– YES –– YES 62
(SGI) 12801024 60.0 63.9 –– –– –– –– YES*4 –– YES –– YES 29
IDC-3000G
PAL625P 768576 50.0 31.4 NEG NEG YES YES YES*7 –– YES*7 –– NO 31
NTSC525P 640480 59.9 31.5 NEG NEG YES YES YES*7 –– YES*7 MOTION NO 32
E-2
4-3
CONFIDENTIAL
*1 Only when using a graphic accelerator board that is capable of displaying 852480.
*2 This signal is converted to a 1024 dots640 lines signal.
*3 The picture is displayed in the original resolution. The picture will be compressed for other signals.
*4 Aspect ratio is 5:4. This signal is converted to a 960 dots768 lines signal.
NOTE:
• While the input signals comply with the resolution listed in the table above, you may have to adjust the position and size of the
picture or the fine picture because of errors in synchronization of your computer.
• When a 1280 dots 1024 lines signal or 1600 dots 1200 lines signal is input to the monitor, the picture will be compressed.
• This monitor has a resolution of 1365 dots 768 lines. It is recommended that the input signal should be XGA, wide XGA,
or equivalent.

Warning NOTE:
Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and
that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be
placed on apparatus.
To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this And regarding DVI and power cable, attach the supplied
apparatus to rain or moisture. ferrite cores. If you do not do this, this monitor will not
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this conform to mandatory CE or C-Tick standards.
product may cause radio interference in which case the user Set the ferrite cores on both ends of the DVI cable (not
may be required to take adequate measures. supplied), and both ends of the power cable (supplied).
Close the lid tightly until the clamps click.
Use the band to fasten the ferrite core (supplied) to the
DVI cable.
DVI cable (not supplied)
band band Connector

core (large)
core (large)
E-3
4-4
CONFIDENTIAL
Operation Manual
For the specifications of your plasma
monitor, refer to “Model Information”.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
У
4-5
CONFIDENTIAL
Precautions 7. Do not attempt to service or repair the unit. The manufacturer is
Please read this manual carefully before using your plasma monitor not liable for any bodily harm or damage caused if unqualified
and keep the manual handy for future reference. persons attempt service or open the back cover. Refer all service
to authorized Service Centers.
CAUTION To avoid damage and prolong operating life:

1. Use only with 100-240V 50/60Hz AC power supply. Continued
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK operation at line voltages greater than 100-240 Volts AC will
DO NOT OPEN shorten the life of the unit, and might even cause a fire hazard.
2. Handle the unit carefully when installing it and do not drop.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC 3. Set the unit away from heat, excessive dust, and direct sunlight.
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER. NO 4. Protect the inside of the unit from liquids and small metal objects.
USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. In case of accident, unplug the power cord and have it serviced
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE by an authorized Service Center.
PERSONNEL. 5. Do not hit or scratch the panel surface as this causes flaws on
This symbol warns the user that uninsulated the surface of the screen.
voltage within the unit may have sufficient 6. For correct installation and mounting it is strongly recommended
magnitude to cause electric shock. Therefore, it to use a trained, authorized dealer.
is dangerous to make any kind of contact with 7. As is the case with any phosphor-based display (like a CRT
any part inside of this unit. monitor, for example) light output will gradually decrease over
the life of a Plasma Display Panel.
This symbol alerts the user that important
8. To avoid sulfurization it is strongly recommended not to place
literature concerning the operation and
the unit in a dressing room in a public bath or hot spring bath.
maintenance of this unit has been included.
9. Do not use in a moving vehicle, as the unit could drop or topple
Therefore, it should be read carefully in order to
over and cause injuries.
avoid any problems.
10.Do not place the unit on its side, upside-down or with the screen
facing up or down, to avoid combustion or electric shock.
WARNING
TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARDS, DO NOT EXPOSE Plasma monitor cleaning procedure:
THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. ALSO DO NOT USE 1. Use a soft dry cloth to clean the front panel and bezel area. Never
THIS UNIT’S POLARIZED PLUG WITH AN EXTENSION CORD use solvents such as alcohol or thinner to clean these surfaces.
RECEPTACLE OR OTHER OUTLETS, UNLESS THE 2. Clean plasma ventilation areas with a vacuum cleaner with a
PRONGS CAN BE FULLY INSERTED. REFRAIN FROM soft brush nozzle attachment.
OPENING THE CABINET AS THERE ARE HIGH-VOLTAGE 3. To ensure proper ventilation, cleaning of the ventilation areas
COMPONENTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED must be carried out monthly. More frequent cleaning may be
SERVICE PERSONNEL. necessary depending on the environment in which the plasma
monitor is installed.
Warnings and Safety Precaution
This plasma monitor is designed and manufactured to provide Recommendations to avoid or minimize phosphor burn-in:
Like all phosphor-based display devices and all other gas plasma
long, trouble-free service. No maintenance other than cleaning
displays, plasma monitors can be susceptible to phosphor burn under
is required. Please see the section “Plasma monitor cleaning
certain circumstances. Certain operating conditions, such as the
procedure” on the next page. continuous display of a static image over a prolonged period of
The plasma display panel consists of fine picture elements time, can result in phosphor burn if proper precautions are not taken.
(cells) with more than 99.99 percent active cells. There may To protect your investment in this plasma monitor, please adhere to
be some cells that do not produce light or remain lit. the following guidelines and recommendations for minimizing the
For operating safety and to avoid damage to the unit, read occurrence of image burn:
carefully and observe the following instructions.
To avoid shock and fire hazards: * Always enable and use your computer’s screen saver function
1. Provide adequate space for ventilation to avoid internal heat during use with a computer input source.
build-up. Do not cover rear vents or install the unit in a closed * Display a moving image whenever possible.
cabinet or shelves. * Change the position of the menu display from time to time.
If you install the unit in an enclosure, make sure there is adequate * Always power down the monitor when you are finished using it.
space at the top of the unit to allow hot air to rise and escape. If
the monitor becomes too hot, the overheat protector will be If the plasma monitor is in long term use or continuous operation
activated and the monitor will be turned off. If this happens, take the following measures to reduce the likelihood of phosphor
turn off the power to the monitor and unplug the power cord. If burn:
the room where the monitor is installed is particularly hot, move
the monitor to a cooler location, and wait for 60 minutes to cool * Lower the Brightness and Contrast levels as much as possible
the monitor. If the problem persists, contact your dealer for without impairing image readability.
service. * Display an image with many colors and color gradations (i.e.
2. Do not use this unit’s polarized plug with extension cords or photographic or photo-realistic images).
outlets unless the prongs can be completely inserted. * Create image content with minimal contrast between light and
3. Do not expose the unit to water or moisture. dark areas, for example white characters on black backgrounds.
4. Avoid damage to the power cord, and do not attempt to modify Use complementary or pastel color whenever possible.
the power cord. * Avoid displaying images with few colors and distinct, sharply
5. Unplug the power cord during electrical storms or if the unit defined borders between colors.
will not be used over a long period.
6. Do not open the cabinet which has potentially dangerous high * Note: Burn-in is not covered by the warranty.
voltage components inside. If the unit is damaged in this way
the warranty will be void. Moreover, there is a serious risk of Contact your dealer for other recommended procedures that will
electric shock. best suit your particular application needs.
E-2
4-6
CONFIDENTIAL
Contents
Installation .................................................... E-4 Setting the Input Skip ............................................. E-22
Ventilation Requirements for enclosure mounting ....... E-4 Resetting to the default values ................................ E-22
How to use the safety metal fittings and the screws for Option2 Settings Menu ......................................... E-23
safety metal fittings ............................................. E-4 Setting the power management for computer images ...... E-23
Creating a video wall ............................................ E-5 POWER/STANDBY indicator ............................... E-23
Cable Management ............................................... E-5 Setting the picture to suit the movie ....................... E-23
Caution on when the plasma monitor is installed vertically .... E-6 Reducing burn-in of the screen .............................. E-23
Setting the gray level for the sides of the screen ..... E-25
How to use the remote control ................................. E-6
Setting the screen size for S1/S2 video input .......... E-25
Battery Installation and Replacement ....................... E-6
Setting the picture size for RGB input signals ........ E-26
Using the wired remote control mode ...................... E-6
Setting the signal and black level for DVI signal .... E-26
Operating Range ...................................................... E-6
Handling the remote control ..................................... E-6 Option3 Settings Menu ......................................... E-26
Using the timer ...................................................... E-26
Part Names and Function ................................ E-7 Setting the power on mode ..................................... E-28
Front View ........................................................... E-7 Enabling/disabling the front panel controls ............ E-28
Rear View/ Terminal Board .................................... E-8 Enabling/disabling remote control wireless
Remote Control ..................................................... E-9 transmission ........................................................ E-28
Basic Operations ........................................... E-10 Loop Out setting .................................................... E-28
POWER .............................................................. E-10 ID number setting .................................................. E-29
To turn the unit ON and OFF: ................................ E-10 Video Wall setting .................................................. E-29
VOLUME ............................................................ E-10 Option4 Settings Menu ......................................... E-32
To adjust the sound volume: ................................... E-10 Erasing the sub screen image when there is no input
MUTE ................................................................. E-10 signal ................................................................... E-32
To mute the audio: ................................................. E-10 Displaying the entire image during DIGITAL ZOOM
operations ............................................................ E-32
DISPLAY .............................................................. E-10
Displaying still images in the sub screen ................ E-32
To check the settings: ............................................. E-10
Switching the input source quickly ........................ E-33
DIGITAL ZOOM ................................................... E-10
Advanced OSM Settings Menu .............................. E-33
AUTO ADJUST .................................................... E-10
Setting the menu mode .......................................... E-33
To adjust the size or quality of the picture
Language Settings Menu ....................................... E-33
automatically: ...................................................... E-10
Setting the language for the menus ......................... E-33
OFF TIMER .......................................................... E-10
Color System Settings Menu .................................. E-34
To set the off timer: ................................................ E-10
Setting the video signal format ............................... E-34
To check the remaining time: ................................. E-10
Source Information Menu ...................................... E-34
To cancel the off timer: .......................................... E-10
Checking the frequencies, polarities of input signals,
WIDE Operations ........................................... E-11 and resolution ...................................................... E-34
Wide Screen Operation (manual) .......................... E-11
External Control ........................................... E-35
When viewing videos or digital video discs ........... E-11
Application ......................................................... E-35
Wide Screen Operation with Computer Signals ....... E-12
Connections ........................................................ E-35
When “PICTURE SIZE” is set to “OFF” ............... E-12
Type of connector: D-Sub 9-pin male .................... E-35
SPLIT SCREEN Operations ............................... E-13 Communication Parameters ................................... E-35
Showing a couple of pictures on the screen at the External Control Codes (Reference) ........................ E-35
same time ........................................................ E-13
Operations in the Side-by-side mode ...................... E-13
Pin Assignments ........................................... E-35
Operations in the Picture-in-picture mode .............. E-14 mini D-Sub 15-pin connector (Analog) ................... E-35
Selecting the input signals to be displayed ............. E-14 DVI-D 24-pin connector (Digital) ............................ E-35
Zooming up pictures .............................................. E-14 Troubleshooting ............................................ E-36
Adjusting the OSM controls ................................... E-14
OSM (On Screen Menu) Controls ..................... E-15 Contents of the Package
Menu Operations ................................................. E-15
䡺 Plasma monitor
Menu Tree ........................................................... E-16
Picture Settings Menu ............................................ E-18 䡺 Power cord
Adjusting the picture .............................................. E-18 䡺 Remote control with two AAA Batteries
Setting the picture mode according to the brightness 䡺 Manuals (Model Information and Operation)
of the room .......................................................... E-18
Reducing noise in the picture ................................. E-18 䡺 Safety metal fittings*
Setting the color temperature ................................. E-18 䡺 Ferrite cores, bands
Adjusting the color to the desired level .................. E-19 䡺 Cable clamps
Changing the Gamma Curve .................................. E-19
Making the Low Tone adjustments ........................ E-19 * Contents will differ according to the model.
Adjusting the colors ............................................... E-19 * These are fittings for fastening the unit to a wall to prevent
Audio Settings Menu ............................................ E-20 tipping due to external shock when using the stand
Adjusting the treble, bass and left/right balance and (optional). Fasten the safety fittings to the holes in the
audio input select ................................................. E-20 back of the monitor using the safety fitting mount screws
Setting the allocation of the audio connectors ........ E-20 (see page E-4).
Image Adjust Settings Menu .................................. E-20
Adjusting the Position, Size, Fine Picture, Picture Adj .... E-20 Options
Option1 Settings Menu ......................................... E-21 • Wall mount unit
Setting the on-screen menu .................................... E-21
• Ceiling mount unit
Setting the BNC connectors ................................... E-21
Setting the RGB1 connector ................................... E-21 • Tilt mount unit
Setting a computer image to the correct RGB select • Stand
screen .................................................................. E-21 • Attachable speakers
Setting high definition images to the suitable screen size ..... E-22
E-3
4-7
CONFIDENTIAL
Installation
* See page E-3.
dealer.
to the installer.
When installing or carrying, use

Drawing A Drawing B the handles attached to the upper
back of the display.

Wall back of the monitor using the safety fitting mount screws.
50mm (2") 50mm (2")
50mm (2")
Screw hole
Wall
Screw or Hook etc.

(Not supplied)

50mm (2") fittings Wall
50mm (2")
Metal chain
(Not supplied)
Table Top
E-4
4-8
CONFIDENTIAL

BNC connector
Cr/Pr
R/
BNC connector OUT
VIDEO
VIDEO 1
(IN/ OUT)
G/
Y
RGB2 / DVD2 / HD2

VIDEO Signal IN
RGB signal/
Cb/Pb
VIDEO 3
VIDEO 2
B/
VIDEO Signal
HD
AUDIO 1
(MONO)
L
VD
Y
DVD1
OUT
(IN / OUT)
RGB signal/
RGB 1
IN DVD/HD signal
IN
Remote REMOTE
control OUT Remote

control
OUT
Remote IN
IN
REMOTE
control OUT Remote
control
OUT
Note:
When LOOP OUT is ON, do not connect an OUTPUT signal from another unit, that will place an extraordinary
load on the other unit and may damage it.
Information
signal.
Cable Management
Back of the unit
Using the cable-clamps provided with the plasma display,
mounting holes
To attach To detach
1. 2.
clamp
cables
mounting hole
E-5
4-9
MENU/ ENTER
OSM
DOWN
VOLUME
BNC INPUT
UP
: RGB
LEFT/-
D-SUB INPUT
RIGHT/ +
90°
: RGB
INPUT SELECT
/EXIT
RGB SELECT
: AUTO
HD SELECT
INPUT SKIP
: OFF
ALL RESET
: OFF
1024768

EXIT RETURN

VOLUME
UP LEFT/- RIGHT/ +
INPUT SELECT
/ EXIT

Operating Range
30°.
2.Align the batteries according to the (+) and (–) indication monitor’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct
inside the case. sunlight or strong artificial light, or if there is an obstacle
between the sensor and the remote control.
Approx.
3.Replace the cover. 7m / 23ft

When the cable is connected, the mode automatically
switches to wired remote control. When the wired remote
Handling the remote control
control mode is used, the remote control can be operated
• Do not drop or mishandle the remote control.
even if no batteries are loaded.
• Do not get the remote control wet. If the remote control
External Control
gets wet, wipe it dry immediately.

IN
REMOTE

OUT

types together.
Remote Control
Cable* into a fire.
To Remote Jack be sure to unplug the remote cable from the REMOTE
* The 1/8 Stereo Mini cable must be purchased separately. E-6

4-10
CONFIDENTIAL
Front View
VOLUME INPUT SELECT

MENU/ENTER DOWN UP LEFT/- RIGHT/+ /EXIT
VOLUME INPUT SELECT

7 6 5 4 1 3 2

u MENU/ENTER
The available inputs depend on the settings of “BNC
INPUT”, “D-SUB INPUT”, “RGB SELECT” and
WARNING
“DVI SET UP”.
(OSM) mode.
Note: This plasma monitor has the capasity to display images when connected to European DVD players with a SCART
output signal, which is RGB with composite sync.
Your dealer can supply a special SCART cable, which will enable you to use the RGB with composite sync signal.
To obtain the special cable as well as for further information, please contact your dealer.
Please refer to page E-21 for selection of the correct mode in the on-screen manager.
E-7
4-11
CONFIDENTIAL
VIDEO
VIDEO 1
C
VIDEO 3
VIDEO 2
D
AUDIO 1
(MONO)
L
R
Y
E DVD1 / HD1
Cb/Pb
Cr/Pr
AUDIO 2
(MONO)
L
R
Cr/Pr
R/
G/
Y
RGB2 / DVD2 / HD2
F
Cb/Pb
B/
HD
VD
G
RGB 1
AUDIO 3
(MONO)
L
R
H
RGB 3
External Control
I A B
IN
J
REMOTE
OUT
A AC IN H RGB3 (DVI 24pin)

Connect the included power cord here. Connect a digital signal (TMDS) from a source with a
DVI output.
B EXT SPEAKER L and R This input can be set for use with an RGB/PC3 (see
Connect speakers (optional) here. Maintain the correct page E-26)
polarity. Connect the (positive) speaker wire to the
EXT SPEAKER terminal and the (negative) I EXTERNAL CONTROL
speaker wire to the EXT SPEAKER terminal on This terminal is used when operating and controlling
both LEFT and RIGHT channels. the monitor externally (by RS-232C).
Please refer to your speaker’s owner’s manual.
J REMOTE IN
C VIDEO1, 2, 3 (BNC, RCA, S-Video) Connect the remote cable* to the remote control’s
Connect VCR’s, DVD’s or Video Cameras, etc. here. remote jack to obtain wired remote control.
VIDEO1 can be used for Input or Output (see page E-
5). K REMOTE OUT
Connect the remote cable* to the REMOTE IN jack of
D AUDIO1, AUDIO2, AUDIO3 the other display monitor to obtain wired remote
These are audio input terminals. control.
The input is selectable. Set which video image to allot
them from the audio menu screen. * The 1/8 Stereo Mini cable must be purchased separately.
E DVD1 / HD1
Connect DVD’s, High Definition or Laser Discs, etc. Information
here. • For Y/CB/Cr, connect to the DVD1 or DVD2
terminals.
F RGB2/ DVD2/ HD2 • For SCART, this unit provides three ways to connect:
RGB2: You can connect an analog RGB signal · SCART1: Connect R/G/B to the DVD2 terminals
and the syncronization signal. and composite sync. to the HD terminal.
DVD2/ HD2: You can connect DVDs, High · SCART2: Connect R/G/B to the DVD2 terminals
Definition sources, Laser Discs, etc. and composite sync. to the VIDEO1 terminal.
here. · SCART3: Connect R/G/B + composite sync. to the
This input can be set for use with an RGB1 terminal.
E-21)
G RGB1 (mini D-Sub 15pin)

Connect an analog RGB signal from a computer, etc.
page E-5) E-8
4-12
CONFIDENTIAL

i POINTER
o ZOOM (+ /–)
!0 VOLUME (+ /–)
!1 MUTE
Mutes the audio.
!2 WIDE
!3 DISPLAY
!4 OFF TIMER
!5 SIDE BY SIDE
side-by-side mode.
!7 SINGLE
!8 SELECT/FREEZE
screen mode.
When the PIC FREEZE function is operating, this
q POWER ON/STANDBY button can be used to display still images on the sub
Switches the power on/standby. screen.
(This does not operate when POWER/STANDBY !9 AUTO ADJUST
indicator of the main unit is off.) Press this button to adjust Fine Picture, Picture ADJ,
w RGB/PC Position, and Contrast automatically, or to switch the
screen size to ZOOM mode automatically with the
Press this button to select RGB/PC as the source.
RGB/PC can also be selected using the INPUT superimposed caption displayed fully only when the
SELECT button on the monitor. picture contains dark areas above and below the picture.
e DVD / HD @0 ID SELECT
Set the ID number in the remote control. The remote
Press this button to select DVD/HD as the source.
DVD/HD can also be selected using the INPUT control can then be used only for a display with the
SELECT button on the monitor. same ID number. When several displays are used
together they can be controlled individually.
r VIDEO
Press this button to select VIDEO as the source. @1 CLEAR/SEAMLESS SW
Clears the number set by the ID SELECT button.
When the SEAMLESS SW function is operating, this
VIDEO can also be selected using the INPUT SELECT button can be used to switch the input source quickly.
button on the monitor. @2 Remote control signal transmitter
Transmits the remote control signals.
t MENU/ENTER
Press this button to access the OSM controls. @3 Remote Jack
Press this button during the display of the main menu Insert the plug of the remote cable (The 1/8 Stereo
to go to the sub menu. Mini cable) here when using the supplied remote
control in the wired condition.
y CURSOR (▲ / ▼ / / )
E-9
4-13
CONFIDENTIAL
Basic Operations
POWER OFF TIMER
VOLUME
MUTE seconds.
Press the MUTE button on the remote control to mute the until it reaches zero.
audio; press again to restore. OFF TIMER 28
DISPLAY
pressed.
the menu turns off.
To cancel the off timer:
DIGITAL ZOOM 1. Press the OFF TIMER button twice in a row.
Digital zoom specifies the picture position and enlarges
the picture.
1. (Be sure ZOOM NAV is off.) OFF TIMER 0
Press the POINTER button to display the pointer. ( )

( )
To change the picture position: Note:
Select the position with the ▲▼ buttons. After the power is turned off with the off timer ...
2. Press the POINTER button to delete the pointer. A slight current is still supplied to the monitor. When you
are leaving the room or do not plan to use the system for a
AUTO ADJUST long period of time, turn off the power of the monitor.
automatically:
Information
(component) input is selected: The screen size
switches to ZOOM mode automatically with the
superimposed caption displayed fully only when the
picture contains dark areas above and below the picture.
E-10
4-14
CONFIDENTIAL
WIDE Operations
Press the WIDE button again. Original image
Information is lost on both sides.
The squeezed film image is expanded to fulfill the entire
→ NORMAL → FULL → STADIUM → ZOOM → 2.35:1 → 14:9
screen at a ratio of 2.35:1. Black bands do not appear at
When a 720P or 1080I signal is input:
right margins.
FULL ↔ 2.35:1 • This feature is available when the input signal is video,
When displaying enhanced split screen: component (480I, 480P, 576I, 576P, 720P, 1080I) or RGB
NORMAL ↔ FULL (525P or 625P signal from a scan converter).
NORMAL size screen (4:3) screen, select the 2.35:1 size screen to avoid phosphor burn-in.
14:9 size screen

Note:

STADIUM size screen

wide screen.
ZOOM size screen

direction, maintaining the original proportions. E-11
4-15
CONFIDENTIAL

Computer Signals
direction.
ZOOM size screen
NORMAL ↔ FULL
TRUE
FULL size screen
FULL
ZOOM size screen
Information
When wide signals are input. See page E-2 of Model Information for details on the
NORMAL.
The screen size switches as follows: put
→ TRUE → FULL → ZOOM Select an appropriate setting for RGB SELECT mode
referring to the“Table of Signals Supported” on page
TRUE size screen (VGA, SVGA 4:3) E-2 of Model Information.
trademarks of IBM, Inc. of the United States.
Note:
E-12
4-16
CONFIDENTIAL


A
B A B A B

button button
VIDEO1

SINGLE
A SINGLE
button
A
B A B
A B

SIDE BY SIDE
VIDEO1 RGB/PC1
button
VIDEO1 RGB/PC1
cursor button.
A B
Sub
screen
PICTURE IN
PICTURE
button A B
Note:
Picture A and B on the above screen are not always of the
same height. button
RGB/PC1 VIDEO1
Information B A
Split screen operations may not function depending on
“” means Yes, “” means No.
VIDEO1 VIDEO2
VIDEO3 HD/DVD1 HD/DVD2 RGB/PC1 RGB3 SCART1~3
RGB2 FREEZE button.
Pictures VIDEO1
displayed on VIDEO2
the left/sub VIDEO3
screen HD/DVD1 VIDEO1 RGB/PC1
(Select2) HD/DVD2 1,2:
RGB2 3:
RGB/PC1 1,2:
3:
A B
RGB3
SCART1~3 1,2: 1,2:
3: 3:
Split screen operations may not function SELECT/FREEZE

depending on the type of the RGB signals. button
VIDEO1 RGB/PC1
A B
E-13
4-17
CONFIDENTIAL


A button A
signal.
B
VIDEO1 RGB/PC2
VIDEO1 RGB/PC2
button used to change the selection.
Top Left Top Right
VIDEO1 RGB/PC2 button VIDEO1 RGB/PC2
picture active.
B B 2. Use the POINTER button and the ZOOM
/ button to
A
A enlage the picture.
button
For details, see “DIGITAL ZOOM” on page E-10.

VIDEO1 RGB/PC1
picture active.
A
B MENU.
A
B page E-15.
Note:
A
B During enhanced split screen mode, some functions of
OSM controls are not available.
A
B
button button

FREEZE button.
A
B SELECT/ A
B
FREEZE
button
E-14
4-18
CONFIDENTIAL
OSM(On Screen Menu) Controls

PICTURE
AUDIO
IMAGE ADJUST
OPTION1
MAIN MENU 1/2
ADVANCED OSM : OFF PICTURE
NEXT PAGE
SEL. MENU/ENTER OK EXIT EXIT AUDIO
IMAGE ADJUST
OPTION1
OPTION2
OPTION3
OPTION4
ADVANCED OSM : ON
NEXT PAGE
selected items.
MAIN MENU 1/2
PICTURE
AUDIO
IMAGE ADJUST
OPTION1
ADVANCED OSM : OFF

NEXT PAGE
MAIN MENU 2/2

PREVIOUS PAGE
LANGUAGE
COLOR SYSTEM
SOURCE INFORMATION

PICTURE 1/2
CONTRAST
BRIGHTNESS
SHARPNESS
COLOR
TINT
NR : OFF
NEXT PAGE

main menu.
E-15
4-19
Menu Tree
PICTURE CONTRAST ←→ 0←52→72 YES E-18
BRIGHTNESS ←→ 0←32→64 YES E-18
SHARPNESS ←→ 0←16→32 YES E-18
COLOR ←→ 0←32→64 YES E-18
TINT R←→G 0←32→64 YES E-18
PICTURE MODE BRIGHT/NORMAL/THEAT.1/THEAT.2/DEFAULT YES E-18
NR OFF/NR-1/NR-2/NR-3 YES E-18
COLOR TEMP LOW/MID LOW/MID/HIGH YES E-18
WHITE BALANCE GAIN RED ←→ 0←→70 YES E-19
GAIN GREEN ←→ 0←→70 YES E-19
GAIN BLUE ←→ 0←→70 YES E-19
BIAS RED ←→ 0←→70 YES E-19
BIAS GREEN ←→ 0←→70 YES E-19
BIAS BLUE ←→ 0←→70 YES E-19
RESET OFF←→ON YES E-19
GAMMA 1←→2←…→4 YES E-19
LOW TONE AUTO←→1←…→3 YES E-19
COLOR TUNE RED Y←→M 0←→64 YES E-19
GREEN C←→Y 0←→64 YES E-19
BLUE M←→C 0←→64 YES E-19
YELLOW G←→R 0←→64 YES E-19
MAGENTA R←→B 0←→64 YES E-19
CYAN B←→G 0←→64 YES E-19
AUDIO BASS ←→ 0←13→26 YES E-20
TREBLE ←→ 0←13→26 YES E-20
BALANCE L←→R -22←0→+22 YES E-20
AUDIO INPUT1 VIDEO 1-3 / HD/DVD 1-2 / RGB 1-3 YES E-20
IMAGE ADJUST ASPECT MODE NORMAL/FULL/STADIUM/ZOOM/2.35:1/14:9 — E-20
V-POSITION ←→ -64←0→+64 YES E-20
H-POSITION ←→ -128←0→+127 YES E-20
V-HEIGHT ←→ 0←→64 YES E-20
H-WIDTH ←→ 0←→64 YES E-20
AUTO PICTURE OFF←→ON*2 NO E-20
FINE PICTURE*1 ←→ *2 0←→64 YES E-20
PICTURE ADJ.*1 ←→ *2 0←→128 YES E-20
OPTION1 OSM DISPLAY OSM OFF←→ON YES E-21
OSM ADJ. 1←…→6 YES E-21
OSM ANGLE H←→V YES E-21
OSM ORBITER OFF←→ON YES E-21
OSM CONTRAST LOW←→NORMAL YES E-21
BNC INPUT RGB←→COMP.←→SCART1←→SCART2 YES E-21
D-SUB INPUT RGB←→SCART3 — E-21
RGB SELECT AUTO/STILL/MOTION/WIDE1/WIDE2/WIDE3/DTV YES E-21
HD SELECT 1080B/1035I/1080A NO E-22
INPUT SKIP OFF←→ON YES E-22
ALL RESET OFF←→ON — E-22
E-16
4-20
CONFIDENTIAL
OPTION2 PWR. MGT. OFF←→ON YES E-23
CINEMA MODE OFF←→ON YES E-23
LONG LIFE PLE AUTO/LOCK 1/LOCK 2/LOCK 3 YES E-23
ORBITER AUTO 1 YES E-24
AUTO 2 YES E-24
MANUAL H-DOT/V-LINE/TIME YES E-24
OFF YES E-24
INVERSE OFF YES E-24
ON WORKING TIME/WAITING TIME YES E-24
WHITE YES E-24
SCREEN WIPER OFF YES E-25
ON WORKING TIME/WAITING TIME/SPEED YES E-25
SOFT FOCUS OFF/1/2/3/4 YES E-25
GRAY LEVEL 0←…→3←…→15 YES E-25
S1/S2 AUTO←→OFF YES E-25
PICTURE SIZE OFF←→ON YES E-26
DVI SET UP PLUG/PLAY PC←→STB/DVD NO E-26
BLACK LEVEL LOW←→HIGH NO E-26
OPTION3 TIMER PRESENT TIME SUMMER TIME OFF←→ON NO E-26
DAY/HOUR/MINUTES NO E-26
PROGRAM OFF YES E-27
ON DATE/ON/OFF(HOUR, MINUTE)/INPUT/FUNCTION YES E-27
MULTI REPEAT OFF YES E-27
ON MULTI MODE/WORK TIME/INPUT MODE YES E-27
PWR. ON MODE LAST /MULTI/ VIDEO 1-3 / HD/DVD 1-2 / RGB 1-3 YES E-28
CONTROL LOCK OFF←→ON YES E-28
IR REMOTE OFF←→ON YES E-28
LOOP OUT OFF←→ON YES E-28
ID NUMBER ALL←→1←…→256 YES E-29
VIDEO WALL DIVIDER OFF/1/4/9/16/25 YES E-29
POSITION No.1←…→No.4/No.7←…→No.15/No.16←…→No.31/No.32←…→No.56 — E-29
DISP. MODE SPLIT←→BLANK YES E-30
AUTO ID OFF←→ON YES E-30
H-POSITION ←→ -128←0→+127 YES E-30
PICTURE ADJ.*1 ←→ *2 0←→128 YES E-30
P. ON DELAY OFF/ON/MODE1/MODE2 YES E-30
PLE LINK OFF←→ON YES E-31
REPEAT TIMER OFF YES E-31
ON DIVIDER/SOURCE/WORK TIME YES E-31
OPTION4 SUB P. DETECT OFF←→AUTO YES E-32
ZOOM NAV OFF←→S BY S←→BTM LFT←→BTM RGT←→TOP RGT←→TOP LFT YES E-32
PIC FREEZE OFF←→S BY S1←→S BY S2←→BTM LFT←→BTM RGT←→TOP RGT←→TOP LFT YES E-32
SEAMLESS SW OFF YES E-33
ON SELECT1/SELECT2 YES E-33
ADVANCED OSM OFF←→ON YES E-33
LANGUAGE ENGLISH/DEUTSCH/FRANÇAIS/ESPAÑOL/ITALIANO/SVENSKA/ /У NO E-33
COLOR SYSTEM AUTO/3.58NTSC/4.43 NTSC/PAL/PAL 60/PAL-N/PAL-M/SECAM NO E-34
SOURCE INFORMATION — — E-34

*2 RGB/PC only
Information
E-17
4-21
CONFIDENTIAL

quality is poor.
PICTURE 1/2
CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS
SHARPNESS COLOR
COLOR TINT

* This function reduces noise in the picture.
Information Types of noise reduction
Picture adjustment screen There are three types of noise reduction. Each has a
CONTRAST: Changes the picture’s white level. different level of noise reduction.
BRIGHTNESS: Changes the picture’s black level. The effect becomes stronger as the number increases
SHARPNESS: Changes the picture’s sharpness. (in the order NR-1 → NR-2 → NR-3).
Adjusts picture detail of VIDEO display. OFF: Turns the noise reduction function off.
COLOR: Changes the color density.
TINT: Changes the picture’s tint. Adjust for natural
Use this procedure to set color tone produced by the plasma
colored skin, background, etc.
display.
Adjusting the computer image
Example: Setting “HIGH”
Only the contrast and brightness can be adjusted when
a computer signal is connected. On “COLOR TEMP.” of “PICTURE” menu, select “HIGH”.
Restoring the factory default settings PICTURE 2/2
PREVIOUS PAGE
Select “DEFAULT” under the “PICTURE MODE” COLOR TEMP. : HIGH
settings. GAMMA : 2
LOW TONE : AUTO
COLOR TUNE
Setting the picture mode according to the
There are four picture modes that can be used effectively SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
according to the environment in which you are viewing
the display. Information
Example: Setting the “THEAT. 1” mode Setting the color temperature
On “PICTURE MODE” of “PICTURE” menu, select LOW: Redder
“THEAT. 1”. MID LOW: Slightly red
PICTURE 1/2
MID: Standard (slightly bluer)
CONTRAST
BRIGHTNESS
HIGH: Bluer
SHARPNESS
COLOR
TINT
NR : OFF
Information
dark room.
NORMAL: Set this mode when watching video in a
bright room.
NORMAL.
E-18
default settings.
4-22
CONFIDENTIAL
COLOR TEMP. : MID
COLOR TUNE
WHITE BALANCE
COLOR TEMP. HIGH
GAIN RED
GAIN GREEN
GAIN BLUE
BIAS RED
BIAS GREEN
BIAS BLUE
RESET : OFF
Information
GAIN RED 70
LOW TONE settings
Such adjustments will not affect the other colors.
Changing the Gamma Curve You can accentuate the green color of trees, the blue of
This feature adjusts the brightness of the midtone areas the sky, etc.
Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the MAIN MENU (1/2), then perform the following operations.
On “GAMMA” of “PICTURE” menu, select “3”. the MENU/ENTER button.
PICTURE 2/2 The “COLOR TUNE” screen appears.
PREVIOUS PAGE
COLOR TEMP. : MID On “BLUE” of “COLOR TUNE”, adjust the color tune.
GAMMA : 3
LOW TONE : AUTO COLOR TUNE
COLOR TUNE RED
GREEN
BLUE
YELLOW
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN MAGENTA
CYAN
RESET : OFF
Information SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
GAMMA settings
The picture becomes darker as the number increases Information
(in the sequence of 1, 2, 3, 4). COLOR TUNE settings
MENU/ENTER button.
E-19
4-23
CONFIDENTIAL

AUDIO
position.
BASS The mode switches as follows each time the 䊴 or 䊳 button is
TREBLE
BALANCE
pressed:
at the factory.
IMAGE ADJUST
V-POSITION
H-POSITION
V-HEIGHT
Information H-WIDTH
AUTO PICTURE : OFF
䡵 Audio settings menu FINE PICTURE

BASS: Controls the level of low frequency sound.
BALANCE: Controls the balance of the left and right Information
channels. 䡵 When “AUTO PICTURE” is “OFF”
IMAGE ADJUST
Setting the allocation of the audio connectors ASPECT MODE : FULL
Setting the AUDIO 1, 2, and 3 connectors to the desired V-POSITION
H-POSITION
input. V-HEIGHT
H-WIDTH
Example: Setting “AUDIO INPUT1” to “VIDEO 2” AUTO PICTURE : OFF
FINE PICTURE
On “AUDIO INPUT1” of “AUDIO” menu, select PICTURE ADJ.
“VIDEO2”.
The available sources depend on the settings of input. When Auto Picture is off, the Fine Picture and the
AUDIO Picture ADJ. items are displayed so that you can adjust
BASS them.
TREBLE
BALANCE 䡵 Adjusting the Auto Picture
AUDIO INPUT2 : HD/DVD1 ON: The Picture ADJ., Fine Picture and Position
AUDIO INPUT3 : RGB1 adjustments are made automatically.
adjustments are made manually.
Information * If FINE PICTURE can’t be adjusted, set Auto Picture
䡵 AUDIO INPUT to OFF and adjust manually.
A single audio input cannot be selected as the audio 䡵 Adjusting the position of the image
channel for more than one input terminal. V-POSITION: Adjusts the vertical position of the
image.
image.
image.
E-20
4-24
CONFIDENTIAL

This sets the position of the menu, the display format RGB, component or SCART1,2.
OSM
RGB SELECT : AUTO
INPUT SKIP : OFF
OSM ALL RESET : OFF
OSM ANGLE : H
OSM ORBITER : OFF
OSM CONTRAST : LOW
Information
䡵 BNC INPUT Settings
Information SCART1: Use the 4BNC terminals for RGB with
䡵 DISPLAY OSM settings composite sync. See page E-8.
ON: The on-screen menu appears. SCART2: Use the 3BNC terminals for RGB and the
OFF: The on-screen menu does not appear. VIDEO1 terminal for composite sync. See page E-8.
If you press the DISPLAY button on the remote control Setting the RGB1 connector
for more than 3 seconds the main menu will appear Select one of the signals being transmitted to the RGB1
and can be set (although it is not ON). terminal.
䡵 OSM ADJUST settings
Example: Set the D-SUB INPUT mode to “SCART3”
Adjusts the position of the menu when it appears on
the screen. On “D-SUB INPUT” of “OPTION1” menu, select
The position can be set between 1 to 6. “SCART3”.
OPTION1 1/4
OSM
BNC INPUT : RGB
D-SUB INPUT : SCART3
RGB SELECT : AUTO
HD SELECT : 1080B
INPUT SKIP : OFF
ALL RESET : OFF
NEXT PAGE
䡵 OSM ANGLE settings

Sets the display format (landscape “H” or portrait “V”). Information
When the unit is installed vertically set the OSM 䡵 D-SUB INPUT Settings
ANGLE at “V”. RGB: Use the D-SUB terminal for RGB input.
“H” “V” SCART3: Use the D-SUB terminal for RGB signal fed
OSM
BNC INPUT
OPTION1
: RGB
1/4
OSM
OPTION1
from SCART. See page E-8.
RGB SELECT : AUTO : RGB

HD SELECT : 1080B D-SUB INPUT
INPUT SKIP : OFF : RGB
ALL RESET : OFF RGB SELECT
NEXT PAGE : AUTO
: 1080B
INPUT SKIP
select screen
: OFF
ALL RESET
: OFF
1024ⴒ768
SEL. MENU/ENTER OK
EXIT RETURN for a moving image such as (video) mode, wide mode or
digital broadcast.
Example: Setting the “RGB SELECT” mode to
“MOTION ”
On “RGB SELECT” of “OPTION1” menu, select
“MOTION”.
OPTION1 1/4
䡵 OSM ORBITER settings OSM

BNC INPUT : RGB
ON: The position of the menu will be shifted by eight D-SUB INPUT : RGB
RGB SELECT : MOTION
dots each time OSM is displayed. HD SELECT : 1080B
OFF: OSM will be displayed at the same position. INPUT SKIP
ALL RESET
: OFF
: OFF
䡵 OSM CONTRAST settings NEXT PAGE
NORMAL: OSM brightness is set to normal.
LOW: OSM brightness is set to lower.
E-21
4-25
CONFIDENTIAL

Information
䡵 RGB SELECT modes skipped over and only pictures whose signals are being
One of these 7 modes must be selected in order to transmitted will be displayed.
display the following signals correctly. This setting is valid only for the INPUT SELECT button
AUTO: Select the suitable mode for the specifications on the unit.
of input signals as listed in the table “Computer input
signals supported by this system” on page E-2 of Model
Information. On “INPUT SKIP” of “OPTION1” menu, select “ON”.
STILL: To display VESA standard signals. (Use this OPTION1 1/4
mode for a still image from a computer.) OSM
BNC INPUT : RGB
MOTION: The video signal (from a scan converter) D-SUB INPUT : RGB
RGB SELECT : AUTO
will be converted to RGB signals to make the picture HD SELECT : 1080B
more easily viewable. (Use this mode for a motion INPUT SKIP : ON
ALL RESET : OFF
image from a computer.) NEXT PAGE
WIDE1: When an 852 dot⳯ 480 line signal with a SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
horizontal frequency of 31.7kHz is input, the image may

be compressed horizontally. To prevent this, set RGB Information
SELECT to WIDE1. 䡵 INPUT SKIP settings
WIDE2: When an 848 dot⳯ 480 line signal with a OFF: Regardless of the presence of the signal, scan
horizontal frequency of 31.0 kHz is input, the image and display all signals.
may be compressed horizontally. To prevent this, set ON: If no input signal is present, skip that signal.
RGB SELECT to WIDE2.
WIDE3: When an 1920 dot⳯ 1200 line signal with a
horizontal frequency of 74.0 kHz is input, the image Resetting to the default values
may be compressed horizontally. To prevent this, set Use these operations to restore all the settings (PICTURE,
RGB SELECT to WIDE3. AUDIO, IMAGE ADJUST, OPTION1~4, etc) to the
DTV: Set this mode when watching digital broadcasting factory default values.
(480P). Refer to page E-16 for items to be reset.
See page E-2 of Model Information for the details of
the above settings. On “ALL RESET” of “OPTION1” menu, select “ON”, then
press the MENU/ENTER button.
Setting high definition images to the suitable OPTION1 1/4 ALL RESET
screen size OSM

BNC INPUT : RGB
Use this procedure to set whether the number of vertical D-SUB INPUT
RGB SELECT
: RGB
: AUTO SETTING NOW
lines of the input high definition image is 1035 or 1080. HD SELECT
INPUT SKIP
: 1080B
: OFF
Example: Setting the “1080B” mode to “1035I” ALL RESET

NEXT PAGE
: ON

OPTION1 1/4
When the “SETTING NOW” screen disappears, then all the
OSM settings are restored to the default values.
BNC INPUT : RGB
D-SUB INPUT : RGB
RGB SELECT : AUTO
HD SELECT : 1035 I
INPUT SKIP : OFF
ALL RESET : OFF
NEXT PAGE
Information
䡵 HD SELECT modes
automatically.
DTC100)
E-22
4-26
CONFIDENTIAL

OPTION2 2/4
On “PWR. MGT.” of “OPTION2” menu, select “ON”. PREVIOUS PAGE
S1/S2 : OFF DVI SET UP
PICTURE SIZE : ON NEXT PAGE
DVI SET UP SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
NEXT PAGE
Information
projection in cinema mode.
* The power management function automatically reduces
OFF: Cinema mode does not function.
the monitor’s power consumption if the computer’s
ORBITER : OFF
OFF: In this mode the power management function is SCREEN WIPER
SOFT FOCUS
:
:
OFF
OFF
turned off.
ORBITER : OFF
computer.

signals are not sent reappears.
from the computer.
Information
䡵 PLE settings
E-23
4-27
CONFIDENTIAL
ORBITER INVERSE
LONG LIFE
PLE : AUTO
LONG LIFE
ORBITER : AUTO1
PLE : AUTO
INVERSE : OFF
ORBITER : OFF
SCREEN WIPER : OFF
INVERSE : WHITE
SOFT FOCUS : OFF
SCREEN WIPER : OFF
SOFT FOCUS : OFF
Information
Adjust the items.
ORBITER
H-DOT : 2 DOT
V-LINE : 4 LINE
TIME : 3M
Information
direction.
V-LINE: Moves from 1 to 20 lines in the vertical
* THE “WORKING TIME” and “WAITING TIME” can be
direction.
set for up to 12 hours and 45 minutes in units of 3 minutes.
TIME: Interval of 1~5 minutes (1 horizontal dot or 1
* Ending a WORKING TIME function, the monitor will
vertical line per interval).
be STAND BY.
[Example]
←−−−− 2 H −−−−→←−− 1.5 H −−→←−−−−

E-24 to 0M. “ON” will be displayed.
4-28
CONFIDENTIAL

LONG LIFE
ORBITER : OFF
SCREEN WIPER : OFF
PLE : AUTO
ORBITER : OFF
INVERSE : OFF
SOFT FOCUS : OFF
Information
OFF: Screen wiper mode does not function. Setting the gray level for the sides of the screen
Use this procedure to set the gray level for the parts on the
Setting the time for SCREEN WIPER screen on which nothing is displayed when the screen is
Set a time duration and the speed.
Example: Setting “GRAY LEVEL” to “5”
starts in 30 minutes and proceeds for one and a half Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/
hours. 2), then perform the following operations.
On “SCREEN WIPER” of “LONG LIFE” menu, select On “GRAY LEVEL” of “OPTION2” menu, select “5”.
OPTION2 2/4
“ON”, then press the MENU/ENTER button. PREVIOUS PAGE
THE “SCREEN WIPER” screen appears. PWR. MGT. : OFF
CINEMA MODE : ON
Adjust the times and speed. LONG LIFE
GRAY LEVEL : 5
SCREEN WIPER S1/S2 : OFF
WORKING TIME : 01H30M PICTURE SIZE : ON
WAITING TIME : 00H30M DVI SET UP
SPEED : 3 NEXT PAGE
Information
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN 䡵 GRAY LEVEL settings
This adjusts the brightness of the black (the gray level)
Information for the sides of the screen.
䡵 Setting the time The standard is 0 (black). The level can be adjusted
from 0 to 15. The factory setting is 3 (dark gray).
WORKING TIME: Set the time duration for “SCREEN
WIPER”. Setting the screen size for S1/S2 video input
When the WORKING TIME is set to “ON” the mode If the S-video signal contains screen size information, the
will stay on. image will be automatically adjusted to fit the screen when
WAITING TIME: Set the standby time until the this S1/S2 is set to AUTO.
“SCREEN WIPER” mode starts. This feature is available only when an S-video signal is
SPEED: Set the moving speed for the “SCREEN input via the VIDEO3 terminal.
Example: Setting the “S1/S2” to “AUTO”
On “S1/S2” of “OPTION2” menu, select “AUTO”.
OPTION2 2/4
minutes. PREVIOUS PAGE
䡵 To select “ON” for the “WORKING TIME”... PWR. MGT.

CINEMA MODE
: OFF
: ON
Set the hours of the working time to 0H and the minutes LONG LIFE
GRAY LEVEL : 3
to 0M. “ON” will be displayed. S1/S2 : AUTO
PICTURE SIZE : ON
DVI SET UP
NEXT PAGE
E-25
4-29
Information Option3 Settings Menu

䡵 S1/S2 settings Using the timer
This function sets the monitor to turn ON/OFF
AUTO: Adjusts the screen size automatically according
automatically at a set time.
to the S1/S2 video signal.
OFF: Turns the S1/S2 function off. Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/
Setting the picture size for RGB input signals On “OPTION3” menu, select “TIMER”, then press the
Use this procedure to switch the setting to “ON” or “OFF”. MENU/ENTER button.
Example: Setting the “PICTURE SIZE” mode to The “TIMER” screen appears.
“OFF” TIMER
PRESENT TIME
Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/ PROGRAM : OFF
2), then perform the following operations. MULTI REPEAT : OFF

OPTION2 2/4
PREVIOUS PAGE
PWR. MGT. : OFF
CINEMA MODE : ON
LONG LIFE
GRAY LEVEL : 3 PRESENT TIME
S1/S2 : OFF
PICTURE SIZE : OFF This sets the day of the week and present time.
DVI SET UP
NEXT PAGE
Example: Setting “WEDNESDAY”, “22:05”
Setting the signal and black level for DVI The “PRESENT TIME” screen appears.
signal Adjust the items.
Choose the signal for the DVI connector (PC or STB/
PRESENT TIME
DVD) and set the black level. RETURN
SUMMER TIME : OFF
Example: Setting the “PLUG/PLAY” mode to “STB/
DVD” WEDNESDAY
22 : 05 : 00
On “OPTION2” menu, select “DVI SET UP”, then press the
MENU/ENTER button. Select “SET”, then press the MENU/ENTER button.
The “DVI SET UP” screen appears. The adjustments are stored and return to the TIMER menu.
On “PLUG/PLAY” of “DVI SET UP” menu, select “STB/ * If you press the EXIT button instead of the MENU/ENTER
DVD”. button, the settings can not be made.
DVI SET UP PRESENT TIME
PLUG/PLAY : STB/DVD RETURN
BLACK LEVEL : HIGH SUMMER TIME : OFF
WEDNESDAY
22 : 05 : 00
SET
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN SEL. MENU/ENTER OK EXIT RETURN
Information Information
䡵 PLUG/PLAY settings 䡵 PRESENT TIME settings
PC: When connected to the PC signal. SUMMER TIME: Use to set SUMMER TIME.
BLACK LEVEL is set to “LOW” automatically. ON: The present time + 1 hour.
STB/DVD: When connected to the SET TOP BOX, OFF: Cancelled
DVD etc. Day: Set the day of the week (e.g. Sunday).
BLACK LEVEL is set to “HIGH” automatically. Hour: Set the hour in the 24-hour format (range 00 to
䡵 BLACK LEVEL settings 23).
LOW: When connected to the PC signal. Minutes: Set the minutes (range 00 to 59).
HIGH: When connected to the SET TOP BOX, DVD
etc. Change “HIGH” into “LOW” if the black level
appears gray.
E-26
4-30
CONFIDENTIAL
PROGRAM TIMER • Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select “MULTI MODE”,

This sets the day and time at which the power will be then use the 䊴 and 䊳 buttons to choose from
switched ON/OFF as well as the input mode. “SINGLE”, “SIDE BY SIDE1~3” and “PICTURE
IN PICTURE (BOTTOM LEFT~TOP LEFT)”.
Example: Setting so that the power will be switched
on at 8:30 A.M., Monday, displaying RGB2 source,
and switched off at 10:30 A.M.
On “PROGRAM” of “TIMER” menu, select “ON”, then “RGB1~3”.
PROGRAM TIMER
The “PROGRAM TIMER” screen appears. DATE ON OFF INPUT FUNCTION
Adjust the items. TUE - - : - - 18 : 15 — —
Each mode switches each time the ZOOM Ⳮ/ⳮ button is SAT 08 : 30 12 : 15 VIDEO1 WHITE
—
*FRI 08 : 30 10 : 00 HD/DVD1
pressed. — --:-- --:-- — —
PROGRAM TIMER * 15 : 30 16 : 00 RGB1 —
DATE ON OFF INPUT FUNCTION SEL. ZOOM ADJ. EXIT RETURN
— --:-- --:-- — —
— --:-- --:-- — — PICTURE IN PICTURE SIDE BY SIDE
— --:-- --:-- — —
PROGRAM TIMER PROGRAM TIMER
— --:-- --:-- — — MULTI SCREEN SETTING MULTI SCREEN SETTING
— --:-- --:-- — —
— --:-- --:-- — — MULTI MODE MULTI MODE
: BOTTOM LEFT : SIDE BY SIDE1
INPUT MODE INPUT MODE
Information SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
䡵 PROGRAM TIMER settings

DATE: Set the day of the week (e.g. Sunday). MULTI REPEAT
ON (hour, minutes): Set the time at which the power Two repeat timers are available.
will be turned on in the 24-hour format. Each timer has MULTI MODE, WORK TIME and INPUT
OFF (hour, minutes): Set the time at which the power MODE functions.
will be turned off in the 24-hour format. Example:
INPUT: Set the input mode that will be displayed when TIMER1 is set to display RGB1 (MAIN) and VIDEO1
the timer is on. (SUB) for 4 hours in picute-in-picture mode.
FUNCTION: Set the LONG LIFE function. TIMER2 is set to display RGB3 (LEFT) and HD/DVD1
䡵 To reset the program (RIGHT) for 2.5 hours in side-by-side mode.
Align the cursor with the DATE field that you wish to
On “MULTI REPEAT” of “TIMER”, select “ON”, then
reset, then press the CLEAR/SEAMLESS SW button.
䡵 To reset the data
The “MULTI REPEAT TIMER” screen appears.
Align the cursor with the field (ON/OFF/INPUT/
Adjust the items.
CLEAR/SEAMLESS SW button. PRESENT TIME 1 MULTI MODE : BTM LFT
WORK TIME : 04H00M
PROGRAM : OFF
MULTI REPEAT : OFF INPUT MODE
MAIN : RGB/PC1
screen SUB : VIDEO1
2 MULTI MODE : S BY S1
WORK TIME : 02H30M
PROGRAM TIMER
INPUT MODE
DATE ON OFF INPUT FUNCTION EXIT RETURN LEFT : RGB/PC3
SEL. ADJ.
MON 08 : 30 10 : 30 RGB2 INVERSE RIGHT : HD/DVD1
TUE - - : - - 18 : 15 — — SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
*FRI 08 : 30 10 : 00 HD/DVD1 —
— --:-- --:-- — — Information
* 15 : 30 16 : 00 RGB1 — 䡵 MULTI REPEAT settings
• An asterisk “*” in the DATE field while the timer is on.
An asterisk “*” means “every”. For example, “*FRI” WORK TIME: Set the time duration of the display.
means every Friday and “*” means everyday. Time range is from 1 minutes to 4 hours and 15 minutes.
INPUT MODE: Set the signal that will be displayed
• A hyphen “-” in the ON field or OFF field
within the selected screen.
If any hyphen remains in the ON field or OFF field, the
Select “MAIN” or “SUB” for “PICTURE IN PICTURE
FUNCTION can not be set.
• A hyphen “-” in the FUNCTION field “S BY S1~3”. Only one signal is selected for
A hyphen “-” means last mode (the mode that was last “SINGLE”.
䡵 To set MULTI INPUT Timer2–Timer1–Timer2.
MENU/ENTER button.
the screen.
E-27
4-31
CONFIDENTIAL
Setting the power on mode Enabling/disabling remote control wireless

This function sets the input mode at the time the power is transmission
switched on. This function enables/disables remote control wireless
Example: Setting “VIDEO2” transmission.
Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/ Example: Setting “OFF”
On “PWR. ON MODE” of “OPTION3” menu, select 2), then perform the following operations.
“VIDEO2”. On “IR REMOTE” of “OPTION3” menu, select “OFF”, then
The available sources depend on the settings of input. press the MENU/ENTER button.
TIMER TIMER
PWR. ON MODE : VIDEO2 PWR. ON MODE : LAST
IR REMOTE : ON IR REMOTE : OFF
ID NUMBER : ALL ID NUMBER : ALL
NEXT PAGE NEXT PAGE
䡵 PWR. ON MODE settings 䡵 IR REMOTE settings
LAST: Last mode (the input that was last selected at ON: Enables remote control wireless transmission.
the time the power was switched off). OFF: Disables remote control wireless transmission.
VIDEO1, 2, 3: VIDEO input mode. Set “OFF” to avoid unwanted control from other remote
RGB1, 2, 3: RGB input mode. controls.
DVD2, 3: DVD input mode. Loop Out setting
MULTI: Multi screen mode. When this feature is set to ON, the received signal will be
Follow the procedure used for PROGRAM TIMER. See looped out.
page E-27. Example: Setting “ON”
Enabling/disabling the front panel controls
This function enables/disables the front panel controls.
On “LOOP OUT” of “OPTION3” menu, select “ON”.
OPTION3 3/4
Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/ PREVIOUS PAGE
TIMER
2), then perform the following operations. PWR. ON MODE : LAST
On “CONTROL LOCK” of “OPTION3” menu, select CONTROL LOCK : OFF
IR REMOTE : ON
“ON”, then press the MENU/ENTER button. LOOP OUT : ON
ID NUMBER : ALL
OPTION3 3/4
PREVIOUS PAGE VIDEO WALL
TIMER NEXT PAGE
PWR. ON MODE : LAST SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
CONTROL LOCK : ON
IR REMOTE : ON
LOOP OUT : OFF Information
ID NUMBER
VIDEO WALL
: ALL
NEXT PAGE ON: The received signal will be looped out via PC1
Information OFF: The received signal will not loop out.
䡵 CONTROL LOCK settings * Even if LOOP OUT is ON, signals won’t be sent out if
ON: Disables the buttons on the front panel. POWER is being turned off.
OFF: Enables the buttons on the front panel. 䡵 To connect another display...
* Even when the CONTROL LOCK is set, the POWER See page E-5.
switch will not be locked. 䡵 If the RGB/PC1 signal is present at the time
the power switched on...
* This becomes effective when the on-screen menu goes
out. The RGB/PC1 input will be displayed regardless of the
setting of LOOP OUT.
E-28
4-32
CONFIDENTIAL
ID number setting DIVIDER

When using more than one of these displays, this function Set the 4-25 video wall.
sets ID numbers so that operation of the remote control
does not cause multiple monitors to operate at the same
time. On “DIVIDER” of “VIDEO WALL” menu, select “4”.
Example: Setting “2” VIDEO WALL
DIVIDER : 4
Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/ POSITION
DISP. MODE : SPLIT
2), then perform the following operations. AUTO ID : OFF
IMAGE ADJUST
On “ID NUMBER” of “OPTION3” menu, select “2”. P. ON DELAY : OFF
OPTION3 3/4 PLE LINK : OFF
PREVIOUS PAGE REPEAT TIMER : OFF
TIMER SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
PWR. ON MODE : LAST
CONTROL LOCK : OFF
IR REMOTE : ON Information
LOOP OUT : OFF
ID NUMBER : 2 䡵 DIVIDER settings
VIDEO WALL
NEXT PAGE OFF, 1: 1 Screen (Matrix display function does not
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN work)
* To reset back to ALL 4: 4 Screens (2×2 video wall)
Press the CLEAR/SEAMLESS SW button 9: 9 Screens (3×3 video wall)
Information 25: 25 Screens (5×5 video wall)
䡵 ID NUMBER settings
* When you select 4-25, set the VIDEO WALL
ALL: ID NUMBER will not be set. POSITION.
1 to 256: ID NUMBER will be set.
䡵 When the ID NUMBER have been set VIDEO WALL POSITION
You can also set ID NUMBER for each remote control Set the position of each display.
see the following explanation.
On “VIDEO WALL” menu, select “POSITION”, then press
To set the ID number for the remote control the MENU/ENTER button.
The “VIDEO WALL POSITION” screen appears.
Select “NO. 4” of “POSITION NO.”.
Press the ID SELECT button on the remote control.
VIDEO WALL POSITION
The “ID SELECT” screen appears.
On “ID NUMBER” of “ID SELECT” menu, select “2”. POSITION NO. 4
ID SELECT
POSITION : 1
ID NUMBER : 2
ADJ. EXIT RETURN
Information
䡵 VIDEO WALL POSITION settings
ADJ. EXIT RETURN
* To reset back to ALL 1 Screen: There is no need to set POSITION.

Press the CLEAR/SEAMLESS SW button 4 Screens 9 Screens
Video Wall setting NO. 1 NO. 2
NO. 7 NO. 8 NO. 9
Use this feature to configure a 4-25 video wall. NO. 10 NO. 11 NO. 12
Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/ NO. 4 NO. 3
NO. 13 NO. 14 NO. 15
On “OPTION3” menu, select “VIDEO WALL”, then press 16 Screens 25 Screens
the MENU/ENTER button. NO. 32 NO. 33 NO. 34 NO. 35 NO. 36
NO. 16 NO. 17 NO. 18 NO. 19
The “VIDEO WALL” screen appears. NO. 37 NO. 38 NO. 39 NO. 40 NO. 41
NO. 20 NO. 21 NO. 22 NO. 23
VIDEO WALL NO. 42 NO. 43 NO. 44 NO. 45 NO.46
DIVIDER : 1 NO. 24 NO. 25 NO. 26 NO. 27
NO. 47 NO. 48 NO. 49 NO. 50 NO. 51
POSITION
DISP. MODE : SPLIT
AUTO ID : OFF
IMAGE ADJUST
P. ON DELAY : OFF
PLE LINK : OFF
REPEAT TIMER : OFF
Note: A contingency method of shutting off the electric

power should be used in cases of emergency during video
wall setup.
E-29
4-33
CONFIDENTIAL
DISP. MODE IMAGE ADJUST

Select the screen mode from between two options The position of the image can be adjusted and flickering
(Splitting, Blanking). of the image can be corrected.
Example: Setting “BLANK” Example: Adjusting the vertical position
On “DISP. MODE” of “VIDEO WALL” menu, select On “VIDEO WALL” menu, select “IMAGE ADJUST”, then
“BLANK”. press the MENU/ENTER button.
VIDEO WALL
The “IMAGE ADJUST” screen appears.
DIVIDER : 1 On “V-POSITION” of “IMAGE ADJUST” menu, adjust the
POSITION
DISP. MODE : BLANK position.
AUTO ID : OFF
IMAGE ADJUST
IMAGE ADJUST ASPECT MODE : NORMAL
P. ON DELAY : OFF V-POSITION
PLE LINK : OFF H-POSITION
REPEAT TIMER : OFF V-HEIGHT
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN H-WIDTH
AUTO PICTURE : OFF
FINE PICTURE

SPLIT: Combines enlarged screens and creates multiple Information
screens. 䡵 IMAGE ADJUST settings
BLANK: Corrects misalignment of combined screen These are the same functions as the IMAGE ADJUST
portions and creates multiple screens menu on page E-20.
AUTO ID P. ON DELAY (Power on delay)

This feature automatically sets the ID numbers of multiple Use this function to activate power-on delay.
displays connected to each other. Turn on the AUTO ID before the following operations.
Example: Setting “ON” Example: Setting “ON”
Set the ID number for the No. 1 display on ID NUMBER On “P. ON DELAY” of “VIDEO WALL” menu, select
menu. “ON”.
VIDEO WALL
then press the MENU/ENTER button. DIVIDER : 1
POSITION
AUTO ID DISP. MODE : SPLIT
AUTO ID : ON AUTO ID : OFF
1 2 1 2 3 IMAGE ADJUST
P. ON DELAY : ON
4 3 8 9 4 PLE LINK : OFF
REPEAT TIMER : OFF
7 6 5 SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
WIRED CABLE
CONNECTION TURN
ADJ. EXIT RETURN Information
䡵 P. ON DELAY settings
Information ON: Turns on the main power of each display after a
䡵 AUTO ID settings delay time.
ON: Enables Auto ID function. In the case shown below, OFF: Turns on the main power of all displays at the
display 1 will be set as ID 1, display 2 as ID2, etc. same time.
This can be set only when a 2×2 or 3×3 video wall is (Only for 16 and 25 screens)
selected. MODE1: Turns on the main power of each display
REMOTE
OUT
No.1 No.2
delayed.
No.1 No.2 REMOTE
REMOTE
IN No.4 No.3 REMOTE
No.4 No.3 OUT MODE2: Turns on the main power of each display more
Display 1
IN
Display 2
delayed.
* Once this function has been set to “ON”, POWER ON/
REMOTE
OUT OFF button on the remote control does not function
REMOTE
IN except for the No.1 monitor.
REMOTE
Display 4
IN
Display 3
OFF: Disables Auto ID function. will be turned on one by one automatically.
E-30
4-34
CONFIDENTIAL
PLE LINK REPEAT TIMER

1 DIVIDER : 1
Use this function to set a uniform brightness for each SOURCE : VIDEO1
display. WORK TIME : 00H03M
Turn on the AUTO ID and set the DIVIDER (at 1, 4 or 9) 2 DIVIDER : 4

before the following operations. SOURCE : RGB1
WORK TIME : 00H06M
On “PLE LINK” of “VIDEO WALL” menu, select “ON”,

then press the MENU/ENTER button. Information
VIDEO WALL 䡵 REPEAT TIMER settings
DIVIDER : 1
POSITION DIVIDER: Divide the screen into 1, 4 or 9 sections.
DISP. MODE : SPLIT SOURCE: Set the input mode to be displayed.
AUTO ID : OFF
IMAGE ADJUST WORK TIME: Can be set to up to 4 hours 15 minutes
P. ON DELAY
PLE LINK
:
:
OFF
ON
in units of 1 minute.
REPEAT TIMER : OFF If you set both timers, Timer 1 and Timer 2 run
consecutively.
In the case of the Video wall, timer No.1 can be used to
Information control all the displays simultaneously.
䡵 PLE LINK settings * This becomes effective when the on-screen menu goes
ON: Sets a uniform brightness for each screen in a video out.
wall is selected.
OFF: Sets the individual screen brightness for each
screen in a video wall.
* When this function is set “ON”, connect your plasma
displays with the remote cable (optional) in the order of
the position numbers for the 2×2 video wall. See the
drawing below.
the PLE LINK will automatically turn OFF.
REMOTE
OUT
REMOTE
IN No.4 No.3 REMOTE
No.4 No.3 OUT
IN
Display 1 Display 2
REMOTE
OUT
REMOTE
OUT No.4 No.3 No.4 No.3 IN
REMOTE
IN
Display 4 Display 3
* With the 3×3 video wall, connect the final display to

the first display the same way as with 2×2 video wall.
Note: The remote control can be operated unless the

IR REMOTE is set to “OFF”.
REPEAT TIMER
Use this to set two timers. Each timer can use the
DIVIDER, SOURCE and WORK TIME.
Turn on the AUTO ID and set the DIVIDER (at 1, 4 or 9)
Example:
TIMER2...RGB1 will be displayed for 6 minutes in a
2×2 video wall.
On “REPEAT TIMER” of “VIDEO WALL” menu, select
“ON”, then press the MENU/ENTER button.
The “REPEAT TIMER” screen appears.
Adjust the items.
E-31
4-35
CONFIDENTIAL
Option4 Settings Menu 䡵 ZOOM NAV settings

Erasing the sub screen image when there is OFF: Will not show the entire image on the sub screen.
no input signal S BY S: Will show the entire image on the sub screen
This function automatically erases the black frame of the of side-by-side mode.
sub screen when there is no sub screen input signal. BTM LFT~TOP LFT: Will show the entire image on
This feature is available only when the picuture-in-picuture the sub screen of picture-in-picture mode.
mode is selected. Side-by-Side Picture-in-Picture
Example: Set to “OFF” RGB/PC1 RGB/PC1

On “SUB. P DETECT” of “OPTION4” menu, select
“OFF”.
POINTER button
OPTION4 4/4 or
PREVIOUS PAGE Zoom+/- button
SUB. P DETECT : OFF
ZOOM NAV : BTM LFT
PIC FREEZE : S BY S
SEAMLESS SW : OFF
SELECT1 : —
SELECT2 : —
POINTER button
Information
䡵 SUB. P DETECT Function
* The sub screen disappears when the input signal is lost.
* Loss of the input signal means a condition in which the
video signal and the sync signal are not present.
* Under conditions in which the sub screen has
disappeared, the ZOOM NAV, PIC FREEZE, and
Displaying still images in the sub screen
SEAMLESS SW functions will not work. The WIDE
This feature enables display in the sub screen of still images
button will not function either.
captured by pressing the SELECT/FREEZE button.
䡵 SUB. P DETECT settings
Example: Setting “PIC FREEZE” to “BTM LFT”
AUTO: The black frame disappears 3 seconds after the
input signal is lost. Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/
OFF: Turns off the SUB. P DETECT function. 2), then perform the following operations.
On “PIC FREEZE” of “OPTION4” menu, select “BTM
Displaying the entire image during DIGITAL LFT”.
ZOOM operations
OPTION4 4/4
Use this function to display the entire image within the PREVIOUS PAGE
sub screen together with an enlarged image on the main SUB. P DETECT : AUTO
ZOOM NAV : BTM LFT
screen. PIC FREEZE : BTM LFT
SEAMLESS SW : OFF
Example: Setting “ZOOM NAV” to “S BY S” SELECT1 : —
SELECT2 : —
2), then perform the following operations. SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN

Information
OPTION4 4/4
PREVIOUS PAGE 䡵 PIC FREEZE Function
ZOOM NAV : S BY S
PIC FREEZE : S BY S signals.
SEAMLESS SW : OFF
SELECT1 : — * This feature does not function during split screen mode.
SELECT2 : —
* Digital zoom is not available while this function is
operating.
* A further press of the SELECT/FREEZE button while
Information
this function is operating will cancel this function.
䡵 ZOOM NAV Function * Providing a 2-screen display will cancel this function.
* This feature is available only for RGB1 or RGB2 input 䡵 PIC FREEZE settings
signals.
OFF: Will not show the still image.
* This feature does not function during split screen mode. S BY S1, 2: The still images captured by pressing the
* This feature does not function while PIC FREEZE is SELECT/FREEZE button will be shown on the sub
operating. screen of side-by-side mode.
* Providing a 2-screen display will cancel this function. BTM LFT~TOP LFT: The still images captured by
E-32 on the sub screen of picture-in-picture mode.
4-36
CONFIDENTIAL
Side-by-Side Picture-in-Picture Advanced OSM Settings Menu

RGB/PC1 RGB/PC1 Setting the menu mode
This allows you to access full menu items.
When P. ON DELAY or PLE LINK is ON, this won’t be
turned OFF.
SELECT/ SELECT/
FREEZE FREEZE On “ADVANCED OSM” of “MAIN MENU”, select “ON”.
button button
MAIN MENU 1/2 MAIN MENU 1/2
PICTURE PICTURE
AUDIO AUDIO
IMAGE ADJUST IMAGE ADJUST
RGB/PC1 RGB/PC1 OPTION1 OPTION1
OPTION2
OPTION3
OPTION4
ADVANCED OSM : OFF ADVANCED OSM : ON
NEXT PAGE NEXT PAGE
SEL. ADJ. EXIT EXIT SEL. ADJ. EXIT EXIT
or Information
S BY S2 䡵 ADVANCED OSM settings
RGB/PC1 RGB/PC1 ON: All of the main menu items are available for
advanced users.
OFF: Some of the main menu items are not available
(e.g. OPTION2, OPTION3 and OPTION4).
Language Settings Menu

Switching the input source quickly Setting the language for the menus
This feature enables quick input selection. The menu display can be set to one of eight languages.
Example: Setting the menu display to “DEUTSCH”
signals. On “MAIN MENU”, select “LANGUAGE”, then press the
Example: Set to switch quickly between RGB1 and MENU/ENTER button.
RGB2. The “LANGUAGE” screen appears.
On “LANGUAGE”, select “ DEUTSCH”, then press the
MENU/ENTER button.
LANGUAGE
On “SEAMLESS SW” of “OPTION4” menu, select “ON”.
LANGUAGE
Select “RGB1” and “RGB2”. : DEUTSCH
OPTION4 4/4
PREVIOUS PAGE
ZOOM NAV : BTM LFT
PIC FREEZE : S BY S
SEAMLESS SW : ON
SELECT1 : RGB1
SELECT2 : RGB2 The “LANGUAGE” is set to “DEUTSCH” and return to the
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN main menu.
* The available sources depend on the settings of input. Information

䡵 Language settings
Information
ENGLISH ........ English ITALIANO ........ Italian
䡵 SEAMLESS SW Function DEUTSCH ....... German SVENSKA ....... Swedish
* This feature will not function for certain input FRANÇAIS ...... French ................... Chinese
combinations. See the table on page E-13. ESPAÑOL ....... Spanish У ............ Russian
* After switching to the selected input, please operate this
function.
* This feature will not function during split screen mode.
* When SEAMLESS SW is first turned on, or when
signals being transmitted are changed, there may be a
slight delay due to signal analysis.
䡵 SEAMLESS SW settings
OFF: Turns off the SEAMLESS SW function.
ON: When the CLEAR/SEAMLESS SW button is
pressed, input signals will switch quickly according to
the setting of SELECT1 and SELECT2.
E-33
4-37
CONFIDENTIAL
Color System Settings Menu

Setting the video signal format
Use these operations to set the color systems of composite
video signals or Y/C input signals.
Example: Setting the color system to “3.58 NTSC”
On the MAIN MENU, select “COLOR SYSTEM”, then press
COLOR SYSTEM
COLOR SYSTEM
: 3.58NTSC
ADJ. EXIT RETURN
Information
䡵 Video signal formats
Different countries use different formats for video
signals. Set to the color system used in your current
country.
AUTO: The color systems are automatically identified
PAL: This is the standard format used mainly in the
United Kingdom and Germany.
SECAM: This is the standard format used mainly in
France and Russia.
4.43 NTSC, PAL60: This format is used for videos in
countries using PAL and SECAM video signals.
Brazil.
Argentina.

Checking the frequencies, polarities of input
signals, and resolution
of the signals currently being input from a computer, etc.
On “MAIN MENU”, select “SOURCE INFORMATION”,
then press the MENU/ENTER button.
SOURCE INFORMATION
H. FREQ : 48.4KHZ
V. FREQ : 60.0HZ
H. POLARITY : NEG.
V. POLARITY : NEG.
MEMORY : 24
EXIT RETURN

E-34
4-38
CONFIDENTIAL
RGB 1
Connections
5 4 3 2 1
15 14 13 12 11
External equipment
1 Red
3 Blue
4 No connection
5 Ground
6 Red ground
7 Green ground
8 Blue ground
9 No connection
Display 10 Sync signal ground
Connector on the plasma monitor side: EXTERNAL 11 No connection
CONTROL connector. 12 Bi-directional DATA (SDA)
Use a crossed (reverse) cable. 13 Horizontal sync or Composite sync
14 Vertical sync
Type of connector: D-Sub 9-pin male 15 Data clock
Pin No. Pin Name Pin No. Pin Name
1 No Connection 6 DSR (DCE side ready) DVI-D 24-pin connector (Digital)
The unit is equipped with a type of connector commonly
4 DTR (DTE side ready) 9 No connection used for digital.
5 GND (This cannot be used for an analog input.)
(TMDS can be used for one link only.)
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
RGB 3
Communication Parameters
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(1) Communication system Asynchronous 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
(2) Interface RS-232C 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
(3) Baud rate 9600 bps
(4) Data length 8 bits
(5) Parity Odd Pin No. Signal (Digital)
(6) Stop bit 1 bit 1 T.M.D.S Data 2 -
(7) Communication code Hex 2 T.M.D.S Data 2 +
External Control Codes (Reference) 4 No connection
5 No connection
FUNCTION CODE DATA
Power ON 9FH 80H 60H 4EH 00H CDH 6 DDC Clock
OFF 9FH 80H 60H 4FH 00H CEH 7 DDC Data
Input Switch Video1 (BNC) DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 01H 08H 8 No connection
Video2 (RCA) DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 02H 09H 9 T.M.D.S Data 1 -
DVD1/HD1 (RCA) DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 05H 0CH 10 T.M.D.S Data 1 +
DVD2/HD2 (BNC) DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 06H 0DH 11 T.M.D.S Data 1 Shield
RGB1 (mini D-Sub 15-Pin) DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 07H 0EH
RGB2 (5BNC) DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 08H 0FH 12 No connection
RGB3 (DVI) DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 0CH 13H 13 No connection
Audio Mute ON 9FH 80H 60H 3EH 00H BDH 14 +5V Power
OFF 9FH 80H 60H 3FH 00H BEH 15 Ground
Picture Mode NORMAL DFH 80H 60H OAH 01H 01H CBH 16 Hot Plug Detect
THEAT. 1 DFH 80H 60H OAH 01H 02H CCH 17 T.M.D.S Data 0 -
THEAT. 2 DFH 80H 60H OAH 01H 03H CDH
DEFAULT DFH 80H 60H OAH 01H 04H CEH 18 T.M.D.S Data 0 +
BRIGHT DFH 80H 60H OAH 01H 05H CFH 19 T.M.D.S Data 0 Shield
Screen Mode STADIUM DFH 80H 60H 51H 01H 02H 13H 20 No connection
ZOOM DFH 80H 60H 51H 01H 03H 14H 21 No connection
NORMAL DFH 80H 60H 51H 01H 04H 15H
FULL DFH 80H 60H 51H 01H 05H 16H 22 T.M.D.S Clock Shield
14 : 9 DFH 80H 60H 51H 01H 09H 1AH 23 T.M.D.S Clock +
2.35 : 1 DFH 80H 60H 51H 01H 0AH 1BH
24 T.M.D.S Clock -
Auto Picture ON DFH 80H 60H 7FH 03H 03H 09H 00H 4DH
OFF DFH 80H 60H 7FH 03H 03H 09H 01H 4EH


E-35
4-39
Troubleshooting
performance.
power.

terminal (Wired).
outlet?
or off mode?
centered.
adjust properly.
control is on.
E-36
4-40
CONFIDENTIAL
USER' S MANUAL
PlasmaSync 50XM4
PX-50XM4W
Model Information
4-1
CONFIDENTIAL

Screen Size 1106(H)622(V) mm 38

58
1222 (48.1") (1.5")
43.5"(H)24.5"(V) inches (2.3")
diagonal 50"
Aspect Ratio 16 : 9
1106 (43.5")
Pixel Pitch 0.81(H)0.81(V) mm
0.032"(H)0.032"(V) inches
622 (24.5")
736 (30")
Signals
Vertical : 50.0 to 120 Hz 96
(3.8")
Input Signals RGB, NTSC (3.58/4.43), PAL (B,G,M,N), Bezel color is gray. Units are in mm
PAL60, SECAM, HD*1, DVD*1, DTV*1 (inch)
Input Terminals (VIDEO1 and RGB1 can also be used as OUTPUT terminals) The features and specifications may be subject to change without
RGB notice.
Visual 1 (Analog) mini D-sub 15-pin1
Visual 2 (Analog) BNC (R, G, B, H/CS, V)1*2 *1 HD/DVD/DTV input signals supported on this
Visual 3 (Digital) DVI-D 24-pin1*3 system
Video 480P (60 Hz) 480I (60 Hz)
Visual 2 RCA-pin1
576P (50 Hz) 576I (50 Hz)
Visual 3 S-Video: DIN 4-pin1
625P (50 Hz) 625I (50 Hz)
DVD/HD/DTV
Visual 2 BNC (Y, PB[CB], PR[CR])1*1, *2 1080I (50 Hz) 1080I (60 Hz)
Visual 3 DVI-D 24-pin1*3 *2 The 5-BNC connectors are used as RGB/PC2 and
Audio Stereo RCA3 (Selectable) HD/DVD2 input. Select one of them under “BNC
External Control D-sub 9-pin1 (RS-232C) INPUT”.
Sound output 9W+9W at 6 ohm 3
* Compatable with HDCP.
Current Rating 7.6 A (maximum)
Supported Signals
• 640480P @ 59.94/60Hz • 19201080I @ 50Hz
Power Consumption 435W (typical) • 1280720P @ 59.94/60Hz • 720576P @ 50Hz
Dimensions 1222 (W)736 (H)96(D) mm • 19201080I @ 59.94/60Hz • 1440 (720)576P @ 50Hz
48.1 (W)30 (H)3.8 (D) inches • 720480P @ 59.94/60Hz
Weight 44 kg / 97 lbs (without stand) • 1440 (720)480I @ 59.94/60Hz
Environmental Considerations Note: In some cases a signal on the plasma monitor may not be displayed
Operating Temperature 0°C to 40°C / 32°F to 104°F properly. The problem may be an inconsistency with standards from
Humidity 20 to 80% (no condensation) the source equipment (DVD, Set-top box, etc...). If you do experience
Altitude 0 to 2800 m / 0 to 9180 feet such a problem please contact your dealer and also the manufacturer of
Storage Temperature -10°C to 50°C / 14°F to 122°F the source equipment.
Altitude 0 to 3000 m / 0 to 9840 feet
Front Panel User Controls Power on/off, Input source select, Other Features Motion compensated 3D Scan Converter (NTSC,
Volume up/down/ OSM control PAL, 480I, 576I, 525I, 625I, 1035I, 1080I), 2-3
Remote Control Functions Power on/off, Input source select, OSM pull down Converter (NTSC, 480I, 525I, 1035I,
control,Volume up/down, Cursor (UP, 1080I (60Hz)), 2-2 pull down Converter (PAL,
DOWN,LEFT, RIGHT), Pointer, Zoom up/ 576I, 625I, NTSC, 480I, 525I), Digital Zoom
down, Off timer, Wireless/Wired remote Function (100-900% Selectable), Video Wall 4-25
control, Split screen buttons multi screen, Self Diagnosis, Image Burn
OSM Functions Picture (Contrast/Brightness/Sharpness/ Color/Tint/ reduction tools (PLE LOCK1~3, INVERSE,
Picture mode/Noise reduction/Color temperature/ WHITE, ORBITER (Auto1,2/Manual), SCREEN
White balance/Gamma/Low tone/Color tune), Audio WIPER), Color Temperature select (high/mid/mid
(Bass/Treble/Balance/Audio input), Image Adjust low/low, user has 4 memories), Control lock
(Aspect mode/V-Position /H-Position/V-Height /H- (Except power SW), Auto Picture, Input Skip,
Width/Auto Picture/Fine picture/Picture adjustment), Color Tune, Low Tone (3 mode), Auto ID,
Option1 (OSM/BNC Input/D-Sub Input/RGB Select/ Programmable Timer, Gamma Correction (4
HD Select/Input Skip/All Reset), Option2 (Power mode), Loop through interface, Plug and play
management/Cinema mode/Long life [PLE, Orbiter, (DDC1, DDC2b, RGB3: DDC2b only),
Inverse, White, Screen wiper, Soft focus]/Gray level/ Split screen operations
S1/S2/Picture size/DVI Set up), Option3 (Timer/ Accessories Remote control with two AAA batteries, Power
Power on mode/Control lock/IR Remote/Loop out/ cord, Manuals, Safety metal fittings,
ID number/Video wall [Divider, Position, Disp. mode, Ferrite cores, Bands, Cable clamps
Auto ID, Image adjust, Power on delay, PLE link, Regulations Meets EMC Directive
Timer]), Option4 (Sub. P detect/Zoom nav/Pic freeze/ (EN55022 Class A, EN55024, EN61000-3-2,
Seamless SW), Advanced OSM, Language*, Color EN61000-3-3)
system, Source information Meets Low Voltage Directive
*English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Swedish, (EN60950-1, IEC60950-1, SEMKO Approved)
Chinese, Russian Meets AS/NZS CISPR 22:2002 Class A
E-1
4-2
CONFIDENTIAL

• When the screen mode is FULL, each signal is converted to a 1365 dots768 lines signal. (Except for *3)
Model Dots lines
640400 70.1 31.5 NEG NEG YES YES YES*2 YES YES –– NO 4
640480 59.9 31.5 NEG NEG YES YES YES YES YES STILL YES 5
848480 60.0 31.0 POS POS YES YES –– YES YES WIDE2 YES 19
852480*1 60.0 31.7 NEG NEG YES YES –– YES YES WIDE1 YES 17
800600 56.3 35.2 POS POS YES YES YES YES YES STILL YES 11
computers 1024768 60.0 48.4 NEG NEG YES YES YES*3 –– YES STILL YES 24
1152864 75.0 67.5 POS POS YES YES YES –– YES STILL YES 51
1280768 56.2 45.1 POS POS YES YES –– –– YES WIDE1 NO 52
1280768*9 69.8 56.0 NEG POS YES YES –– –– YES WIDE1 YES 66
1360765 60.0 47.7 POS POS YES YES –– – – YES*3 WIDE1 NO 22
1360768 60.0 47.7 POS POS YES YES –– – – YES*3 WIDE1 YES 22
1376768 59.9 48.3 NEG POS YES YES –– –– YES WIDE2 YES 53
12801024 60.0 64.0 POS POS YES YES YES*4 –– YES STILL YES 29
16001200 60.0 75.0 POS POS YES YES YES –– YES –– YES 54
19201200*9 60.0 74.6 NEG NEG YES YES –– –– YES WIDE2 –– 81
19201200RB*9 60.0 74.0 NEG NEG YES YES –– –– YES WIDE3 YES 88
Apple 640480 66.7 35.0 Sync on G Sync on G –– –– YES YES YES –– NO 6
Macintosh*6 *8 832624 74.6 49.7 Sync on G Sync on G –– –– YES YES YES –– NO 16
1024768 74.9 60.2 Sync on G Sync on G –– –– YES*3 –– YES WIDE1 NO 28
1152870 75.1 68.7 Sync on G Sync on G –– –– YES –– YES WIDE1 NO 39
1440900*9 60.0 56.0 NEG NEG YES YES –– –– YES –– YES 89
Work Station 12801024 60.0 64.6 NEG NEG YES YES YES*4 –– YES –– YES 29
Work Station(HP)*8 12801024 72.0 78.1 –– –– –– –– YES*4 –– YES –– YES 59
Work Station 1152900 66.0 61.8 C Sync C Sync –– –– YES –– YES –– YES 60
12801024 76.1 81.1 C Sync C Sync –– –– YES*4 –– YES –– YES 30
Work Station 1024768 60.0 49.7 –– –– –– –– YES*3 –– YES –– YES 62
(SGI) 12801024 60.0 63.9 –– –– –– –– YES*4 –– YES –– YES 29
IDC-3000G
PAL625P 768576 50.0 31.4 NEG NEG YES YES YES*7 –– YES*7 –– NO 31
NTSC525P 640480 59.9 31.5 NEG NEG YES YES YES*7 –– YES*7 MOTION NO 32
E-2
4-3
CONFIDENTIAL
*2 This signal is converted to a 1024 dots640 lines signal.
NOTE:
or equivalent.

Warning NOTE:
Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and
that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be
placed on apparatus.
To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this And regarding DVI and power cable, attach the supplied
apparatus to rain or moisture. ferrite cores. If you do not do this, this monitor will not
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this conform to mandatory CE or C-Tick standards.
product may cause radio interference in which case the user Set the ferrite cores on both ends of the DVI cable (not
may be required to take adequate measures. supplied), and both ends of the power cable (supplied).
DVI cable.
band band Connector

core (large)
core (large)
E-3
4-4
CONFIDENTIAL
Operation Manual
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
У
4-5
CONFIDENTIAL

avoid any problems.
WARNING
E-2
4-6
CONFIDENTIAL
Contents
Installation .................................................... E-4 Setting the Input Skip ............................................. E-22
Ventilation Requirements for enclosure mounting ....... E-4 Resetting to the default values ................................ E-22
How to use the safety metal fittings and the screws for Option2 Settings Menu ......................................... E-23
safety metal fittings ............................................. E-4 Setting the power management for computer images ...... E-23
Creating a video wall ............................................ E-5 POWER/STANDBY indicator ............................... E-23
Cable Management ............................................... E-5 Setting the picture to suit the movie ....................... E-23
Caution on when the plasma monitor is installed vertically .... E-6 Reducing burn-in of the screen .............................. E-23
Setting the gray level for the sides of the screen ..... E-25
How to use the remote control ................................. E-6
Setting the screen size for S1/S2 video input .......... E-25
Battery Installation and Replacement ....................... E-6
Setting the picture size for RGB input signals ........ E-26
Using the wired remote control mode ...................... E-6
Setting the signal and black level for DVI signal .... E-26
Operating Range ...................................................... E-6
Handling the remote control ..................................... E-6 Option3 Settings Menu ......................................... E-26
Using the timer ...................................................... E-26
Part Names and Function ................................ E-7 Setting the power on mode ..................................... E-28
Front View ........................................................... E-7 Enabling/disabling the front panel controls ............ E-28
Rear View/ Terminal Board .................................... E-8 Enabling/disabling remote control wireless
Remote Control ..................................................... E-9 transmission ........................................................ E-28
Basic Operations ........................................... E-10 Loop Out setting .................................................... E-28
POWER .............................................................. E-10 ID number setting .................................................. E-29
To turn the unit ON and OFF: ................................ E-10 Video Wall setting .................................................. E-29
VOLUME ............................................................ E-10 Option4 Settings Menu ......................................... E-32
To adjust the sound volume: ................................... E-10 Erasing the sub screen image when there is no input
MUTE ................................................................. E-10 signal ................................................................... E-32
To mute the audio: ................................................. E-10 Displaying the entire image during DIGITAL ZOOM
operations ............................................................ E-32
DISPLAY .............................................................. E-10
Displaying still images in the sub screen ................ E-32
To check the settings: ............................................. E-10
Switching the input source quickly ........................ E-33
DIGITAL ZOOM ................................................... E-10
Advanced OSM Settings Menu .............................. E-33
AUTO ADJUST .................................................... E-10
Setting the menu mode .......................................... E-33
Language Settings Menu ....................................... E-33
automatically: ...................................................... E-10
OFF TIMER .......................................................... E-10
Color System Settings Menu .................................. E-34
To set the off timer: ................................................ E-10
Setting the video signal format ............................... E-34
To check the remaining time: ................................. E-10
Source Information Menu ...................................... E-34
To cancel the off timer: .......................................... E-10
Checking the frequencies, polarities of input signals,
WIDE Operations ........................................... E-11 and resolution ...................................................... E-34
Wide Screen Operation (manual) .......................... E-11
External Control ........................................... E-35
When viewing videos or digital video discs ........... E-11
Application ......................................................... E-35
Connections ........................................................ E-35
When “PICTURE SIZE” is set to “OFF” ............... E-12
Type of connector: D-Sub 9-pin male .................... E-35
SPLIT SCREEN Operations ............................... E-13 Communication Parameters ................................... E-35
Showing a couple of pictures on the screen at the External Control Codes (Reference) ........................ E-35
same time ........................................................ E-13
Pin Assignments ........................................... E-35
Operations in the Picture-in-picture mode .............. E-14 mini D-Sub 15-pin connector (Analog) ................... E-35
Selecting the input signals to be displayed ............. E-14 DVI-D 24-pin connector (Digital) ............................ E-35
Zooming up pictures .............................................. E-14 Troubleshooting ............................................ E-36
Adjusting the OSM controls ................................... E-14
OSM (On Screen Menu) Controls ..................... E-15 Contents of the Package
Menu Operations ................................................. E-15
䡺 Plasma monitor
Menu Tree ........................................................... E-16
Picture Settings Menu ............................................ E-18 䡺 Power cord
Adjusting the picture .............................................. E-18 䡺 Remote control with two AAA Batteries
Setting the picture mode according to the brightness 䡺 Manuals (Model Information and Operation)
of the room .......................................................... E-18
Reducing noise in the picture ................................. E-18 䡺 Safety metal fittings*
Setting the color temperature ................................. E-18 䡺 Ferrite cores, bands
Adjusting the color to the desired level .................. E-19 䡺 Cable clamps
Changing the Gamma Curve .................................. E-19
Making the Low Tone adjustments ........................ E-19 * Contents will differ according to the model.
Adjusting the colors ............................................... E-19 * These are fittings for fastening the unit to a wall to prevent
Audio Settings Menu ............................................ E-20 tipping due to external shock when using the stand
Adjusting the treble, bass and left/right balance and (optional). Fasten the safety fittings to the holes in the
audio input select ................................................. E-20 back of the monitor using the safety fitting mount screws
Setting the allocation of the audio connectors ........ E-20 (see page E-4).
Image Adjust Settings Menu .................................. E-20
Adjusting the Position, Size, Fine Picture, Picture Adj .... E-20 Options
Option1 Settings Menu ......................................... E-21 • Wall mount unit
Setting the on-screen menu .................................... E-21
• Ceiling mount unit
Setting the RGB1 connector ................................... E-21 • Tilt mount unit
Setting a computer image to the correct RGB select • Stand
screen .................................................................. E-21 • Attachable speakers
Setting high definition images to the suitable screen size ..... E-22
E-3
4-7
CONFIDENTIAL
Installation
* See page E-3.
dealer.
to the installer.


50mm (2") 50mm (2")
50mm (2")
Screw hole
Wall
Screw or Hook etc.

(Not supplied)

50mm (2")
Metal chain
(Not supplied)
Table Top
E-4
4-8
CONFIDENTIAL

BNC connector
Cr/Pr
R/
BNC connector OUT
VIDEO
VIDEO 1
(IN/ OUT)
G/
Y
RGB2 / DVD2 / HD2

VIDEO Signal IN
RGB signal/
Cb/Pb
VIDEO 3
VIDEO 2
B/
VIDEO Signal
HD
AUDIO 1
(MONO)
L
VD
Y
DVD1
OUT
(IN / OUT)
RGB signal/
RGB 1
IN DVD/HD signal
IN
Remote REMOTE
control OUT Remote

control
OUT
Remote IN
IN
REMOTE
control OUT Remote
control
OUT
Note:
When LOOP OUT is ON, do not connect an OUTPUT signal from another unit, that will place an extraordinary
load on the other unit and may damage it.
Information
signal.
Cable Management
Back of the unit
Using the cable-clamps provided with the plasma display,
mounting holes
To attach To detach
1. 2.
clamp
cables
mounting hole
E-5
4-9
MENU/ ENTER
OSM
DOWN
VOLUME
BNC INPUT
UP
: RGB
LEFT/-
D-SUB INPUT
RIGHT/ +
90°
: RGB
INPUT SELECT
/EXIT
RGB SELECT
: AUTO
HD SELECT
INPUT SKIP
: OFF
ALL RESET
: OFF
1024768

EXIT RETURN

VOLUME
UP LEFT/- RIGHT/ +
INPUT SELECT
/ EXIT

Operating Range
30°.
2.Align the batteries according to the (+) and (–) indication monitor’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct
inside the case. sunlight or strong artificial light, or if there is an obstacle
Approx.
3.Replace the cover. 7m / 23ft

When the cable is connected, the mode automatically
switches to wired remote control. When the wired remote
control mode is used, the remote control can be operated
even if no batteries are loaded.
External Control

IN
REMOTE

OUT

types together.
Remote Control
Cable* into a fire.
To Remote Jack be sure to unplug the remote cable from the REMOTE
* The 1/8 Stereo Mini cable must be purchased separately. E-6

4-10
CONFIDENTIAL
Front View
VOLUME INPUT SELECT

VOLUME INPUT SELECT

7 6 5 4 1 3 2

u MENU/ENTER
The available inputs depend on the settings of “BNC
WARNING
“DVI SET UP”.
(OSM) mode.
E-7
4-11
CONFIDENTIAL
VIDEO
VIDEO 1
C
VIDEO 3
VIDEO 2
D
AUDIO 1
(MONO)
L
R
Y
E DVD1 / HD1
Cb/Pb
Cr/Pr
AUDIO 2
(MONO)
L
R
Cr/Pr
R/
G/
Y
RGB2 / DVD2 / HD2
F
Cb/Pb
B/
HD
VD
G
RGB 1
AUDIO 3
(MONO)
L
R
H
RGB 3
External Control
I A B
IN
J
REMOTE
OUT
A AC IN H RGB3 (DVI 24pin)

Connect the included power cord here. Connect a digital signal (TMDS) from a source with a
DVI output.
B EXT SPEAKER L and R This input can be set for use with an RGB/PC3 (see
Connect speakers (optional) here. Maintain the correct page E-26)
polarity. Connect the (positive) speaker wire to the
EXT SPEAKER terminal and the (negative) I EXTERNAL CONTROL
speaker wire to the EXT SPEAKER terminal on This terminal is used when operating and controlling
both LEFT and RIGHT channels. the monitor externally (by RS-232C).
J REMOTE IN
C VIDEO1, 2, 3 (BNC, RCA, S-Video) Connect the remote cable* to the remote control’s
Connect VCR’s, DVD’s or Video Cameras, etc. here. remote jack to obtain wired remote control.
VIDEO1 can be used for Input or Output (see page E-
5). K REMOTE OUT
Connect the remote cable* to the REMOTE IN jack of
D AUDIO1, AUDIO2, AUDIO3 the other display monitor to obtain wired remote
These are audio input terminals. control.
The input is selectable. Set which video image to allot
them from the audio menu screen. * The 1/8 Stereo Mini cable must be purchased separately.
E DVD1 / HD1
Connect DVD’s, High Definition or Laser Discs, etc. Information
here. • For Y/CB/Cr, connect to the DVD1 or DVD2
terminals.
F RGB2/ DVD2/ HD2 • For SCART, this unit provides three ways to connect:
RGB2: You can connect an analog RGB signal · SCART1: Connect R/G/B to the DVD2 terminals
and the syncronization signal. and composite sync. to the HD terminal.
DVD2/ HD2: You can connect DVDs, High · SCART2: Connect R/G/B to the DVD2 terminals
Definition sources, Laser Discs, etc. and composite sync. to the VIDEO1 terminal.
here. · SCART3: Connect R/G/B + composite sync. to the
This input can be set for use with an RGB1 terminal.
E-21)
G RGB1 (mini D-Sub 15pin)

Connect an analog RGB signal from a computer, etc.
page E-5) E-8
4-12
CONFIDENTIAL

i POINTER
o ZOOM (+ /–)
!0 VOLUME (+ /–)
!1 MUTE
Mutes the audio.
!2 WIDE
!3 DISPLAY
!4 OFF TIMER
!5 SIDE BY SIDE
side-by-side mode.
!7 SINGLE
!8 SELECT/FREEZE
screen mode.
When the PIC FREEZE function is operating, this
q POWER ON/STANDBY button can be used to display still images on the sub
Switches the power on/standby. screen.
(This does not operate when POWER/STANDBY !9 AUTO ADJUST
indicator of the main unit is off.) Press this button to adjust Fine Picture, Picture ADJ,
w RGB/PC Position, and Contrast automatically, or to switch the
screen size to ZOOM mode automatically with the
Press this button to select RGB/PC as the source.
RGB/PC can also be selected using the INPUT superimposed caption displayed fully only when the
SELECT button on the monitor. picture contains dark areas above and below the picture.
e DVD / HD @0 ID SELECT
Set the ID number in the remote control. The remote
DVD/HD can also be selected using the INPUT control can then be used only for a display with the
SELECT button on the monitor. same ID number. When several displays are used
together they can be controlled individually.
r VIDEO
Press this button to select VIDEO as the source. @1 CLEAR/SEAMLESS SW
Clears the number set by the ID SELECT button.
When the SEAMLESS SW function is operating, this
VIDEO can also be selected using the INPUT SELECT button can be used to switch the input source quickly.
button on the monitor. @2 Remote control signal transmitter
t MENU/ENTER
Press this button to access the OSM controls. @3 Remote Jack
Press this button during the display of the main menu Insert the plug of the remote cable (The 1/8 Stereo
to go to the sub menu. Mini cable) here when using the supplied remote
control in the wired condition.
y CURSOR (▲ / ▼ / / )
E-9
4-13
CONFIDENTIAL
Basic Operations
POWER OFF TIMER
VOLUME
MUTE seconds.
DISPLAY
pressed.
the menu turns off.
the picture.
Press the POINTER button to display the pointer. ( )

( )
2. Press the POINTER button to delete the pointer. A slight current is still supplied to the monitor. When you
AUTO ADJUST long period of time, turn off the power of the monitor.
automatically:
Information
(component) input is selected: The screen size
switches to ZOOM mode automatically with the
superimposed caption displayed fully only when the
picture contains dark areas above and below the picture.
E-10
4-14
CONFIDENTIAL
WIDE Operations
→ NORMAL → FULL → STADIUM → ZOOM → 2.35:1 → 14:9
right margins.
FULL ↔ 2.35:1 • This feature is available when the input signal is video,
NORMAL ↔ FULL (525P or 625P signal from a scan converter).
14:9 size screen

Note:

STADIUM size screen

wide screen.
ZOOM size screen

4-15
CONFIDENTIAL

Computer Signals
direction.
ZOOM size screen
NORMAL ↔ FULL
TRUE
FULL size screen
FULL
ZOOM size screen
Information
When wide signals are input. See page E-2 of Model Information for details on the
NORMAL.
The screen size switches as follows: put
→ TRUE → FULL → ZOOM Select an appropriate setting for RGB SELECT mode
referring to the“Table of Signals Supported” on page
TRUE size screen (VGA, SVGA 4:3) E-2 of Model Information.
Note:
E-12
4-16
CONFIDENTIAL


A
B A B A B

button button
VIDEO1

SINGLE
A SINGLE
button
A
B A B
A B

SIDE BY SIDE
VIDEO1 RGB/PC1
button
VIDEO1 RGB/PC1
cursor button.
A B
Sub
screen
PICTURE IN
PICTURE
button A B
Note:
same height. button
RGB/PC1 VIDEO1
Information B A
VIDEO1 VIDEO2
VIDEO3 HD/DVD1 HD/DVD2 RGB/PC1 RGB3 SCART1~3
RGB2 FREEZE button.
Pictures VIDEO1
displayed on VIDEO2
the left/sub VIDEO3
RGB2 3:
RGB/PC1 1,2:
3:
A B
RGB3
SCART1~3 1,2: 1,2:
3: 3:
Split screen operations may not function SELECT/FREEZE

VIDEO1 RGB/PC1
A B
E-13
4-17
CONFIDENTIAL


A button A
signal.
B
VIDEO1 RGB/PC2
VIDEO1 RGB/PC2
button used to change the selection.
Top Left Top Right
picture active.
B B 2. Use the POINTER button and the ZOOM
/ button to
A
A enlage the picture.
button

VIDEO1 RGB/PC1
picture active.
A
B MENU.
A
B page E-15.
Note:
A
B During enhanced split screen mode, some functions of
OSM controls are not available.
A
B
button button

FREEZE button.
A
B SELECT/ A
B
FREEZE
button
E-14
4-18
CONFIDENTIAL
OSM(On Screen Menu) Controls

PICTURE
AUDIO
IMAGE ADJUST
OPTION1
MAIN MENU 1/2
ADVANCED OSM : OFF PICTURE
NEXT PAGE
SEL. MENU/ENTER OK EXIT EXIT AUDIO
IMAGE ADJUST
OPTION1
OPTION2
OPTION3
OPTION4
ADVANCED OSM : ON
NEXT PAGE
selected items.
MAIN MENU 1/2
PICTURE
AUDIO
IMAGE ADJUST
OPTION1
ADVANCED OSM : OFF

NEXT PAGE
MAIN MENU 2/2

PREVIOUS PAGE
LANGUAGE
COLOR SYSTEM
SOURCE INFORMATION

PICTURE 1/2
CONTRAST
BRIGHTNESS
SHARPNESS
COLOR
TINT
NR : OFF
NEXT PAGE

main menu.
E-15
4-19
Menu Tree
PICTURE CONTRAST ←→ 0←52→72 YES E-18
COLOR ←→ 0←32→64 YES E-18
TINT R←→G 0←32→64 YES E-18
PICTURE MODE BRIGHT/NORMAL/THEAT.1/THEAT.2/DEFAULT YES E-18
COLOR TEMP LOW/MID LOW/MID/HIGH YES E-18
GAMMA 1←→2←…→4 YES E-19
TREBLE ←→ 0←13→26 YES E-20
H-POSITION ←→ -128←0→+127 YES E-20
PICTURE ADJ.*1 ←→ *2 0←→128 YES E-20
OPTION1 OSM DISPLAY OSM OFF←→ON YES E-21
OSM ADJ. 1←…→6 YES E-21
OSM ANGLE H←→V YES E-21
OSM ORBITER OFF←→ON YES E-21
OSM CONTRAST LOW←→NORMAL YES E-21
BNC INPUT RGB←→COMP.←→SCART1←→SCART2 YES E-21
D-SUB INPUT RGB←→SCART3 — E-21
HD SELECT 1080B/1035I/1080A NO E-22
INPUT SKIP OFF←→ON YES E-22
ALL RESET OFF←→ON — E-22
E-16
4-20
CONFIDENTIAL
OPTION2 PWR. MGT. OFF←→ON YES E-23
CINEMA MODE OFF←→ON YES E-23
LONG LIFE PLE AUTO/LOCK 1/LOCK 2/LOCK 3 YES E-23
ORBITER AUTO 1 YES E-24
AUTO 2 YES E-24
MANUAL H-DOT/V-LINE/TIME YES E-24
OFF YES E-24
INVERSE OFF YES E-24
ON WORKING TIME/WAITING TIME YES E-24
WHITE YES E-24
SCREEN WIPER OFF YES E-25
ON WORKING TIME/WAITING TIME/SPEED YES E-25
SOFT FOCUS OFF/1/2/3/4 YES E-25
PICTURE SIZE OFF←→ON YES E-26
OPTION3 TIMER PRESENT TIME SUMMER TIME OFF←→ON NO E-26
DAY/HOUR/MINUTES NO E-26
PROGRAM OFF YES E-27
ON DATE/ON/OFF(HOUR, MINUTE)/INPUT/FUNCTION YES E-27
MULTI REPEAT OFF YES E-27
ON MULTI MODE/WORK TIME/INPUT MODE YES E-27
PWR. ON MODE LAST /MULTI/ VIDEO 1-3 / HD/DVD 1-2 / RGB 1-3 YES E-28
CONTROL LOCK OFF←→ON YES E-28
IR REMOTE OFF←→ON YES E-28
LOOP OUT OFF←→ON YES E-28
ID NUMBER ALL←→1←…→256 YES E-29
VIDEO WALL DIVIDER OFF/1/4/9/16/25 YES E-29
POSITION No.1←…→No.4/No.7←…→No.15/No.16←…→No.31/No.32←…→No.56 — E-29
DISP. MODE SPLIT←→BLANK YES E-30
AUTO ID OFF←→ON YES E-30
H-POSITION ←→ -128←0→+127 YES E-30
PICTURE ADJ.*1 ←→ *2 0←→128 YES E-30
P. ON DELAY OFF/ON/MODE1/MODE2 YES E-30
PLE LINK OFF←→ON YES E-31
REPEAT TIMER OFF YES E-31
ON DIVIDER/SOURCE/WORK TIME YES E-31
OPTION4 SUB P. DETECT OFF←→AUTO YES E-32
ZOOM NAV OFF←→S BY S←→BTM LFT←→BTM RGT←→TOP RGT←→TOP LFT YES E-32
PIC FREEZE OFF←→S BY S1←→S BY S2←→BTM LFT←→BTM RGT←→TOP RGT←→TOP LFT YES E-32
SEAMLESS SW OFF YES E-33
ON SELECT1/SELECT2 YES E-33
ADVANCED OSM OFF←→ON YES E-33
LANGUAGE ENGLISH/DEUTSCH/FRANÇAIS/ESPAÑOL/ITALIANO/SVENSKA/ /У NO E-33
COLOR SYSTEM AUTO/3.58NTSC/4.43 NTSC/PAL/PAL 60/PAL-N/PAL-M/SECAM NO E-34
SOURCE INFORMATION — — E-34

*2 RGB/PC only
Information
E-17
4-21
CONFIDENTIAL

quality is poor.
PICTURE 1/2
CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS
SHARPNESS COLOR
COLOR TINT

Information Types of noise reduction
Picture adjustment screen There are three types of noise reduction. Each has a
CONTRAST: Changes the picture’s white level. different level of noise reduction.
BRIGHTNESS: Changes the picture’s black level. The effect becomes stronger as the number increases
SHARPNESS: Changes the picture’s sharpness. (in the order NR-1 → NR-2 → NR-3).
Adjusts picture detail of VIDEO display. OFF: Turns the noise reduction function off.
Use this procedure to set color tone produced by the plasma
display.
Example: Setting “HIGH”
a computer signal is connected. On “COLOR TEMP.” of “PICTURE” menu, select “HIGH”.
Restoring the factory default settings PICTURE 2/2
PREVIOUS PAGE
Select “DEFAULT” under the “PICTURE MODE” COLOR TEMP. : HIGH
settings. GAMMA : 2
LOW TONE : AUTO
COLOR TUNE
Setting the picture mode according to the
There are four picture modes that can be used effectively SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
the display. Information
Example: Setting the “THEAT. 1” mode Setting the color temperature
On “PICTURE MODE” of “PICTURE” menu, select LOW: Redder
“THEAT. 1”. MID LOW: Slightly red
PICTURE 1/2
MID: Standard (slightly bluer)
CONTRAST
BRIGHTNESS
HIGH: Bluer
SHARPNESS
COLOR
TINT
NR : OFF
Information
dark room.
NORMAL: Set this mode when watching video in a
bright room.
NORMAL.
E-18
default settings.
4-22
CONFIDENTIAL
COLOR TEMP. : MID
COLOR TUNE
WHITE BALANCE
COLOR TEMP. HIGH
GAIN RED
GAIN GREEN
GAIN BLUE
BIAS RED
BIAS GREEN
BIAS BLUE
RESET : OFF
Information
GAIN RED 70
LOW TONE settings
Such adjustments will not affect the other colors.
Changing the Gamma Curve You can accentuate the green color of trees, the blue of
This feature adjusts the brightness of the midtone areas the sky, etc.
Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the MAIN MENU (1/2), then perform the following operations.
On “GAMMA” of “PICTURE” menu, select “3”. the MENU/ENTER button.
PICTURE 2/2 The “COLOR TUNE” screen appears.
PREVIOUS PAGE
COLOR TEMP. : MID On “BLUE” of “COLOR TUNE”, adjust the color tune.
GAMMA : 3
LOW TONE : AUTO COLOR TUNE
COLOR TUNE RED
GREEN
BLUE
YELLOW
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN MAGENTA
CYAN
RESET : OFF
GAMMA settings
The picture becomes darker as the number increases Information
(in the sequence of 1, 2, 3, 4). COLOR TUNE settings
MENU/ENTER button.
E-19
4-23
CONFIDENTIAL

AUDIO
position.
BASS The mode switches as follows each time the 䊴 or 䊳 button is
TREBLE
BALANCE
pressed:
at the factory.
IMAGE ADJUST
V-POSITION
H-POSITION
V-HEIGHT
Information H-WIDTH
AUTO PICTURE : OFF
䡵 Audio settings menu FINE PICTURE

BASS: Controls the level of low frequency sound.
BALANCE: Controls the balance of the left and right Information
channels. 䡵 When “AUTO PICTURE” is “OFF”
IMAGE ADJUST
Setting the allocation of the audio connectors ASPECT MODE : FULL
Setting the AUDIO 1, 2, and 3 connectors to the desired V-POSITION
H-POSITION
input. V-HEIGHT
H-WIDTH
Example: Setting “AUDIO INPUT1” to “VIDEO 2” AUTO PICTURE : OFF
FINE PICTURE
On “AUDIO INPUT1” of “AUDIO” menu, select PICTURE ADJ.
“VIDEO2”.
AUDIO Picture ADJ. items are displayed so that you can adjust
BASS them.
TREBLE
BALANCE 䡵 Adjusting the Auto Picture
AUDIO INPUT2 : HD/DVD1 ON: The Picture ADJ., Fine Picture and Position
AUDIO INPUT3 : RGB1 adjustments are made automatically.
Information * If FINE PICTURE can’t be adjusted, set Auto Picture
䡵 AUDIO INPUT to OFF and adjust manually.
A single audio input cannot be selected as the audio 䡵 Adjusting the position of the image
channel for more than one input terminal. V-POSITION: Adjusts the vertical position of the
image.
image.
image.
E-20
4-24
CONFIDENTIAL

This sets the position of the menu, the display format RGB, component or SCART1,2.
OSM
RGB SELECT : AUTO
INPUT SKIP : OFF
OSM ALL RESET : OFF
OSM ANGLE : H
OSM ORBITER : OFF
OSM CONTRAST : LOW
Information
䡵 BNC INPUT Settings
Information SCART1: Use the 4BNC terminals for RGB with
䡵 DISPLAY OSM settings composite sync. See page E-8.
ON: The on-screen menu appears. SCART2: Use the 3BNC terminals for RGB and the
OFF: The on-screen menu does not appear. VIDEO1 terminal for composite sync. See page E-8.
If you press the DISPLAY button on the remote control Setting the RGB1 connector
for more than 3 seconds the main menu will appear Select one of the signals being transmitted to the RGB1
and can be set (although it is not ON). terminal.
䡵 OSM ADJUST settings
Adjusts the position of the menu when it appears on
the screen. On “D-SUB INPUT” of “OPTION1” menu, select
The position can be set between 1 to 6. “SCART3”.
OPTION1 1/4
OSM
BNC INPUT : RGB
RGB SELECT : AUTO
HD SELECT : 1080B
INPUT SKIP : OFF
ALL RESET : OFF
NEXT PAGE
䡵 OSM ANGLE settings

Sets the display format (landscape “H” or portrait “V”). Information
When the unit is installed vertically set the OSM 䡵 D-SUB INPUT Settings
ANGLE at “V”. RGB: Use the D-SUB terminal for RGB input.
“H” “V” SCART3: Use the D-SUB terminal for RGB signal fed
OSM
BNC INPUT
OPTION1
: RGB
1/4
OSM
OPTION1
from SCART. See page E-8.
RGB SELECT : AUTO : RGB

HD SELECT : 1080B D-SUB INPUT
INPUT SKIP : OFF : RGB
ALL RESET : OFF RGB SELECT
NEXT PAGE : AUTO
: 1080B
INPUT SKIP
select screen
: OFF
ALL RESET
: OFF
1024ⴒ768
SEL. MENU/ENTER OK
EXIT RETURN for a moving image such as (video) mode, wide mode or
digital broadcast.
“MOTION ”
On “RGB SELECT” of “OPTION1” menu, select
“MOTION”.
OPTION1 1/4
䡵 OSM ORBITER settings OSM

BNC INPUT : RGB
ON: The position of the menu will be shifted by eight D-SUB INPUT : RGB
RGB SELECT : MOTION
dots each time OSM is displayed. HD SELECT : 1080B
OFF: OSM will be displayed at the same position. INPUT SKIP
ALL RESET
: OFF
: OFF
䡵 OSM CONTRAST settings NEXT PAGE
E-21
4-25
CONFIDENTIAL

Information
䡵 RGB SELECT modes skipped over and only pictures whose signals are being
One of these 7 modes must be selected in order to transmitted will be displayed.
display the following signals correctly. This setting is valid only for the INPUT SELECT button
AUTO: Select the suitable mode for the specifications on the unit.
Information. On “INPUT SKIP” of “OPTION1” menu, select “ON”.
STILL: To display VESA standard signals. (Use this OPTION1 1/4
mode for a still image from a computer.) OSM
BNC INPUT : RGB
MOTION: The video signal (from a scan converter) D-SUB INPUT : RGB
RGB SELECT : AUTO
will be converted to RGB signals to make the picture HD SELECT : 1080B
more easily viewable. (Use this mode for a motion INPUT SKIP : ON
ALL RESET : OFF
image from a computer.) NEXT PAGE

SELECT to WIDE1. 䡵 INPUT SKIP settings
WIDE2: When an 848 dot⳯ 480 line signal with a OFF: Regardless of the presence of the signal, scan
horizontal frequency of 31.0 kHz is input, the image and display all signals.
may be compressed horizontally. To prevent this, set ON: If no input signal is present, skip that signal.
horizontal frequency of 74.0 kHz is input, the image Resetting to the default values
may be compressed horizontally. To prevent this, set Use these operations to restore all the settings (PICTURE,
RGB SELECT to WIDE3. AUDIO, IMAGE ADJUST, OPTION1~4, etc) to the
DTV: Set this mode when watching digital broadcasting factory default values.
(480P). Refer to page E-16 for items to be reset.
See page E-2 of Model Information for the details of
the above settings. On “ALL RESET” of “OPTION1” menu, select “ON”, then
Setting high definition images to the suitable OPTION1 1/4 ALL RESET
screen size OSM

BNC INPUT : RGB
Use this procedure to set whether the number of vertical D-SUB INPUT
RGB SELECT
: RGB
: AUTO SETTING NOW
lines of the input high definition image is 1035 or 1080. HD SELECT
INPUT SKIP
: 1080B
: OFF
Example: Setting the “1080B” mode to “1035I” ALL RESET

NEXT PAGE
: ON

OPTION1 1/4
When the “SETTING NOW” screen disappears, then all the
OSM settings are restored to the default values.
BNC INPUT : RGB
D-SUB INPUT : RGB
RGB SELECT : AUTO
HD SELECT : 1035 I
INPUT SKIP : OFF
ALL RESET : OFF
NEXT PAGE
Information
䡵 HD SELECT modes
automatically.
DTC100)
E-22
4-26
CONFIDENTIAL

OPTION2 2/4
On “PWR. MGT.” of “OPTION2” menu, select “ON”. PREVIOUS PAGE
S1/S2 : OFF DVI SET UP
PICTURE SIZE : ON NEXT PAGE
DVI SET UP SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
NEXT PAGE
Information
projection in cinema mode.
* The power management function automatically reduces
OFF: Cinema mode does not function.
the monitor’s power consumption if the computer’s
ORBITER : OFF
OFF: In this mode the power management function is SCREEN WIPER
SOFT FOCUS
:
:
OFF
OFF
turned off.
ORBITER : OFF
computer.

signals are not sent reappears.
from the computer.
Information
䡵 PLE settings
E-23
4-27
CONFIDENTIAL
ORBITER INVERSE
LONG LIFE
PLE : AUTO
LONG LIFE
ORBITER : AUTO1
PLE : AUTO
INVERSE : OFF
ORBITER : OFF
SCREEN WIPER : OFF
INVERSE : WHITE
SOFT FOCUS : OFF
SCREEN WIPER : OFF
SOFT FOCUS : OFF
Information
Adjust the items.
ORBITER
H-DOT : 2 DOT
V-LINE : 4 LINE
TIME : 3M
Information
direction.
V-LINE: Moves from 1 to 20 lines in the vertical
* THE “WORKING TIME” and “WAITING TIME” can be
direction.
set for up to 12 hours and 45 minutes in units of 3 minutes.
TIME: Interval of 1~5 minutes (1 horizontal dot or 1
* Ending a WORKING TIME function, the monitor will
vertical line per interval).
be STAND BY.
[Example]
←−−−− 2 H −−−−→←−− 1.5 H −−→←−−−−

E-24 to 0M. “ON” will be displayed.
4-28
CONFIDENTIAL

LONG LIFE
ORBITER : OFF
SCREEN WIPER : OFF
PLE : AUTO
ORBITER : OFF
INVERSE : OFF
SOFT FOCUS : OFF
Information
OFF: Screen wiper mode does not function. Setting the gray level for the sides of the screen
Setting the time for SCREEN WIPER screen on which nothing is displayed when the screen is
Set a time duration and the speed.
starts in 30 minutes and proceeds for one and a half Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/
hours. 2), then perform the following operations.
On “SCREEN WIPER” of “LONG LIFE” menu, select On “GRAY LEVEL” of “OPTION2” menu, select “5”.
OPTION2 2/4
“ON”, then press the MENU/ENTER button. PREVIOUS PAGE
THE “SCREEN WIPER” screen appears. PWR. MGT. : OFF
CINEMA MODE : ON
Adjust the times and speed. LONG LIFE
GRAY LEVEL : 5
SCREEN WIPER S1/S2 : OFF
WORKING TIME : 01H30M PICTURE SIZE : ON
WAITING TIME : 00H30M DVI SET UP
SPEED : 3 NEXT PAGE
Information
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN 䡵 GRAY LEVEL settings
This adjusts the brightness of the black (the gray level)
Information for the sides of the screen.
䡵 Setting the time The standard is 0 (black). The level can be adjusted
from 0 to 15. The factory setting is 3 (dark gray).
WORKING TIME: Set the time duration for “SCREEN
WIPER”. Setting the screen size for S1/S2 video input
When the WORKING TIME is set to “ON” the mode If the S-video signal contains screen size information, the
will stay on. image will be automatically adjusted to fit the screen when
WAITING TIME: Set the standby time until the this S1/S2 is set to AUTO.
“SCREEN WIPER” mode starts. This feature is available only when an S-video signal is
SPEED: Set the moving speed for the “SCREEN input via the VIDEO3 terminal.
Example: Setting the “S1/S2” to “AUTO”
On “S1/S2” of “OPTION2” menu, select “AUTO”.
OPTION2 2/4
minutes. PREVIOUS PAGE
䡵 To select “ON” for the “WORKING TIME”... PWR. MGT.

CINEMA MODE
: OFF
: ON
Set the hours of the working time to 0H and the minutes LONG LIFE
GRAY LEVEL : 3
to 0M. “ON” will be displayed. S1/S2 : AUTO
PICTURE SIZE : ON
DVI SET UP
NEXT PAGE
E-25
4-29
Information Option3 Settings Menu

䡵 S1/S2 settings Using the timer
This function sets the monitor to turn ON/OFF
AUTO: Adjusts the screen size automatically according
automatically at a set time.
to the S1/S2 video signal.
OFF: Turns the S1/S2 function off. Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/
Setting the picture size for RGB input signals On “OPTION3” menu, select “TIMER”, then press the
Use this procedure to switch the setting to “ON” or “OFF”. MENU/ENTER button.
Example: Setting the “PICTURE SIZE” mode to The “TIMER” screen appears.
“OFF” TIMER
PRESENT TIME
Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/ PROGRAM : OFF
2), then perform the following operations. MULTI REPEAT : OFF

OPTION2 2/4
PREVIOUS PAGE
PWR. MGT. : OFF
CINEMA MODE : ON
LONG LIFE
GRAY LEVEL : 3 PRESENT TIME
S1/S2 : OFF
PICTURE SIZE : OFF This sets the day of the week and present time.
DVI SET UP
NEXT PAGE
Example: Setting “WEDNESDAY”, “22:05”
Setting the signal and black level for DVI The “PRESENT TIME” screen appears.
signal Adjust the items.
PRESENT TIME
DVD) and set the black level. RETURN
SUMMER TIME : OFF
Example: Setting the “PLUG/PLAY” mode to “STB/
DVD” WEDNESDAY
22 : 05 : 00
On “OPTION2” menu, select “DVI SET UP”, then press the
MENU/ENTER button. Select “SET”, then press the MENU/ENTER button.
The “DVI SET UP” screen appears. The adjustments are stored and return to the TIMER menu.
On “PLUG/PLAY” of “DVI SET UP” menu, select “STB/ * If you press the EXIT button instead of the MENU/ENTER
DVD”. button, the settings can not be made.
DVI SET UP PRESENT TIME
PLUG/PLAY : STB/DVD RETURN
BLACK LEVEL : HIGH SUMMER TIME : OFF
WEDNESDAY
22 : 05 : 00
SET
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN SEL. MENU/ENTER OK EXIT RETURN
䡵 PLUG/PLAY settings 䡵 PRESENT TIME settings
PC: When connected to the PC signal. SUMMER TIME: Use to set SUMMER TIME.
BLACK LEVEL is set to “LOW” automatically. ON: The present time + 1 hour.
STB/DVD: When connected to the SET TOP BOX, OFF: Cancelled
DVD etc. Day: Set the day of the week (e.g. Sunday).
BLACK LEVEL is set to “HIGH” automatically. Hour: Set the hour in the 24-hour format (range 00 to
䡵 BLACK LEVEL settings 23).
LOW: When connected to the PC signal. Minutes: Set the minutes (range 00 to 59).
appears gray.
E-26
4-30
CONFIDENTIAL
PROGRAM TIMER • Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select “MULTI MODE”,

This sets the day and time at which the power will be then use the 䊴 and 䊳 buttons to choose from
switched ON/OFF as well as the input mode. “SINGLE”, “SIDE BY SIDE1~3” and “PICTURE
IN PICTURE (BOTTOM LEFT~TOP LEFT)”.
Example: Setting so that the power will be switched
on at 8:30 A.M., Monday, displaying RGB2 source,
and switched off at 10:30 A.M.
On “PROGRAM” of “TIMER” menu, select “ON”, then “RGB1~3”.
PROGRAM TIMER
The “PROGRAM TIMER” screen appears. DATE ON OFF INPUT FUNCTION
Adjust the items. TUE - - : - - 18 : 15 — —
Each mode switches each time the ZOOM Ⳮ/ⳮ button is SAT 08 : 30 12 : 15 VIDEO1 WHITE
—
*FRI 08 : 30 10 : 00 HD/DVD1
pressed. — --:-- --:-- — —
PROGRAM TIMER * 15 : 30 16 : 00 RGB1 —
DATE ON OFF INPUT FUNCTION SEL. ZOOM ADJ. EXIT RETURN
— --:-- --:-- — —
— --:-- --:-- — — PICTURE IN PICTURE SIDE BY SIDE
— --:-- --:-- — —
PROGRAM TIMER PROGRAM TIMER
— --:-- --:-- — — MULTI SCREEN SETTING MULTI SCREEN SETTING
— --:-- --:-- — —
— --:-- --:-- — — MULTI MODE MULTI MODE
: BOTTOM LEFT : SIDE BY SIDE1
INPUT MODE INPUT MODE
Information SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
䡵 PROGRAM TIMER settings

DATE: Set the day of the week (e.g. Sunday). MULTI REPEAT
ON (hour, minutes): Set the time at which the power Two repeat timers are available.
will be turned on in the 24-hour format. Each timer has MULTI MODE, WORK TIME and INPUT
OFF (hour, minutes): Set the time at which the power MODE functions.
will be turned off in the 24-hour format. Example:
INPUT: Set the input mode that will be displayed when TIMER1 is set to display RGB1 (MAIN) and VIDEO1
the timer is on. (SUB) for 4 hours in picute-in-picture mode.
FUNCTION: Set the LONG LIFE function. TIMER2 is set to display RGB3 (LEFT) and HD/DVD1
䡵 To reset the program (RIGHT) for 2.5 hours in side-by-side mode.
Align the cursor with the DATE field that you wish to
On “MULTI REPEAT” of “TIMER”, select “ON”, then
reset, then press the CLEAR/SEAMLESS SW button.
䡵 To reset the data
The “MULTI REPEAT TIMER” screen appears.
Align the cursor with the field (ON/OFF/INPUT/
Adjust the items.
CLEAR/SEAMLESS SW button. PRESENT TIME 1 MULTI MODE : BTM LFT
WORK TIME : 04H00M
PROGRAM : OFF
MULTI REPEAT : OFF INPUT MODE
MAIN : RGB/PC1
screen SUB : VIDEO1
2 MULTI MODE : S BY S1
WORK TIME : 02H30M
PROGRAM TIMER
INPUT MODE
DATE ON OFF INPUT FUNCTION EXIT RETURN LEFT : RGB/PC3
SEL. ADJ.
MON 08 : 30 10 : 30 RGB2 INVERSE RIGHT : HD/DVD1
TUE - - : - - 18 : 15 — — SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
*FRI 08 : 30 10 : 00 HD/DVD1 —
— --:-- --:-- — — Information
* 15 : 30 16 : 00 RGB1 — 䡵 MULTI REPEAT settings
• An asterisk “*” in the DATE field while the timer is on.
An asterisk “*” means “every”. For example, “*FRI” WORK TIME: Set the time duration of the display.
means every Friday and “*” means everyday. Time range is from 1 minutes to 4 hours and 15 minutes.
INPUT MODE: Set the signal that will be displayed
• A hyphen “-” in the ON field or OFF field
within the selected screen.
If any hyphen remains in the ON field or OFF field, the
Select “MAIN” or “SUB” for “PICTURE IN PICTURE
FUNCTION can not be set.
• A hyphen “-” in the FUNCTION field “S BY S1~3”. Only one signal is selected for
A hyphen “-” means last mode (the mode that was last “SINGLE”.
䡵 To set MULTI INPUT Timer2–Timer1–Timer2.
MENU/ENTER button.
the screen.
E-27
4-31
CONFIDENTIAL
Setting the power on mode Enabling/disabling remote control wireless

This function sets the input mode at the time the power is transmission
switched on. This function enables/disables remote control wireless
Example: Setting “VIDEO2” transmission.
Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/ Example: Setting “OFF”
On “PWR. ON MODE” of “OPTION3” menu, select 2), then perform the following operations.
“VIDEO2”. On “IR REMOTE” of “OPTION3” menu, select “OFF”, then
The available sources depend on the settings of input. press the MENU/ENTER button.
TIMER TIMER
PWR. ON MODE : VIDEO2 PWR. ON MODE : LAST
IR REMOTE : ON IR REMOTE : OFF
ID NUMBER : ALL ID NUMBER : ALL
NEXT PAGE NEXT PAGE
䡵 PWR. ON MODE settings 䡵 IR REMOTE settings
LAST: Last mode (the input that was last selected at ON: Enables remote control wireless transmission.
the time the power was switched off). OFF: Disables remote control wireless transmission.
VIDEO1, 2, 3: VIDEO input mode. Set “OFF” to avoid unwanted control from other remote
RGB1, 2, 3: RGB input mode. controls.
DVD2, 3: DVD input mode. Loop Out setting
MULTI: Multi screen mode. When this feature is set to ON, the received signal will be
Follow the procedure used for PROGRAM TIMER. See looped out.
page E-27. Example: Setting “ON”
Enabling/disabling the front panel controls
This function enables/disables the front panel controls.
On “LOOP OUT” of “OPTION3” menu, select “ON”.
OPTION3 3/4
Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/ PREVIOUS PAGE
TIMER
2), then perform the following operations. PWR. ON MODE : LAST
On “CONTROL LOCK” of “OPTION3” menu, select CONTROL LOCK : OFF
IR REMOTE : ON
“ON”, then press the MENU/ENTER button. LOOP OUT : ON
ID NUMBER : ALL
OPTION3 3/4
PREVIOUS PAGE VIDEO WALL
TIMER NEXT PAGE
PWR. ON MODE : LAST SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
CONTROL LOCK : ON
IR REMOTE : ON
LOOP OUT : OFF Information
ID NUMBER
VIDEO WALL
: ALL
NEXT PAGE ON: The received signal will be looped out via PC1
Information OFF: The received signal will not loop out.
䡵 CONTROL LOCK settings * Even if LOOP OUT is ON, signals won’t be sent out if
ON: Disables the buttons on the front panel. POWER is being turned off.
OFF: Enables the buttons on the front panel. 䡵 To connect another display...
* Even when the CONTROL LOCK is set, the POWER See page E-5.
switch will not be locked. 䡵 If the RGB/PC1 signal is present at the time
the power switched on...
* This becomes effective when the on-screen menu goes
out. The RGB/PC1 input will be displayed regardless of the
setting of LOOP OUT.
E-28
4-32
CONFIDENTIAL
ID number setting DIVIDER

When using more than one of these displays, this function Set the 4-25 video wall.
sets ID numbers so that operation of the remote control
does not cause multiple monitors to operate at the same
time. On “DIVIDER” of “VIDEO WALL” menu, select “4”.
Example: Setting “2” VIDEO WALL
DIVIDER : 4
Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/ POSITION
DISP. MODE : SPLIT
2), then perform the following operations. AUTO ID : OFF
IMAGE ADJUST
On “ID NUMBER” of “OPTION3” menu, select “2”. P. ON DELAY : OFF
OPTION3 3/4 PLE LINK : OFF
PREVIOUS PAGE REPEAT TIMER : OFF
TIMER SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
PWR. ON MODE : LAST
CONTROL LOCK : OFF
IR REMOTE : ON Information
LOOP OUT : OFF
ID NUMBER : 2 䡵 DIVIDER settings
VIDEO WALL
NEXT PAGE OFF, 1: 1 Screen (Matrix display function does not
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN work)
* To reset back to ALL 4: 4 Screens (2×2 video wall)
Press the CLEAR/SEAMLESS SW button 9: 9 Screens (3×3 video wall)
Information 25: 25 Screens (5×5 video wall)
䡵 ID NUMBER settings
* When you select 4-25, set the VIDEO WALL
ALL: ID NUMBER will not be set. POSITION.
1 to 256: ID NUMBER will be set.
䡵 When the ID NUMBER have been set VIDEO WALL POSITION
You can also set ID NUMBER for each remote control Set the position of each display.
see the following explanation.
On “VIDEO WALL” menu, select “POSITION”, then press
To set the ID number for the remote control the MENU/ENTER button.
The “VIDEO WALL POSITION” screen appears.
Select “NO. 4” of “POSITION NO.”.
Press the ID SELECT button on the remote control.
VIDEO WALL POSITION
The “ID SELECT” screen appears.
On “ID NUMBER” of “ID SELECT” menu, select “2”. POSITION NO. 4
ID SELECT
POSITION : 1
ID NUMBER : 2
ADJ. EXIT RETURN
Information
䡵 VIDEO WALL POSITION settings
ADJ. EXIT RETURN
* To reset back to ALL 1 Screen: There is no need to set POSITION.

Press the CLEAR/SEAMLESS SW button 4 Screens 9 Screens
Video Wall setting NO. 1 NO. 2
NO. 7 NO. 8 NO. 9
Use this feature to configure a 4-25 video wall. NO. 10 NO. 11 NO. 12
Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/ NO. 4 NO. 3
NO. 13 NO. 14 NO. 15
On “OPTION3” menu, select “VIDEO WALL”, then press 16 Screens 25 Screens
the MENU/ENTER button. NO. 32 NO. 33 NO. 34 NO. 35 NO. 36
NO. 16 NO. 17 NO. 18 NO. 19
The “VIDEO WALL” screen appears. NO. 37 NO. 38 NO. 39 NO. 40 NO. 41
NO. 20 NO. 21 NO. 22 NO. 23
VIDEO WALL NO. 42 NO. 43 NO. 44 NO. 45 NO.46
DIVIDER : 1 NO. 24 NO. 25 NO. 26 NO. 27
NO. 47 NO. 48 NO. 49 NO. 50 NO. 51
POSITION
DISP. MODE : SPLIT
AUTO ID : OFF
IMAGE ADJUST
P. ON DELAY : OFF
PLE LINK : OFF
REPEAT TIMER : OFF
Note: A contingency method of shutting off the electric

power should be used in cases of emergency during video
wall setup.
E-29
4-33
CONFIDENTIAL
DISP. MODE IMAGE ADJUST

Select the screen mode from between two options The position of the image can be adjusted and flickering
(Splitting, Blanking). of the image can be corrected.
Example: Setting “BLANK” Example: Adjusting the vertical position
On “DISP. MODE” of “VIDEO WALL” menu, select On “VIDEO WALL” menu, select “IMAGE ADJUST”, then
“BLANK”. press the MENU/ENTER button.
VIDEO WALL
The “IMAGE ADJUST” screen appears.
DIVIDER : 1 On “V-POSITION” of “IMAGE ADJUST” menu, adjust the
POSITION
DISP. MODE : BLANK position.
AUTO ID : OFF
IMAGE ADJUST
IMAGE ADJUST ASPECT MODE : NORMAL
P. ON DELAY : OFF V-POSITION
PLE LINK : OFF H-POSITION
REPEAT TIMER : OFF V-HEIGHT
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN H-WIDTH
AUTO PICTURE : OFF
FINE PICTURE

SPLIT: Combines enlarged screens and creates multiple Information
screens. 䡵 IMAGE ADJUST settings
BLANK: Corrects misalignment of combined screen These are the same functions as the IMAGE ADJUST
portions and creates multiple screens menu on page E-20.
AUTO ID P. ON DELAY (Power on delay)

This feature automatically sets the ID numbers of multiple Use this function to activate power-on delay.
displays connected to each other. Turn on the AUTO ID before the following operations.
Example: Setting “ON” Example: Setting “ON”
Set the ID number for the No. 1 display on ID NUMBER On “P. ON DELAY” of “VIDEO WALL” menu, select
menu. “ON”.
VIDEO WALL
then press the MENU/ENTER button. DIVIDER : 1
POSITION
AUTO ID DISP. MODE : SPLIT
AUTO ID : ON AUTO ID : OFF
1 2 1 2 3 IMAGE ADJUST
P. ON DELAY : ON
4 3 8 9 4 PLE LINK : OFF
REPEAT TIMER : OFF
7 6 5 SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
WIRED CABLE
CONNECTION TURN
ADJ. EXIT RETURN Information
䡵 P. ON DELAY settings
Information ON: Turns on the main power of each display after a
䡵 AUTO ID settings delay time.
ON: Enables Auto ID function. In the case shown below, OFF: Turns on the main power of all displays at the
display 1 will be set as ID 1, display 2 as ID2, etc. same time.
This can be set only when a 2×2 or 3×3 video wall is (Only for 16 and 25 screens)
selected. MODE1: Turns on the main power of each display
REMOTE
OUT
No.1 No.2
delayed.
No.1 No.2 REMOTE
REMOTE
IN No.4 No.3 REMOTE
No.4 No.3 OUT MODE2: Turns on the main power of each display more
Display 1
IN
Display 2
delayed.
* Once this function has been set to “ON”, POWER ON/
REMOTE
OUT OFF button on the remote control does not function
REMOTE
IN except for the No.1 monitor.
REMOTE
Display 4
IN
Display 3
OFF: Disables Auto ID function. will be turned on one by one automatically.
E-30
4-34
CONFIDENTIAL
PLE LINK REPEAT TIMER

1 DIVIDER : 1
Use this function to set a uniform brightness for each SOURCE : VIDEO1
display. WORK TIME : 00H03M
Turn on the AUTO ID and set the DIVIDER (at 1, 4 or 9) 2 DIVIDER : 4

before the following operations. SOURCE : RGB1
WORK TIME : 00H06M
On “PLE LINK” of “VIDEO WALL” menu, select “ON”,

then press the MENU/ENTER button. Information
VIDEO WALL 䡵 REPEAT TIMER settings
DIVIDER : 1
POSITION DIVIDER: Divide the screen into 1, 4 or 9 sections.
DISP. MODE : SPLIT SOURCE: Set the input mode to be displayed.
AUTO ID : OFF
IMAGE ADJUST WORK TIME: Can be set to up to 4 hours 15 minutes
P. ON DELAY
PLE LINK
:
:
OFF
ON
in units of 1 minute.
REPEAT TIMER : OFF If you set both timers, Timer 1 and Timer 2 run
consecutively.
In the case of the Video wall, timer No.1 can be used to
Information control all the displays simultaneously.
䡵 PLE LINK settings * This becomes effective when the on-screen menu goes
ON: Sets a uniform brightness for each screen in a video out.
wall is selected.
OFF: Sets the individual screen brightness for each
screen in a video wall.
* When this function is set “ON”, connect your plasma
displays with the remote cable (optional) in the order of
the position numbers for the 2×2 video wall. See the
drawing below.
the PLE LINK will automatically turn OFF.
REMOTE
OUT
REMOTE
IN No.4 No.3 REMOTE
No.4 No.3 OUT
IN
Display 1 Display 2
REMOTE
OUT
REMOTE
OUT No.4 No.3 No.4 No.3 IN
REMOTE
IN
Display 4 Display 3
* With the 3×3 video wall, connect the final display to

the first display the same way as with 2×2 video wall.
Note: The remote control can be operated unless the

IR REMOTE is set to “OFF”.
REPEAT TIMER
Use this to set two timers. Each timer can use the
DIVIDER, SOURCE and WORK TIME.
Turn on the AUTO ID and set the DIVIDER (at 1, 4 or 9)
Example:
TIMER2...RGB1 will be displayed for 6 minutes in a
2×2 video wall.
On “REPEAT TIMER” of “VIDEO WALL” menu, select
“ON”, then press the MENU/ENTER button.
The “REPEAT TIMER” screen appears.
Adjust the items.
E-31
4-35
CONFIDENTIAL
Option4 Settings Menu 䡵 ZOOM NAV settings

Erasing the sub screen image when there is OFF: Will not show the entire image on the sub screen.
no input signal S BY S: Will show the entire image on the sub screen
This function automatically erases the black frame of the of side-by-side mode.
sub screen when there is no sub screen input signal. BTM LFT~TOP LFT: Will show the entire image on
This feature is available only when the picuture-in-picuture the sub screen of picture-in-picture mode.
mode is selected. Side-by-Side Picture-in-Picture
Example: Set to “OFF” RGB/PC1 RGB/PC1

On “SUB. P DETECT” of “OPTION4” menu, select
“OFF”.
POINTER button
OPTION4 4/4 or
PREVIOUS PAGE Zoom+/- button
SUB. P DETECT : OFF
ZOOM NAV : BTM LFT
PIC FREEZE : S BY S
SEAMLESS SW : OFF
SELECT1 : —
SELECT2 : —
POINTER button
Information
䡵 SUB. P DETECT Function
* Loss of the input signal means a condition in which the
video signal and the sync signal are not present.
* Under conditions in which the sub screen has
disappeared, the ZOOM NAV, PIC FREEZE, and
Displaying still images in the sub screen
SEAMLESS SW functions will not work. The WIDE
This feature enables display in the sub screen of still images
button will not function either.
captured by pressing the SELECT/FREEZE button.
Example: Setting “PIC FREEZE” to “BTM LFT”
input signal is lost. Set “ADVANCED OSM” to “ON” in the main menu (1/
OFF: Turns off the SUB. P DETECT function. 2), then perform the following operations.
On “PIC FREEZE” of “OPTION4” menu, select “BTM
Displaying the entire image during DIGITAL LFT”.
ZOOM operations
OPTION4 4/4
Use this function to display the entire image within the PREVIOUS PAGE
sub screen together with an enlarged image on the main SUB. P DETECT : AUTO
ZOOM NAV : BTM LFT
screen. PIC FREEZE : BTM LFT
SEAMLESS SW : OFF
Example: Setting “ZOOM NAV” to “S BY S” SELECT1 : —
SELECT2 : —
2), then perform the following operations. SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN

Information
OPTION4 4/4
PREVIOUS PAGE 䡵 PIC FREEZE Function
ZOOM NAV : S BY S
PIC FREEZE : S BY S signals.
SEAMLESS SW : OFF
SELECT1 : — * This feature does not function during split screen mode.
SELECT2 : —
* Digital zoom is not available while this function is
operating.
* A further press of the SELECT/FREEZE button while
Information
䡵 ZOOM NAV Function * Providing a 2-screen display will cancel this function.
* This feature is available only for RGB1 or RGB2 input 䡵 PIC FREEZE settings
signals.
* This feature does not function during split screen mode. S BY S1, 2: The still images captured by pressing the
* This feature does not function while PIC FREEZE is SELECT/FREEZE button will be shown on the sub
operating. screen of side-by-side mode.
* Providing a 2-screen display will cancel this function. BTM LFT~TOP LFT: The still images captured by
E-32 on the sub screen of picture-in-picture mode.
4-36
CONFIDENTIAL
Side-by-Side Picture-in-Picture Advanced OSM Settings Menu

RGB/PC1 RGB/PC1 Setting the menu mode
This allows you to access full menu items.
When P. ON DELAY or PLE LINK is ON, this won’t be
turned OFF.
SELECT/ SELECT/
FREEZE FREEZE On “ADVANCED OSM” of “MAIN MENU”, select “ON”.
button button
MAIN MENU 1/2 MAIN MENU 1/2
PICTURE PICTURE
AUDIO AUDIO
IMAGE ADJUST IMAGE ADJUST
RGB/PC1 RGB/PC1 OPTION1 OPTION1
OPTION2
OPTION3
OPTION4
ADVANCED OSM : OFF ADVANCED OSM : ON
NEXT PAGE NEXT PAGE
SEL. ADJ. EXIT EXIT SEL. ADJ. EXIT EXIT
or Information
S BY S2 䡵 ADVANCED OSM settings
RGB/PC1 RGB/PC1 ON: All of the main menu items are available for
advanced users.
OFF: Some of the main menu items are not available
(e.g. OPTION2, OPTION3 and OPTION4).
Language Settings Menu

Switching the input source quickly Setting the language for the menus
This feature enables quick input selection. The menu display can be set to one of eight languages.
signals. On “MAIN MENU”, select “LANGUAGE”, then press the
Example: Set to switch quickly between RGB1 and MENU/ENTER button.
RGB2. The “LANGUAGE” screen appears.
On “LANGUAGE”, select “ DEUTSCH”, then press the
MENU/ENTER button.
LANGUAGE
On “SEAMLESS SW” of “OPTION4” menu, select “ON”.
LANGUAGE
Select “RGB1” and “RGB2”. : DEUTSCH
OPTION4 4/4
PREVIOUS PAGE
ZOOM NAV : BTM LFT
PIC FREEZE : S BY S
SEAMLESS SW : ON
SELECT1 : RGB1
SELECT2 : RGB2 The “LANGUAGE” is set to “DEUTSCH” and return to the
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN main menu.
* The available sources depend on the settings of input. Information

Information
ENGLISH ........ English ITALIANO ........ Italian
䡵 SEAMLESS SW Function DEUTSCH ....... German SVENSKA ....... Swedish
* This feature will not function for certain input FRANÇAIS ...... French ................... Chinese
combinations. See the table on page E-13. ESPAÑOL ....... Spanish У ............ Russian
* After switching to the selected input, please operate this
function.
* This feature will not function during split screen mode.
* When SEAMLESS SW is first turned on, or when
signals being transmitted are changed, there may be a
slight delay due to signal analysis.
䡵 SEAMLESS SW settings
OFF: Turns off the SEAMLESS SW function.
ON: When the CLEAR/SEAMLESS SW button is
pressed, input signals will switch quickly according to
the setting of SELECT1 and SELECT2.
E-33
4-37
CONFIDENTIAL
Color System Settings Menu

video signals or Y/C input signals.
On the MAIN MENU, select “COLOR SYSTEM”, then press
COLOR SYSTEM
COLOR SYSTEM
: 3.58NTSC
ADJ. EXIT RETURN
Information
䡵 Video signal formats
Different countries use different formats for video
signals. Set to the color system used in your current
country.
France and Russia.
Brazil.
Argentina.

Checking the frequencies, polarities of input
signals, and resolution
of the signals currently being input from a computer, etc.
On “MAIN MENU”, select “SOURCE INFORMATION”,
then press the MENU/ENTER button.
SOURCE INFORMATION
H. FREQ : 48.4KHZ
V. FREQ : 60.0HZ
H. POLARITY : NEG.
V. POLARITY : NEG.
MEMORY : 24
EXIT RETURN

E-34
4-38
CONFIDENTIAL
RGB 1
Connections
5 4 3 2 1
15 14 13 12 11
External equipment
1 Red
3 Blue
4 No connection
5 Ground
6 Red ground
7 Green ground
8 Blue ground
9 No connection
Connector on the plasma monitor side: EXTERNAL 11 No connection
CONTROL connector. 12 Bi-directional DATA (SDA)
Use a crossed (reverse) cable. 13 Horizontal sync or Composite sync
14 Vertical sync
Type of connector: D-Sub 9-pin male 15 Data clock
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
RGB 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(2) Interface RS-232C 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
(4) Data length 8 bits
(5) Parity Odd Pin No. Signal (Digital)
(6) Stop bit 1 bit 1 T.M.D.S Data 2 -
(7) Communication code Hex 2 T.M.D.S Data 2 +
5 No connection
FUNCTION CODE DATA
Power ON 9FH 80H 60H 4EH 00H CDH 6 DDC Clock
Input Switch Video1 (BNC) DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 01H 08H 8 No connection
DVD1/HD1 (RCA) DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 05H 0CH 10 T.M.D.S Data 1 +
RGB3 (DVI) DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 0CH 13H 13 No connection
Audio Mute ON 9FH 80H 60H 3EH 00H BDH 14 +5V Power
OFF 9FH 80H 60H 3FH 00H BEH 15 Ground
Picture Mode NORMAL DFH 80H 60H OAH 01H 01H CBH 16 Hot Plug Detect
THEAT. 1 DFH 80H 60H OAH 01H 02H CCH 17 T.M.D.S Data 0 -
DEFAULT DFH 80H 60H OAH 01H 04H CEH 18 T.M.D.S Data 0 +
BRIGHT DFH 80H 60H OAH 01H 05H CFH 19 T.M.D.S Data 0 Shield
ZOOM DFH 80H 60H 51H 01H 03H 14H 21 No connection
FULL DFH 80H 60H 51H 01H 05H 16H 22 T.M.D.S Clock Shield
14 : 9 DFH 80H 60H 51H 01H 09H 1AH 23 T.M.D.S Clock +
2.35 : 1 DFH 80H 60H 51H 01H 0AH 1BH
24 T.M.D.S Clock -


E-35
4-39
Troubleshooting
performance.
power.

terminal (Wired).
outlet?
or off mode?
centered.
adjust properly.
control is on.
E-36
4-40
CONFIDENTIAL
USER' S MANUAL
PX-50XR4A
Model Information
For the operation of your plasma monitor,
refer to “Operation Manual”.
4-1
CONFIDENTIAL
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read before operating equipment
1. Read these instructions. 17. Tilt/Stability - All televisions must comply with
2. Keep these instructions. recommended international global safety standards for
3. Heed all warnings. tilt and stability properties of its cabinets design.
4. Follow all instructions. • Do not compromise these design standards by
5. Do not use this apparatus near water. applying excessive pull force to the front, or top, of
6. Clean only with a dry cloth. the cabinet which could ultimately overturn the
7. Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in product.
accordance with the manufacturers instructions. • Also, do not endanger yourself, or children, by placing
8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, electronic equipment/toys on the top of the cabinet.
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including Such items could unsuspectingly fall from the top of
amplifiers) that produce heat. the set and cause product damage and/or personal
9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or injury.
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades 18. Wall Mounting - The appliance should be mounted to a
with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug wall only as recommended by the manufacturer.
has two blades and third grounding prong.The wide 19. Power Lines - An outdoor antenna should be located
blade or third prong are provided for your safety. When away from power lines.
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult 20. Outdoor Antenna Grounding - If an outside antenna is
an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. connected to the receiver, be sure the antenna system is
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched grounded so as to provide some protection against
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the voltage surges and built up static charges.
point where they exit from the apparatus. Section 810 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the No. 70- 1984, provides information with respect to proper
manufacturer. grounding of the mats and supporting structure
12. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna-discharge
or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold unit, size of grounding connectors, location of antenna-
with the apparatus.When a cart is used, use discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes and
caution when moving the cart/apparatus requirements for the grounding electrode.
combination to avoid injury from tip-over. 21. Objects and Liquid Entry - Care should be taken so that
13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the
unused for long periods of time. enclosure through openings.
14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing
damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug and that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall
is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen be placed on apparatus.
into apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain
or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been WARNING
dropped.
To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose
15. This product may contain lead or mercury. Disposal of
this apparatus to rain or moisture.
these materials may be regulated due to environmental
considerations.
For disposal or recycling information, please contact your
local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance:
www.eiae.org.
16. Damage Requiring Service - The appliance should be
serviced by qualified service personnel when:
A. The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged;
or
B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into
the appliance; or
C. The appliance has been exposed to rain; or
D. The appliance does not appear to operate normally
or exhibits a marked change in performance; or
E. The appliance has been dropped, or the enclosure
damaged.
2
4-2
CONFIDENTIAL
PRÉCAUTIONS IMPORTANTES DE SÉCURITÉ
A lire avant de faire fonctionner l’appareil
1. Lire ces instructions. 17. Tous les téléviseurs doivent être conformes aux normes
2. Garder ces instructions. inter-nationales de sécurité préconisées pour les
3. Respecter tous les avertissements. propriétés de sta-bilité et d’inclinaison dans la conception
4. Suivre toutes les instructions. des meubles.
5. Ne pas utiliser cet appareil près de l’eau. • Ne pas compromettre ces normes de conception en
6. Nettoyer seulement avec un chiffon sec. tirant excessivement sur le devant ou le haut du
7. Ne pas boucher les ouvertures d’aération. Installer selon meuble, ce qui risque éventuellement de renverser
les instructions du fabricant le produit.
8. Ne pas installer près d’une source de chaleur telle qu’un • De plus, ne pas se mettre en danger, ni mettre les
radiateur, une bouche de chauffage, une cuisinière ou enfants en danger en plaçant du matériel électronique
d’autre matériel (y compris des amplificateurs) qui ou des jouets sur le meuble. De tels articles pourraient
produit de la chaleur. tomber malencon-treusement du haut du téléviseur
9. Ne pas contourner la sécurité fournie par la fiche et endommager le produit et/ou blesser des gens.
polarisée ou la fiche de mise à la terre. Une fiche polarisée 18. Montage au mur ou au plafond - Il faut monter l’appareil
possède deux lames dont une plus large que l’autre. Une à un mur ou plafond uniquement en suivant les
fiche de mise à la terre possède deux lames et une broche recommandations du fabricant.
de mise à la terre. La lame large ou la broche est fournie 19. Lignes de transmission - Il faut situer une antenne
pour votre sécurité. Lorsque la fiche fournie ne va pas extérieure à l’écart des lignes de transmission
dans la prise, demander à un électricien de remplacer la d’électricité.
prise démodée. 20. Mise à terre de l’antenne extérieure - Si une antenne
10. Protéger le cordon d’alimentation en ne pas marchant extérieure est reliée au récepteur, assurez-vous que le
dessous ni le coinçant, en particulier près des fiches, système d’antenne est bien mis à la terre pour protéger
des prises et de l’endroit où le cordon rejoint de l’appareil. contre les sauts de tension et l’accumulation des charges
11. N’utiliser que des accessoires préconisés par le fabricant. d’électricité statique.
12. Utiliser seulement avec un chariot, meuble, La section 810 du National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA No.
trépied, support ou table spécifié par le 70-1984, fournit des renseignements sur la mise à la terre
fabricant ou vendu avec l’appareil. En utilisant du mât et de sa structure de soutient, du fil d’entrée à un
un chariot, au moment de déplacer le chariot/ appareil de décharge/antenne, sur la grosseur des
téléviseur, bien faire attention pour éviter des conducteurs de mise à terre, sur l’emplacement d’un
blessures dues au renversement éventuel. appareil de décharge/antenne, sur la mise à la terre vers
13. Débrancher cet appareil pendant des orages ou lorsqu’il les électrodes de terre, ainsi que sur les
ne sera pas utilisé pendant longtemps. recommandations sur les électrodes de terre.
14. Consulter un technicien agréé de service après vente 21. Entrée des objets et des liquides - Evitez de laisser
pour toute réparation. Le service après vente est tomber des objets ou des liquides par les ouverture de
nécessaire lorsque l’appareil a été endommagé de l’enclos.
quelque façon que ce soit, telle que lorsque le cordon
d’alimentation ou la fiche est endommagé, du liquide Ne pas exposer l’appareil aux projections ou aux écoulement
renversé, un objet tombé dans l’appareil, l’exposition d’eau et ne jamais poser un récipient contenant du liquide,
de l’appareil à la pluie ou l’humidité, lorsque l’appareil un vase par exemple, sur l’appareil.
ne fonc-tionne pas normalement ou lorsqu’on a laissé
tomber l’appareil. AVERTISSMENT
15. Ce produit peut contenir un plomb ou du mercure. La
Pour réduire les risques d’incendie ou d’électrocution, ne
mise à rebut de ces matières pourrait être réglementée
jamais exposer cet appareil à la pluie ou à l’humidité.
pour des raisons de protection de l’environnement. Pour
s’informer sur la mise à rebut ou le recyclage, veuillez
se mettre en contact avec les autorités locales ou
l’Electronic Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org.
16. Dommages qu’il faut faire réparer - Il faut faire réparer
l’appareil par un technicien qualifié lorsque:
A. Le cordon d’alimentation en électricité ou la fiche a
été endommagé; ou
B. On a laissé tomber des objets ou du liquide dans
l’appareil;
C. On a exposé l’appareil a la pluie; ou
D. L’appareil ne paraît pas marcher normalement ou
présente de grands changements d’opération; ou
E. On a laissé tomber l’appareil ou endommager le
coffret.
3
4-3
CONFIDENTIAL
Warning NOTE:
Not for use in a computer room as defined in the Standard
for the Protection of Electronic Computer/ Data Processing
Equipment ANSI/NFPA 75.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with ferrite cores. If you do not do this, this monitor will not
the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of conform to mandatory FCC standards.
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide Attaching the ferrite cores:
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a Set the ferrite cores on both ends of the DVI cable (not
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and supplied), and both ends of the power cable (supplied).
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and Close the lid tightly until the clamps click.
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful Use the band to fasten the ferrite core (supplied) to the
interference to radio communications. However, there is no DVI cable.
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference DVI cable (not supplied)
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by band band Connector
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to
try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures: core (small) core (small)
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver. Power cable (supplied)
core (large)
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different
from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician
for help. core (large)
Caution
This model is for use with the following optional accessories.
Use with other optional accessories is capable of resulting in
instability causing possible injury.
Manufacturer’s name: NEC Plasma Display Corporation

Speakers: PX-50SP1U, PX-50SP1U/S
Stand: PX-ST1U, PX-ST1U/S, PX-50XM1U-ST
Please contact NEC Solutions (America), Inc. for approved

optional accessories.
4
4-4
CONFIDENTIAL
Avertissement Attention
Ne pas utiliser dans une salle d’ordinateurs telle que définie Cet modèle est fait pour être utilisé avec les accessoires
dans la Norme pour la protection des ordinateurs optionnels suivants. Toute utilisation avec d’autres
électroniques/appareils de traitement des données ANSI/ accessoires optionnels peut entraîner une instabilité pouvant
NFPA75. causer des blessures.
DOC avis de conformation Nom du fabricant: NEC Plasma Display Corporation

Cet appareil numérigue de la Classe B respecte toutes les Enceintes: PX-50SP1U, PX-50SP1U/S
Support: PX-ST1U, PX-ST1U/S, PX-50XM1U-ST
exigences du Réglement sur le Matériel Brouilleur du Canada.
Veuillez contacter NEC Solutions (America), Inc. pour
REMARQUE: connaître les accessoires optionnels approuvés par NEC.
Pour raccorder un ordinateur à ce moniteur, procéder à
l’aide d’un câble RGB à âme de ferrite aux deux
extrémités. Sur les câbles DVI et les câbles d’alimentation
électrique, fixer les âmes de ferrite fournies aux extrémités.
Si vous ne le faîtes, le moniteur ne sera pas en
conformité avec les exigences des standards FCC.
Fixation des noyaux en ferrite.
Monter les tores en ferrite aux deux extrêmités du câble
DVI (non fourni) et aux deux extrêmités du câble
d’alimentation électrique (fourni).
Fermez doucement le couvercle jusqu’à ce que les crans
se clipsent.
Fixer le tore en ferrite (fourni) au câble DVI à l’aide d’un
collier.
Câble DVI (non fourni) Connecteur
Collier Collier
noyau (petit) noyau (petit)
Câble d'alimentation
électrique (fourni) noyau (grande)
noyau (grande)
5
4-5
CONFIDENTIAL
Specifications
Screen Size 43.5"(H)⳯24.5"(V) inches
1106(H)⳯622(V) mm 1.5"
diagonal 50" 48.1" (1222) (38) 2.3"
(58)
Aspect Ratio 16 : 9
Resolution 1365(H)⳯768(V) pixels
Pixel Pitch 0.032"(H)⳯0.032"(V) inches 43.5" (1106)
0.81(H)⳯0.81(V) mm
Signals
24.5" (622)
30" (736)
(automatic : step scan) 3.8"
Input Signals RGB, NTSC (3.58/4.43), PAL (B,G,M,N), (96)
PAL60, SECAM, HD*1 , DVD*1 , DTV*1 Bezel color is silver. Units are in inch
Input Terminals (mm)
Visual 1 (Analog) mini D-sub 15-pin⳯1 notice.
Visual 2 (Analog) BNC (R, G, B, H/CS, V)⳯1*2
Visual 3 (Digital) DVI-D 24-pin⳯1*3 *1 HD/DVD/DTV input signals supported on this system
480P (60 Hz) 480I (60 Hz) 525P (60 Hz)
Video
525I (60 Hz) 576P (50 Hz) 576I (50 Hz)
Visual 1 BNC⳯1
625P (50 Hz) 625I (50 Hz) 720P (60 Hz)
Visual 2 RCA-pin⳯1
1035I (60 Hz) 1080I (50 Hz) 1080I (60 Hz)
Visual 3 S-Video: DIN 4-pin⳯1
*2 The 5-BNC connectors are used as RGB/PC2 and HD/DVD2 input.
DVD/HD/DTV Select one of them under “BNC INPUT”.
Visual 1 RCA-pin (Y, PB[CB], PR[CR])⳯1*1 *3 Compatible with HDCP.
Visual 2 BNC (Y, PB[CB], PR[CR])⳯1*1, *2 Supported Signals
Visual 3 DVI-D 24-pin⳯1*3 • 640ⴒ480P @ 59.94/60Hz • 1920ⴒ1080I @ 50Hz
Audio Stereo RCA⳯3 (Selectable) • 1280ⴒ720P @ 59.94/60Hz • 720ⴒ576P @ 50Hz
External Control D-sub 9-pin⳯1 (RS-232C) • 1920ⴒ1080I @ 59.94/60Hz • 1440 (720)ⴒ576P @ 50Hz
Sound output 9W+9W at 6 ohm • 720ⴒ480P @ 59.94/60Hz
Power Supply AC100-240V 50/60Hz • 1440 (720)ⴒ480I @ 59.94/60Hz
Note: In some cases a signal on the plasma monitor may not be displayed
Current Rating 7.6A (maximum)
properly. The problem may be an inconsistency with standards from
Power Consumption 435W (typical) the source equipment (DVD, Set-top box, etc...). If you do experience
Dimensions 48.1 (W)⳯30 (H)⳯3.8 (D) inches such a problem please contact NEC Solutions (America), Inc. and also
1222 (W)⳯736 (H)⳯96(D) mm the manufacturer of the source equipment.
Weight 98.1 lbs / 44.5 kg (without stand)
Environmental Considerations
Operating Temperature 0°C to 40°C / 32°F to 104°F
Storage Temperature -10°C to 50°C / 14°F to 122°F
Front Panel User Controls Power on/off, Input source select,
Volume up/down/ OSM control
Remote Control Functions Power on/off, Input source select, OSM
*English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Swedish,
control,Volume up/down, Cursor (UP,
Chinese, Russian
DOWN,LEFT, RIGHT), Zoom up/down,
Split screen buttons Other Features Motion compensated 3D Scan Converter (NTSC,
PAL, 480I, 576I, 525I, 625I, 1035I, 1080I), 2-3
OSM Functions PICTURE (PICTURE MEMORY/CONTRAST/
pull down Converter (NTSC, 480I, 525I, 1035I,
BRIGHTNESS/SHARPNESS/COLOR/TINT/NR/
1080I (60Hz)), 2-2 pull down Converter (PAL,
COLOR TEMP./WHITE BALANCE/GAMMA/
576I, 625I, NTSC, 480I, 525I), Digital Zoom
LOW TONE/SET UP LEVEL/COLOR TUNE/
Function (100-900% Selectable), Self Diagnosis,
CINEMA MODE/PICTURE MODE), AUDIO
Image Burn reduction tools (PEAK BRIGHT,
(BASS/TREBLE/BALANCE/AUDIO INPUT1/
INVERSE, WHITE, ORBITER, SCREEN
AUDIO INPUT2/AUDIO INPUT3), IMAGE
WIPER), Color Temperature select (high/middle/
ADJUST (ASPECT MODE/V-POSITION/H-
middle low/low, user has 4 memories), Auto
POSITION/V-HEIGHT/H-WIDTH/AUTO
Picture, Input Skip, Color Tune, Low Tone (3
PICTURE/FINE PICTURE/PICTURE ADJ.),
mode), Gamma Correction (4 mode), Plug and
SET UP (LANGUAGE*/BNC INPUT/D-SUB
play (DDC1, DDC2b, RGB3: DDC2b only),
INPUT/HD SELECT/RGB SELECT/DVI SET UP/
Split screen operations
COLOR SYSTEM/BACK GROUND/GRAY
LEVEL/S1/S2/DISPLAY OSM/OSM ADJ./ALL Accessories Remote control with two AAA batteries, Power
RESET), FUNCTION (POWER MGT./INPUT cord, Manuals, Safety metal fittings, Ferrite cores,
SKIP/SUB. P DETECT/ZOOM NAV/PICTURE Bands, Cable clamps, HDMI-DVI cable
FREEZE/PDP SAVER [PEAK BRIGHT / Regulations UL Approved (UL 60950-1 and UL65000,
ORBITER / INVERSE/WHITE / SCREEN WIPER CAN/CSA C22.2 No.60950-1 and CAN/CSA-
/ SOFT FOCUS / OSM ORBITER / OSM E60065-00)
CONTRAST]/CLOSED CAPTION/CAPTION DOC Canada requirements
CONT), SIGNAL INFO. Meets FCC Class B requirements
6
4-6
CONFIDENTIAL

• When the screen mode is NORMAL, each signal is converted to a 1024 dots⳯768 lines signal. (Except for *2, 3, 4)
• When the screen mode is FULL, each signal is converted to a 1365 dots⳯768 lines signal. (Except for *3)
Model Dots ⳯ lines
640⳯400 70.1 31.5 NEG NEG YES YES YES*2 YES YES –– NO 4
640⳯480 59.9 31.5 NEG NEG YES YES YES YES YES STILL YES 5
848⳯480 60.0 31.0 POS POS YES YES –– YES YES WIDE2 YES 19
852⳯480*1 60.0 31.7 NEG NEG YES YES –– YES YES WIDE1 YES 17
800⳯600 56.3 35.2 POS POS YES YES YES YES YES STILL YES 11
computers 1024⳯768 60.0 48.4 NEG NEG YES YES YES*3 –– YES STILL YES 24
1152⳯864 75.0 67.5 POS POS YES YES YES –– YES STILL YES 51
1280⳯768 56.2 45.1 POS POS YES YES –– –– YES WIDE1 NO 52
1280⳯768*9 69.8 56.0 NEG POS YES YES –– –– YES WIDE1 YES 66
1360⳯765 60.0 47.7 POS POS YES YES –– – – YES*3 WIDE1 NO 22
1360⳯768 60.0 47.7 POS POS YES YES –– – – YES*3 WIDE1 YES 22
1376⳯768 59.9 48.3 NEG POS YES YES –– –– YES WIDE2 YES 53
1280⳯1024 60.0 64.0 POS POS YES YES YES*4 –– YES STILL YES 29
1600⳯1200 60.0 75.0 POS POS YES YES YES –– YES –– YES 54
1920⳯1200*9 60.0 74.6 NEG NEG YES YES –– –– YES WIDE2 –– 81
1920⳯1200RB*9 60.0 74.0 NEG NEG YES YES –– –– YES WIDE3 YES 88
Apple 640⳯480 66.7 35.0 Sync on G Sync on G –– –– YES YES YES –– NO 6
Macintosh*6 *8 832⳯624 74.6 49.7 Sync on G Sync on G –– –– YES YES YES –– NO 16
1024⳯768 74.9 60.2 Sync on G Sync on G –– –– YES*3 –– YES WIDE1 NO 28
1152⳯870 75.1 68.7 Sync on G Sync on G –– –– YES –– YES WIDE1 NO 39
1440⳯900*9 60.0 56.0 NEG NEG YES YES –– –– YES –– YES 89
Work Station 1280⳯1024 60.0 64.6 NEG NEG YES YES YES*4 –– YES –– YES 29
Work Station(HP)*8 1280⳯1024 72.0 78.1 –– –– –– –– YES*4 –– YES –– YES 59
Work Station 1152⳯900 66.0 61.8 C Sync C Sync –– –– YES –– YES –– YES 60
1280⳯1024 76.1 81.1 C Sync C Sync –– –– YES*4 –– YES –– YES 30
Work Station 1024⳯768 60.0 49.7 –– –– –– –– YES*3 –– YES –– YES 62
(SGI) 1280⳯1024 60.0 63.9 –– –– –– –– YES*4 –– YES –– YES 29
IDC-3000G
PAL625P 768⳯576 50.0 31.4 NEG NEG YES YES YES*7 –– YES*7 –– NO 31
NTSC525P 640⳯480 59.9 31.5 NEG NEG YES YES YES*7 –– YES*7 MOTION NO 32
7
4-7
CONFIDENTIAL
*1 Only when using a graphic accelerator board that is capable of displaying 852⳯480.
*2 This signal is converted to a 1024 dots ⳯ 640 lines signal.
*3 The picture is displayed in the original resolution.
*4 The aspect ratio is 5:4. This signal is converted to a 960 dots⳯768 lines signal.
NOTE:
• While the input signals comply with the resolution listed in the table above, you may have to adjust the position and size of the picture or
the fine picture because of errors in synchronization of your computer.
• When a 1280 dots ⳯ 1024 lines signal or 1600 dots ⳯ 1200 lines signal is input to the monitor, the picture will be compressed.
• This monitor has a resolution of 1365 dots ⳯ 768 lines. It is recommended that the input signal should be XGA, wide XGA, or equivalent.

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions. (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
U.S. Responsible Party: NEC SOLUTIONS (AMERICA), INC.

Address: 1250 N. Arlington Heights Road, Suite 400
Tel. No.: 800-836-0655
Type of Product: Plasma Display

Equipment Classification: Class B Peripheral
Models: PX-50XR4A
We hereby declare that the equipment specified above
conforms to the technical standards as specified in the FCC Rules.

NEC and the NEC logo are registered trademarks of
NEC Corporation
Printed in Japan
7S801421
8
4-8
CONFIDENTIAL
Operation Manual
For the specifications of your plasma monitor,

refer to “Model Information”.
4-9
Precautions 2. Do not use this unit’s polarized plug with extension cords
Please read this manual carefully before using your plasma or outlets unless the prongs can be completely inserted.
monitor and keep the manual handy for future reference. 3. Do not expose the unit to water or moisture.
4. Avoid damage to the power cord, and do not attempt to
modify the power cord.
CAUTION 5. Unplug the power cord during electrical storms or if
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK the unit will not be used over a long period.
DO NOT OPEN 6. Do not open the cabinet which has potentially dangerous
high voltage components inside. If the unit is damaged in
CAUTION:TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC this way the warranty will be void. Moreover, there is a
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER. NO serious risk of electric shock.
USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. 7. Do not attempt to service or repair the unit. The
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED manufacturer is not liable for any bodily harm or damage
SERVICE PERSONNEL. caused if unqualified persons attempt service or open
the back cover. Refer all service to authorized Service
This symbol warns the user that uninsulated Centers.
voltage within the unit may have sufficient
magnitude to cause electric shock. To avoid damage and prolong operating life:
Therefore, it is dangerous to make any kind 1. Use only with 100-240V 50/60Hz AC power supply.
of contact with any part inside of this unit. Continued operation at line voltages greater than 100-
This symbol alerts the user that important 240 Volts AC will shorten the life of the unit, and might
literature concerning the operation and even cause a fire hazard.
maintenance of this unit has been included. 2. Handle the unit carefully when installing it and do not
Therefore, it should be read carefully in drop.
order to avoid any problems. 3. Set the unit away from heat, excessive dust, and direct
sunlight.
4. Protect the inside of the unit from liquids and small
metal objects. In case of accident, unplug the power
WARNING cord and have it serviced by an authorized Service
TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARDS, DO NOT EXPOSE Center.
THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. ALSO DO NOT USE
5. Do not hit or scratch the panel surface as this causes
THIS UNIT’S POLARIZED PLUG WITH AN EXTENSION CORD
RECEPTACLE OR OTHER OUTLETS, UNLESS THE
flaws on the surface of the screen.
PRONGS CAN BE FULLY INSERTED. REFRAIN FROM 6. For correct installation and mounting it is strongly
OPENING THE CABINET AS THERE ARE HIGH-VOLTAGE recommended to use a trained, authorized dealer.
COMPONENTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED 7. As is the case with any phosphor-based display (like a
SERVICE PERSONNEL. CRT monitor, for example) light output will gradually
decrease over the life of a Plasma Display Panel.
Warnings and Safety Precaution 8. To avoid sulfurization it is strongly recommended not to
This plasma monitor is designed and place the unit in a dressing room in a public bath or hot
manufactured to provide long, trouble-free service. spring bath.
No maintenance other than cleaning is required. 9. Do not use in a moving vehicle, as the unit could drop or
Please see the section “Plasma monitor cleaning topple over and cause injuries.
procedure” on the next page. 10. Do not place the unit on its side, upside-down or with the
The plasma display panel consists of fine picture screen facing up or down, to avoid combustion or electric
elements (cells) with more than 99.99 percent active shock.
cells. There may be some cells that do not produce
light or remain lit. Plasma monitor cleaning procedure:
For operating safety and to avoid damage to the unit, 1. Use a soft dry cloth to clean the front panel and bezel
read carefully and observe the following instructions. area. Never use solvents such as alcohol or thinner to
To avoid shock and fire hazards: clean these surfaces.
2. Clean plasma ventilation areas with a vacuum cleaner
1. Provide adequate space for ventilation to avoid internal with a soft brush nozzle attachment.
heat build-up. Do not cover rear vents or install the unit 3. To ensure proper ventilation, cleaning of the ventilation
in a closed cabinet or shelves. areas must be carried out monthly. More frequent cleaning
If you install the unit in an enclosure, make sure there may be necessary depending on the environment in which
is adequate space at the top of the unit to allow hot air the plasma monitor is installed.
to rise and escape. If the monitor becomes too hot, the
overheat protector will be activated and the monitor will Recommendations to avoid or minimize phosphor burn-in:
be turned off. If this happens, turn off the power to the Like all phosphor-based display devices and all other gas
monitor and unplug the power cord. If the room where plasma displays, plasma monitors can be susceptible to
the monitor is installed is particularly hot, move the phosphor burn under certain circumstances. Certain
monitor to a cooler location, and wait for 60 minutes to operating conditions, such as the continuous display of a
cool the monitor. If the problem persists, contact your static image over a prolonged period of time, can result in
dealer for service. phosphor burn if proper precautions are not taken. To protect
2
4-10
CONFIDENTIAL
your investment in this plasma monitor, please adhere to the * Lower the Brightness and Contrast levels as much as
following guidelines and recommendations for minimizing possible without impairing image readability.
the occurrence of image burn: * Display an image with many colors and color gradations
(i.e. photographic or photo-realistic images).
* Always enable and use your computer’s screen saver * Create image content with minimal contrast between light
function during use with a computer input source. and dark areas, for example white characters on black
* Display a moving image whenever possible. backgrounds. Use complementary or pastel color whenever
* Change the position of the menu display from time to time. possible.
* Always power down the monitor when you are finished * Avoid displaying images with few colors and distinct,
using it. sharply defined borders between colors.
If the plasma monitor is in long term use or continuous * Note: Burn-in is not covered by the warranty.
operation take the following measures to reduce the
likelihood of phosphor burn: Contact your dealer for other recommended procedures that
will best suit your particular application needs.
Précautions Mises en garde et précautions de
Veuillez lire avec attention ce manuel avant d’utiliser le sécurité
moniteur à plasma et le conserver accessible pour s’y référer Ce moniteur à plasma a été conçu et fabriqué pour
ultérieurement. une utilisation fiable et durable. Il ne nécessite aucun
entretien en dehors du nettoyage. Voir la section
“Méthode de nettoyage du moniteur à plasma” plus loin.
ATTENTION Le panneau à affichage plasma est constitué de fines
RISQUE D’ELECTROCUTION particules d’images (cellules) dont plus de 99,99%sont
NE PAS OUVRIR actives. Certaines d’entre elles ne produisent pas de
lumière ou restent allumées.
MISE EN GARDE: AFIN DE REDUIRE LES RISQUES Pour des raisons de sécurité et pour éviter
D’ELECTRO-CUTION, NE PAS d’endommager l’appareil, lire attentivement les
DEPOSER LE COUVERCLE, IL N’Y A instructions suivantes.
AUCUNE PIECE UTILISABLE A
L’INTERIEUR DE CET APPAREIL. NE Pour éviter les risques d’éléctrocution et d’incendie:
CONFIER LES TRAVAUX D’ENTRETIEN 1. Laisser suffisament d’espace autour de l’appareil pour
QU’A UN PERSONNEL QUALIFIE. la ventilation et éviter toute augmentation excessive de
la température interne. Ne pas couvrir les évents ou
Ce symbole a pour but de prévenir l’utilisateur
de la présence d’une tension dangereuse, non l’installer dans un endroit trop exigu.
isolée se trouvant à l’intérieur de l’appareil. Si vous installez l’appareil dans un espace clos,
Elle est d’une intensité suffisante pour assurezvous qu’il y ait suffisamment d’espace au dessus
constituer un risque d’électrocution. Eviter le pour permettre à l’air chaud de s’élever et de s’évacuer.
contact avec les pièces à l’intérieur de cet Si la température du moniteur devient excessive, la
appareil. protection contre les surchauffes entrera en action et
coupera l’alimentation. Dans ce cas, éteindre l’appareil
Ce symbole a pour but de prévenir l’utilisateur et débrancher le câble d’alimentation. Si la température
de la présence d’importantes instructions de la pièce dans laquelle se trouve le moniteur est
concernant l’entretien et le fonctionnement de particulièrement élevée, déplacer celui-ci dans un endroit
cet appareil. Par conséquent, elles doivent être plus frais et attendre environ 60 minutes qu’il refroidisse.
lues attentivement afin d’éviter des problèmes. Si le problème persiste, prendre contact avec votre
revendeur.
2. Ne pas raccorder la prise d’alimentation polarisée de ce
périphérique à une rallonge ou une prise murale si les
AVERTISSEMENT
AFIN DE REDUIRE LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE OU fiches ne peuvent pas être complètement insérées.
D’ELECTROCUTION, NE PAS EXPOSER CET APPAREIL 3. Ne pas exposer à L’eau ou à l’humidité.
A LA PLUIE OU A L’HUMIDITE. AUSSI, NE PAS UTILISER 4. Eviter d’endommager le cordon d’alimentation, et ne pas
LA FICHE POLARISEE AVEC UN PROLONGATEUR OU modifier le cordon d’alimentation.
UNE AUTRE PRISE DE COURANT SAUF SI CES LAMES 5. Débrancher le câble d’alimentation électrique pendant les
PEUVENT ETRE INSEREES A FOND. NE PAS OUVRIR
LE COFFRET, DES COMPOSANTS HAUTE TENSION SE orages ou les longues périodes d’inactivité.
TROUVENT A L’INTERIEUR. LAISSER A UN PERSONNEL 6. Ne pas ouvrir le coffret. Des composants de haute
QUALIFIE LE SOIN DE REPARER CET APPAREIL. tension se trouvent à l’intérieur. Si l’appareil est
endommagé de cette manière, la garantie devient
caduque. De plus, il y a risque d’électrocution.
3 7. Ne pas essayer d’intervenir ou de réparer l’appareil. Le
4-11
CONFIDENTIAL
fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de blessure • Assurez-vous de mettre en marche et d’utliser
corporelle ou de dégâts matériels résultant d’une opération l’économisateur d’écran chaque fois que c’est possible
d’entretien quelconque effectuée par des personnes non lorsque vous l’utilisez avec une source d’entrée
qualifiées ou résultant de l’ouverture du couvercle arrière. d’ordinateur.
S’adresser aux services après-vente autorisés. • Affichez une image en mouvement aussi souvent que
possible.
Pour éviter des dommages et prolonger la durée de • Changer la position de l’affichage de menu de temps à autre.
service de l’appareil: • Coupez toujours l’alimentation lorsque vous avez terminé
1. N’utiliser qu’une source d’alimentation de 100-240 V d’utiliser la moniteur.
50/60 Hz CA. Le fait d’utiliser l’appareil en continu à
des tensions de ligne supérieures à 100-240 Volts CA Si le moniteur est en usage continu ou longue durée, prenez
réduit sa durée de vie et risque de provoquer un incendie. les mesures suivantes afin d’éviter l’occurence le brûlage
2. Manipuler l’appareil avec soin pendant son du luminophore:
déplacement et ne pas le faire tomber.
3. Eloigner l’appareil des endroits chauds, très poussiéreux • Abaissez le niveau de l’image (contraste, luminosité)
et exposés en plein soleil. autant que possible, sans faire perdre la lisibilité de
4. Eviter que des liquides et des petits objets métalliques l’image.
pénètrent à l’intérieur de l’appareil. En cas d’incident de • Affichez une image avec de nombreuses couleurs et
ce genre, débrancher le câble d’alimentation électrique graduations de couleur (par ex. des images
et confier le moniteur à un service après-vente agréé. photographiques ou photo-réalistes).
5. Ne pas frapper ou rayer la surface de la écran plasma, • Créez un contenu d’image avec un contraste minimal
car des défauts risquent de se produire sur la surface entre les zones sombres et les zones claires, par exemple,
de la écran plasma. des caractères blancs sur un fond noir. Utilisez des
6. Pour un montage et une installation correcte, il est couleurs complémentaires ou pastels le plus souvent
fortement recommandé de faire appel à un revendeur possible.
agréé et qualifié. • Évitez d’afficher des images avec peu de couleurs et des
7. Comme c’est le cas pour tout affichage à base de limites nettes et clairement définies entre les couleurs.
phosphore (comme un moniteur CRT, par exemple), la
puissance de lumière baisse graduellement au cours de * Remarque: Le brûlage de l’écran n’est pas couvert
la vie du Panneau d’Affichage à Plasma. par la garantie.
8. Pour éviter tout risque de sulfuration, il est fortement
conseillé de ne pas installer l’appareil dans un vestiaire, Contactez un revendeur agréé ou un revendeur de marque
un bain public ou un bain de source thermale. pour d'autres procédures qui conviendront le mieux à vos
9. Ne pas utiliser dans un véhicule en marche car l’unité besoins particuliers.
pourrait tomber ou glisser et provoquer des blessures.
10. Pour éviter l ‘inflammation ou les chocs électriques, ne
pas placer l’unité sur la tranche, à l’envers ou avec l’écran
vers le bas ou vers le haut.
Méthode de nettoyage du moniteur à plasma:

1. Nettoyer le panneau avant et le cadre en procédant à l’aide
d’un chiffon doux et sec. Ne jamais utiliser de solvents
du type alcool ou diluant pour le nettoyage de ces surfaces.
2. Nettoyer les prises d’aération du plasma en procédant à
l’aide d’une brosse à poils doux fixée à un aspirateur.
3. Pour garantir la bonne ventilation du moniteur, nettoyer
les prises d’air tous les mois. Un nettoyage plus fréquent
peut s’avérer nécessaire selon les conditions
environnantes dans lesquelles le moniteur à plasma est
utilisé.
Pour éviter les risques de brûlage du luminophore, les

mesures suivantes sont recommandées:
Comme tous les périphériques d’affichage à base luminophore
et tous les autres affichages gaz plasma, les moniteurs plasma
peuvent être sujets au brûlage du luminophore dans certaines
circonstances. Certaines conditions d’utilisation, telles que
l’affichage continu d’une image statique pour une durée
prolongée, peuvent causer le brûlage du luminophore si
aucune précaution n’est prise. Pour protéger votre
investissement dans ce moniteur à plasma, veuillez suivre
les directives et les conseils suivantes pour minimiser
l’occurence le marquage de l’écran:
4
4-12
CONFIDENTIAL
Contents
Installation ...................................................... 6 Setting the background color when no signal is being
Ventilation Requirements for enclosure mounting .......... 6 input ........................................................................ 24
How to use the safety metal fittings and the screws for Setting the gray level for the sides of the screen ......... 25
safety metal fittings ................................................ 6 Setting the screen size for S1/S2 video input .............. 25
Cable Management .................................................. 7 Turning on/off the menu display ................................ 25
How to use the remote control .................................... 7 Setting the position of the menu ................................. 25
Battery Installation and Replacement ........................... 7 Resetting to the default values .................................... 25
Operating Range .......................................................... 7 Function Settings Menu ........................................... 26
Handling the remote control ......................................... 7 Setting the power management for computer images ..... 26
POWER/STANDBY indicator ................................... 26
Part Names and Function .................................. 8 Setting the Input Skip ................................................. 26
Front View .............................................................. 8 Erasing the sub screen image when there is no input
Rear View/ Terminal Board ....................................... 9 signal ....................................................................... 26
Remote Control ...................................................... 10 Displaying the entire image during DIGITAL ZOOM
Basic Operations ............................................. 11 operations ................................................................ 27
POWER ................................................................ 11 Displaying still images in the sub screen .................... 27
To turn the unit ON and OFF: .................................... 11 Reducing burn-in of the screen .................................. 27
VOLUME .............................................................. 11 Setting Closed Caption .............................................. 29
To adjust the sound volume: ....................................... 11 Reducing the brightness of Closed Caption ................ 29
MUTE ................................................................... 11 Signal Information Menu ......................................... 29
To mute the audio: ..................................................... 11 Checking the frequencies, polarities of input signals,
DISPLAY ................................................................ 11 and resolution .......................................................... 29
To check the settings: ................................................. 11 External Control ............................................. 30
DIGITAL ZOOM ..................................................... 11 Application ........................................................... 30
OFF TIMER ............................................................ 11 Connections .......................................................... 30
To set the off timer: .................................................... 11 Type of connector: D-Sub 9-pin male ........................ 30
To check the remaining time: ..................................... 11 Communication Parameters ..................................... 30
To cancel the off timer: .............................................. 11 External Control Codes (Reference) .......................... 30
WIDE Operations ............................................. 12 Pin Assignments ............................................. 30
Wide Screen Operation (manual) ............................ 12 mini D-Sub 15-pin connector (Analog) ..................... 30
When viewing videos or digital video discs ............... 12 DVI-D 24-pin connector (Digital) .............................. 30
Wide Screen Operation with Computer Signals ......... 13
Troubleshooting .............................................. 31
SPLIT SCREEN Operations ................................. 14
Showing a couple of pictures on the screen at the
same time .......................................................... 14
Operations in the Side-by-side mode .......................... 14 Contents of the Package
Operations in the Picture-in-picture mode .................. 15
Selecting the input signals to be displayed ................. 15
䡺 Plasma monitor
Zooming up pictures .................................................. 15 䡺 Power cord
Adjusting the OSM controls ....................................... 15
䡺 Remote control with two AAA Batteries
OSM (On Screen Menu) Controls ....................... 16
Menu Operations ................................................... 16 䡺 Manuals (Model Information and Operation)
Menu Tree ............................................................. 17
Picture Settings Menu .............................................. 19 䡺 Safety metal fittings*
Storing picture settings ............................................... 19 䡺 Ferrite cores, bands
Adjusting the picture .................................................. 19
Reducing noise in the picture ..................................... 19 䡺 Cable clamps
Setting the color temperature ..................................... 20
Adjusting the color to the desired level ...................... 20 䡺 HDMI-DVI cable
Changing the Gamma Curve ...................................... 20 * Contents will differ according to the model.
Making the Low Tone adjustments ............................ 20
Adjusting the pedestal level (black level) ................... 21 * These are fittings for fastening the unit to a wall to prevent
Adjusting the colors ................................................... 21 tipping due to external shock when using the stand
Setting the picture to suit the movie ........................... 21 (optional). Fasten the safety fittings to the holes in the
Setting the picture mode according to the brightness of
the room .................................................................. 21
back of the monitor using the safety fitting mount screws
Audio Settings Menu .............................................. 22 (see page 6).
Adjusting the treble, bass and left/right balance and
audio input select ..................................................... 22 Options
Setting the allocation of the audio connectors ............ 22 • Wall mount unit
Image Adjust Settings Menu .................................... 22 • Ceiling mount unit
Adjusting the Position, Size, Fine Picture, Picture Adj ..... 22
• Tilt mount unit
SET UP Settings Menu ............................................. 23
Setting the language for the menus ............................. 23 • Stand
Setting the BNC connectors ....................................... 23 • Attachable speakers
Checking the signal being transmitted to RGB1 terminal .... 23
Setting high definition images to the suitable screen size .... 23
Setting a computer image to the correct RGB select
screen ...................................................................... 23
Setting the signal and black level for DVI signal ........ 24
Setting the video signal format ................................... 24 5
4-13
CONFIDENTIAL
Installation
* See page 5.
dealer.
to the installer.
* Use only the mounting kit or stand provided by manufacturer and listed under Options.
Drawing A Drawing B When installing or carrying, use the

handles attached to the upper back
of the display.

Wall
back of the monitor using the safety fitting mount screws.
50mm (2") 50mm (2")
50mm (2")
Screw hole
Wall
Screw or Hook etc.

(Not supplied)
50mm (2") Screw for Safty metal

50mm (2")
fittings Wall
Metal chain
(Not supplied)
Table Top
6
4-14
CONFIDENTIAL
Cable Management Operating Range

Using the cable clamps provided with the plasma display, * Use the remote control within a distance of about 7 m/
bundle at the back of the unit the signal and audio cables 23ft. from the front of the monitor’s remote control sensor
connected to the display. and at horizontal and vertical angles of up to approximately
30°.
Back of the unit monitor’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct
sunlight or strong artificial light, or if there is an obstacle
mounting holes
To attach
Approx.
1. 2. 7m / 23ft
clamp
cables
mounting hole
To detach

How to use the remote control • When not using the remote control for a long period,
Battery Installation and Replacement remove the batteries.
Insert the 2 “AAA” batteries, making sure to set them in • Do not use new and old batteries together, or use different
with the proper polarity. types together.
1.Press and open the cover. • Do not take apart the batteries, heat them, or throw them
into a fire.
2.Align the batteries according to the (+) and (–) indication

inside the case.
7
4-15
CONFIDENTIAL
Front View
VOLUME INPUT SELECT

VOLUME INPUT SELECT

7 6 5 4 1 3 2

u MENU/ENTER
INPUT”, “RGB SELECT” and “DVI SET UP”.
WARNING
(OSM) mode.
8
4-16
CONFIDENTIAL
C
D
E
I A B
A AC IN F DVD2/ HD2, RGB2

Connect the included power cord here. DVD2/ HD2: You can connect DVDs, High
B EXT SPEAKER L and R here.
Connect speakers (optional) here. Maintain the correct This input can be set for use with an
polarity. Connect the (positive) speaker wire to the RGB or component source. (see page
EXT SPEAKER terminal and the (negative) 23)
speaker wire to the EXT SPEAKER terminal on RGB2: You can connect an analog RGB signal
both LEFT and RIGHT channels. and the syncronization signal.
G RGB1 (D-Sub)
C VIDEO1, 2, 3 (BNC, RCA, S-Video) Connect an analog RGB signal from a computer, etc.
Connect VCR’s, DVD’s or Video Cameras, etc. here. here.
D AUDIO1, AUDIO2, AUDIO3 H DVD3/ HD3, RGB3 (DVI)
These are audio input terminals. Connect a digital signal (TMDS) from a source with a
The input is selectable. Set which video image to allot DVI output.
them from the audio menu screen. This input can be set for use with an RGB3 or DVD3/
E DVD1 / HD1 HD3 source. (see page 24)
Connect DVD’s, High Definition or Laser Discs, etc. I EXTERNAL CONTROL (D-Sub)
here. This terminal is used when operating and controlling
the monitor externally (by external control).
9
4-17
CONFIDENTIAL
Remote Control i MUTE

Mutes the audio.
o VOLUME (+ /–)
!0 ZOOM (+ /–)
!1 SINGLE
!2 SIDE BY SIDE
side-by-side mode.
!4 ACTIVE SELECT
Press this button to make the desired picture activate
during split screen mode.
!5 VIDEO1, 2, 3
Press this button to select VIDEO as the source.
VIDEO can also be selected using the INPUT SELECT
button on the monitor.
!6 DVD/HD1, 2, 3
DVD/HD can also be selected using the INPUT
SELECT button on the monitor.
!7 PC/RGB
Press this button to select PC/RGB as the source.
PC/RGB can also be selected using the INPUT
!8 PICTURE MEMORY
Switches sequentially between picture memory settings
1 to 6.
!9 Remote control signal transmitter
q POWER ON/STANDBY
Switches the power on/standby.
(This does not operate when POWER/STANDBY
indicator of the main unit is off.)
w OFF TIMER
e DISPLAY
r WIDE
Automatically detects the signal and sets the aspect
ratio.
t MENU/ENTER
Press this button to access the OSM controls.
Press this button during the display of the main menu
y CURSOR (▲ / ▼ / / )
u EXIT
menu to return to the previous menu. 10
4-18
CONFIDENTIAL
Basic Operations
POWER OFF TIMER
4. Press the POWER STANDBY button (on the remote OFF TIMER 30
control) or the Power button (on the unit) to turn off the
unit.
VOLUME
To adjust the sound volume: To check the remaining time:
1. Press and hold the VOLUME button (on the remote 1. Once the off timer has been set, press the OFF TIMER
control or the unit) to increase to the desired level. button once.
2. Press and hold the VOLUME button (on the remote 2. The remaining time is displayed, then turns off after a few
control or the unit) to decrease to the desired level. seconds.
MUTE 3. When five minutes remain the remaining time appears
To mute the audio: until it reaches zero.
Press the MUTE button on the remote control to mute the OFF TIMER 28
audio; press again to restore.
DISPLAY
pressed.
the menu turns off. To cancel the off timer:
1. Press the OFF TIMER button twice in a row.
DIGITAL ZOOM
the picture. OFF TIMER 0
1. (Be sure ZOOM NAV is off.)

Press the ZOOM (+ or -) button to display magnifying
glass. ( )
2. Press the EXIT button to delete the pointer. A slight current is still supplied to the monitor. When you
long period of time, turn off the power of the monitor.
11
4-19
WIDE Operations
Wide Screen Operation (manual) The picture is expanded in the horizontal and vertical
With this function, you can select one of six screen sizes. direction, maintaining the original proportions.
1. Press the WIDE button on the remote control. 2.35:1 size screen

→ NORMAL → ANAMORPHIC → STADIUM → ZOOM → 2.35:1 → 14:9
Original image
ANAMORPHIC ↔ 2.35:1
NORMAL ↔ ANAMORPHIC
right margins.
NORMAL size screen (4:3) • This feature is available when the input signal is video,
component (480I, 480P, 576I, 576P, 720P, 1080I) or RGB
(525P or 625P signal from a scan converter).
screen, select the 2.35:1 size screen to avoid phosphor burn-
in.
14:9 size screen

aspect ratio.
ANAMORPHIC size screen
The image is displayed at a 14:9 aspect ratio.

component (480I, 480P, 576I, 576P) or RGB (525P or 625P
The image is expanded in the horizontal direction. Note:

* Images compressed in the horizontal direction (“squeezed Do not allow the displayed in 4:3 mode for an extended
images”) are expanded in the horizontal direction and period. This can cause a phosphor burn-in.
STADIUM size screen

wide screen.
ZOOM size screen
12
4-20
CONFIDENTIAL
Wide Screen Operation with Information

Computer Signals Supported resolution
Switch to the wide screen mode to expand the 4 : 3 image See page 7 of Model Information for details on the
to fill the entire screen. display output of the various VESA signal standards
1. Press the WIDE button on the remote control. supported by the monitor.
2. Within 3 seconds ... When 852 (848) dot 480 line wide VGA*
Press the WIDE button again. signals with a vertical frequency of 60 Hz and
The screen size switches as follows: horizontal frequency of 31.7 (31.0) kHz are in-
→ NORMAL → ANAMORPHIC → ZOOM
put
Select an appropriate setting for RGB SELECT mode
referring to the“Table of Signals Supported” on page 7
of Model Information.
NORMAL ↔ ANAMORPHIC
Note:
The picture has the same size as the normal computer

image.
ZOOM size screen
13
4-21
CONFIDENTIAL


A
B A B A B

button button
VIDEO1

SINGLE
A SINGLE
button
A
B A B
A B

SIDE BY SIDE
VIDEO1 RGB/PC1
button
VIDEO1 RGB/PC1
cursor button.
A B
Sub
screen
PICTURE IN
PICTURE
button A B
Note:
Picture A and B on the above screen are not always of the button
same height.
RGB/PC1 VIDEO1
Information B A
Pictures displayed on the right/main screen (Select1) To make the desired picture active, press the ACTIVE
VIDEO1 VIDEO2 VIDEO3 HD/DVD1 HD/DVD2 RGB/PC1 HD/DVD3
RGB2 RGB3 SELECT button.
Pictures VIDEO1
displayed on VIDEO2
the left/sub VIDEO3
(Select2) HD/DVD2
RGB2
RGB/PC1
HD/DVD3

A B
RGB3
Split screen operations may not function

depending on the type of the RGB signals. ACTIVE SELECT
button
VIDEO1 RGB/PC1
A B
14
4-22
CONFIDENTIAL

To move the position of the sub screen, press the cursor 1. Press the ACTIVE SELECT button to make the desired
2. Press the PC/RGB, VIDEO1, 2, 3, or DVD/HD1, 2, 3

button
button to change the selection of the input signal.
A
VIDEO1 RGB/PC2 VIDEO1 A
RGB/PC2
The INPUT SELECT button on the monitor can also be
B
B used to change the selection.
button
Top Left Top Right Zooming up pictures
button button button button 1. Press the ACTIVE SELECT button to make the desired
picture active.
2. Use the ZOOM (
or ) button to enlage the picture.
A
B B A
For details, see “DIGITAL ZOOM” on page 11.

button
1. Press the ACTIVE SELECT button to make the desired
picture active.
To change the size of the sub screen, press the button.
VIDEO1 RGB/PC1
MENU.
3. Adjust the setting to your preference.
A
B For details, see “OSM (On Screen Menu) Controls” on
VIDEO1 RGB/PC1 page 16.
A
B Note:
button VIDEO1 RGB/PC1 During enhanced split screen, some functions of OSM
A
B
A
B
button button
To make the desired picture active, press the ACTIVE

SELECT button.
A
B ACTIVE A
B
SELECT
button
15
4-23
CONFIDENTIAL
Menu Operations
The following describes how to use the menus and the
selected items.
MAIN MENU
PICTURE SET UP
AUDIO FUNCTION
IMAGE ADJ. SIGNAL INFO.

PICTURE
PICTURE MEMORY : OFF
CONTRAST
BRIGHTNESS
SHARPNESS
COLOR
TINT R G
NR : OFF
COLOR TEMP. : MIDDLE
GAMMA : 2.2
LOW TONE : AUTO
SET UP LEVEL : 0%
COLOR TUNE
CINEMA MODE : ON
SEL. ADJ. MENU/ENTER OK EXIT RETURN

CONTRAST 10

main menu.
press the or button within 5 seconds. If not, the current
setting is set and the previous screen appears.
Note: The main menu disappears by pressing the EXIT

button.
16
4-24
CONFIDENTIAL
Menu Tree
PICTURE PICTURE MEMORY OFF/MEMORY1-6 YES 19
CONTRAST ←→ 0←52→72 YES 19
BRIGHTNESS ←→ 0←32→64 YES 19
SHARPNESS ←→ 0←16→32 YES 19
COLOR ←→ 0←32→64 YES 19
TINT R←→G 0←32→64 YES 19
NR OFF/NR-1/NR-2/NR-3 YES 19
COLOR TEMP. LOW/MIDDLE LOW/MIDDLE/HIGH YES 20
WHITE BALANCE GAIN RED ←→ 0←→70 YES 20
GAIN GREEN ←→ 0←→70 YES 20
GAIN BLUE ←→ 0←→70 YES 20
BIAS RED ←→ 0←→70 YES 20
BIAS GREEN ←→ 0←→70 YES 20
BIAS BLUE ←→ 0←→70 YES 20
GAMMA 2.1←2.2←2.3→2.4 YES 20
LOW TONE AUTO←→1←…→3 YES 20
SET UP LEVEL 0%←→3.75%←→7.5% YES 21
COLOR TUNE RED Y←→M 0←→64 YES 21
GREEN C←→Y 0←→64 YES 21
BLUE M←→C 0←→64 YES 21
YELLOW G←→R 0←→64 YES 21
MAGENTA R←→B 0←→64 YES 21
CYAN B←→G 0←→64 YES 21
CINEMA MODE ON←→OFF YES 21
PICTURE MODE DEFAULT/THEATER1/THEATER2/NORMAL/BRIGHT YES 21
AUDIO BASS ←→ 0←13→26 YES 22
TREBLE ←→ 0←13→26 YES 22
BALANCE L←→R -22←0→+22 YES 22
IMAGE ADJUST ASPECT MODE ZOOM/NORMAL/ANAMORPHIC/STADIUM/14:9/2.35:1 NO 22
V-POSITION ←→ -64←0→+64 YES 22
H-POSITION ←→ -128←0→+127 YES 22
V-HEIGHT ←→ 0←→64 YES 22
H-WIDTH ←→ 0←→64 YES 22
AUTO PICTURE ON←→OFF*2 NO 22
FINE PICTURE*1 ←→ *2 0←→64 YES 22
PICTURE ADJ.*1 ←→ *2 0←→128 YES 22
SET UP LANGUAGE ENGLISH/DEUTSCH/FRANÇAIS/ESPAÑOL/ITALIANO/SVENSKA/ /У NO 23
BNC INPUT RGB←→COMPONENT YES 23
D-SUB INPUT RGB YES 23
HD SELECT 1080I/1035I/540P NO 23
RGB SELECT AUTO/STILL/MOTION/WIDE1/WIDE2/WIDE3/DTV YES 23
DVI SET UP PLUG/PLAY PC←→STB/DVD NO 24
BLACK LEVEL LOW←→HIGH NO 24
COLOR SYSTEM AUTO/PAL/PAL-M/PAL-N/PAL 60/SECAM/4.43 NTSC/3.58NTSC NO 24
BACK GROUND BLACK/GRAY YES 24
GRAY LEVEL 0←…→3←…→15 YES 25
S1/S2 AUTO←→OFF YES 25
DISPLAY OSM ON←→OFF YES 25
OSM ADJ. TOP LEFT←→TOP CENTER←→TOP RIGHT←→BTM LEFT←→BTM CENTER←→BTM RIGHT YES 25
ALL RESET ON←→OFF — 25
17
4-25
CONFIDENTIAL
FUNCTION POWER MGT. ON←→OFF YES 26
INPUT SKIP ON←→OFF YES 26
SUB. P DETECT AUTO←→OFF YES 26
ZOOM NAV OFF←→S BY S←→BTM LEFT←→BTM RIGHT←→TOP RIGHT←→TOP LEFT YES 27
PICTURE FREEZE OFF←→S BY S1←→S BY S2←→BTM LEFT←→BTM RIGHT←→TOP RIGHT←→TOP LEFT YES 27
PDP SAVER MANUAL/AUTO YES 27
PEAK BRIGHT 100%/75%/50%/25% YES 28
ORBITER OFF/AUTO1/AUTO2 YES 28
INVERSE/WHITE OFF/INVERSE/WHITE YES 28
SCREEN WIPER ON/OFF YES 28
SOFT FOCUS OFF/LEVEL1-4 YES 28
OSM ORBITER ON/OFF YES 29
OSM CONTRAST LOW/NORMAL YES 29
CLOSED CAPTION OFF/CAPTION1-4/TEXT1-4 YES 29
CAPTION CONT LOW/NORMAL YES 29
SIGNAL INFO. — 29
*1 Only when AUTO PICTURE is OFF.

*2 RGB/PC only
Information
Select “ALL RESET” under the SET UP menu. Note that this also restores other settings to the factory defaults.
18
4-26
CONFIDENTIAL
Picture Settings Menu Adjusting the picture

Storing picture settings The contrast, brightness, sharpness, color and tint can be
This function allows you to store in memory the current adjusted as desired.
input signal and PICTURE menu settings and to recall Example: Adjusting the contrast
these settings when necessary. On “CONTRAST” of “PICTURE” menu, adjust the contrast.
There are six picture memories, and notes of up to 15 PICTURE
characters can be added to each. PICTURE MEMORY
CONTRAST
: OFF
BRIGHTNESS
Example: Storing picture settings at MEMORY1 SHARPNESS
COLOR
TINT R G
On “PICTURE MEMORY” of “PICTURE” menu, select NR : OFF
“MEMORY1”, then press the MENU/ENTER button. GAMMA : 2.2
CONTRAST 10
LOW TONE : AUTO

The “PICTURE MEMORY” screen appears. SET UP LEVEL : 0%
COLOR TUNE
PICTURE MEMORY 1/2 PICTURE MEMORY 2/2 CINEMA MODE : ON
MEMORY1 SET RESET PREVIOUS PAGE PICTURE MODE : NORMAL
INPUT : DVD/HD1 MEMORY4 SET RESET SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
SIGNAL : 480P INPUT : —
NOTE : DVD/STAR WARS
MEMORY2
SIGNAL : —
NOTE : — Note: If “CAN NOT ADJUST” appears ...
INPUT : — MEMORY5
SIGNAL : — INPUT : — When trying to enter the PICTURE submenu, make sure
NOTE : — SIGNAL : —
MEMORY3 NOTE : — PICTURE MODE is not set to DEFAULT.
INPUT : — MEMORY6
SIGNAL : — INPUT : —
NOTE : — SIGNAL : — Information
NOTE : —
NEXT PAGE
SEL. ADJ. MENU/ENTER OK EXIT RETURN SEL. ADJ. MENU/ENTER OK EXIT RETURN
Picture adjustment screen
CONTRAST: Changes the picture’s white level.
Information BRIGHTNESS: Changes the picture’s black level.
SHARPNESS: Changes the picture’s sharpness.
PICTURE MEMORY Settings
Adjusts picture detail of VIDEO display.
OFF: Picture memory not used.
MEMORY1 to 6: Picture memory with the specified
number used. Maximum memories are 6, not depending
on inputs.
Setting the memory
• Use the ▲ and ▼ button to select the desired memory
place, MEMORY1 to MEMORY6.
• Use the and buttons to select “SET”, then press
the MENU/ENTER button. Select “DEFAULT” under the “PICTURE MODE”
• If necessary, input a note. settings.
Resetting the memory Reducing noise in the picture
Use the ▲ and ▼ button to select the desired memory Use these settings if the picture has noise due to poor
place, MEMORY1 to MEMORY6, then use the and reception or when playing video tapes on which the picture
buttons to select “RESET”, and finally press the quality is poor.
MENU/ENTER button. Example: Setting “NR-3”
The memory is cleared, and “—” is displayed in the
“INPUT”, “SIGNAL” and “NOTE” columns. On “NR” of “PICTURE” menu, select “NR-3”.
Inputting notes PICTURE
CONTRAST
• Use the and buttons to select “NOTE”, then press BRIGHTNESS
SHARPNESS
the MENU/ENTER button. COLOR
TINT R G
• Input the note. NR : OFF

: MIDDLE
COLOR TEMP. NR : NR-3
Use the ▲ and ▼ button to select the character. GAMMA
LOW TONE
: 2.2
: AUTO
Use the and buttons to move the cursor. SET UP LEVEL
COLOR TUNE
: 0%
Use the EXIT button to delete the character at the CINEMA MODE
PICTURE MODE
: ON
: NORMAL
cursor position. SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
• When you have finished inputting the note, press the

MENU/ENTER button. Information
NR
* “NR” stands for Noise Reduction.
Types of noise reduction
There are three types of noise reduction. Each has a
different level of noise reduction.
The effect becomes stronger as the number increases
(in the order NR-1 → NR-2 → NR-3).
OFF: Turns the noise reduction function off.
19
4-27
CONFIDENTIAL
Setting the color temperature Changing the Gamma Curve

Use this procedure to set color tone produced by the plasma This feature adjusts the brightness of the midtone areas
display. while keeping shadows and highlights unchanged.
Example: Setting “HIGH” Example: Setting “2.3”
On “COLOR TEMP.” of “PICTURE” menu, select “HIGH”. On “GAMMA” of “PICTURE” menu, select “2.3”.
PICTURE PICTURE
PICTURE MEMORY : OFF PICTURE MEMORY : OFF
CONTRAST CONTRAST
BRIGHTNESS BRIGHTNESS
SHARPNESS SHARPNESS
COLOR COLOR
TINT R G TINT R G
NR : OFF NR : OFF
COLOR TEMP. : HIGH COLOR TEMP. : MIDDLE
GAMMA : 2.2 GAMMA : 2.3
LOW TONE : AUTO LOW TONE : AUTO
SET UP LEVEL : 0% SET UP LEVEL : 0%
COLOR TUNE COLOR TUNE
CINEMA MODE : ON CINEMA MODE : ON
PICTURE MODE : NORMAL PICTURE MODE : NORMAL
Setting the color temperature GAMMA settings
LOW: Redder The picture becomes darker as the number increases
MIDDLE LOW: Slightly red (in the sequence of 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4).
MIDDLE: Standard (slightly bluer) * These values are approximate.
HIGH: Bluer
Making the Low Tone adjustments
Adjusting the color to the desired level This feature allows more detailed tone to be reproduced
Use this procedure to adjust the white balance for each especially in the dark area.
color temperature to achieve the desired color quality.
Example: Adjusting the “GAIN RED” of “HIGH” color
On “LOW TONE” of “PICTURE” menu, select “2”.
temperature
PICTURE
On “COLOR TEMP.” of “PICTURE” menu, select “HIGH”, PICTURE MEMORY : OFF
CONTRAST
then press the MENU/ENTER button. BRIGHTNESS
SHARPNESS
The “WHITE BALANCE” screen appears. COLOR
TINT R G
On “GAIN RED”, adjust the white balance. NR : OFF
WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMP. : MIDDLE
COLOR TEMP. HIGH GAMMA : 2.2
GAIN RED
LOW TONE : 2
GAIN GREEN
GAIN BLUE SET UP LEVEL : 0%
BIAS RED COLOR TUNE
BIAS GREEN CINEMA MODE : ON
BIAS BLUE PICTURE MODE : NORMAL
RESET : OFF
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN GAIN RED 20 SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
Adjusting the white balance LOW TONE settings
GAIN R/G/B: White balance adjustment for white level AUTO: Will automatically appraise the picture and
BIAS R/G/B: White balance adjustment for black level make adjustments.
RESET: Resets settings to the factory default values. 1: Will apply the dither method suitable for still pictures.
Use and buttons to select “ON”, then press the 2: Will apply the dither method suitable for motion
MENU/ENTER button. pictures.
Restoring the factory default settings 3: Will apply the error diffusion method.
Select “RESET” under the WHITE BALANCE menu.
20
4-28
CONFIDENTIAL
Adjusting the pedestal level (black level) Setting the picture to suit the movie
This feature adjusts the video black level in a video image. The film image is automatically discriminated and
Example: Setting “3.75%” projected in an image mode suited to the picture.
[NTSC, PAL, PAL60, 480I (60Hz), 525I (60Hz), 576I
On “SET UP LEVEL” of “PICTURE” menu, select “3.75%”. (50Hz), 625I (50Hz), 1035I (60Hz), 1080I (60Hz) only]
PICTURE
PICTURE MEMORY : OFF Example: Setting the “CINEMA MODE” to “OFF”
CONTRAST
BRIGHTNESS On “CINEMA MODE” of “PICTURE” menu, select “OFF”.
SHARPNESS
COLOR PICTURE
TINT R G PICTURE MEMORY : OFF
NR : OFF CONTRAST
COLOR TEMP. : MIDDLE BRIGHTNESS
GAMMA : 2.2 SHARPNESS
LOW TONE : AUTO COLOR
SET UP LEVEL : 3.75% TINT R G
COLOR TUNE NR : OFF
CINEMA MODE : ON COLOR TEMP. : MIDDLE
PICTURE MODE : NORMAL GAMMA : 2.2
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN LOW TONE : AUTO
SET UP LEVEL : 0%
COLOR TUNE
Information CINEMA MODE : OFF
SET UP LEVEL settings

0%: Normal status

3.75%: 3.5% lower than normal Information
7.5%: 7.5% lower than normal CINEMA MODE
ON: Automatic discrimination of the image and
Adjusting the colors projection in cinema mode.
Use this procedure to adjust hue and color density for red, OFF: Cinema mode does not function.
green, blue, yellow, magenta and cyan.
You can accentuate the green color of trees, the blue of Setting the picture mode according to the
the sky, etc. brightness of the room
Example: Adjusting the color tune for blue There are four picture modes that can be used effectively
the display.
The “COLOR TUNE” screen appears. Example: Setting the “THEATER1” mode
On “BLUE” of “COLOR TUNE”, adjust the color tune. On “PICTURE MODE” of “PICTURE” menu, select
COLOR TUNE
“THEATER1”.
RED Y M PICTURE
GREEN C Y PICTURE MEMORY : OFF
BLUE M C CONTRAST
BRIGHTNESS
YELLOW G R
SHARPNESS
MAGENTA R B
COLOR
CYAN B G TINT R G
RESET : OFF NR : OFF

SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN COLOR TEMP. : MIDDLE PICTURE MODE : THEATER1
GAMMA : 2.2
LOW TONE : AUTO
SET UP LEVEL : 0%
Information COLOR TUNE

CINEMA MODE : ON
COLOR TUNE settings


GREEN: Makes green’s adjustment Information
BLUE: Makes blue’s adjustment Types of picture modes
YELLOW: Makes yellow’s adjustment THEATER1, 2: Set this mode when watching video in a
MAGENTA: Makes magenta’s adjustment dark room.
CYAN: Makes cyan’s adjustment This mode provides darker, finer pictures, like the screen
RESET: Resets settings to the factory default value. in movie theaters.
Use and buttons to select “ON”, then press the For a darker image, select THEATER2.
MENU/ENTER button. NORMAL: Set this mode when watching video in a bright
room.
NORMAL.
default settings.
21
4-29

AUDIO position.
BASS
TREBLE
The mode switches as follows each time the 䊴 or 䊳 button is
BALANCE
: VIDEO1
pressed:
AUDIO INPUT1
AUDIO INPUT2 : HD/DVD1 NORMAL ↔ ANAMORPHIC
AUDIO INPUT3 : RGB1
* The mode can also be switched by pressing the WIDE
* The settings on the IMAGE ADJUST menu are not preset
at the factory.
Set “AUDIO INPUT” on the AUDIO menu correctly.
IMAGE ADJUST
Information V-POSITION
H-POSITION
䡵 Audio settings menu V-HEIGHT
H-WIDTH
AUTO PICTURE : OFF
BASS: Controls the level of low frequency sound. FINE PICTURE
PICTURE ADJ. V-POSITION -30
TREBLE: Controls the level of high frequency sound. SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN

䡵 When “AUTO PICTURE” is “OFF”
Setting the allocation of the audio connectors IMAGE ADJUST
Setting the AUDIO 1, 2, and 3 connectors to the desired ASPECT MODE : ANAMORPHIC
V-POSITION
input. H-POSITION
V-HEIGHT
Example: Setting “AUDIO INPUT1” to “VIDEO 2” H-WIDTH
AUTO PICTURE : OFF
On “AUDIO INPUT1” of “AUDIO” menu, select FINE PICTURE
PICTURE ADJ.
“VIDEO2”. SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
AUDIO
BASS
TREBLE them.
BALANCE
AUDIO INPUT1 : VIDEO2 䡵 Adjusting the Auto Picture
AUDIO INPUT3 : RGB1 ON: The Picture ADJ., Fine Picture and Position
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN adjustments are made automatically.
Information
䡵 AUDIO INPUT
* If FINE PICTURE can’t be adjusted, set Auto Picture
A single audio input cannot be selected as the audio
to OFF and adjust manually.
channel for more than one input terminal.
䡵 Adjusting the position of the image
image.
image.
image.
22
4-30
CONFIDENTIAL
SET UP Settings Menu Checking the signal being transmitted to

Setting the language for the menus RGB1 terminal
The menu display can be set to one of eight languages. Use this to confirm the signal being transmitted to the
RGB1 terminal.
It is set to RGB and can not be adjusted.
On “LANGUAGE” of “SET UP” menu, select “DEUTSCH”. SET UP
LANGUAGE : ENGLISH
SET UP
BNC INPUT : COMPONENT
LANGUAGE : DEUTSCH
D-SUB INPUT : RGB
HD SELECT : 1080I
D-SUB INPUT : RGB
RGB SELECT : AUTO
HD SELECT : 1080I
DVI SET UP
RGB SELECT : AUTO
COLOR SYSTEM : AUTO
DVI SET UP
BACK GROUND : GRAY
COLOR SYSTEM : AUTO
GRAY LEVEL : 3
BACK GROUND : GRAY
S1/S2 : OFF
GRAY LEVEL : 3
DISPLAY OSM : ON
S1/S2 : OFF
OSM ADJ. : TOP LEFT
DISPLAY OSM : ON
ALL RESET : OFF
OSM ADJ. : TOP LEFT
ALL RESET : OFF CAN NOT ADJUST
Information screen size
Use this procedure to set whether the number of vertical
lines of the input high definition image is 1080I or 1035I
ENGLISH ........ English ITALIANO ........ Italian or 540P.
DEUTSCH ....... German SVENSKA ....... Swedish
FRANÇAIS ...... French Example: Setting the “HD SELECT” mode to “1035I”
................... Chinese
ESPAÑOL ....... Spanish У ............ Russian On “HD SELECT” of “SET UP” menu, select “1035I”.
SET UP
Setting the BNC connectors LANGUAGE : ENGLISH
Select whether to set the input of the 5 BNC connectors to D-SUB INPUT : RGB
RGB and component. HD SELECT
RGB SELECT
: 1035I
: AUTO
Example: Set the BNC INPUT mode to “RGB” DVI SET UP
COLOR SYSTEM : AUTO
BACK GROUND : GRAY
On “BNC INPUT” of “SET UP” menu, select “RGB”. GRAY LEVEL : 3
S1/S2 : OFF
SET UP DISPLAY OSM : ON
LANGUAGE : ENGLISH OSM ADJ. : TOP LEFT
BNC INPUT : RGB ALL RESET : OFF
D-SUB INPUT : RGB SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
HD SELECT : 1080I
RGB SELECT : AUTO
DVI SET UP
COLOR SYSTEM : AUTO Information
䡵 HD SELECT modes
BACK GROUND : GRAY
GRAY LEVEL : 3
S1/S2 : OFF
DISPLAY OSM : ON These 3 modes are not displayed in correct image
OSM ADJ.
ALL RESET
: TOP LEFT
: OFF
automatically.
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN 1080I: Standard digital broadcasts
Information 540P: Special Digital broadcasts (for example :
䡵 BNC INPUT Settings DTC100)
RGB: Use the 5BNC terminals for RGB input. Setting a computer image to the correct RGB
COMPONENT: Use the 3BNC terminals for select screen
component input. With the computer image, select the RGB Select mode
digital broadcast.
“MOTION ”
On “RGB SELECT” of “SET UP” menu, select “MOTION”.
SET UP
LANGUAGE : ENGLISH
D-SUB INPUT : RGB
HD SELECT : 1080I
RGB SELECT : MOTION
DVI SET UP : 1024ⴒ768
COLOR SYSTEM : AUTO
BACK GROUND : GRAY
GRAY LEVEL : 3
S1/S2 : OFF
DISPLAY OSM : ON
OSM ADJ. : TOP LEFT
ALL RESET : OFF
23
4-31
CONFIDENTIAL

Information
䡵 RGB SELECT modes video signals or Y/C input signals.
display the following signals correctly.
AUTO: Select the suitable mode for the specifications On “COLOR SYSTEM” of “SET UP” menu, select
of input signals as listed in the table “Computer input “3.58NTSC”.
signals supported by this system” on page 7 of Model SET UP
LANGUAGE : ENGLISH
Information. BNC INPUT : COMPONENT
D-SUB INPUT : RGB
STILL: To display VESA standard signals. (Use this HD SELECT : 1080I
mode for a still image from a computer.) RGB SELECT : AUTO
DVI SET UP
MOTION: The video signal (from a scan converter) COLOR SYSTEM : 3.58NTSC
BACK GROUND : GRAY
will be converted to RGB signals to make the picture GRAY LEVEL : 3
more easily viewable. (Use this mode for a motion S1/S2
DISPLAY OSM
: OFF
: ON
image from a computer.) OSM ADJ. : TOP LEFT
ALL RESET : OFF
SELECT to WIDE1. 䡵 Video signal formats
Different countries use different formats for video signals.
Set to the color system used in your current country.
may be compressed horizontally. To prevent this, set
may be compressed horizontally. To prevent this, set
France and Russia.
DTV: Set this mode when watching digital broadcasting
(480P).
See page 7 of Model Information for the details of the
above settings.
Setting the signal and black level for DVI PAL-M: This is the standard format used mainly in
signal Brazil.
Choose the signal for the DVI connector (PC or STB/ PAL-N: This is the standard format used mainly in
DVD) and set the black level. Argentina.
Example: Setting the “PLUG/PLAY” mode to “STB/ Setting the background color when no signal
DVD” is being input
On “SET UP” menu, select “DVI SET UP”, then press the The color displayed on the background when there is no
MENU/ENTER button. signal can be set to gray.
The “DVI SET UP” screen appears. Example: Setting “BACK GROUND” to “BLACK”
On “PLUG/PLAY” of “DVI SET UP” menu, select “STB/ On “BACK GROUND” of “SET UP” menu, select
DVD”. “BLACK”.
DVI SET UP
SET UP
PLUG/PLAY : STB/DVD
LANGUAGE : ENGLISH
BLACK LEVEL : HIGH
D-SUB INPUT : RGB
HD SELECT : 1080I
RGB SELECT : AUTO
DVI SET UP
SEL. COLOR SYSTEM : AUTO
ADJ. EXIT RETURN
BACK GROUND : BLACK
GRAY LEVEL : 3
S1/S2 : OFF
Information DISPLAY OSM : ON
OSM ADJ. : TOP LEFT
䡵 PLUG/PLAY settings ALL RESET : OFF
PC: When connected to the PC signal.
BLACK LEVEL is set to “LOW” automatically.
Information
STB/DVD: When connected to the SET TOP BOX,
DVD etc. 䡵 BACK GROUND Settings
BLACK LEVEL is set to “HIGH” automatically. BLACK: Sets the background color to black.
䡵 BLACK LEVEL settings GRAY: Sets the background color to gray.
Setting this makes it easier to see that there is no signal.
LOW: When connected to the PC signal.
appears gray.
24
4-32
CONFIDENTIAL
Setting the gray level for the sides of the screen

Information
screen on which nothing is displayed when the screen is 䡵 DISPLAY OSM settings
set to the 4:3 size. ON: The on-screen menu appears.
OFF: The on-screen menu does not appear.
If you press the DISPLAY button on the remote control
On “GRAY LEVEL” of “SET UP” menu, select “5”. for more than 3 seconds the main menu will appear
SET UP and can be set (although it is not ON).
LANGUAGE : ENGLISH
D-SUB INPUT : RGB Setting the position of the menu
HD SELECT : 1080I
RGB SELECT : AUTO
Adjusts the position of the menu when it appears on the
DVI SET UP
: AUTO
screen.
COLOR SYSTEM
BACK GROUND
GRAY LEVEL
: GRAY
: 5
Example: Set the position to “TOP CENTER”
S1/S2 : OFF
DISPLAY OSM : ON On “OSM ADJ.” of “SET UP” menu, select “TOP CENTER”.
OSM ADJ. : TOP LEFT
ALL RESET : OFF SET UP
LANGUAGE : ENGLISH
D-SUB INPUT : RGB
HD SELECT : 1080I
Information RGB SELECT : AUTO
DVI SET UP
䡵 GRAY LEVEL settings COLOR SYSTEM : AUTO
BACK GROUND : GRAY
This adjusts the brightness of the black (the gray level) GRAY LEVEL : 3
S1/S2 : OFF
for the sides of the screen. DISPLAY OSM : ON
The standard is 0 (black). The level can be adjusted OSM ADJ. : TOP CENTER
ALL RESET : OFF
from 0 to 15. The factory setting is 3 (dark gray). SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN

Information
image will be automatically adjusted to fit the screen when 䡵 OSM ADJUST settings
this S1/S2 is set to AUTO.
This feature is available only when an S-video signal is TOP TOP TOP
LEFT CENTER RIGHT
input via the VIDEO3 terminal.
BTM BTM BTM
LEFT CENTER RIGHT
On “S1/S2” of “SET UP” menu, select “AUTO”.
SET UP
LANGUAGE : ENGLISH
D-SUB INPUT : RGB Resetting to the default values
HD SELECT : 1080I
RGB SELECT : AUTO
Use these operations to restore all the settings (PICTURE,
DVI SET UP AUDIO, IMAGE ADJUST, SET UP, etc) to the factory
COLOR SYSTEM : AUTO
BACK GROUND : GRAY default values.
GRAY LEVEL : 3
S1/S2 : AUTO Refer to page 17 for items to be reset.
DISPLAY OSM : ON
OSM ADJ.
ALL RESET
: TOP LEFT
: OFF
On “ALL RESET” of “SET UP” menu, select “ON”, then
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN press the MENU/ENTER button.
SET UP ALL RESET
LANGUAGE : ENGLISH
Information BNC INPUT : COMPONENT
D-SUB INPUT : RGB
䡵 S1/S2 settings
SETTING NOW
HD SELECT : 1080I
RGB SELECT : AUTO
DVI SET UP
AUTO: Adjusts the screen size automatically according COLOR SYSTEM : AUTO
BACK GROUND : GRAY
to the S1/S2 video signal. GRAY LEVEL : 3
S1/S2 : OFF
OFF: Turns the S1/S2 function off. DISPLAY OSM : ON
OSM ADJ. : TOP LEFT
ALL RESET : ON
Turning on/off the menu display SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
When this is set to OFF, the menu will not displayed even When the “SETTING NOW” screen disappears, then all the
if you press the MENU/ENTER button. settings are restored to the default values.
Example: Turning the DISPLAY OSM off
On “DISPLAY OSM” of “SET UP” menu, select “OFF”.
SET UP
LANGUAGE : ENGLISH
D-SUB INPUT : RGB
HD SELECT : 1080I
RGB SELECT : AUTO
DVI SET UP
COLOR SYSTEM : AUTO
BACK GROUND : GRAY
GRAY LEVEL : 3
S1/S2 : OFF
DISPLAY OSM : OFF
OSM ADJ. : TOP LEFT
ALL RESET : OFF
25
4-33
CONFIDENTIAL
Function Settings Menu Setting the Input Skip

Setting the power management for computer When this is ON, signals which are not present will be
images skipped over and only pictures whose signals are being
This energy-saving (power management) function transmitted will be displayed.
automatically reduces the monitor’s power consumption This setting is valid only for the INPUT SELECT button
if no operation is performed for a certain amount of time. on the unit.
Example: Turning the power management function on Example: Set to “ON”
On “POWER MGT.” of “FUNCTION” menu, select “ON”. On “INPUT SKIP” of “FUNCTION” menu, select “ON”.
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
POWER MGT. : OFF
POWER MGT. : ON
INPUT SKIP : ON
INPUT SKIP : OFF
ZOOM NAV : BTM LEFT
ZOOM NAV : BTM LEFT
PICTURE FREEZE : S BY S1
PDP SAVER : MANUAL
PDP SAVER : MANUAL
CLOSED CAPTION : OFF
CAPTION CONT : LOW
CAPTION CONT : LOW
䡵 Power management function 䡵 INPUT SKIP settings
* The power management function automatically reduces OFF: Regardless of the presence of the signal, scan
the monitor’s power consumption if the computer’s and display all signals.
keyboard or mouse is not operated for a certain amount ON: If no input signal is present, skip that signal.
of time. This function can be used when using the * “SETTING NOW” will appear during the input search.
monitor with a computer.
* If the computer’s power is not turned on or if the Erasing the sub screen image when there is
computer and selector tuner are not properly connected, no input signal
the system is set to the off state. This function automatically erases the black frame of the
sub screen when there is no sub screen input signal.
* For instructions on using the computer’s power
This feature is available only when the picuture-in-picuture
management function, refer to the computer’s operating
mode is selected.
instructions.
䡵 Power management settings Example: Set to “OFF”
ON: In this mode the power management function is On “SUB. P DETECT” of “FUNCTION” menu, select
turned on. “OFF”.
OFF: In this mode the power management function is FUNCTION
POWER MGT. : OFF
turned off. INPUT SKIP : OFF
䡵 Power management function and POWER/ SUB. P DETECT
ZOOM NAV
: OFF
: BTM LEFT
STANDBY indicator PICTURE FREEZE : S BY S1
PDP SAVER : MANUAL
The POWER/STANDBY indicator indicates the status CLOSED CAPTION : OFF
CAPTION CONT : LOW
of the power management function. See below for SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
Information
POWER/STANDBY indicator 䡵 SUB. P DETECT Function
management STANDBY management back on
mode indicator operating status * Loss of the input signal means a condition in which the
On Green Not activated. Horizontal and vertical Picture already on. video signal and the sync signal are not present.
synchronizing signals
are present from the * Under conditions in which the sub screen has
computer. disappeared, the ZOOM NAV and PICTURE FREEZE
Off Red Activated. Horizontal and/or Operate the keyboard or functions will not work. The WIDE button will not
signals are not sent reappears. function either.
from the computer.
input signal is lost.
OFF: Turns off the SUB. P DETECT function.
26
4-34
CONFIDENTIAL
Displaying the entire image during DIGITAL FUNCTION

: OFF
ZOOM operations POWER MGT.
INPUT SKIP : OFF
Use this function to display the entire image within the SUB. P DETECT : AUTO
ZOOM NAV : BTM LEFT
sub screen together with an enlarged image on the main PICTURE FREEZE : BTM LEFT
PDP SAVER : MANUAL
screen. CLOSED CAPTION : OFF
CAPTION CONT : LOW
Example: Setting “ZOOM NAV” to “S BY S” SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
On “ZOOM NAV” of “FUNCTION” menu, select “S BY

S”. Information
䡵 PICTURE FREEZE Function
FUNCTION
POWER MGT. : OFF * This feature is available only for RGB1 or RGB2 input
INPUT SKIP : OFF
SUB. P DETECT : AUTO signals.
ZOOM NAV : S BY S
PDP SAVER : MANUAL * Digital zoom is not available while this function is
CAPTION CONT : LOW operating.
* A further press of the ACTIVE SELECT button while
Information
䡵 ZOOM NAV Function
䡵 PICTURE FREEZE settings
signals.
S BY S1, 2: The still images captured by pressing the
ACTIVE SELECT button will be shown on the sub
* This feature does not function while PICTURE FREEZE
screen of side-by-side mode.
is operating.
BTM LEFT~TOP LEFT: The still images captured by
pressing the ACTIVE SELECT button will be shown
䡵 ZOOM NAV settings on the sub screen of picture-in-picture mode.
OFF: Will not show the entire image on the sub screen. Side-by-Side Picture-in-Picture
S BY S: Will show the entire image on the sub screen
RGB/PC1 RGB/PC1
of side-by-side mode.
BTM LEFT~TOP LEFT: Will show the entire image
Side-by-Side Picture-in-Picture
RGB/PC1 RGB/PC1 ACTIVE ACTIVE
SELECT SELECT
button button
RGB/PC1 RGB/PC1
S BY S1
RGB/PC1 RGB/PC1
Zoom+/- button
or
S BY S2
RGB/PC1 RGB/PC1
SINGLE button
Reducing burn-in of the screen

The brightness of the screen, the position of the picture,
positive/negative mode and screen wiper are adjusted to
reduce burn-in of the screen.
Displaying still images in the sub screen On “PDP SAVER” of “FUNCTION” menu, select
This feature enables display in the sub screen of still images “MANUAL”, then press the MENU/ENTER button.
captured by pressing the ACTIVE SELECT button. The “PDP SAVER” screen appears.
Example: Setting “PICTURE FREEZE” to “BTM PDP SAVER
LEFT” PEAK BRIGHT : 100%
ORBITER : OFF
INVERSE/WHITE : OFF
On “PICTURE FREEZE” of “FUNCTION” menu, select SCREEN WIPER : OFF
“BTM LEFT”. SOFT FOCUS
OSM ORBITER
: OFF
: ON
OSM CONTRAST : LOW
27
4-35
CONFIDENTIAL
INVERSE/WHITE
Information
䡵 When set to AUTO Use this to set the inverse mode or to display a white
screen.
Set automatically, as described below.
PEAK BRIGHT: 100% Example: Setting “INVERSE/WHITE” to “WHITE”
ORBITER: ON On “INVERSE/WHITE” of “PDP SAVER” menu, select
INVERSE/WHITE: OFF “WHITE”.
SCREEN WIPER: OFF
PDP SAVER
SOFT FOCUS: OFF PEAK BRIGHT : 100%
ORBITER : OFF
OSD ORBITER: ON INVERSE/WHITE : WHITE
OSD CONTRAST: LOW SCREEN WIPER
SOFT FOCUS
: OFF
: OFF
OSM ORBITER : ON
PEAK BRIGHT OSM CONTRAST
SEL. ADJ.
: LOW
EXIT RETURN

Example: Setting “PEAK BRIGHT” to “75%” Information
On “PEAK BRIGHT” of “PDP SAVER” menu, select “75%”. 䡵 INVERSE/WHITE Settings
PDP SAVER OFF: Inverse/white mode does not function.
PEAK BRIGHT : 75%
ORBITER : OFF
INVERSE: The picture is displayed alternately between
INVERSE/WHITE : OFF positive image and negative image.
SCREEN WIPER : OFF
SOFT FOCUS : OFF WHITE: The entire screen turns white.
OSM ORBITER : ON
OSM CONTRAST : LOW
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN SCREEN WIPER
When this is set to ON, a white vertical bar moves
Information repeatedly from the left and of the screen to the right end
䡵 PEAK BRIGHT settings at a constant speed.
100%: The brightness of the screen is adjusted Example: Setting “SCREEN WIPER” to “ON”
automatically to suit the picture quality. On “SCREEN WIPER” of “PDP SAVER” menu, select
75%, 50%, 25%: Sets maximum brightness. “ON”.
The brightness level decreases in the order of 75%,
PDP SAVER
50%, 25%. 25% provides minimum brightness. PEAK BRIGHT : 100%
ORBITER : OFF
* These values are approximate. INVERSE/WHITE : OFF
SCREEN WIPER : ON
SOFT FOCUS : OFF
ORBITER OSM ORBITER : ON
OSM CONTRAST : LOW
Use this to set the picture shift. SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
Example: Setting “ORBITER” to “AUTO1”

On “ORBITER” of “PDP SAVER” menu, select “AUTO1”. Information
䡵 SCREEN WIPER
PDP SAVER
PEAK BRIGHT : 100% ON: The white vertical bar appears.
ORBITER : AUTO1
INVERSE/WHITE : OFF OFF: Screen wiper mode does not function.
SCREEN WIPER : OFF
SOFT FOCUS : OFF
OSM ORBITER : ON SOFT FOCUS
OSM CONTRAST : LOW
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN Reduces edges and softens the image.
Example: Setting “SOFT FOCUS” to “LEVEL2”
Information On “SOFT FOCUS” of “PDP SAVER” menu, select
䡵 ORBITER settings “LEVEL2”.
OFF: Orbiter mode does not function. PDP SAVER
This is the default setting when RGB is input. PEAK BRIGHT
ORBITER
: 100%
: OFF
AUTO1: The picture moves around the screen INVERSE/WHITE : OFF
SCREEN WIPER : OFF
intermittently, making the picture smaller. This is the SOFT FOCUS : LEVEL2
OSM ORBITER : ON
default setting when a Video or a DVD/HD/DTV signal OSM CONTRAST : LOW
is input. Set to “OFF” when these signals are not used. SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
AUTO2: The picture moves around the screen

intermittently, making the picture bigger. Information
* When a Video or a DVD/HD/DTV signal is input, the 䡵 SOFT FOCUS settings
AUTO1 and 2 functions will affect only the moving OFF: Turns the SOFT FOCUS function off.
picture and will not make the screen smaller or bigger. LEVEL1, 2, 3, 4: Activates the SOFT FOCUS setting.
The higher numbers create a softer image.
“SHARPNESS” can not be adjusted on the
“PICTURE” menu.
28
4-36
CONFIDENTIAL
OSM ORBITER
Information
Use this to set OSM menu shift. 䡵 CLOSED CAPTION settings
Example: Setting “OSM ORBITER” to “OFF” OFF: This exits the closed caption mode.
On “OSM ORBITER” of “PDP SAVER” menu, select CAPTION1~4: Text is superimposed.
“OFF”. TEXT1~4: Text is displayed in full screen.
A closed caption signal may not be decoded in the
PDP SAVER
PEAK BRIGHT : 100% following signature;
ORBITER : OFF
INVERSE/WHITE : OFF 1. when a video tape has been dubbed.
SCREEN WIPER : OFF
SOFT FOCUS : OFF
2. when the signal reception is weak.
OSM ORBITER : OFF 3. when the signal reception is nonstandard.
OSM CONTRAST : LOW
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN When using closed captioned channel or the text mode,
the text screen always appears.
When there is no signal, however, the text screen will
Information
not display text characters.
䡵 OSM ORBITER settings
ON: The position of the menu will be shifted by eight Reducing the brightness of Closed Caption
dots each time OSM is displayed. Use this to reduce the brightness of Closed Caption.
OFF: OSM will be displayed at the same position. Example: Setting “NORMAL”
OSM CONTRAST On “CAPTION CONT” of “FUNCTION” menu, select

“NORMAL”.
Use this to reduce the brightness of OSM menu.
FUNCTION
Example: Setting “OSM CONTRAST” to “NORMAL” POWER MGT. : OFF
INPUT SKIP : OFF
On “OSM CONTRAST” of “PDP SAVER” menu, select SUB. P DETECT
ZOOM NAV
: AUTO
: BTM LEFT
“NORMAL”. PICTURE FREEZE : S BY S1
PDP SAVER : MANUAL
PDP SAVER CLOSED CAPTION : OFF
PEAK BRIGHT : 100% CAPTION CONT : NORMAL
ORBITER : OFF SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
INVERSE/WHITE : OFF
SCREEN WIPER : OFF
SOFT FOCUS : OFF Information
OSM ORBITER : ON
OSM CONTRAST : NORMAL 䡵 CAPTION CONT settings
NORMAL: Closed Caption brightness is set to normal.
LOW: Closed Caption brightness is set to lower.
Information
䡵 OSM CONTRAST settings Signal Information Menu
NORMAL: OSM brightness is set to normal. Checking the frequencies, polarities of input
LOW: OSM brightness is set to lower. signals, and resolution
Setting Closed Caption Use this function to check the frequencies and polarities
This function sets several closed caption modes that allows of the signals currently being input from a computer, etc.
text to be superimposed on display. On “MAIN MENU”, select “SIGNAL INFO.”, then press
Example: Setting “CAPTION2”
The “SIGNAL INFORMATION” is displayed.
On “CLOSED CAPTION” of “FUNCTION” menu, select
SIGNAL INFORMATION
“CAPTION2”. H. FREQUENCY : 48.4KHz
V. FREQUENCY : 60.0Hz
FUNCTION
POWER MGT. : OFF H. POLARITY : NEGATIVE
INPUT SKIP : OFF V. POLARITY : NEGATIVE
ZOOM NAV : BTM LEFT MEMORY : 24
PICTURE FREEZE : S BY S1 RESOLUTION : 1024ⴒ768
PDP SAVER : MANUAL SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
CLOSED CAPTION : CAPTION2
CAPTION CONT
SEL. ADJ.
: LOW
EXIT RETURN
29
4-37
CONFIDENTIAL
RGB 1
Connections
5 4 3 2 1
15 14 13 12 11
External equipment
1 Red
3 Blue
4 No connection
5 Ground
6 Red ground
7 Green ground
8 Blue ground
9 No connection
11 No connection
Connector on the plasma monitor side: EXTERNAL 12 Bi-directional DATA (SDA)
CONTROL connector. 13 Horizontal sync or Composite sync
Use a crossed (reverse) cable. 14 Vertical sync
15 Data clock
Type of connector: D-Sub 9-pin male
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 RGB 3
Communication Parameters 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
(2) Interface RS-232C
(4) Data length 8 bits Pin No. Signal (Digital)
(5) Parity Odd 1 T.M.D.S Data 2 -
(6) Stop bit 1 bit 2 T.M.D.S Data 2 +
(7) Communication code Hex 3 T.M.D.S Data 2 Shield
4 No connection
FUNCTION CODE DATA
6 DDC Clock
8 No connection
10 T.M.D.S Data 1 +
DVD3/HD3 (DVI) DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 0EH 15H
RGB1 (mini D-sub 15-pin) DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 07H 0EH
12 No connection
RGB3 (DVI) DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 0CH 13H
14 +5V Power
Audio Mute ON 9FH 80H 60H 3EH 00H BDH 15 Ground
OFF 9FH 80H 60H 3FH 00H BEH 16 Hot Plug Detect
Picture Mode NORMAL DFH 80H 60H OAH 01H 01H CBH 17 T.M.D.S Data 0 -
THEATER 1 DFH 80H 60H OAH 01H 02H CCH 18 T.M.D.S Data 0 +
THEATER 2 DFH 80H 60H OAH 01H 03H CDH
DEFAULT DFH 80H 60H OAH 01H 04H CEH 19 T.M.D.S Data 0 Shield
BRIGHT DFH 80H 60H OAH 01H 05H CFH 20 No connection
ZOOM DFH 80H 60H 51H 01H 03H 14H 22 T.M.D.S Clock Shield
ANAMORPHIC DFH 80H 60H 51H 01H 05H 16H 23 T.M.D.S Clock +
14 : 9 DFH 80H 60H 51H 01H 09H 1AH 24 T.M.D.S Clock -
2.35 : 1 DFH 80H 60H 51H 01H 0AH 1BH


External Control Codes if needed. 30
4-38
CONFIDENTIAL
Troubleshooting
performance.
power.
outlet?
or off mode?
centered.
adjust properly.
control is on.
31
4-39
32
4-40
CONFIDENTIAL
33
4-41
CONFIDENTIAL
34
4-42
CONFIDENTIAL
Limited Warranty Plasma Monitors
NEC Solutions, Inc. (hereinafter NEC Solutions) warrants HOW YOU CAN GET WARRANTY SERVICE
this product to be free from defects in material and 1. To obtain service on your product, consult the dealer from whom
workmanship under the following terms and, subject to you purchased the product.
the conditions set forth below, agrees to repair or replace 2. Whenever warranty service is required, the original dated invoice
(at NEC Solutions’ sole option) any part of the enclosed (or a copy) must be presented as proof of warranty coverage.
Please also include in any mailing your name, address and a
unit which proves defective. Replacement parts or products
description of the problem(s).
may be new or refurbished and will meet specifications of
3. For the name of the nearest NEC Solutions authorized service
the original parts or products. center, call NEC Solutions at 800-836-0655.
HOW LONG IS THE WARRANTY? LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY

Parts and labor are warranted for (1) one year from the Except for the obligations specifically set forth in this
date of the first customer purchase. warranty statement, we will not be liable for any direct,
indirect, special, incidental, consequential, or other types
WHO IS PROTECTED? of damages, whether based on contract, tort, or any other
This warranty may be enforced only by the first purchaser. legal theory, whether or not we have been advised of the
possibility of such damages. This warranty is in lieu of all
WHAT IS COVERED AND WHAT IS NOT COVERED other warranties expressed or implied, including, but not
Except as specified below, this warranty covers all defects limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability or
in material or workmanship in this product. The following fitness for a particular purpose.
are not covered by the warranty:
1. Any product which is not distributed in the U.S.A. or Canada by
EXCLUSION OF DAMAGES
NEC Solutions or which is not purchased in the U.S.A. or Canada
NEC Solutions’ liability for any defective product is
from an authorized NEC Solutions dealer.
2. Any product of which the serial number has been defaced, limited to the repair or replacement of the product at our
modified or removed. option. NEC Solutions shall not be liable for:
3. Damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from: 1. Damage to other property caused by any defects in this
a. Accident, misuse, abuse, neglect, fire, water, lightning or other product, damages based upon inconvenience, loss of use of
acts of nature, unauthorized product modification, or failure the product, loss of time, commercial loss; or
to follow instructions supplied with the product. 2. Any other damages whether incidental, consequential or
b. Repair or attempted repair by anyone not authorized by NEC otherwise. Some states do not allow limitation on how long
Solutions. an implied warranty lasts and/or do not allow the exclusion
c. Any shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the
carrier). above limitations and exclusions may not apply to you.
d. Removal or installation of the product.
e. Any other cause which does not relate to a product defect. HOW STATE LAW RELATES TO THE WARRANTY
f. Burns or residual images upon the phosphor of the panel. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may
4. Cartons, carrying cases, batteries, external cabinets, magnetic also have other rights which vary from state to state.
tapes, or any accessories used in connection with the product.
5. Service outside of the U.S.A. and Canada. FOR MORE INFORMATION,
TELEPHONE 800-836-0655
WHAT WE WILL PAY FOR AND WHAT WE WILL NEC SOLUTIONS (AMERICA), INC.
NOT PAY FOR 1250 N. Arlington Heights Road, Suite 400
We will pay labor and material expenses for covered items, Itasca, Illinois 60143-1248
but we will not pay for the following:
1. Removal or installation charges. Note: All products returned to NEC Solutions (America),
Inc. for service MUST have prior approval. To get
2. Costs of initial technical adjustments (set-up), including approval, call NEC Solutions (America), Inc. at 800-836-
adjustment of user controls. These costs are the 0655.
responsibility of the NEC Solutions dealer from whom
the product was purchased.
3. Shipping charges.

NEC and the NEC logo are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation
4-43
CONFIDENTIAL

Printed in Japan
7S801441
4-44
CONFIDENTIAL
USER' S MANUAL
PX-50XR4G
Model Information
4-1
CONFIDENTIAL

Screen Size 1106(H)622(V) mm

43.5"(H)24.5"(V) inches 38
diagonal 50" 1222 (48.1") (1.5") 58
(2.3")
Aspect Ratio 16 : 9
Pixel Pitch 0.81(H)0.81(V) mm 1106 (43.5")
0.032"(H)0.032"(V) inches
622 (24.5")
Signals
736 (30")
(automatic : step scan) 96
Input Signals RGB, NTSC (3.58/4.43), PAL (B,G,M,N), (3.8")
PAL60, SECAM, HD*1, DVD*1, DTV*1 Units are in mm
Bezel color is silver.
Input Terminals (inch)
Visual 1 (Analog) mini D-sub 15-pin1 notice.
Visual 2 (Analog) BNC (R, G, B, H/CS, V)1*2
Visual 3 (Digital) DVI-D 24-pin1*3 *1 HD/DVD/DTV input signals supported on this
Video system
Visual 2 RCA-pin1
Visual 3 S-Video: DIN 4-pin1 525P (60 Hz) 525I (60 Hz)
DVD/HD/DTV 576P (50 Hz) 576I (50 Hz)
Visual 2 BNC (Y, PB[CB], PR[CR])1*1, *2 720P (60 Hz) 1035I (60 Hz)
Visual 3 DVI-D 24-pin1*3 1080I (50 Hz) 1080I (60 Hz)
Audio Stereo RCA3 (Selectable) 2
* The 5-BNC connectors are used as RGB/PC2 and
External Control D-sub 9-pin1 (RS-232C)
HD/DVD2 input. Select one of them under “BNC
Sound output 9W+9W at 6 ohm
INPUT”.
Current Rating 7.6 A (maximum) *3 Compatable with HDCP.
Power Consumption 435W (typical) Supported Signals
• 640480P @ 59.94/60Hz • 19201080I @ 50Hz
Dimensions 1222 (W)736 (H)96(D) mm
• 1280720P @ 59.94/60Hz • 720576P @ 50Hz
48.1 (W)30 (H)3.8 (D) inches
• 19201080I @ 59.94/60Hz • 1440 (720)576P @ 50Hz
Weight 44.5 kg / 98.1 lbs (without stand) • 720480P @ 59.94/60Hz
Environmental Considerations • 1440 (720)480I @ 59.94/60Hz
Operating Temperature 0°C to 40°C / 32°F to 104°F Note: In some cases a signal on the plasma monitor may not be displayed
Humidity 20 to 80% (no condensation) properly. The problem may be an inconsistency with standards from
Altitude 0 to 2800 m / 0 to 9180 feet the source equipment (DVD, Set-top box, etc...). If you do experience
Storage Temperature -10°C to 50°C / 14°F to 122°F such a problem please contact your dealer and also the manufacturer of
Humidity 10 to 90% (no condensation) the source equipment.
Altitude 0 to 3000 m / 0 to 9840 feet *English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Swedish,
Front Panel User Controls Power on/off, Input source select, Chinese, Russian
Volume up/down/ OSM control Other Features Motion compensated 3D Scan Converter (NTSC,
Remote Control Functions Power on/off, Input source select, OSM PAL, 480I, 576I, 525I, 625I, 1035I, 1080I), 2-3
control,Volume up/down, Cursor (UP, pull down Converter (NTSC, 480I, 525I, 1035I,
DOWN,LEFT, RIGHT), Zoom up/down, 1080I (60Hz)), 2-2 pull down Converter (PAL,
Split screen buttons 576I, 625I, NTSC, 480I, 525I), Digital Zoom
OSM Functions PICTURE (PICTURE MEMORY/CONTRAST/ Function (100-900% Selectable), Self Diagnosis,
BRIGHTNESS/SHARPNESS/COLOR/TINT/ Image Burn reduction tools (PEAK BRIGHT,
NR/COLOR TEMP./WHITE BALANCE/ INVERSE, WHITE, ORBITER, SCREEN
GAMMA/LOW TONE/SET UP LEVEL/COLOR WIPER), Color Temperature select (high/middle/
TUNE/CINEMA MODE/PICTURE MODE), middle low/low, user has 4 memories), Auto
AUDIO (BASS/TREBLE/BALANCE/AUDIO Picture, Input Skip, Color Tune, Low Tone (3
INPUT1/AUDIO INPUT2/AUDIO INPUT3), mode), Gamma Correction (4 mode), Plug and
IMAGE ADJUST (ASPECT MODE/V- play (DDC1, DDC2b, RGB3: DDC2b only),
POSITION/H-POSITION/V-HEIGHT/H- Split screen operations
WIDTH/AUTO PICTURE/FINE PICTURE/ Accessories Remote control with two AAA batteries, Power
PICTURE ADJ.), cord, Manuals, Safety metal fittings,
SET UP (LANGUAGE*/BNC INPUT/D-SUB Ferrite cores, Bands, Cable clamps, HDMI-DVI
INPUT/HD SELECT/RGB SELECT/DVI SET cable
UP/COLOR SYSTEM/BACK GROUND/GRAY Regulations Meets EMC Directive
LEVEL/S1/S2/DISPLAY OSM/OSM ADJ./ALL (EN55022 Class B, EN55024, EN61000-3-2,
RESET), FUNCTION (POWER MGT./INPUT EN61000-3-3)
SKIP/SUB. P DETECT/ZOOM NAV/PICTURE Meets Low Voltage Directive
FREEZE/PDP SAVER [PEAK BRIGHT / (EN60950-1 and EN60065, IEC60950-1 and
ORBITER / INVERSE/WHITE / SCREEN IEC60065, SEMKO Approved)
WIPER / SOFT FOCUS / OSM ORBITER / OSM Meets AS/NZS CISPR 22:2002 Class B
CONTRAST]), SIGNAL INFO.
E-1
4-2
CONFIDENTIAL

• When the screen mode is ANAMORPHIC, each signal is converted to a 1365 dots768 lines signal. (Except for *3)
Model Dots lines
frequency frequency Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical NORMAL ANAMORPHIC select*5 DVI Memory
640400 70.1 31.5 NEG NEG YES YES YES*2 YES –– NO 4
640480 59.9 31.5 NEG NEG YES YES YES YES STILL YES 5
72.8 37.9 NEG NEG YES YES YES YES –– YES 7
75.0 37.5 NEG NEG YES YES YES YES STILL YES 8
848480 60.0 31.0 POS POS YES YES –– YES WIDE2 YES 19
852480*1 60.0 31.7 NEG NEG YES YES –– YES WIDE1 YES 17
800600 56.3 35.2 POS POS YES YES YES YES STILL YES 11
60.3 37.9 POS POS YES YES YES YES STILL YES 12
72.2 48.1 POS POS YES YES YES YES –– YES 13
IBM PC/AT*8 99.8 63.0 POS POS YES YES YES YES –– YES 43
compatible 120.0 75.7 POS POS YES YES YES YES –– YES 44
computers 1024768 60.0 48.4 NEG NEG YES YES YES*3 YES STILL YES 24
70.1 56.5 NEG NEG YES YES YES*3 YES –– YES 25
75.0 60.0 POS POS YES YES YES*3 YES STILL YES 26
85.0 68.7 POS POS YES YES YES*3 YES –– YES 27
1280768 56.2 45.1 POS POS YES YES –– YES WIDE1 NO 52
59.8 48.0 POS NEG YES YES –– YES WIDE3 YES 80
1280768*9 69.8 56.0 NEG POS YES YES –– YES WIDE1 YES 66
1360765 60.0 47.7 POS POS YES YES –– YES*3 WIDE1 NO 22
1360768 60.0 47.7 POS POS YES YES –– YES*3 WIDE1 YES 22
1376768 59.9 48.3 NEG POS YES YES –– YES WIDE2 YES 53
12801024 60.0 64.0 POS POS YES YES YES*4 YES STILL YES 29
100.1 108.5 POS POS YES YES YES*4 YES –– NO 47
16001200 60.0 75.0 POS POS YES YES YES YES –– YES 54
65.0 81.3 POS POS YES YES YES YES –– NO 55
19201200*9 60.0 74.6 NEG NEG YES YES –– YES WIDE2 –– 81
19201200RB*9 60.0 74.0 NEG NEG YES YES –– YES WIDE3 YES 88
Apple 640480 66.7 35.0 Sync on G Sync on G –– –– YES YES –– NO 6
Macintosh*6 *8 832624 74.6 49.7 Sync on G Sync on G –– –– YES YES –– NO 16
1024768 74.9 60.2 Sync on G Sync on G –– –– YES*3 YES WIDE1 NO 28
1152870 75.1 68.7 Sync on G Sync on G –– –– YES YES WIDE1 NO 39
1440900*9 60.0 56.0 NEG NEG YES YES –– YES –– YES 89
Work Station 12801024 60.0 64.6 NEG NEG YES YES YES*4 YES –– YES 29
(EWS4800)*8 71.2 75.1 NEG NEG YES YES YES*4 YES –– YES 48
Work Station(HP)*8 12801024 72.0 78.1 –– –– –– –– YES*4 YES –– YES 59
Work Station 1152900 66.0 61.8 C Sync C Sync –– –– YES YES –– YES 60
(SUN)*8 76.0 71.7 C Sync C Sync –– –– YES YES –– YES 61
12801024 76.1 81.1 C Sync C Sync –– –– YES*4 YES –– YES 30
Work Station 1024768 60.0 49.7 –– –– –– –– YES*3 YES –– YES 62
(SGI) 12801024 60.0 63.9 –– –– –– –– YES*4 YES –– YES 29
IDC-3000G
PAL625P 768576 50.0 31.4 NEG NEG YES YES YES*7 YES*7 –– NO 31
NTSC525P 640480 59.9 31.5 NEG NEG YES YES YES*7 YES*7 MOTION NO 32
E-2
4-3
CONFIDENTIAL
*2 Display only 640 lines with the screen center of the vertical orientation located at the center.
NOTE:
or equivalent.

NOTE:
ferrite cores. If you do not do this, this monitor will not
conform to mandatory CE or C-Tick standards.
Set the ferrite cores on both ends of the DVI cable (not
supplied), and both ends of the power cable (supplied).
DVI cable.
band band Connector

core (large)
core (large)
E-3
4-4
CONFIDENTIAL
Operation Manual
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
У
4-5

avoid any problems.
WARNING
E-2
4-6
CONFIDENTIAL
Contents
Installation .................................................... E-4 Setting the signal and black level for DVI signal .... E-22
Ventilation Requirements for enclosure mounting ....... E-4 Setting the video signal format ............................... E-22
How to use the safety metal fittings and the screws for Setting the background color when no signal is
safety metal fittings ............................................. E-4 being input .......................................................... E-22
Cable Management ............................................... E-5 Setting the gray level for the sides of the screen ..... E-23
How to use the remote control ................................. E-5 Setting the screen size for S1/S2 video input .......... E-23
Battery Installation and Replacement ....................... E-5 Turning on/off the menu display ............................ E-23
Operating Range ...................................................... E-5 Setting the position of the menu ............................. E-23
Handling the remote control ..................................... E-5 Resetting to the default values ................................ E-23
Function Settings Menu ......................................... E-24
Part Names and Function ................................ E-6 Setting the power management for computer images.... E-24
Front View ........................................................... E-6 POWER/STANDBY indicator ............................... E-24
Rear View/ Terminal Board .................................... E-7 Setting the Input Skip ............................................. E-24
Remote Control ..................................................... E-8 Erasing the sub screen image when there is no input
Basic Operations ............................................. E-9 signal ................................................................... E-24
POWER ............................................................... E-9 Displaying the entire image during DIGITAL ZOOM
To turn the unit ON and OFF: .................................. E-9 operations ............................................................ E-25
VOLUME ............................................................. E-9 Displaying still images in the sub screen ................ E-25
To adjust the sound volume: ..................................... E-9 Reducing burn-in of the screen .............................. E-25
MUTE .................................................................. E-9 Signal Information Menu ....................................... E-27
To mute the audio: ................................................... E-9 Checking the frequencies, polarities of input signals,
DISPLAY ............................................................... E-9 and resolution ...................................................... E-27
To check the settings: ............................................... E-9 External Control ........................................... E-28
DIGITAL ZOOM .................................................... E-9 Application ......................................................... E-28
OFF TIMER ........................................................... E-9 Connections ........................................................ E-28
To set the off timer: .................................................. E-9 Type of connector: D-Sub 9-pin male .................... E-28
To check the remaining time: ................................... E-9 Communication Parameters ................................... E-28
To cancel the off timer: ............................................ E-9 External Control Codes (Reference) ........................ E-28
WIDE Operations ........................................... E-10 Pin Assignments ........................................... E-28
Wide Screen Operation (manual) .......................... E-10 mini D-Sub 15-pin connector (Analog) ................... E-28
When viewing videos or digital video discs ........... E-10 DVI-D 24-pin connector (Digital) ............................ E-28
Troubleshooting ............................................ E-29
SPLIT SCREEN Operations ............................... E-12
Showing a couple of pictures on the screen
at the same time ............................................... E-12 Contents of the Package
Operations in the Picture-in-picture mode .............. E-13 䡺 Plasma monitor
Selecting the input signals to be displayed ............. E-13 䡺 Power cord
Zooming up pictures .............................................. E-13
Adjusting the OSM controls ................................... E-13 䡺 Remote control with two AAA Batteries
OSM (On Screen Menu) Controls ..................... E-14 䡺 Manuals (Model Information and Operation)
Menu Operations ................................................. E-14 䡺 Safety metal fittings*
Menu Tree ........................................................... E-15 䡺 Ferrite cores, bands
Picture Settings Menu ............................................ E-17
Storing picture settings ........................................... E-17 䡺 Cable clamps
Adjusting the picture .............................................. E-17 䡺 HDMI-DVI cable
Reducing noise in the picture ................................. E-17
Setting the color temperature ................................. E-18 * Contents will differ according to the model.
Adjusting the color to the desired level .................. E-18 * These are fittings for fastening the unit to a wall to prevent
Changing the Gamma Curve .................................. E-18 tipping due to external shock when using the stand
Making the Low Tone adjustments ........................ E-18 (optional). Fasten the safety fittings to the holes in the
Adjusting the pedestal level (black level) ............... E-19 back of the monitor using the safety fitting mount screws
Adjusting the colors ............................................... E-19 (see page E-4).
Setting the picture to suit the movie ....................... E-19
of the room .......................................................... E-19 Options
Audio Settings Menu ............................................ E-20 • Wall mount unit
Adjusting the treble, bass and left/right balance • Ceiling mount unit
and audio input select .......................................... E-20 • Tilt mount unit
Setting the allocation of the audio connectors ........ E-20 • Stand
Image Adjust Settings Menu .................................. E-20 • Attachable speakers
Adjusting the Position, Size, Fine Picture,
Picture Adj .......................................................... E-20
SET UP Settings Menu ........................................... E-21
Setting the RGB1 connector ................................... E-21
screen size ........................................................... E-21
screen .................................................................. E-21 E-3
4-7
CONFIDENTIAL
Installation
* See page E-3.
dealer.
to the installer.


50mm (2") 50mm (2")
50mm (2")
Screw hole
Wall
Screw or Hook etc.

(Not supplied)

50mm (2")
Metal chain
(Not supplied)
Table Top
E-4
4-8
CONFIDENTIAL

Using the cable-clamps provided with the plasma display, * Use the remote control within a distance of about 7 m/
30°.
Back of the unit
mounting holes
To attach
Approx.
1. 2. 7m /23ft
clamp
cables
mounting hole
To detach

into a fire.

inside the case.
E-5
4-9
CONFIDENTIAL
Front View
VOLUME INPUT SELECT

VOLUME INPUT SELECT

7 6 5 4 1 3 2

u MENU/ENTER
WARNING
“DVI SET UP”.
(OSM) mode.
E-6
4-10
CONFIDENTIAL
C
D
E
I A B
A AC IN G RGB1 (D-Sub)
here.
B EXT SPEAKER L and R
Connect speakers (optional) here. Maintain the correct H DVD3/HD3, RGB3 (DVI)
polarity. Connect the (positive) speaker wire to the Connect a digital signal (TMDS) from a source with a
EXT SPEAKER terminal and the (negative) DVI output.
speaker wire to the EXT SPEAKER terminal on This input can be set for use with an RGB3 or DVD3/
both LEFT and RIGHT channels. HD3 source. (see page E-22)
I EXTERNAL CONTROL (D-Sub)
C VIDEO1, 2, 3 (BNC, RCA, S-Video) This terminal is used when operating and controlling
Connect VCR’s, DVD’s or Video Cameras, etc. here. the monitor externally (by RS-232C).
D AUDIO1, AUDIO2, AUDIO3

These are audio input terminals. Information
The input is selectable. Set which video image to allot • For Y/CB/Cr, connect to the DVD1 or DVD2
them from the audio menu screen. terminals.
• For SCART, this unit provides three ways to connect:
E DVD1 / HD1 · SCART1: Connect R/G/B to the DVD2 terminals
Connect DVD’s, High Definition or Laser Discs, etc. and composite sync. to the HD terminal.
here. · SCART2: Connect R/G/B to the DVD2 terminals
and composite sync. to the VIDEO1 terminal.
F DVD2/ HD2, RGB2 · SCART3: Connect R/G/B + composite sync. to the
DVD2/ HD2: You can connect DVDs, High RGB1 terminal.
here.
RGB or component source. (see page
E-21)
RGB2: You can connect an analog RGB signal
E-7
4-11
CONFIDENTIAL

Mutes the audio.
o VOLUME (+ /–)
!0 ZOOM (+ /–)
!1 SINGLE
!2 SIDE BY SIDE
side-by-side mode.
!4 ACTIVE SELECT
When the PICTURE FREEZE function is operating,
this button can be used to display still images on the
sub screen.
!5 VIDEO1, 2, 3
!6 DVD/HD1, 2, 3
!7 PC/RGB
!8 PICTURE MEMORY
1 to 6.
q POWER ON/STANDBY
w OFF TIMER
e DISPLAY
r WIDE
ratio.
t MENU/ENTER
y CURSOR (▲ / ▼ / / )
u EXIT
menu to return to the previous menu. E-8
4-12
CONFIDENTIAL
Basic Operations
POWER OFF TIMER
VOLUME
MUTE seconds.
DISPLAY
pressed.
the menu turns off.
the picture.

glass. ( )
2. Press the EXIT button to delete the pointer. After the power is turned off with the off timer ...
E-9
4-13
CONFIDENTIAL
WIDE Operations
right margins.
ANAMORPHIC ↔ 2.35:1 • This feature is available when the input signal is video,
NORMAL ↔ ANAMORPHIC (525P or 625P signal from a scan converter).
14:9 size screen

ANAMORPHIC size screen component (480I, 480P, 576I, 576P) or RGB (525P or 625P
Note:

STADIUM size screen

wide screen.
ZOOM size screen

4-14
CONFIDENTIAL

Switch to the wide screen mode to expand the 4 : 3 image See page E-2 of Model Information for details on the
put
When displaying enhanced split screen: referring to the“Table of Signals Supported” on page
NORMAL ↔ ANAMORPHIC E-2 of Model Information.
NORMAL size screen (4:3 or SXGA 5:4) trademarks of IBM, Inc. of the United States.
Note:
ZOOM size screen
E-11
4-15


A
B A B A B

button button
VIDEO1

SINGLE
A SINGLE
button
A
B A B
A B

SIDE BY SIDE
VIDEO1 RGB/PC1
button
VIDEO1 RGB/PC1
cursor button.
A B
Sub
screen
PICTURE IN
PICTURE
button A B
Note:
same height. button
RGB/PC1 VIDEO1
Information
VIDEO1 VIDEO2 VIDEO3 HD/DVD1 HD/DVD2 RGB/PC1 HD/DVD3 SCART1~3
RGB2 RGB3 To make the desired picture active, press the ACTIVE
Pictures VIDEO1
displayed on VIDEO2
SELECT button.
the left/sub VIDEO3
screen HD/DVD1
VIDEO1 RGB/PC1
RGB2 3:
RGB/PC1 1,2:
3:
HD/DVD3 A B
RGB3
SCART1~3 1,2: 1,2:
3: 3:
Split screen operations may not function ACTIVE SELECT

VIDEO1 RGB/PC1
A B
E-12
4-16
CONFIDENTIAL


A
VIDEO1 RGB/PC2 button VIDEO1 A
RGB/PC2
B
button
picture active.
button
2. Use the ZOOM (
A
B B A

button
Bottom Left Bottom Right Adjusting the OSM controls
picture active.
VIDEO1 RGB/PC1
MENU.
A
VIDEO1 RGB/PC1 page E-14.
A
B Note:
A
B
A
B
button button

SELECT button.
A
B ACTIVE A
B
SELECT
button
E-13
4-17
CONFIDENTIAL
Menu Operations
selected items.
MAIN MENU
PICTURE SET UP
AUDIO FUNCTION

PICTURE
CONTRAST
BRIGHTNESS
SHARPNESS
COLOR
TINT R G
NR : OFF
GAMMA : 2.2
LOW TONE : AUTO
SET UP LEVEL : 0%
COLOR TUNE
CINEMA MODE : ON

CONTRAST 10

main menu.

button.
E-14
4-18
CONFIDENTIAL
Menu Tree
PICTURE PICTURE MEMORY OFF/MEMORY1-6 NO E-17
CONTRAST ←→ 0←52→72 YES E-17
COLOR ←→ 0←32→64 YES E-17
TINT R←→G 0←32→64 YES E-17
COLOR TEMP. LOW/MIDDLE LOW/MIDDLE/HIGH YES E-18
GAMMA 2.1←2.2←2.3→2.4 YES E-18
SET UP LEVEL 0%←→3.75%←→7.5% YES E-19
CINEMA MODE ON←→OFF YES E-19
PICTURE MODE DEFAULT/THEATER1/THEATER2/NORMAL/BRIGHT YES E-19
TREBLE ←→ 0←13→26 YES E-20
IMAGE ADJUST ASPECT MODE ZOOM/NORMAL/ANAMORPHIC/STADIUM/14:9/2.35:1 NO E-20
H-POSITION ←→ -128←0→+127 YES E-20
AUTO PICTURE ON←→OFF*2 NO E-20
PICTURE ADJ.*1 ←→ *2 0←→128 YES E-20
SET UP LANGUAGE ENGLISH/DEUTSCH/FRANÇAIS/ESPAÑOL/ITALIANO/SVENSKA/ /У NO E-21
BNC INPUT RGB←→COMPONENT←→SCART1←→SCART2 YES E-21
D-SUB INPUT RGB←→SCART3 YES E-21
HD SELECT 1080I/1035I/540P NO E-21
COLOR SYSTEM AUTO/PAL/PAL-M/PAL-N/PAL 60/SECAM/4.43 NTSC/3.58NTSC NO E-22
BACK GROUND BLACK/GRAY YES E-22
DISPLAY OSM ON←→OFF YES E-23
OSM ADJ. TOP LEFT←→TOP CENTER←→TOP RIGHT←→BTM LEFT←→BTM CENTER←→BTM RIGHT YES E-23
ALL RESET ON←→OFF — E-23
E-15
4-19
CONFIDENTIAL
FUNCTION POWER MGT. ON←→OFF YES E-24
INPUT SKIP ON←→OFF YES E-24
SUB. P DETECT AUTO←→OFF YES E-24
ZOOM NAV OFF←→S BY S←→BTM LEFT←→BTM RIGHT←→TOP RIGHT←→TOP LEFT YES E-25
PICTURE FREEZE OFF←→S BY S1←→S BY S2←→BTM LEFT←→BTM RIGHT←→TOP RIGHT←→TOP LEFT YES E-25
PDP SAVER MANUAL/AUTO YES E-25
PEAK BRIGHT 100%/75%/50%/25% YES E-26
ORBITER OFF/AUTO1/AUTO2 YES E-26
INVERSE/WHITE OFF/INVERSE/WHITE YES E-26
SCREEN WIPER ON/OFF YES E-26
SOFT FOCUS OFF/LEVEL1-4 YES E-27
OSM ORBITER ON/OFF YES E-27
OSM CONTRAST LOW/NORMAL YES E-27
SIGNAL INFO. — E-27

*2 RGB/PC only
Information
E-16
4-20
CONFIDENTIAL

CONTRAST
: OFF
BRIGHTNESS
COLOR
TINT R G
CONTRAST 10
LOW TONE : AUTO

COLOR TUNE
MEMORY2
SIGNAL : —
INPUT : — MEMORY5
INPUT : — MEMORY6
NOTE : —
NEXT PAGE
on inputs.
Setting the memory
CONTRAST
SHARPNESS
TINT R G

: MIDDLE
LOW TONE
: 2.2
: AUTO
COLOR TUNE
: 0%
PICTURE MODE
: ON
: NORMAL

NR
E-17
4-21
CONFIDENTIAL

PICTURE PICTURE
CONTRAST CONTRAST
SHARPNESS SHARPNESS
COLOR COLOR
TINT R G TINT R G
NR : OFF NR : OFF
HIGH: Bluer
temperature
PICTURE
CONTRAST
SHARPNESS
TINT R G
GAIN RED
LOW TONE : 2
GAIN GREEN
BIAS RED COLOR TUNE
RESET : OFF
E-18
4-22
CONFIDENTIAL
PICTURE
CONTRAST
SHARPNESS
COLOR PICTURE
NR : OFF CONTRAST
COLOR TUNE NR : OFF
SET UP LEVEL : 0%
COLOR TUNE

0%: Normal status

the display.
COLOR TUNE
“THEATER1”.
RED Y M PICTURE
BLUE M C CONTRAST
BRIGHTNESS
YELLOW G R
SHARPNESS
MAGENTA R B
COLOR
CYAN B G TINT R G

GAMMA : 2.2
LOW TONE : AUTO
SET UP LEVEL : 0%

CINEMA MODE : ON
COLOR TUNE settings


room.
NORMAL.
default settings.
E-19
4-23
CONFIDENTIAL

AUDIO position.
BASS
TREBLE The mode switches as follows each time the 䊴 or 䊳 button is
BALANCE
pressed:
AUDIO INPUT3 : RGB1
at the factory.
IMAGE ADJUST
H-POSITION
H-WIDTH
AUTO PICTURE : OFF

V-POSITION
input. H-POSITION
V-HEIGHT
AUTO PICTURE : OFF
PICTURE ADJ.
AUDIO
BASS
TREBLE them.
BALANCE
Information
䡵 AUDIO INPUT
image.
image.
image.
E-20
4-24
CONFIDENTIAL
SET UP Settings Menu Information

Setting the language for the menus 䡵 D-SUB INPUT Settings
The menu display can be set to one of eight languages.
RGB: Use the D-SUB terminal for RGB input.
Example: Setting the menu display to “DEUTSCH” SCART3: Use the D-SUB terminal for RGB signal fed
On “LANGUAGE” of “SET UP” menu, select “DEUTSCH”. from SCART. See page E-7.
SET UP
LANGUAGE : DEUTSCH
: COMPONENT
BNC INPUT
D-SUB INPUT : RGB screen size
HD SELECT : 1080I
RGB SELECT : AUTO Use this procedure to set whether the number of vertical
DVI SET UP
COLOR SYSTEM : AUTO
BACK GROUND : GRAY or 540P.
GRAY LEVEL : 3
S1/S2 : OFF Example: Setting the “HD SELECT” mode to “1035I”
DISPLAY OSM : ON
OSM ADJ. : TOP LEFT
ALL RESET : OFF
On “HD SELECT” of “SET UP” menu, select “1035I”.
SET UP
LANGUAGE : ENGLISH
Information D-SUB INPUT : RGB
HD SELECT : 1035I
䡵 Language settings RGB SELECT : AUTO
DVI SET UP
ENGLISH ........ English ITALIANO ........ Italian COLOR SYSTEM : AUTO
DEUTSCH ....... German SVENSKA ....... Swedish BACK GROUND

GRAY LEVEL
: GRAY
: 3
FRANÇAIS ...... French ................... Chinese S1/S2 : OFF
DISPLAY OSM : ON
ESPAÑOL ....... Spanish У ............ Russian OSM ADJ. : TOP LEFT
ALL RESET : OFF
Setting the BNC connectors
Select whether to set the input of the 5 BNC connectors to
RGB and component or SCART1, 2. Information
Example: Set the BNC INPUT mode to “RGB” 䡵 HD SELECT modes
On “BNC INPUT” of “SET UP” menu, select “RGB”. automatically.
LANGUAGE
SET UP
: ENGLISH
1080I: Standard digital broadcasts
BNC INPUT : RGB 1035I: Japanese “High Vision” signal format
D-SUB INPUT : RGB
HD SELECT : 1080I 540P: Special Digital broadcasts (for example :
RGB SELECT : AUTO
DVI SET UP
DTC100)
COLOR SYSTEM : AUTO
BACK GROUND
GRAY LEVEL
: GRAY
: 3
S1/S2 : OFF select screen
DISPLAY OSM : ON
OSM ADJ. : TOP LEFT With the computer image, select the RGB Select mode
ALL RESET : OFF
digital broadcast.
Information Example: Setting the “RGB SELECT” mode to
䡵 BNC INPUT Settings “MOTION ”
RGB: Use the 5BNC terminals for RGB input. On “RGB SELECT” of “SET UP” menu, select “MOTION”.
COMPONENT: Use the 3BNC terminals for SET UP
LANGUAGE : ENGLISH
component input. BNC INPUT : COMPONENT
SCART1: Use the 4BNC terminals for RGB with D-SUB INPUT
HD SELECT
: RGB
: 1080I
composite sync. See page E-7. RGB SELECT : MOTION
DVI SET UP 1024ⴒ768
SCART2: Use the 3BNC terminals for RGB and the COLOR SYSTEM : AUTO
BACK GROUND : GRAY
VIDEO1 terminal for composite sync. See page E-7. GRAY LEVEL : 3
S1/S2 : OFF
Setting the RGB1 connector DISPLAY OSM : ON
OSM ADJ. : TOP LEFT
Select one of the signals being transmitted to the RGB1 ALL RESET : OFF
terminal.
Information
On “D-SUB INPUT” of “SET UP” menu, select “SCART3”. 䡵 RGB SELECT modes
LANGUAGE
SET UP
: ENGLISH
BNC INPUT : COMPONENT display the following signals correctly.
HD SELECT : 1080I AUTO: Select the suitable mode for the specifications
RGB SELECT : AUTO
DVI SET UP
COLOR SYSTEM
BACK GROUND
: AUTO
: GRAY
GRAY LEVEL : 3 Information.
S1/S2 : OFF
DISPLAY OSM : ON STILL: To display VESA standard signals. (Use this
OSM ADJ. : TOP LEFT
ALL RESET : OFF
mode for a still image from a computer.)
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN MOTION: The video signal (from a scan converter)
E-21
4-25
will be converted to RGB signals to make the picture Setting the video signal format
more easily viewable. (Use this mode for a motion Use these operations to set the color systems of composite
image from a computer.) video signals or Y/C input signals.
WIDE1: When an 852 dot⳯ 480 line signal with a Example: Setting the color system to “3.58 NTSC”
be compressed horizontally. To prevent this, set RGB On “COLOR SYSTEM” of “SET UP” menu, select
SELECT to WIDE1. “3.58NTSC”.
SET UP
WIDE2: When an 848 dot⳯ 480 line signal with a LANGUAGE : ENGLISH
horizontal frequency of 31.0 kHz is input, the image BNC INPUT : COMPONENT
D-SUB INPUT : RGB
may be compressed horizontally. To prevent this, set HD SELECT : 1080I
RGB SELECT : AUTO
RGB SELECT to WIDE2. DVI SET UP
WIDE3: When an 1920 dot⳯ 1200 line signal with a COLOR SYSTEM
BACK GROUND
: 3.58NTSC
: GRAY
horizontal frequency of 74.0 kHz is input, the image GRAY LEVEL : 3
S1/S2 : OFF
may be compressed horizontally. To prevent this, set DISPLAY OSM : ON
OSM ADJ. : TOP LEFT
RGB SELECT to WIDE3. ALL RESET : OFF
DTV: Set this mode when watching digital broadcasting SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
(480P).
See page E-2 of Model Information for the details of Information
the above settings. 䡵 Video signal formats
signal
DVD) and set the black level.
Example: Setting the “PLUG/PLBH±-mode to “STB/ United Kingdom and Germany.
DVD” SECAM: This is the standard format used mainly in
On “SET UP” menu, select “DVI SET UP”, then press the France and Russia.
MENU/ENTER button. 4.43 NTSC, PAL60: This format is used for videos in
The “DVI SET UP” screen appears. countries using PAL and SECAM video signals.
On “PLUG/PLAY” of “DVI SET UP” menu, select “STB/ 3.58 NTSC: This is the standard format used mainly
DVD”. in the United States and Japan.
DVI SET UP
PLUG/PLAY : STB/DVD Brazil.
BLACK LEVEL : HIGH
Argentina.

Setting the background color when no signal
is being input
The color displayed on the background when there is no
Information
signal can be set to gray.
䡵 PLUG/PLAY settings
Example: Setting “BACK GROUND” to “BLACK”
BLACK LEVEL is set to “LOW” automatically. On “BACK GROUND” of “SET UP” menu, select
STB/DVD: When connected to the SET TOP BOX, “BLACK”.
DVD etc. SET UP
LANGUAGE : ENGLISH
BLACK LEVEL is set to “HIGH” automatically. BNC INPUT : COMPONENT
䡵 BLACK LEVEL settings D-SUB INPUT : RGB

HD SELECT : 1080I
RGB SELECT : AUTO
LOW: When connected to the PC signal. DVI SET UP
HIGH: When connected to the SET TOP BOX, DVD COLOR SYSTEM
BACK GROUND
: AUTO
: BLACK
etc. Change “HIGH” into “LOW” if the black level GRAY LEVEL : 3
S1/S2 : OFF
appears gray. DISPLAY OSM : ON
OSM ADJ. : TOP LEFT
ALL RESET : OFF
Information
䡵 BACK GROUND Settings
BLACK: Sets the background color to black.
GRAY: Sets the background color to gray.
E-22
4-26
CONFIDENTIAL

Information
LANGUAGE : ENGLISH
HD SELECT : 1080I
RGB SELECT : AUTO
DVI SET UP
: AUTO
screen.
COLOR SYSTEM
BACK GROUND
GRAY LEVEL
: GRAY
: 5
Example: Set the position to “TOP CEN”
S1/S2 : OFF
DISPLAY OSM : ON On “OSM ADJ.” of “SET UP” menu, select “TOP CEN”.
OSM ADJ. : TOP LEFT
LANGUAGE : ENGLISH
D-SUB INPUT : RGB
HD SELECT : 1080I
DVI SET UP
BACK GROUND : GRAY
S1/S2 : OFF
ALL RESET : OFF

Information
LEFT CENTER RIGHT
BTM BTM BTM
LEFT CENTER RIGHT
SET UP
LANGUAGE : ENGLISH
HD SELECT : 1080I
RGB SELECT : AUTO
COLOR SYSTEM : AUTO
GRAY LEVEL : 3
S1/S2 : AUTO Refer to page E-15 for items to be reset.
DISPLAY OSM : ON
OSM ADJ.
ALL RESET
: TOP LEFT
: OFF
SET UP ALL RESET
LANGUAGE : ENGLISH
D-SUB INPUT : RGB
䡵 S1/S2 settings
SETTING NOW
HD SELECT : 1080I
RGB SELECT : AUTO
DVI SET UP
BACK GROUND : GRAY
S1/S2 : OFF
OSM ADJ. : TOP LEFT
ALL RESET : ON
SET UP
LANGUAGE : ENGLISH
D-SUB INPUT : RGB
HD SELECT : 1080I
RGB SELECT : AUTO
DVI SET UP
COLOR SYSTEM : AUTO
BACK GROUND : GRAY
GRAY LEVEL : 3
S1/S2 : OFF
DISPLAY OSM : OFF
OSM ADJ. : TOP LEFT
ALL RESET : OFF
E-23
4-27
CONFIDENTIAL

FUNCTION
FUNCTION
POWER MGT. : OFF
POWER MGT. : ON
INPUT SKIP : ON
INPUT SKIP : OFF
ZOOM NAV : BTM LEFT
ZOOM NAV : BTM LEFT
PDP SAVER : MANUAL
PDP SAVER : MANUAL

mode is selected.
instructions.
POWER MGT. : OFF
ZOOM NAV
: OFF
: BTM LEFT
PDP SAVER : MANUAL
The POWER/STANDBY indicator indicates the status
Information
from the computer.
E-24
4-28
CONFIDENTIAL
Displaying the entire image during DIGITAL Displaying still images in the sub screen
ZOOM operations This feature enables display in the sub screen of still images
Use this function to display the entire image within the captured by pressing the ACTIVE SELECT button.
sub screen together with an enlarged image on the main Example: Setting “PICTURE FREEZE” to “BTM
screen. LEFT”
Example: Setting “ZOOM NAV” to “S BY S” On “PICTURE FREEZE” of “FUNCTION” menu, select
On “ZOOM NAV” of “FUNCTION” menu, select “S BY “BTM LEFT”.
S”. FUNCTION
POWER MGT. : OFF
FUNCTION INPUT SKIP : OFF
POWER MGT. : OFF SUB. P DETECT : AUTO
INPUT SKIP : OFF ZOOM NAV : BTM LEFT
SUB. P DETECT : AUTO PICTURE FREEZE : BTM LEFT
ZOOM NAV : S BY S PDP SAVER : MANUAL
PDP SAVER : MANUAL
Information
Information 䡵 PICTURE FREEZE Function
䡵 ZOOM NAV Function * This feature is available only for RGB1 or RGB2 input
* This feature is available only for RGB1 or RGB2 input signals.
signals. * This feature does not function during multi screen mode.
* This feature does not function during multi screen mode. * Digital zoom is not available while this function is
* This feature does not function while PICTURE FREEZE operating.
is operating. * A further press of the ACTIVE SELECT button while
* Providing a 2-screen display will cancel this function. this function is operating will cancel this function.
䡵 ZOOM NAV settings * Providing a 2-screen display will cancel this function.
OFF: Will not show the entire image on the sub screen. 䡵 PICTURE FREEZE settings
S BY S: Will show the entire image on the sub screen OFF: Will not show the still image.
of side-by-side mode. S BY S1, 2: The still images captured by pressing the
BTM LEFT~TOP LEFT: Will show the entire image ACTIVE SELECT button will be shown on the sub
on the sub screen of picture-in-picture mode. screen of side-by-side mode.
Side-by-Side Picture-in-Picture BTM LEFT~TOP LEFT: The still images captured by
RGB/PC1
RGB/PC1
RGB/PC1 RGB/PC1
Zoom+/- button
ACTIVE ACTIVE
SELECT SELECT
button button
RGB/PC1 RGB/PC1
SINGLE button
or
S BY S2
RGB/PC1 RGB/PC1

On “PDP SAVER” of “FUNCTION” menu, select
The “PDP SAVER” screen appears.
E-25
4-29
CONFIDENTIAL
PEAK BRIGHT
PDP SAVER
: 100%
Information
ORBITER
INVERSE/WHITE
: OFF
: OFF
䡵 ORBITER settings
SCREEN WIPER
SOFT FOCUS
: OFF
: OFF
OFF: Orbiter mode does not function.
OSM ORBITER : ON This is the default setting when RGB is input.
OSM CONTRAST : LOW
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN AUTO1: The picture moves around the screen
intermittently, making the picture smaller. This is the
default setting when a Video or a DVD/HD/DTV signal
Information
is input. Set to “OFF” when these signals are not used.
䡵 When set to AUTO AUTO2: The picture moves around the screen
Set automatically, as described below. intermittently, making the picture bigger.
PEAK BRIGHT: 100%
* When a Video or a DVD/HD/DTV signal is input, the
ORBITER: OFF
AUTO1 and 2 functions will affect only the moving
INVERSE/WHITE: OFF
picture and will not make the screen smaller or bigger.
SCREEN WIPER: OFF
SOFT FOCUS: OFF INVERSE/WHITE
OSM ORBITER: ON
Use this to set the inverse mode or to display a white
OSM CONTRAST: LOW
screen.
PEAK BRIGHT Example: Setting “INVERSE/WHITE” to “WHITE”
Use this to activate the brightness limiter. On “INVERSE/WHITE” of “PDP SAVER” menu, select
Example: Setting “PEAK BRIGHT” to “75%” “WHITE”.
On “PEAK BRIGHT” of “PDP SAVER” menu, select “75%”. PDP SAVER
: 100%
PEAK BRIGHT
ORBITER : OFF
PDP SAVER
INVERSE/WHITE : WHITE
PEAK BRIGHT : 75%
SCREEN WIPER : OFF
ORBITER : OFF
SOFT FOCUS : OFF
INVERSE/WHITE : OFF
OSM ORBITER : ON
SCREEN WIPER : OFF
OSM CONTRAST : LOW
SOFT FOCUS : OFF
OSM ORBITER : ON
OSM CONTRAST : LOW
Information
Information 䡵 INVERSE/WHITE Settings
䡵 PEAK BRIGHT settings OFF: Inverse/white mode does not function.
100%: The brightness of the screen is adjusted
positive image and negative image.
WHITE: The entire screen turns white.
75%, 50%, 25%: Sets maximum brightness.
SCREEN WIPER
50%, 25%. 25% provides minimum brightness.
* These values are approximate.
repeatedly from the left and of the screen to the right end
ORBITER at a constant speed.
Use this to set the picture shift. Example: Setting “SCREEN WIPER” to “ON”
Example: Setting “ORBITER” to “AUTO1” On “SCREEN WIPER” of “PDP SAVER” menu, select
“ON”.
On “ORBITER” of “PDP SAVER” menu, select “AUTO1”.
PDP SAVER
PDP SAVER PEAK BRIGHT : 100%
PEAK BRIGHT : 100% ORBITER : OFF
ORBITER : AUTO1 INVERSE/WHITE : OFF
INVERSE/WHITE : OFF SCREEN WIPER : ON
SCREEN WIPER : OFF SOFT FOCUS : OFF
SOFT FOCUS : OFF OSM ORBITER : ON
OSM ORBITER : ON OSM CONTRAST : LOW
OSM CONTRAST : LOW SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
Information
䡵 SCREEN WIPER
ON: The white vertical bar appears.
OFF: Screen wiper mode does not function.
E-26
4-30
CONFIDENTIAL
SOFT FOCUS Signal Information Menu

Reduces edges and softens the image. Checking the frequencies, polarities of input
Example: Setting “SOFT FOCUS” to “LEVEL2” signals, and resolution
On “SOFT FOCUS” of “PDP SAVER” menu, select of the signals currently being input from a computer, etc.
“LEVEL2”.
On “MAIN MENU”, select “SIGNAL INFO.”, then press
PDP SAVER the MENU/ENTER button.
PEAK BRIGHT : 100%
ORBITER : OFF The “SIGNAL INFORMATION” is displayed.
INVERSE/WHITE : OFF
SCREEN WIPER : OFF SIGNAL INFORMATION
SOFT FOCUS : LEVEL2 H. FREQUENCY : 48.4KHz
OSM ORBITER : ON V. FREQUENCY : 60.0Hz
OSM CONTRAST : LOW
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN H. POLARITY : NEGATIVE
V. POLARITY : NEGATIVE
MEMORY : 24
Information RESOLUTION : 1024ⴒ768
OFF: Turns the SOFT FOCUS function off. PC: MEMORY will be displayed.
LEVEL1, 2, 3, 4: Activates the SOFT FOCUS setting. Others: MODE will be displayed.
“PICTURE” menu.
OSM ORBITER
Use this to set OSM menu shift.
Example: Setting “OSM ORBITER” to “OFF”
On “OSM ORBITER” of “PDP SAVER” menu, select
“OFF”.
PDP SAVER
PEAK BRIGHT : 100%
ORBITER : OFF
INVERSE/WHITE : OFF
SCREEN WIPER : OFF
SOFT FOCUS : OFF
OSM ORBITER : OFF
OSM CONTRAST : LOW
Information
ON: The position of the menu will be shifted by eight
dots each time OSM is displayed.
OFF: OSM will be displayed at the same position.
OSM CONTRAST
Example: Setting “OSM CONTRAST” to “NORMAL”
On “OSM CONTRAST” of “PDP SAVER” menu, select
“NORMAL”.
PDP SAVER
PEAK BRIGHT : 100%
ORBITER : OFF
INVERSE/WHITE : OFF
SCREEN WIPER : OFF
SOFT FOCUS : OFF
OSM ORBITER : ON
OSM CONTRAST : NORMAL
Information
䡵 OSM CONTRAST settings
E-27
4-31
CONFIDENTIAL
Connections RGB 1
Connections are made as described below.
5 4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6

1 Red
3 Blue
4 No connection
5 Ground
6 Red ground
7 Green ground
8 Blue ground
Display
9 No connection
14 Vertical sync
15 Data clock
4 DTR (DTE side ready) 9 No connection DVI-D 24-pin connector (Digital)
5 GND
used for digital.
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 (This cannot be used for an analog input.)
(1) Communication system Asynchronous RGB 3
(3) Baud rate 9600 bps 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
(4) Data length 8 bits 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
(5) Parity Odd
(6) Stop bit 1 bit
External Control Codes (Reference) 1 T.M.D.S Data 2 -
2 T.M.D.S Data 2 +
FUNCTION CODE DATA 3 T.M.D.S Data 2 Shield
5 No connection
Video2 (RCA) DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 02H 09H 6 DDC Clock
Video3 (S-Video) DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 03H 0AH 7 DDC Data
DVD2/HD2 (BNC) DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 06H 0DH 8 No connection
DVD3/HD3 (DVI) DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 0EH 15H 9 T.M.D.S Data 1 -
RGB2 (5BNC) DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 08H 0FH 10 T.M.D.S Data 1 +
Audio Mute ON 9FH 80H 60H 3EH 00H BDH 12 No connection
Picture Mode NORMAL DFH 80H 60H OAH 01H 01H CBH 14 +5V Power
16 Hot Plug Detect
18 T.M.D.S Data 0 +
ANAMORPHIC DFH 80H 60H 51H 01H 05H 16H
20 No connection
2.35 : 1 DFH 80H 60H 51H 01H 0AH 1BH
22 T.M.D.S Clock Shield
24 T.M.D.S Clock -

E-28
4-32
CONFIDENTIAL
Troubleshooting
performance.
power.
outlet?
or off mode?
centered.
adjust properly.
control is on.
E-29
4-33
CONFIDENTIAL
E-30
4-34
CONFIDENTIAL
USER' S MANUAL
PX-50XR4W
Model Information
4-1

Screen Size 1106(H)622(V) mm

43.5"(H)24.5"(V) inches 38
diagonal 50" 1222 (48.1") (1.5") 58
(2.3")
Aspect Ratio 16 : 9
Pixel Pitch 0.81(H)0.81(V) mm 1106 (43.5")
0.032"(H)0.032"(V) inches
622 (24.5")
Signals
736 (30")
(automatic : step scan) 96
Input Signals RGB, NTSC (3.58/4.43), PAL (B,G,M,N), (3.8")
PAL60, SECAM, HD*1, DVD*1, DTV*1 Units are in mm
Bezel color is silver.
Input Terminals (inch)
Visual 1 (Analog) mini D-sub 15-pin1 notice.
Visual 2 (Analog) BNC (R, G, B, H/CS, V)1*2
Visual 3 (Digital) DVI-D 24-pin1*3 *1 HD/DVD/DTV input signals supported on this
Video system
Visual 2 RCA-pin1
Visual 3 S-Video: DIN 4-pin1 525P (60 Hz) 525I (60 Hz)
DVD/HD/DTV 576P (50 Hz) 576I (50 Hz)
Visual 2 BNC (Y, PB[CB], PR[CR])1*1, *2 720P (60 Hz) 1035I (60 Hz)
Visual 3 DVI-D 24-pin1*3 1080I (50 Hz) 1080I (60 Hz)
Audio Stereo RCA3 (Selectable) 2
* The 5-BNC connectors are used as RGB/PC2 and
External Control D-sub 9-pin1 (RS-232C)
HD/DVD2 input. Select one of them under “BNC
Sound output 9W+9W at 6 ohm
INPUT”.
Current Rating 7.6 A (maximum) *3 Compatable with HDCP.
Power Consumption 435W (typical) Supported Signals
• 640480P @ 59.94/60Hz • 19201080I @ 50Hz
Dimensions 1222 (W)736 (H)96(D) mm
• 1280720P @ 59.94/60Hz • 720576P @ 50Hz
48.1 (W)30 (H)3.8 (D) inches
• 19201080I @ 59.94/60Hz • 1440 (720)576P @ 50Hz
Weight 44.5 kg / 98.1 lbs (without stand) • 720480P @ 59.94/60Hz
Environmental Considerations • 1440 (720)480I @ 59.94/60Hz
Operating Temperature 0°C to 40°C / 32°F to 104°F Note: In some cases a signal on the plasma monitor may not be displayed
Humidity 20 to 80% (no condensation) properly. The problem may be an inconsistency with standards from
Altitude 0 to 2800 m / 0 to 9180 feet the source equipment (DVD, Set-top box, etc...). If you do experience
Storage Temperature -10°C to 50°C / 14°F to 122°F such a problem please contact your dealer and also the manufacturer of
Humidity 10 to 90% (no condensation) the source equipment.
Altitude 0 to 3000 m / 0 to 9840 feet *English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Swedish,
Front Panel User Controls Power on/off, Input source select, Chinese, Russian
Volume up/down/ OSM control Other Features Motion compensated 3D Scan Converter (NTSC,
Remote Control Functions Power on/off, Input source select, OSM PAL, 480I, 576I, 525I, 625I, 1035I, 1080I), 2-3
control,Volume up/down, Cursor (UP, pull down Converter (NTSC, 480I, 525I, 1035I,
DOWN,LEFT, RIGHT), Zoom up/down, 1080I (60Hz)), 2-2 pull down Converter (PAL,
Split screen buttons 576I, 625I, NTSC, 480I, 525I), Digital Zoom
OSM Functions PICTURE (PICTURE MEMORY/CONTRAST/ Function (100-900% Selectable), Self Diagnosis,
BRIGHTNESS/SHARPNESS/COLOR/TINT/ Image Burn reduction tools (PEAK BRIGHT,
NR/COLOR TEMP./WHITE BALANCE/ INVERSE, WHITE, ORBITER, SCREEN
GAMMA/LOW TONE/SET UP LEVEL/COLOR WIPER), Color Temperature select (high/middle/
TUNE/CINEMA MODE/PICTURE MODE), middle low/low, user has 4 memories), Auto
AUDIO (BASS/TREBLE/BALANCE/AUDIO Picture, Input Skip, Color Tune, Low Tone (3
INPUT1/AUDIO INPUT2/AUDIO INPUT3), mode), Gamma Correction (4 mode), Plug and
IMAGE ADJUST (ASPECT MODE/V- play (DDC1, DDC2b, RGB3: DDC2b only),
POSITION/H-POSITION/V-HEIGHT/H- Split screen operations
WIDTH/AUTO PICTURE/FINE PICTURE/ Accessories Remote control with two AAA batteries, Power
PICTURE ADJ.), cord, Manuals, Safety metal fittings,
SET UP (LANGUAGE*/BNC INPUT/D-SUB Ferrite cores, Bands, Cable clamps, HDMI-DVI
INPUT/HD SELECT/RGB SELECT/DVI SET cable
UP/COLOR SYSTEM/BACK GROUND/GRAY Regulations Meets EMC Directive
LEVEL/S1/S2/DISPLAY OSM/OSM ADJ./ALL (EN55022 Class B, EN55024, EN61000-3-2,
RESET), FUNCTION (POWER MGT./INPUT EN61000-3-3)
SKIP/SUB. P DETECT/ZOOM NAV/PICTURE Meets Low Voltage Directive
FREEZE/PDP SAVER [PEAK BRIGHT / (EN60950-1 and EN60065, IEC60950-1 and
ORBITER / INVERSE/WHITE / SCREEN IEC60065, SEMKO Approved)
WIPER / SOFT FOCUS / OSM ORBITER / OSM Meets AS/NZS CISPR 22:2002 Class B
CONTRAST]), SIGNAL INFO.
E-1
4-2
CONFIDENTIAL

• When the screen mode is ANAMORPHIC, each signal is converted to a 1365 dots768 lines signal. (Except for *3)
Model Dots lines
frequency frequency Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical NORMAL ANAMORPHIC select*5 DVI Memory
640400 70.1 31.5 NEG NEG YES YES YES*2 YES –– NO 4
640480 59.9 31.5 NEG NEG YES YES YES YES STILL YES 5
75.0 37.5 NEG NEG YES YES YES YES STILL YES 8
848480 60.0 31.0 POS POS YES YES –– YES WIDE2 YES 19
60.3 37.9 POS POS YES YES YES YES STILL YES 12
IBM PC/AT*8 99.8 63.0 POS POS YES YES YES YES –– YES 43
compatible 120.0 75.7 POS POS YES YES YES YES –– YES 44
computers 1024768 60.0 48.4 NEG NEG YES YES YES*3 YES STILL YES 24
75.0 60.0 POS POS YES YES YES*3 YES STILL YES 26
1280768 56.2 45.1 POS POS YES YES –– YES WIDE1 NO 52
59.8 48.0 POS NEG YES YES –– YES WIDE3 YES 80
1280768*9 69.8 56.0 NEG POS YES YES –– YES WIDE1 YES 66
1360765 60.0 47.7 POS POS YES YES –– YES*3 WIDE1 NO 22
1360768 60.0 47.7 POS POS YES YES –– YES*3 WIDE1 YES 22
1376768 59.9 48.3 NEG POS YES YES –– YES WIDE2 YES 53
12801024 60.0 64.0 POS POS YES YES YES*4 YES STILL YES 29
100.1 108.5 POS POS YES YES YES*4 YES –– NO 47
16001200 60.0 75.0 POS POS YES YES YES YES –– YES 54
19201200*9 60.0 74.6 NEG NEG YES YES –– YES WIDE2 –– 81
19201200RB*9 60.0 74.0 NEG NEG YES YES –– YES WIDE3 YES 88
Apple 640480 66.7 35.0 Sync on G Sync on G –– –– YES YES –– NO 6
Macintosh*6 *8 832624 74.6 49.7 Sync on G Sync on G –– –– YES YES –– NO 16
1024768 74.9 60.2 Sync on G Sync on G –– –– YES*3 YES WIDE1 NO 28
1152870 75.1 68.7 Sync on G Sync on G –– –– YES YES WIDE1 NO 39
1440900*9 60.0 56.0 NEG NEG YES YES –– YES –– YES 89
Work Station 12801024 60.0 64.6 NEG NEG YES YES YES*4 YES –– YES 29
(EWS4800)*8 71.2 75.1 NEG NEG YES YES YES*4 YES –– YES 48
Work Station(HP)*8 12801024 72.0 78.1 –– –– –– –– YES*4 YES –– YES 59
Work Station 1152900 66.0 61.8 C Sync C Sync –– –– YES YES –– YES 60
(SUN)*8 76.0 71.7 C Sync C Sync –– –– YES YES –– YES 61
12801024 76.1 81.1 C Sync C Sync –– –– YES*4 YES –– YES 30
Work Station 1024768 60.0 49.7 –– –– –– –– YES*3 YES –– YES 62
(SGI) 12801024 60.0 63.9 –– –– –– –– YES*4 YES –– YES 29
IDC-3000G
PAL625P 768576 50.0 31.4 NEG NEG YES YES YES*7 YES*7 –– NO 31
NTSC525P 640480 59.9 31.5 NEG NEG YES YES YES*7 YES*7 MOTION NO 32
E-2
4-3
CONFIDENTIAL
*2 Display only 640 lines with the screen center of the vertical orientation located at the center.
NOTE:
or equivalent.

NOTE:
ferrite cores. If you do not do this, this monitor will not
conform to mandatory CE or C-Tick standards.
Set the ferrite cores on both ends of the DVI cable (not
supplied), and both ends of the power cable (supplied).
DVI cable.
band band Connector

core (large)
core (large)
E-3
4-4
CONFIDENTIAL
Operation Manual
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
У
4-5
CONFIDENTIAL

avoid any problems.
WARNING
E-2
4-6
CONFIDENTIAL
Contents
Installation .................................................... E-4 Setting the signal and black level for DVI signal .... E-22
Ventilation Requirements for enclosure mounting ....... E-4 Setting the video signal format ............................... E-22
How to use the safety metal fittings and the screws for Setting the background color when no signal is
safety metal fittings ............................................. E-4 being input .......................................................... E-22
Cable Management ............................................... E-5 Setting the gray level for the sides of the screen ..... E-23
How to use the remote control ................................. E-5 Setting the screen size for S1/S2 video input .......... E-23
Battery Installation and Replacement ....................... E-5 Turning on/off the menu display ............................ E-23
Operating Range ...................................................... E-5 Setting the position of the menu ............................. E-23
Handling the remote control ..................................... E-5 Resetting to the default values ................................ E-23
Function Settings Menu ......................................... E-24
Part Names and Function ................................ E-6 Setting the power management for computer images.... E-24
Front View ........................................................... E-6 POWER/STANDBY indicator ............................... E-24
Rear View/ Terminal Board .................................... E-7 Setting the Input Skip ............................................. E-24
Remote Control ..................................................... E-8 Erasing the sub screen image when there is no input
Basic Operations ............................................. E-9 signal ................................................................... E-24
POWER ............................................................... E-9 Displaying the entire image during DIGITAL ZOOM
To turn the unit ON and OFF: .................................. E-9 operations ............................................................ E-25
VOLUME ............................................................. E-9 Displaying still images in the sub screen ................ E-25
To adjust the sound volume: ..................................... E-9 Reducing burn-in of the screen .............................. E-25
MUTE .................................................................. E-9 Signal Information Menu ....................................... E-27
To mute the audio: ................................................... E-9 Checking the frequencies, polarities of input signals,
DISPLAY ............................................................... E-9 and resolution ...................................................... E-27
To check the settings: ............................................... E-9 External Control ........................................... E-28
DIGITAL ZOOM .................................................... E-9 Application ......................................................... E-28
OFF TIMER ........................................................... E-9 Connections ........................................................ E-28
To set the off timer: .................................................. E-9 Type of connector: D-Sub 9-pin male .................... E-28
To check the remaining time: ................................... E-9 Communication Parameters ................................... E-28
To cancel the off timer: ............................................ E-9 External Control Codes (Reference) ........................ E-28
WIDE Operations ........................................... E-10 Pin Assignments ........................................... E-28
Wide Screen Operation (manual) .......................... E-10 mini D-Sub 15-pin connector (Analog) ................... E-28
When viewing videos or digital video discs ........... E-10 DVI-D 24-pin connector (Digital) ............................ E-28
Troubleshooting ............................................ E-29
SPLIT SCREEN Operations ............................... E-12
Showing a couple of pictures on the screen
at the same time ............................................... E-12 Contents of the Package
Operations in the Picture-in-picture mode .............. E-13 䡺 Plasma monitor
Selecting the input signals to be displayed ............. E-13 䡺 Power cord
Zooming up pictures .............................................. E-13
Adjusting the OSM controls ................................... E-13 䡺 Remote control with two AAA Batteries
OSM (On Screen Menu) Controls ..................... E-14 䡺 Manuals (Model Information and Operation)
Menu Operations ................................................. E-14 䡺 Safety metal fittings*
Menu Tree ........................................................... E-15 䡺 Ferrite cores, bands
Picture Settings Menu ............................................ E-17
Storing picture settings ........................................... E-17 䡺 Cable clamps
Adjusting the picture .............................................. E-17 䡺 HDMI-DVI cable
Reducing noise in the picture ................................. E-17
Setting the color temperature ................................. E-18 * Contents will differ according to the model.
Adjusting the color to the desired level .................. E-18 * These are fittings for fastening the unit to a wall to prevent
Changing the Gamma Curve .................................. E-18 tipping due to external shock when using the stand
Making the Low Tone adjustments ........................ E-18 (optional). Fasten the safety fittings to the holes in the
Adjusting the pedestal level (black level) ............... E-19 back of the monitor using the safety fitting mount screws
Adjusting the colors ............................................... E-19 (see page E-4).
Setting the picture to suit the movie ....................... E-19
of the room .......................................................... E-19 Options
Audio Settings Menu ............................................ E-20 • Wall mount unit
Adjusting the treble, bass and left/right balance • Ceiling mount unit
and audio input select .......................................... E-20 • Tilt mount unit
Setting the allocation of the audio connectors ........ E-20 • Stand
Image Adjust Settings Menu .................................. E-20 • Attachable speakers
Adjusting the Position, Size, Fine Picture,
Picture Adj .......................................................... E-20
SET UP Settings Menu ........................................... E-21
Setting the RGB1 connector ................................... E-21
screen size ........................................................... E-21
screen .................................................................. E-21 E-3
4-7
CONFIDENTIAL
Installation
* See page E-3.
dealer.
to the installer.


50mm (2") 50mm (2")
50mm (2")
Screw hole
Wall
Screw or Hook etc.

(Not supplied)

50mm (2")
Metal chain
(Not supplied)
Table Top
E-4
4-8
CONFIDENTIAL

Using the cable-clamps provided with the plasma display, * Use the remote control within a distance of about 7 m/
30°.
Back of the unit
mounting holes
To attach
Approx.
1. 2. 7m /23ft
clamp
cables
mounting hole
To detach

into a fire.

inside the case.
E-5
4-9
CONFIDENTIAL
Front View
VOLUME INPUT SELECT

VOLUME INPUT SELECT

7 6 5 4 1 3 2

u MENU/ENTER
WARNING
“DVI SET UP”.
(OSM) mode.
E-6
4-10
CONFIDENTIAL
C
D
E
I A B
A AC IN G RGB1 (D-Sub)
here.
B EXT SPEAKER L and R
Connect speakers (optional) here. Maintain the correct H DVD3/HD3, RGB3 (DVI)
polarity. Connect the (positive) speaker wire to the Connect a digital signal (TMDS) from a source with a
EXT SPEAKER terminal and the (negative) DVI output.
speaker wire to the EXT SPEAKER terminal on This input can be set for use with an RGB3 or DVD3/
both LEFT and RIGHT channels. HD3 source. (see page E-22)
I EXTERNAL CONTROL (D-Sub)
C VIDEO1, 2, 3 (BNC, RCA, S-Video) This terminal is used when operating and controlling
Connect VCR’s, DVD’s or Video Cameras, etc. here. the monitor externally (by RS-232C).
D AUDIO1, AUDIO2, AUDIO3

These are audio input terminals. Information
The input is selectable. Set which video image to allot • For Y/CB/Cr, connect to the DVD1 or DVD2
them from the audio menu screen. terminals.
• For SCART, this unit provides three ways to connect:
E DVD1 / HD1 · SCART1: Connect R/G/B to the DVD2 terminals
Connect DVD’s, High Definition or Laser Discs, etc. and composite sync. to the HD terminal.
here. · SCART2: Connect R/G/B to the DVD2 terminals
and composite sync. to the VIDEO1 terminal.
F DVD2/ HD2, RGB2 · SCART3: Connect R/G/B + composite sync. to the
DVD2/ HD2: You can connect DVDs, High RGB1 terminal.
here.
RGB or component source. (see page
E-21)
RGB2: You can connect an analog RGB signal
E-7
4-11

Mutes the audio.
o VOLUME (+ /–)
!0 ZOOM (+ /–)
!1 SINGLE
!2 SIDE BY SIDE
side-by-side mode.
!4 ACTIVE SELECT
When the PICTURE FREEZE function is operating,
this button can be used to display still images on the
sub screen.
!5 VIDEO1, 2, 3
!6 DVD/HD1, 2, 3
!7 PC/RGB
!8 PICTURE MEMORY
1 to 6.
q POWER ON/STANDBY
w OFF TIMER
e DISPLAY
r WIDE
ratio.
t MENU/ENTER
y CURSOR (▲ / ▼ / / )
u EXIT
menu to return to the previous menu. E-8
4-12
CONFIDENTIAL
Basic Operations
POWER OFF TIMER
VOLUME
MUTE seconds.
DISPLAY
pressed.
the menu turns off.
the picture.

glass. ( )
2. Press the EXIT button to delete the pointer. After the power is turned off with the off timer ...
E-9
4-13
CONFIDENTIAL
WIDE Operations
right margins.
ANAMORPHIC ↔ 2.35:1 • This feature is available when the input signal is video,
NORMAL ↔ ANAMORPHIC (525P or 625P signal from a scan converter).
14:9 size screen

ANAMORPHIC size screen component (480I, 480P, 576I, 576P) or RGB (525P or 625P
Note:

STADIUM size screen

wide screen.
ZOOM size screen

4-14
CONFIDENTIAL

Switch to the wide screen mode to expand the 4 : 3 image See page E-2 of Model Information for details on the
put
When displaying enhanced split screen: referring to the“Table of Signals Supported” on page
NORMAL ↔ ANAMORPHIC E-2 of Model Information.
NORMAL size screen (4:3 or SXGA 5:4) trademarks of IBM, Inc. of the United States.
Note:
ZOOM size screen
E-11
4-15
CONFIDENTIAL


A
B A B A B

button button
VIDEO1

SINGLE
A SINGLE
button
A
B A B
A B

SIDE BY SIDE
VIDEO1 RGB/PC1
button
VIDEO1 RGB/PC1
cursor button.
A B
Sub
screen
PICTURE IN
PICTURE
button A B
Note:
same height. button
RGB/PC1 VIDEO1
Information
VIDEO1 VIDEO2 VIDEO3 HD/DVD1 HD/DVD2 RGB/PC1 HD/DVD3 SCART1~3
RGB2 RGB3 To make the desired picture active, press the ACTIVE
Pictures VIDEO1
displayed on VIDEO2
SELECT button.
the left/sub VIDEO3
screen HD/DVD1
VIDEO1 RGB/PC1
RGB2 3:
RGB/PC1 1,2:
3:
HD/DVD3 A B
RGB3
SCART1~3 1,2: 1,2:
3: 3:
Split screen operations may not function ACTIVE SELECT

VIDEO1 RGB/PC1
A B
E-12
4-16
CONFIDENTIAL


A
VIDEO1 RGB/PC2 button VIDEO1 A
RGB/PC2
B
button
picture active.
button
2. Use the ZOOM (
A
B B A

button
Bottom Left Bottom Right Adjusting the OSM controls
picture active.
VIDEO1 RGB/PC1
MENU.
A
VIDEO1 RGB/PC1 page E-14.
A
B Note:
A
B
A
B
button button

SELECT button.
A
B ACTIVE A
B
SELECT
button
E-13
4-17
CONFIDENTIAL
Menu Operations
selected items.
MAIN MENU
PICTURE SET UP
AUDIO FUNCTION

PICTURE
CONTRAST
BRIGHTNESS
SHARPNESS
COLOR
TINT R G
NR : OFF
GAMMA : 2.2
LOW TONE : AUTO
SET UP LEVEL : 0%
COLOR TUNE
CINEMA MODE : ON

CONTRAST 10

main menu.

button.
E-14
4-18
CONFIDENTIAL
Menu Tree
PICTURE PICTURE MEMORY OFF/MEMORY1-6 NO E-17
CONTRAST ←→ 0←52→72 YES E-17
COLOR ←→ 0←32→64 YES E-17
TINT R←→G 0←32→64 YES E-17
COLOR TEMP. LOW/MIDDLE LOW/MIDDLE/HIGH YES E-18
GAMMA 2.1←2.2←2.3→2.4 YES E-18
SET UP LEVEL 0%←→3.75%←→7.5% YES E-19
CINEMA MODE ON←→OFF YES E-19
PICTURE MODE DEFAULT/THEATER1/THEATER2/NORMAL/BRIGHT YES E-19
TREBLE ←→ 0←13→26 YES E-20
IMAGE ADJUST ASPECT MODE ZOOM/NORMAL/ANAMORPHIC/STADIUM/14:9/2.35:1 NO E-20
H-POSITION ←→ -128←0→+127 YES E-20
AUTO PICTURE ON←→OFF*2 NO E-20
PICTURE ADJ.*1 ←→ *2 0←→128 YES E-20
SET UP LANGUAGE ENGLISH/DEUTSCH/FRANÇAIS/ESPAÑOL/ITALIANO/SVENSKA/ /У NO E-21
BNC INPUT RGB←→COMPONENT←→SCART1←→SCART2 YES E-21
D-SUB INPUT RGB←→SCART3 YES E-21
HD SELECT 1080I/1035I/540P NO E-21
COLOR SYSTEM AUTO/PAL/PAL-M/PAL-N/PAL 60/SECAM/4.43 NTSC/3.58NTSC NO E-22
BACK GROUND BLACK/GRAY YES E-22
DISPLAY OSM ON←→OFF YES E-23
OSM ADJ. TOP LEFT←→TOP CENTER←→TOP RIGHT←→BTM LEFT←→BTM CENTER←→BTM RIGHT YES E-23
ALL RESET ON←→OFF — E-23
E-15
4-19
CONFIDENTIAL
FUNCTION POWER MGT. ON←→OFF YES E-24
INPUT SKIP ON←→OFF YES E-24
SUB. P DETECT AUTO←→OFF YES E-24
ZOOM NAV OFF←→S BY S←→BTM LEFT←→BTM RIGHT←→TOP RIGHT←→TOP LEFT YES E-25
PICTURE FREEZE OFF←→S BY S1←→S BY S2←→BTM LEFT←→BTM RIGHT←→TOP RIGHT←→TOP LEFT YES E-25
PDP SAVER MANUAL/AUTO YES E-25
PEAK BRIGHT 100%/75%/50%/25% YES E-26
ORBITER OFF/AUTO1/AUTO2 YES E-26
INVERSE/WHITE OFF/INVERSE/WHITE YES E-26
SCREEN WIPER ON/OFF YES E-26
SOFT FOCUS OFF/LEVEL1-4 YES E-27
OSM ORBITER ON/OFF YES E-27
OSM CONTRAST LOW/NORMAL YES E-27
SIGNAL INFO. — E-27

*2 RGB/PC only
Information
E-16
4-20
CONFIDENTIAL

CONTRAST
: OFF
BRIGHTNESS
COLOR
TINT R G
CONTRAST 10
LOW TONE : AUTO

COLOR TUNE
MEMORY2
SIGNAL : —
INPUT : — MEMORY5
INPUT : — MEMORY6
NOTE : —
NEXT PAGE
on inputs.
Setting the memory
CONTRAST
SHARPNESS
TINT R G

: MIDDLE
LOW TONE
: 2.2
: AUTO
COLOR TUNE
: 0%
PICTURE MODE
: ON
: NORMAL

NR
E-17
4-21

PICTURE PICTURE
CONTRAST CONTRAST
SHARPNESS SHARPNESS
COLOR COLOR
TINT R G TINT R G
NR : OFF NR : OFF
HIGH: Bluer
temperature
PICTURE
CONTRAST
SHARPNESS
TINT R G
GAIN RED
LOW TONE : 2
GAIN GREEN
BIAS RED COLOR TUNE
RESET : OFF
E-18
4-22
CONFIDENTIAL
PICTURE
CONTRAST
SHARPNESS
COLOR PICTURE
NR : OFF CONTRAST
COLOR TUNE NR : OFF
SET UP LEVEL : 0%
COLOR TUNE

0%: Normal status

the display.
COLOR TUNE
“THEATER1”.
RED Y M PICTURE
BLUE M C CONTRAST
BRIGHTNESS
YELLOW G R
SHARPNESS
MAGENTA R B
COLOR
CYAN B G TINT R G

GAMMA : 2.2
LOW TONE : AUTO
SET UP LEVEL : 0%

CINEMA MODE : ON
COLOR TUNE settings


room.
NORMAL.
default settings.
E-19
4-23
CONFIDENTIAL

AUDIO position.
BASS
TREBLE The mode switches as follows each time the 䊴 or 䊳 button is
BALANCE
pressed:
AUDIO INPUT3 : RGB1
at the factory.
IMAGE ADJUST
H-POSITION
H-WIDTH
AUTO PICTURE : OFF

V-POSITION
input. H-POSITION
V-HEIGHT
AUTO PICTURE : OFF
PICTURE ADJ.
AUDIO
BASS
TREBLE them.
BALANCE
Information
䡵 AUDIO INPUT
image.
image.
image.
E-20
4-24
CONFIDENTIAL
SET UP Settings Menu Information

Setting the language for the menus 䡵 D-SUB INPUT Settings
The menu display can be set to one of eight languages.
RGB: Use the D-SUB terminal for RGB input.
Example: Setting the menu display to “DEUTSCH” SCART3: Use the D-SUB terminal for RGB signal fed
On “LANGUAGE” of “SET UP” menu, select “DEUTSCH”. from SCART. See page E-7.
SET UP
LANGUAGE : DEUTSCH
: COMPONENT
BNC INPUT
D-SUB INPUT : RGB screen size
HD SELECT : 1080I
RGB SELECT : AUTO Use this procedure to set whether the number of vertical
DVI SET UP
COLOR SYSTEM : AUTO
BACK GROUND : GRAY or 540P.
GRAY LEVEL : 3
S1/S2 : OFF Example: Setting the “HD SELECT” mode to “1035I”
DISPLAY OSM : ON
OSM ADJ. : TOP LEFT
ALL RESET : OFF
On “HD SELECT” of “SET UP” menu, select “1035I”.
SET UP
LANGUAGE : ENGLISH
Information D-SUB INPUT : RGB
HD SELECT : 1035I
䡵 Language settings RGB SELECT : AUTO
DVI SET UP
ENGLISH ........ English ITALIANO ........ Italian COLOR SYSTEM : AUTO
DEUTSCH ....... German SVENSKA ....... Swedish BACK GROUND

GRAY LEVEL
: GRAY
: 3
FRANÇAIS ...... French ................... Chinese S1/S2 : OFF
DISPLAY OSM : ON
ESPAÑOL ....... Spanish У ............ Russian OSM ADJ. : TOP LEFT
ALL RESET : OFF
Setting the BNC connectors
Select whether to set the input of the 5 BNC connectors to
RGB and component or SCART1, 2. Information
Example: Set the BNC INPUT mode to “RGB” 䡵 HD SELECT modes
On “BNC INPUT” of “SET UP” menu, select “RGB”. automatically.
LANGUAGE
SET UP
: ENGLISH
1080I: Standard digital broadcasts
BNC INPUT : RGB 1035I: Japanese “High Vision” signal format
D-SUB INPUT : RGB
HD SELECT : 1080I 540P: Special Digital broadcasts (for example :
RGB SELECT : AUTO
DVI SET UP
DTC100)
COLOR SYSTEM : AUTO
BACK GROUND
GRAY LEVEL
: GRAY
: 3
S1/S2 : OFF select screen
DISPLAY OSM : ON
OSM ADJ. : TOP LEFT With the computer image, select the RGB Select mode
ALL RESET : OFF
digital broadcast.
Information Example: Setting the “RGB SELECT” mode to
䡵 BNC INPUT Settings “MOTION ”
RGB: Use the 5BNC terminals for RGB input. On “RGB SELECT” of “SET UP” menu, select “MOTION”.
COMPONENT: Use the 3BNC terminals for SET UP
LANGUAGE : ENGLISH
component input. BNC INPUT : COMPONENT
SCART1: Use the 4BNC terminals for RGB with D-SUB INPUT
HD SELECT
: RGB
: 1080I
composite sync. See page E-7. RGB SELECT : MOTION
DVI SET UP 1024ⴒ768
SCART2: Use the 3BNC terminals for RGB and the COLOR SYSTEM : AUTO
BACK GROUND : GRAY
VIDEO1 terminal for composite sync. See page E-7. GRAY LEVEL : 3
S1/S2 : OFF
Setting the RGB1 connector DISPLAY OSM : ON
OSM ADJ. : TOP LEFT
Select one of the signals being transmitted to the RGB1 ALL RESET : OFF
terminal.
Information
On “D-SUB INPUT” of “SET UP” menu, select “SCART3”. 䡵 RGB SELECT modes
LANGUAGE
SET UP
: ENGLISH
BNC INPUT : COMPONENT display the following signals correctly.
HD SELECT : 1080I AUTO: Select the suitable mode for the specifications
RGB SELECT : AUTO
DVI SET UP
COLOR SYSTEM
BACK GROUND
: AUTO
: GRAY
GRAY LEVEL : 3 Information.
S1/S2 : OFF
DISPLAY OSM : ON STILL: To display VESA standard signals. (Use this
OSM ADJ. : TOP LEFT
ALL RESET : OFF
mode for a still image from a computer.)
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN MOTION: The video signal (from a scan converter)
E-21
4-25
CONFIDENTIAL
will be converted to RGB signals to make the picture Setting the video signal format
more easily viewable. (Use this mode for a motion Use these operations to set the color systems of composite
image from a computer.) video signals or Y/C input signals.
WIDE1: When an 852 dot⳯ 480 line signal with a Example: Setting the color system to “3.58 NTSC”
be compressed horizontally. To prevent this, set RGB On “COLOR SYSTEM” of “SET UP” menu, select
SELECT to WIDE1. “3.58NTSC”.
SET UP
WIDE2: When an 848 dot⳯ 480 line signal with a LANGUAGE : ENGLISH
horizontal frequency of 31.0 kHz is input, the image BNC INPUT : COMPONENT
D-SUB INPUT : RGB
may be compressed horizontally. To prevent this, set HD SELECT : 1080I
RGB SELECT : AUTO
RGB SELECT to WIDE2. DVI SET UP
WIDE3: When an 1920 dot⳯ 1200 line signal with a COLOR SYSTEM
BACK GROUND
: 3.58NTSC
: GRAY
horizontal frequency of 74.0 kHz is input, the image GRAY LEVEL : 3
S1/S2 : OFF
may be compressed horizontally. To prevent this, set DISPLAY OSM : ON
OSM ADJ. : TOP LEFT
RGB SELECT to WIDE3. ALL RESET : OFF
DTV: Set this mode when watching digital broadcasting SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
(480P).
See page E-2 of Model Information for the details of Information
the above settings. 䡵 Video signal formats
signal
DVD) and set the black level.
Example: Setting the “PLUG/PLBH±-mode to “STB/ United Kingdom and Germany.
DVD” SECAM: This is the standard format used mainly in
On “SET UP” menu, select “DVI SET UP”, then press the France and Russia.
MENU/ENTER button. 4.43 NTSC, PAL60: This format is used for videos in
The “DVI SET UP” screen appears. countries using PAL and SECAM video signals.
On “PLUG/PLAY” of “DVI SET UP” menu, select “STB/ 3.58 NTSC: This is the standard format used mainly
DVD”. in the United States and Japan.
DVI SET UP
PLUG/PLAY : STB/DVD Brazil.
BLACK LEVEL : HIGH
Argentina.

Setting the background color when no signal
is being input
The color displayed on the background when there is no
Information
signal can be set to gray.
䡵 PLUG/PLAY settings
Example: Setting “BACK GROUND” to “BLACK”
BLACK LEVEL is set to “LOW” automatically. On “BACK GROUND” of “SET UP” menu, select
STB/DVD: When connected to the SET TOP BOX, “BLACK”.
DVD etc. SET UP
LANGUAGE : ENGLISH
BLACK LEVEL is set to “HIGH” automatically. BNC INPUT : COMPONENT
䡵 BLACK LEVEL settings D-SUB INPUT : RGB

HD SELECT : 1080I
RGB SELECT : AUTO
LOW: When connected to the PC signal. DVI SET UP
HIGH: When connected to the SET TOP BOX, DVD COLOR SYSTEM
BACK GROUND
: AUTO
: BLACK
etc. Change “HIGH” into “LOW” if the black level GRAY LEVEL : 3
S1/S2 : OFF
appears gray. DISPLAY OSM : ON
OSM ADJ. : TOP LEFT
ALL RESET : OFF
Information
䡵 BACK GROUND Settings
BLACK: Sets the background color to black.
GRAY: Sets the background color to gray.
E-22
4-26
CONFIDENTIAL

Information
LANGUAGE : ENGLISH
HD SELECT : 1080I
RGB SELECT : AUTO
DVI SET UP
: AUTO
screen.
COLOR SYSTEM
BACK GROUND
GRAY LEVEL
: GRAY
: 5
Example: Set the position to “TOP CEN”
S1/S2 : OFF
DISPLAY OSM : ON On “OSM ADJ.” of “SET UP” menu, select “TOP CEN”.
OSM ADJ. : TOP LEFT
LANGUAGE : ENGLISH
D-SUB INPUT : RGB
HD SELECT : 1080I
DVI SET UP
BACK GROUND : GRAY
S1/S2 : OFF
ALL RESET : OFF

Information
LEFT CENTER RIGHT
BTM BTM BTM
LEFT CENTER RIGHT
SET UP
LANGUAGE : ENGLISH
HD SELECT : 1080I
RGB SELECT : AUTO
COLOR SYSTEM : AUTO
GRAY LEVEL : 3
S1/S2 : AUTO Refer to page E-15 for items to be reset.
DISPLAY OSM : ON
OSM ADJ.
ALL RESET
: TOP LEFT
: OFF
SET UP ALL RESET
LANGUAGE : ENGLISH
D-SUB INPUT : RGB
䡵 S1/S2 settings
SETTING NOW
HD SELECT : 1080 I
RGB SELECT : AUTO
DVI SET UP
BACK GROUND : GRAY
S1/S2 : OFF
OSM ADJ. : TOP LEFT
ALL RESET : ON
SET UP
LANGUAGE : ENGLISH
D-SUB INPUT : RGB
HD SELECT : 1080I
RGB SELECT : AUTO
DVI SET UP
COLOR SYSTEM : AUTO
BACK GROUND : GRAY
GRAY LEVEL : 3
S1/S2 : OFF
DISPLAY OSM : OFF
OSM ADJ. : TOP LEFT
ALL RESET : OFF
E-23
4-27
CONFIDENTIAL

FUNCTION
FUNCTION
POWER MGT. : OFF
POWER MGT. : ON
INPUT SKIP : ON
INPUT SKIP : OFF
ZOOM NAV : BTM LEFT
ZOOM NAV : BTM LEFT
PDP SAVER : MANUAL
PDP SAVER : MANUAL

mode is selected.
instructions.
POWER MGT. : OFF
ZOOM NAV
: OFF
: BTM LEFT
PDP SAVER : MANUAL
The POWER/STANDBY indicator indicates the status
Information
from the computer.
E-24
4-28
CONFIDENTIAL
Displaying the entire image during DIGITAL Displaying still images in the sub screen
ZOOM operations This feature enables display in the sub screen of still images
Use this function to display the entire image within the captured by pressing the ACTIVE SELECT button.
sub screen together with an enlarged image on the main Example: Setting “PICTURE FREEZE” to “BTM
screen. LEFT”
Example: Setting “ZOOM NAV” to “S BY S” On “PICTURE FREEZE” of “FUNCTION” menu, select
On “ZOOM NAV” of “FUNCTION” menu, select “S BY “BTM LEFT”.
S”. FUNCTION
POWER MGT. : OFF
FUNCTION INPUT SKIP : OFF
POWER MGT. : OFF SUB. P DETECT : AUTO
INPUT SKIP : OFF ZOOM NAV : BTM LEFT
SUB. P DETECT : AUTO PICTURE FREEZE : BTM LEFT
ZOOM NAV : S BY S PDP SAVER : MANUAL
PDP SAVER : MANUAL
Information
Information 䡵 PICTURE FREEZE Function
䡵 ZOOM NAV Function * This feature is available only for RGB1 or RGB2 input
* This feature is available only for RGB1 or RGB2 input signals.
signals. * This feature does not function during multi screen mode.
* This feature does not function during multi screen mode. * Digital zoom is not available while this function is
* This feature does not function while PICTURE FREEZE operating.
is operating. * A further press of the ACTIVE SELECT button while
* Providing a 2-screen display will cancel this function. this function is operating will cancel this function.
䡵 ZOOM NAV settings * Providing a 2-screen display will cancel this function.
OFF: Will not show the entire image on the sub screen. 䡵 PICTURE FREEZE settings
S BY S: Will show the entire image on the sub screen OFF: Will not show the still image.
of side-by-side mode. S BY S1, 2: The still images captured by pressing the
BTM LEFT~TOP LEFT: Will show the entire image ACTIVE SELECT button will be shown on the sub
on the sub screen of picture-in-picture mode. screen of side-by-side mode.
Side-by-Side Picture-in-Picture BTM LEFT~TOP LEFT: The still images captured by
RGB/PC1
RGB/PC1
RGB/PC1 RGB/PC1
Zoom+/- button
ACTIVE ACTIVE
SELECT SELECT
button button
RGB/PC1 RGB/PC1
SINGLE button
or
S BY S2
RGB/PC1 RGB/PC1

On “PDP SAVER” of “FUNCTION” menu, select
The “PDP SAVER” screen appears.
E-25
4-29
CONFIDENTIAL
PEAK BRIGHT
PDP SAVER
: 100%
Information
ORBITER
INVERSE/WHITE
: OFF
: OFF
䡵 ORBITER settings
SCREEN WIPER
SOFT FOCUS
: OFF
: OFF
OFF: Orbiter mode does not function.
OSM ORBITER : ON This is the default setting when RGB is input.
OSM CONTRAST : LOW
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN AUTO1: The picture moves around the screen
intermittently, making the picture smaller. This is the
default setting when a Video or a DVD/HD/DTV signal
Information
is input. Set to “OFF” when these signals are not used.
䡵 When set to AUTO AUTO2: The picture moves around the screen
Set automatically, as described below. intermittently, making the picture bigger.
PEAK BRIGHT: 100%
* When a Video or a DVD/HD/DTV signal is input, the
ORBITER: OFF
AUTO1 and 2 functions will affect only the moving
INVERSE/WHITE: OFF
picture and will not make the screen smaller or bigger.
SCREEN WIPER: OFF
SOFT FOCUS: OFF INVERSE/WHITE
OSM ORBITER: ON
Use this to set the inverse mode or to display a white
OSM CONTRAST: LOW
screen.
PEAK BRIGHT Example: Setting “INVERSE/WHITE” to “WHITE”
Use this to activate the brightness limiter. On “INVERSE/WHITE” of “PDP SAVER” menu, select
Example: Setting “PEAK BRIGHT” to “75%” “WHITE”.
On “PEAK BRIGHT” of “PDP SAVER” menu, select “75%”. PDP SAVER
: 100%
PEAK BRIGHT
ORBITER : OFF
PDP SAVER
INVERSE/WHITE : WHITE
PEAK BRIGHT : 75%
SCREEN WIPER : OFF
ORBITER : OFF
SOFT FOCUS : OFF
INVERSE/WHITE : OFF
OSM ORBITER : ON
SCREEN WIPER : OFF
OSM CONTRAST : LOW
SOFT FOCUS : OFF
OSM ORBITER : ON
OSM CONTRAST : LOW
Information
Information 䡵 INVERSE/WHITE Settings
䡵 PEAK BRIGHT settings OFF: Inverse/white mode does not function.
100%: The brightness of the screen is adjusted
positive image and negative image.
WHITE: The entire screen turns white.
75%, 50%, 25%: Sets maximum brightness.
SCREEN WIPER
50%, 25%. 25% provides minimum brightness.
* These values are approximate.
repeatedly from the left and of the screen to the right end
ORBITER at a constant speed.
Use this to set the picture shift. Example: Setting “SCREEN WIPER” to “ON”
Example: Setting “ORBITER” to “AUTO1” On “SCREEN WIPER” of “PDP SAVER” menu, select
“ON”.
On “ORBITER” of “PDP SAVER” menu, select “AUTO1”.
PDP SAVER
PDP SAVER PEAK BRIGHT : 100%
PEAK BRIGHT : 100% ORBITER : OFF
ORBITER : AUTO1 INVERSE/WHITE : OFF
INVERSE/WHITE : OFF SCREEN WIPER : ON
SCREEN WIPER : OFF SOFT FOCUS : OFF
SOFT FOCUS : OFF OSM ORBITER : ON
OSM ORBITER : ON OSM CONTRAST : LOW
OSM CONTRAST : LOW SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN
Information
䡵 SCREEN WIPER
ON: The white vertical bar appears.
OFF: Screen wiper mode does not function.
E-26
4-30
CONFIDENTIAL
SOFT FOCUS Signal Information Menu

Reduces edges and softens the image. Checking the frequencies, polarities of input
Example: Setting “SOFT FOCUS” to “LEVEL2” signals, and resolution
On “SOFT FOCUS” of “PDP SAVER” menu, select of the signals currently being input from a computer, etc.
“LEVEL2”.
On “MAIN MENU”, select “SIGNAL INFO.”, then press
PDP SAVER the MENU/ENTER button.
PEAK BRIGHT : 100%
ORBITER : OFF The “SIGNAL INFORMATION” is displayed.
INVERSE/WHITE : OFF
SCREEN WIPER : OFF SIGNAL INFORMATION
SOFT FOCUS : LEVEL2 H. FREQUENCY : 48.4KHz
OSM ORBITER : ON V. FREQUENCY : 60.0Hz
OSM CONTRAST : LOW
SEL. ADJ. EXIT RETURN H. POLARITY : NEGATIVE
V. POLARITY : NEGATIVE
MEMORY : 24
Information RESOLUTION : 1024ⴒ768
OFF: Turns the SOFT FOCUS function off. PC: MEMORY will be displayed.
LEVEL1, 2, 3, 4: Activates the SOFT FOCUS setting. Others: MODE will be displayed.
“PICTURE” menu.
OSM ORBITER
Use this to set OSM menu shift.
Example: Setting “OSM ORBITER” to “OFF”
On “OSM ORBITER” of “PDP SAVER” menu, select
“OFF”.
PDP SAVER
PEAK BRIGHT : 100%
ORBITER : OFF
INVERSE/WHITE : OFF
SCREEN WIPER : OFF
SOFT FOCUS : OFF
OSM ORBITER : OFF
OSM CONTRAST : LOW
Information
ON: The position of the menu will be shifted by eight
dots each time OSM is displayed.
OFF: OSM will be displayed at the same position.
OSM CONTRAST
Example: Setting “OSM CONTRAST” to “NORMAL”
On “OSM CONTRAST” of “PDP SAVER” menu, select
“NORMAL”.
PDP SAVER
PEAK BRIGHT : 100%
ORBITER : OFF
INVERSE/WHITE : OFF
SCREEN WIPER : OFF
SOFT FOCUS : OFF
OSM ORBITER : ON
OSM CONTRAST : NORMAL
Information
䡵 OSM CONTRAST settings
E-27
4-31
Connections RGB 1
Connections are made as described below.
5 4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6

1 Red
3 Blue
4 No connection
5 Ground
6 Red ground
7 Green ground
8 Blue ground
Display
9 No connection
14 Vertical sync
15 Data clock
4 DTR (DTE side ready) 9 No connection DVI-D 24-pin connector (Digital)
5 GND
used for digital.
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 (This cannot be used for an analog input.)
(1) Communication system Asynchronous RGB 3
(3) Baud rate 9600 bps 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
(4) Data length 8 bits 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
(5) Parity Odd
(6) Stop bit 1 bit
External Control Codes (Reference) 1 T.M.D.S Data 2 -
2 T.M.D.S Data 2 +
FUNCTION CODE DATA 3 T.M.D.S Data 2 Shield
5 No connection
Video2 (RCA) DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 02H 09H 6 DDC Clock
Video3 (S-Video) DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 03H 0AH 7 DDC Data
DVD2/HD2 (BNC) DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 06H 0DH 8 No connection
DVD3/HD3 (DVI) DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 0EH 15H 9 T.M.D.S Data 1 -
RGB2 (5BNC) DFH 80H 60H 47H 01H 08H 0FH 10 T.M.D.S Data 1 +
Audio Mute ON 9FH 80H 60H 3EH 00H BDH 12 No connection
Picture Mode NORMAL DFH 80H 60H OAH 01H 01H CBH 14 +5V Power
16 Hot Plug Detect
18 T.M.D.S Data 0 +
ANAMORPHIC DFH 80H 60H 51H 01H 05H 16H
20 No connection
2.35 : 1 DFH 80H 60H 51H 01H 0AH 1BH
22 T.M.D.S Clock Shield
24 T.M.D.S Clock -

E-28
4-32
CONFIDENTIAL
Troubleshooting
performance.
power.
outlet?
or off mode?
centered.
adjust properly.
control is on.
E-29
4-33
CONFIDENTIAL
E-30
4-34
CONFIDENTIAL
TROBLESHOOTING
• Problems in the power supply, such as “Failure in Power ON” or “LED flashing or lighting (alarm
display)”
→ 1. Go to Power failure (P5-2).
• Problems in the images, such as “No pictures available”

→ 2. Go to Image errors (P5-8).
• No video loop-out signal is generated.

→ The MAIN PWB is faulty.
• “Remote control not effective”

→ 3. Go to Audio errors (P5-16).
• “Remote control not effective”

→ 4. Go to Remote control not effective (P5-17).
• The closed caption is displayed incorrectly. (PX-*****A only)

→ 5. Go to "The closed caption (CC) is displayed incorrectly." (P.5-19).
5-1
CONFIDENTIAL
1. Power failure (Caution) If any abnormality is sensed in such a

manner that the LED flashes or lights, all
the power lines other than those of 7Vdc
(M+7V) and 5Vdc (M+5V) are automatically
(1) The power supply is not turned on. turned off in about 10 seconds. When
checking the power lines other than those of
M+7V and M+5V, a circuit tester or the like
Move the main power setting for should have been connected in advance.
OFF→ ON.
NO Is the AC power NO The power cord is defective.

Is the POWER/STANDBY lamp lit? output available at
the AC connector
(power cord)?
YES
YES
Is a 6.8Vdc output NO Is a 6.8Vdc output available in
(2) Blinking in green (Alarm of available at Pin  of the state that the LD connector
temperature sensor error or fan error) the PM connector? is disconnected and the main
Go to (P5-3) power is turned ON?
YES The LD
(3) Blinking in red after repeating YES
reciprocal flash in red and green connector or
(POWER ON↔OFF) 3times (Alarm of the LED PWB
temperature error) Go to (P5-5). NO is fault.
Is a 6.8Vdc output Is a 6.8Vdc output available in

(4) Reciprocal flashing in red and available at Pin  of the state that the PW connector
green (Alarm of panel error) Go to the PW connector? is disconnected and the main
(P5-6). power is turned ON?
NO The PW
YES The PW
(5) Lighting in green, and then in connector or connector or
YES the PWR PWB the PWR PWB
red (Alarm of power line error) Go to
is fault. NO is fault.
(P5-7).
Is a 6.8Vdc output Is a 6.8Vdc output available in
available at Pin  of the state that the PM connector
the PM connector? is disconnected and the main
power is turned ON?
NO The PM YES The PM
connector or connector or
Is a 5Vdc output available in the state that YES the MAIN the MAIN
the LD connector is disconnected and the
PWB is fault. PWB is fault.
main power is turned ON?
Is a 4.9Vdc output
YES The LD connector or the available at Pin  of
LED PWB is fault. the PM connector?
NO
NO
Is a 5Vdc output available in the state that NO YES The power unit is fault.
the RS connector is disconnected and the
main power is turned ON?
Is a 5Vdc output
available at Pin  of
YES The RS connector or the the PW connector?
232C PWB is fault.
NO
NO YES
The PW connector, PWR PWB or the MAIN
PWB is fault.
The MAIN PWB is fault.
5-2
CONFIDENTIAL
(2) Blinking in green

 Alarm of temperature sensor error
Blinking in green (intervals of 2 seconds)
Turn off the main power supply.
Pressing the [MENU] key of the product,

turn on the main power supply to cancel
alarming.
Press the remove control keys in the FAN SET

sequential order of [POWER ON] →
[POWER ON] → [EXIT] → [DISPLAY] and
enter the factory adjustment menu. Press FAN SET
the [MENU/ENTER] key to FAN MODE H CONT ENA –
display the FAN SET menu (P2/11). FAN OFF/L – CONT UP –
FAN L/M – CONT TIME –
FAN M/H – UP STEP 2
SF SAVE 075 DOWN STEP 2
PLE SAVE 070 READ TIME 60
Is there a display of T ALM 095 TEMP LEVEL 1
numerals (almost room RET TME 030
PLE TIME 001
temperatures) at the right T1 030 T2 025
side of [T1, T2, T3]? T3 030 T4 – MODE 2
IC ERROR –
[MENU/ENTER] NEXT [EXIT] PREV 2/11
YES
NO
Is there a display of [-] for

all the numerals at the
right side of [T1, T2, T3]?
When a [-] display is presented, the PWB with the symbol shown
NO below is fault. T1: SEND PWB, T2: SENB PWB, T3: SENC PWB
YES
Are there a 3.3Vdc Are there a 3.3Vdc Are there a 3.3Vdc
output at Pin  and a NO output at Pin  and a NO output at Pin  and a NO
clock signal (3.3Vpp) clock signal (3.3Vpp) clock signal (3.3Vpp)
at Pins  and  of the at Pins  and  of the at Pins  and  of
TS in the state that the TR in the state that the the TM in the state The MAIN PWB
TS connector is TR connector is that the TM connector is fault.
disconnected and the disconnected and the is disconnected and
main power supply is main power supply is the main power
turned on? turned on? supply is turned on?
YES YES YES

The TS connector The TR connector The TM connector
or the SENC PWB or the SEND PWB or the SENB PWB
is fault. is fault. is fault.
5-3
CONFIDENTIAL
 Alarm of fan error FAN SET
FAN MODE ENA CONT ENA –

FAN OFF/L – CONT UP –
Blinking in green (intervals of FAN L/M – CONT TIME –
0.5seconds) FAN M/H – UP STEP 2
FAN SAVE 075 DOWN STEP 2
PLE SAVE 070 READ TIME 60
T ALM 095 TEMP LEVEL 1
RET TME 030
Turn off the main power supply. PLE TIME 001
T1 030 T2 025
T3 030 T4 – MODE 2
IC ERROR –
Pressing the [MENU] key
of the product, turn on the
main power supply to
cancel alarming.
FAN SET
FAN MODE H CONT ENA –

FAN OFF/L – CONT UP –
Is the fan running? FAN L/M – CONT TIME –
(Caution) When alarming is FAN M/H – UP STEP 2
canceled, [FAN MODE] of FAN SAVE 075 DOWN STEP 2
FAN SET (P2/11) in the PLE SAVE 070 READ TIME 60
T ALM 095 TEMP LEVEL 1
factory adjustment menu RET TME 030
automatically moves from PLE TIME 001
[ENA] to [H], thus causing T1 030 T2 025
the fan to run. T3 030 T4 – MODE 2
IC ERROR –
Is there a 3.3Vdc output YES The fan is out of order on the

YES
at Pin  of the FA and side where a 3.3Vdc output
NO FB, FC connectors? is generated.
Is there a voltage output of 11.3Vdc for PX- NO

42XM3/XR3, 11.2Vdc for PX-50XM4/XR4, and
9.3Vdc for PX-61XM3/XR3, respectively, at Pin
1 of the FA, FB, and FC connectors? The MAIN PWB is fault.
YES (Caution) The FAN-C and FC

NO The FAN-A/FAN-B/FAN-C is fault.
connectors are used
Is there a voltage output of only for the 61XM3
11.3Vdc for PX-42XM3/XR3, Series.
Is there a voltage output of
11.2Vdc for PX-50XM4/XR4, and
11.3Vdc for PX-42XM3/XR3,
9.3Vdc for PX-61XM3/XR3, Is there a voltage output of
11.2Vdc for PX-50XM4/XR4, and
respectively, when the FA 11.3Vdc for PX-42XM3/XR3,
9.3Vdc for PX-61XM3/XR3,
connector is disconnected and the 11.2Vdc for PX-50XM4/XR4, and
respectively, when the FB
mains power is turned ON? 9.3Vdc for PX-61XM3/XR3,
connector is disconnected and the
NO mains power is turned ON? respectively, when the FC
connector is disconnected and the
YES NO mains power is turned ON?
YES
NO The MAIN PWB
YES is fault.
The FAN-A is fault. The FAN-B is fault. The FAN-C is fault.
(Caution) In the FAN MODE, [ENA] is automatically recovered when the main power is turned OFF → ON.
5-4
CONFIDENTIAL
(3) Blinking in red (Alarm of temperature error)

Since the internal temperature is too high in the product, the temperature protector has been actuated. In such
a case, the following actions should be taken immediately:
1. Turn off the main power supply and pull out the power cord from the wall outlet.
2. Wait for about 60 minutes until the temperature in the main unit lowers.
3. Check whether the heat discharge port is covered with dust or the like. If yes, remove the clogging substance.
4. If the unit is used where the ambient temperature is high, it should be moved to an adequate place (air
temperature ranging from 5°C to 35°C).
5-5
CONFIDENTIAL
(4) Alternation blinking in red and green (Alarm of PDP error)
(Caution) How to reset the alarming condition

Pressing the [Input Select] key of the product, turn on the main power supply
of the main unit. In this state, keep pressing the [Input Select] key for more
than 2 seconds until alarming is canceled. Make confirmation by the method
specified below.
Blinking in red and green
Move the main power

setting for OFF → ON.
NO
Is there alternation blinking Normal
in red and green?
YES
Turn OFF the main power
supply. (Caution) When the main power supply is turned on with the
[Menu] key of the product kept pressed, it takes 30
seconds more to assume the state of [blinking in red and
green]. In this time period, the following voltage checks
With the [Menu] key of the
should be carried out.
product kept pressed, turn
If the state of [blinking in red and green] is assumed
on the main power supply
during this checking, take actions of [Alarm Canceling]
to assume the [Voltage
and [Voltage Check Mode Setup] again.
Check Mode].
Is there a 3.3Vdc output at YES

Pin 94 of IC9501 in the The MAIN PWB is fault.
MAIN PWB? (See the
PWB Layout Diagram on
P4-20.)
NO
NO
Turn ON the main power The Power unit is fault.
supply in the state that the
AD, PD, and PH connectors
are disconnected. In this (Caution) The voltage values of Vd and Vs and also the connector
state, are there the outputs pin numbers can differ according to the PDP. The method
of Vs (170Vdc), Vd (60Vdc), of checking these voltage values is obtainable from [2.
and 5Vdc at the PD/PH Adjustment of the power unit] in the method of adjustment
connectors as specified in plus the table specified below.
the table at right? In this
case, however, no images
are generate. Inch Vs Vd GND 5Vdc GND
YES 42/50 PD-9pin PD-7pin PD-5pin PH-1pin PH-3pin

61 PD-9pin PD-7pin PD-5pin PD-4pin PD-5pin
The PDP is fault. PH-1pin PH-4pin PH-5pin PH-7pin PH-5pin
(To the separate PDP service manual)
5-6
CONFIDENTIAL
(5) Lighting in green, and then in red (Alarm of power voltage error)
Unlike [lighting in red] in the STANDBY mode, [lighting in green] continues for about 30 seconds without any
output of images and audio signals. Since then, the mode turns into [lighting in red].
(Caution) How to reset the alarming condition The

Lighting in red
alarming condition can be reset when an
OFF→ ON setting is repeated twice for the
main power supply in the state that the
Make an OFF → ON setting LED is lit in red. The interval between the
twice for the main power first and second settings is not particularly
supply in order to reset the specified.
alarming condition.
Is the LED lit in red after it NO

has been lit in green for about Normal
30 seconds?
YES
When the main power supply is turned on in YES To the separate PDP
the state that the AD, PD, and PH The PDP is fault.
service manual
connectors are disconnected, are there the
Vs (170Vdc) and Vd (60Vdc) outputs at Pins (Caution) The voltage values of Vd and Vs
- to Pins - of the PD connector and can differ according to the PDP.
a 5Vdc output at Pins - of the PH The method of checking these
connector? In this case, is the LED not voltage values is obtainable from
turned in red after it has been lit in green for [2. Adjustment of the power unit]
about 30 seconds? At that time, however, no in the method of adjustment.
images are generated.
NO
When the main power supply is turned on in YES The MAIN PWB or the
the state that the PA and PV connectors are AUDIO PWB is fault.
disconnected from one after another, is
there a 12Vdc output at Pins - of the PA
connector or the 12Vdc and 6Vdc outputs at
Pins  and - of the PV connector? In
this case, is the LED not turned in red after it
has been lit in green for about 30 seconds?
NO
Is there an output of 3.3Vdc available at Pins NO The Power unit or the
 ~  and 2.5Vdc at Pins  ~  in the PN connector is fault.
state that the PA and PV connectors are
returned to the former state, the main power
is turned ON, and the PN connector is
disconnected? In this case, however, this
check must be finished in 30 seconds.
Otherwise, there will be power tripping on
account of an alarm.
YES
5-7
CONFIDENTIAL
2. Image errors
(Caution) Typical abnormal images are shown below. All errors do not always fall on these error samples.
(1) Image burn and deterioration in brightness
Residual images are seen

without signal entry.
This is not a fault.

A
No signal
Deterioration in brightness
This is not a fault.
All-whitesignal
(2) Failure in writing
Failure in writing
The PDP is fault.

All-whitesignal
Dot errors change

with no continuity.
All-whitesignal
5-8
CONFIDENTIAL
(3) Pixel defect
Pixel defect
Bright defect
Are there many defective pixel sexceeding

the pixel defect standard?
NO
This is not a problem.
YES
(Fig. 1) All-Black Signal
The PDP is fault.
Dark defect
(Fig. 2) All-White Signal

[Pixel defect standard for reference]
Pixel defect standard

Displayed image
Non-continuous Continuous Continuous
Zone A:Fdots or less in all for each color
Black all over the screen (Fig. 1) ContinuousFdots or less
Bright defect
Zone B:Fdots or less in all for each color

Red level 100% over the screen Zone A:Fdots or less in all for each color
Defective whenFdots or less are
Green level 100% over the screen Zone B:Fdots or less in all for each color continuously horizontal and seen white.
Blue level 100% over the screen Each zone:Fdots or less for each uni-color
Red level 100% over the screen Zone A:Fdots or less vertically
continuous
Green level 100% over the screen
Zone A:Fdots or less in all for each color Zone B:Fdots or less continuous
Blue level 100% over the screen
Zone B:Fdots or less in all for each color Except for the continuous portions,
Dark defect
however, the distance between dark dots

shall be Fcm or more.
Zone A:Fdots continuous in one portion
or less (Fdots for vertical continuity)
Zone B:Fdots or less continuous
White all over the screen (Fig. 2) –
Except for the continuous portions,
however, the distance between dark dots
shall be Fcm or more.
(Caution) In regard to the full information, refer to the PDP quality updating report (Japan) or the PDP quality
report (other than Japan).
5-9
CONFIDENTIAL
<For the 42XM3/XR3, 50XM4/XR4, and 61XM3/XR3>
(Caution1) Zone A: Central part (the area

surrounded by the right and left
V Zone B Zone A Zone B sides by 1/4H) with the area that
is 1/2 of the whole
Zone B: Area other than A above
1/4H 1/4H
→ 3 dots continuous
(Caution2) The continuous dots appearing
→ 3 dots continuous in the slantwise direction or in a
cluster state shall be defined as
follows:
<For the 42VM5/VP5>
1/4V Zone B (Caution1) Zone A: Central part (the area

surrounded by the upper and
V Zone A lower sides, right and left sides
by 1/4H) with the area that is 1/2
1/4V of the whole
Zone B: Area other than A
1/4H 1/4H above
(Caution2) The continuous dots
appearing in the slantwise
→ 3 dots continuous direction or in a cluster state
shall be defined as follows:
5-10
CONFIDENTIAL
(4) Wrong lighting
Wrong lighting
The PDP is fault.
(To the separate PDP service manual) All-black signal
Dot errors change

with no continuity.
All-black signal
(5) Dark images [Other than the deterioration in brightness as per (1) above]
The images are dark even

with an all-white input
The PDP is fault.
All-white signal
(6) Defect in horizontal lines
Line defect
The PDP is fault.
All-white signal
5-11
CONFIDENTIAL
All-white signal
All-white signal
Defect in the block unit
The PDP is fault.
All-white signal
All-white signal
5-12
CONFIDENTIAL
(7) Defect in vertical lines
Defect in vertical lines
The PDP is fault.

All-white signal
All-white signal
All-white signal
Block defect
The PDP is fault.

All-white signal
5-13
CONFIDENTIAL
All-white signal
All-white signal
5-14
CONFIDENTIAL
(8) No pictures [(Caution) The voltage outputs of Vs = 170V and Vd = 64V, 5Vdc are always generated, but the
LED is not flashing or lighting for alarming. However, the voltage values can differ according to the PDP.]
No picture is displayed.
Make the setting of OFF→ ON

for the main power supply.
Does the priming glimpse?
NO
The PDP is fault. (To the separate PDP service manual)
YES
When the AD connector is disconnected, is
the LVDS signal normally output to each NO
pin of the AD connector? (For more details The MAIN PWB is fault.
of the signal, refer to the descriptions about
the connector pins.)
YES
The AD connector or the PDP is fault.
5-15
CONFIDENTIAL
3. Audio errors
(Caution) In regard to the method of audio input setting, refer to the specifications and the instruction
manual to confirm that all the setting is free from errors. Since then, troubleshooting can be
carried out. It must be noted that the protector functions and no audio output is available if
the opposing electrodes of the speaker output or the speaker output and the ground (GND)
are short-circuited. In such a case, turn off the main power supply and make the
connections correctly. The protector is reset when the main power supply is turned on after
that
Audio errors
In the state that the speaker cable is

disconnected, is the audio signal output The speaker or the speaker
available at the speaker terminal? YES
cable is fault.
NO
Is the voltage output specified below NO The power unit or the PA
available at each pin of the PA connector connector is fault.
in the AUDIO PWB?
Pin_NO Name Voltage
1 S+12 12Vdc
2 S+12 12Vdc
3 S+12 12Vdc
4 GND GND
5 GND GND
6 GND GND
YES
Is the waveform specified below output to NO The MAIN PWB or the AU
the AU connector of the AUDIO PWB? connector is fault.
Pin6
5Vpp
Pin7
5Vpp
Pin5
3.5Vdc
Pin 1,3 • • • Audio signal waveform
YES
The AUDIO PWB is fault.
5-16
CONFIDENTIAL
4. Remote control not effective

(1) The wired remote control is not effective.
 When a single item is used (Caution) The wired remote control is not effective if the setting
of [PLE LINK], or [Repeat TIMER] is ON, or if the
The wired remote control is not setting of [ID NUMBER] has been made. Therefore,
effective. such a setting should be turned off, without fail. Since
then, troubleshooting can be carried out.
Is there a signal output specified below

at Pin 7 of the RS connector?
YES The RS connector or the
MAIN PWB is fault.
3.3Vpp
NO
Is there a signal output specified below NO Is there a 3.3Vdc output
at Pin 3 of the M2003? (Refer to the at Pin 2 of the M2003?
PWB layout diagram on Page P4-21.) (Refer to the PWB layout
diagram on Page P4-21.)
5Vpp
YES The remote control or the
remote control cable is fault.
NO
YES
When the RS connector is The RS232C PWB is fault.
disconnected, is there a signal output
specified below at the RS connector of
the MAIN PWB? NO The RS connector or the
Pin No. Pin name Voltage MAIN PWB is fault.
1 M+5V 5Vdc
5 M+3.3V 3.3Vdc
YES
The 232C PWB is fault.
 When a daisy chain (including the video wall) is used

The wired remote control
is not effective.
Are the 0Vdc and 5Vdc YES Is there a clock signal output at YES Check the products of
outputs respectively available Pin 3 of the M2004? (Refer to second and thereafter
at Pins 9 and 10 of the RS the PWB layout diagram on according to “1 When a
connector in the standard Page P4-21.) single item is used.”
product of 232C PWB?
NO NO
The MAIN PWB is fault. The 232C PWB is fault.
5-17
CONFIDENTIAL
(2) The wireless remote control is not effective.

(Caution) Since the detection of “wired” or “wireless” is conducted for the remote control
through the remote terminal, it is necessary to pull out the remote control cable
from the remote terminal, without fail. Troubleshooting should be carried out after
confirming that “IR REMOTE” is set at ON and that “ID NUMBER” is at ALL
according to the user’s menu.
The wireless remote control is not

effective.
Is there a 0Vdc output at Pin 12 of the When the RS connector is disconnected,

NO is there a 0Vdc output at Pin 12 of the RS
RS connector?
connector in the MAIN PWB?
YES
YES The 232C PWB or the RS
Is there a signal output specified connector is fault.
below at Pin 6 of the PW connector?
NO
5Vp-p YES The MAIN PWB is fault.
NO
Is there a signal output specified
below at Pin 1 of the LD connector?
YES The PW connector or the
PWR PWB is fault.
5Vp-p
NO
The LED connector or the LED PWB is fault.
5-18
CONFIDENTIAL
5. The closed caption (CC) is displayed incorrectly. (PX-*****A only)

(Caution) Only the models for North America. The PCB-5044 (CCD PWB) is not installed in other
models. Checks are needed by applying a signal output to the video input circuit, which is
equivalent to the closed caption.
CC is displayed incorrectly.
In the state that the CCD PWB is
dislodged, are there a voltage output
of 6.0Vdc at Pin 3 of the PV
Are there voltage outputs of NO The MAIN PWB
NO connector and 3.3Vdc at Pin 1 of the
3.3Vdc and 6.0Vdc as specified
PN connector in the MAIN PWB? is fault.
in Fig. 1 on next page?
YES
YES
Is there a CLK waveform output The CCD PWB is fault.

(3.3Vp-p) of 27MHz at Point A of Fig. 1,
and also a digital waveform output
(3.3Vp-p) of H/L at Point B (in 3
places)? In addition, is there an analog NO
video signal waveform output (1Vp-p)
at Point C?
YES
Is there a digital waveform output NO
(3.3Vp-p) of H/L at Point D of Fig. 1? The CCD PWB is fault.
YES
Is there a digital waveform output

NO The CCD PWB is fault.
(3.3Vp-p) at Point E (in 4 places) of Fig.
1?
YES
Waveform at Point B/D/E

Check point: Check voltage and see whether a change in H/L is present.
3.3Vp-p
Waveform at Point C
1Vp-p
NTSC video signal (with gray scale input)
5-19
CONFIDENTIAL
6V 3.3V
C
E
<Fig. 1 CCD PWB Pattern Diagram>
5-20
CONFIDENTIAL
Check point
MAIN PWB
5-21
CONFIDENTIAL
232C PWB
5-22
CONFIDENTIAL
CLT PWB
5-23
PWR PWB CONFIDENTIAL
5-24
LED PWB CONFIDENTIAL
5-25
SENB PWB CONFIDENTIAL
5-26
SENC PWB CONFIDENTIAL
5-27
SEND PWB CONFIDENTIAL
5-28
AUDIO PWB CONFIDENTIAL
5-29
CCD PWB (PX-*****A only) CONFIDENTIAL
5-30
CONFIDENTIAL
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
■Adjusting conditions
Adjustments should be carried out in the procedures of A to C specified below. However, any
adjustments other than the items A to C below are not required.
A. When the “PDP module” is replaced, adjustments should conform to the
adjusting items of [1 and 2] specified below.
B. When the “POWER UNIT” is replaced, adjustments should conform to the
adjusting item of [2] specified below.
C. When the “MAIN PWB” is replaced, adjustments should conform to the
adjusting item of [3] specified below.
■Adjusting items
1. Clearing of the usage time (Using the remote control)
(1) Press the keys in the order of [POWER ON] → [POWER ON] → [EXIT] → [DISPLAY] in order to
enter the factory adjustment menu.
(2) Press the [MENU/ENTER] key to select the [USAGE TIME] menu (8/11). Then, the integrated time
[34567 (hours)] (example) accumulated till the present time is displayed when the main power supply
is turned on (except for the standby mode).
USAGE TIME
34567H
232C-ALARM RX 0
TX 0
(3) When the keys are pressed in the order of [MUTE] → POSITION/CONTROL [ ]→
POSITION/CONTROL [ ] → [OFF TIMER], the display is cleared to [00000H]. At that time, the
characters of [RESET] are displayed for about 5 seconds on the right side of time display.
USAGE TIME
00000H RESET
232C-ALARM RX 0
TX 0
6-1
CONFIDENTIAL
2. Adjustment of the power unit (Using a screwdriver for general-purpose

adjustments)
2-1. For the PX-42VM5/42VP5/42VR5,PX-42XM3/42XR3 Series
2-1-1. Adjustment of the Vs voltage
(1) Enter a color bar input by means of either video signal of VIDEO input, or DVD/HD input, or RGB
input, and turn on the power switch of the main unit.
(2) Turn the volume control (RV203) in the power unit and make adjustments until the voltages of TP204
and TP205 (D, GND) of the power unit attain the voltage values specified for the PDP (Vs value of the
voltage regulation indicator label on below the figure) ±1V.
2-1-2. Adjustment of the Vd voltage
(2) Turn the volume control (RV204) in the power unit and make adjustments until the voltages of TP206
and TP205 (D, GND) of the power unit attain the voltage values specified for the PDP (Vd value of
the voltage regulation indicator label on below the figure) ±1V.
2-1-3. Adjustment of the +5V voltage

(1) Display a color bar by means of either video signal of VIDEO input, or DVD/HD input, or RGB input.
(2) Confirm that the voltages of TP203 and TP205 (D, GND) of the power unit are maintained at “5.15 ±
0.1V”. Otherwise, turn the volume control (RV201) until the voltage attains “5.15 ± 0.1V”.
SERIAL NO.
********
Vd= **V
Vs=***V
CODE -01
OR
Vs/Vd/100/185/220 V
555/84.2/782/10204 K
347 W/0 /2 P
(Caution) Rear-side view when the back cover is removed The label is concealed between the MAIN
PWB and PDP. Check it by peeping through the space from above. The label position can
be changed, without notice.
6-2
CONFIDENTIAL
* Top view of the power unit for the PX-42VM5/42VP5/42VR5,PX-42XM3/42XR3 Series
TP203 TP204
D+5 PH PD D+170 (D+180)
Adjustmen
t of 5V TP205
D.GND
TP206 Adjustment of
D+60 the Vs voltage
(D+65)
RV203
D+170 ADJ
P
RV204
M D+60 ADJ
(D+65)
P Adjustment of
N the Vd voltage
RV201
D+5 ADJ
P
V
P
A
P
I
(Caution) The values in ( ) are applicable to the PX-42XM2 Series.
6-3
CONFIDENTIAL
2-2. For the PX-50XM4/50XR4 Series

(2) Turn the volume control (RV6) in the power unit and make adjustments until the voltages of CH2 and
CH1 (D, GND) of the power unit attain the voltage values specified for the PDP (Vs value of the

(2) Confirm that the voltages of CH4 and CH1 (D, GND) of the power unit are maintained at the voltage
values specified for the PDP (Vd value of the voltage regulation indicator label on below the figure)
±1V.
Otherwise, turn the volume control (RV5) until the voltage attains the voltage values specified for the
PDP (Vd value of the voltage regulation indicator label on below the figure) ±1V.

(2) Confirm that the voltages of CH3 and CH1 (D, GND) of the power unit are maintained at “5.15 ±
SERIAL NO.
********
Vd= **V
Vs=***V
CODE -01
OR
Vs/Vd/100/185/220 V
555/84.2/782/10204 K
347 W/0 /2 P
6-4
CONFIDENTIAL
* Top view of the power unit for the PX-50XM4/50XR4 Series
P PH PD
V CH1 CH3
D.GND Vcc
Adjustmen CH2
t of 5V CH4 Vs
Vd
P RV5
D+70 ADJ
M RV3 Adjustment of
D+3.3 ADJ
the Vs voltage
RV2
P D+5 ADJ RV6
N D+170 ADJ
Adjustment of
P the Vd voltage
A
AC
6-5
CONFIDENTIAL
2-3. For the PX-61XM3/61XR3 Series

(2) Turn the volume control (RV6) in the power unit and make adjustments until the voltages of CH2 and
CH1 (D, GND) of the power unit attain the voltage values specified for the PDP (Vs value of the

(2) Confirm that the voltages of CH4 and CH1 (D, GND) of the power unit are maintained at the voltage
values specified for the PDP (Vd value of the voltage regulation indicator label on below the figure)
±1V.
Otherwise, turn the volume control (RV5) until the voltage attains the voltage values specified for the
PDP (Vd value of the voltage regulation indicator label on below the figure) ±1V.

(2) Confirm that the voltages of CH3 and CH1 (D, GND) of the power unit are maintained at “5.15 ±
SERIAL NO.
********
Vd= **V
Vs=***V
CODE -01
OR
Vs/Vd/100/185/220 V
555/84.2/782/10204 K
347 W/0 /2 P
6-6
CONFIDENTIAL
* Top view of the power unit for the PX-61XM3/61XR3 Series
P PD PH
V CH1 CH3
D.GND Vcc
Adjustmen CH2
t of 5V CH4 Vs
Vd
P RV5
D+70 ADJ
M RV3 Adjustment of
D+3.3 ADJ
the Vs voltage
RV2
P D+5 ADJ RV6
N D+170 ADJ
Adjustment of
the Vd voltage
P
A
AC
6-7
CONFIDENTIAL
3. Adjustments after the replacement of the MAIN PWB (Using the remote control)
3-1. Product serial No. registration
(1) Press the keys in the order of [POWER ON] → [POWER ON] → [EXIT] → [DISPLAY] in order to
enter the factory adjustment menu.
(2) Press the [MENU/ENTER] key to select the [MONITOR INFORMATION] No. menu. (Example : PX-
61XM3A)
MONITOR INFORMATION
MODEL NAME
: PX-61XM3A
SERIAL/NUMBER
:
SOFT WARE VERSION
: F123
USAGE TIME
: 00000H
T1 025 T2 025
T3 025 T4 - -
[MENU/ENTER] NEXT [EXIT] PREV

(3) Press the [WIDE] key 4 times to display a cursor in the lower column of [SERIAL/NUMBER].
MONITOR INFORMATION
MODEL NAME
: PX-61XM3A (Caution 1)
SERIAL/NUMBER
:
SOFT WARE VERSION
: F123 (Caution 2)
USAGE TIME
: 00000H
T1 025 T2 025
T3 025 T4 - -
(Caution 1) No modification is possible here because this modification is already finished by 3-2.
Factory shipment setting (initial setting).
(Caution 2) No modification is possible here because registration is already finished at the time of
shipment in terms of maintenance parts.
(4) Moving the POSITION/CONTROL keys of [ ] and [ ], select the numerals and characters of
the serial number that is listed in the serial label located on the rear surface of the product. Register
the serial number. (Blank → 0 ~ 9 → A ~ Z)
(5) Moving the POSITION/CONTROL keys of [ ] and [ ], select the next digit by means of a
cursor.
(6) Repeat the processes of (4) and (5) above and register the serial number completely.
6-8
CONFIDENTIAL
• How to read the serial number

Serial No.      
 ················· Year of manufacture (lower one digit of the year)
 ················· Month of manufacture (January to September = 1 to 9, October = X, November = Y,
December =Z)
 ················· GS model: 1, Other than GS model: 0
 ······ Serial numbers of 0001 to 9999. The serial number starts with 0001 in each month of
production. There is no duplication or missing of the number in the same month.
 ················· Place of manufacture
 ················· Control number S→A→M→T→Z→N→K→U→C→W→J→P
(* Arbitrary for the first symbol)
(Example) First unit in March 1999 → 93000019C
First unit in November 2000 → 0Y000019W
(Example) When entering a serial number of [2900123 9Z]

 Move the POSITION/CONTROL keys of [ ] and [ ] to select [2].
MONITOR INFORMATION
MODEL NAME
: PX-61XM3A
SERIAL/NUMBER
: 2
SOFT WARE VERSION
: F123
USAGE TIME
: 00000H
T1 025 T2 025
T3 025 T4 - -
 Move the POSITION/CONTROL keys of [ ] and [ ] to select the next digit.
MONITOR INFORMATION
MODEL NAME
: PX-61XM3A
SERIAL/NUMBER
: 2
SOFT WARE VERSION
: F123
USAGE TIME
: 00000H
T1 025 T2 025
T3 025 T4 - -
6-9
CONFIDENTIAL
 Repeat the procedures of  and  above, and enter all inputs of [2900123 9Z] from the left side.
MONITOR INFORMATION
MODEL NAME
: PX-61XM3A
SERIAL/NUMBER
: 29001230 9Z
SOFT WARE VERSION
: F123
(Caution)
USAGE Give a one-digit space between the 7th
TIME
: 00000Hand 8th digits.
T1 025 T2 025
T3 025 T4 - -
(7) Following the above, setting must be carried out without fail according to “3-2. Factory shipment
setting (Initial setting)”
3-2.Factory shipment setting (Initial setting)

(1) Press the [MENU/ENTER] ke to select the [FUNCTION] menu.
(2) Move the POSITION/CONTROL keys of [ ] and [ ] to the item of [SHIP]. Then, move the
POSITION/CONTROL keys of [ ] and [ ] to select [DESTINATION ALPHABETS] shown below.
(The asterisks * shown below denote the numerals or the characters.)
J : PX-*****J JW : OEM Specifications for use in Japan
A : PX-*****A AW : OEM Specifications for North America
G : PX-*****G GW : OEM Specifications for European countries
W : PX-*****W WW : OEM Specifications for zones other than the above
FUNCTION
SCART OFF SAFEL MODE ---

SHIP A PLE TEST OFF --
LIMIT-VD OFF VD2 VLIM 5HZ
LIMIT-PC ON VD2 YCORB --
GAMMA MD 12 VD2 YCOREN ON
VOL OFFSET 2 VD2 CORB --
FHCRT COMP 3 VD2 COREN ON
ACTVH TIME 2 VD OUT 10
PSC-T OFF ROTATE PTN 1
EXT-PC OFF BLUE GAIN OFF
(3) Press the keys in the order of [MUTE] → POSITION/CONTROL [ ] → POSITION/CONTROL

[ ] → [OFF TIMER] to make “Factory shipment setting”. When “Factory shipment setting” is
executed, the red characters of [SET] is shown for about 5 seconds on the right side of the
[DESTINATION ALPHABETS]. The setting is finished when these red characters of [SET] go out. In
regard to the factory shipment setting values, refer to the descriptions given below.
6-10
CONFIDENTIAL
FUNCTION
SCART OFF SAFEL MODE---

SHIP A SET PLE TEST OFF --
LIMIT-VD OFF VD2 VLIM 5HZ
LIMIT-PC ON VD2 YCORB 1
GAMMA MD 10 VD2 YCOREN ON
VOL OFFSET 2 VD2 CORB 1
FHCRT COMP 3 VD2 COREN ON
ACTVH TIME 2 VD OUT 8
PSC-T OFF ROTATE PTN 1
EXT-PC OFF BLUE GAIN OFF
(4) Press the keys of the remote control in the order of [POWER ON] → [POWER ON] → [EXIT] →
[DISPLAY] in order to withdraw from the Factory shipment setting.
[Factory shipment setting values]

1. Initial setting values for the user menu
MENU A,AW,G,GW,W,WW J,JW
POWER ON/OFF ON ON
VOLUME 10step 10step
INPUT MODE VIDEO1 VIDEO1
WIDE MODE STADIUM STADIUM
AUTO PICTURE OFF (RGB1~3) OFF (RGB1~3)
HD SELECT 1080B * 1080B
LANGUAGE ENGLISH JAPANEASE
COLOR SYSTEM AUTO AUTO
All items intended to recover the initial values
Initial values Initial values
through the selection of [All Reset] in the user menu
* 1080I for *PX-***R**
2. Field menu initial setup values (applicable in common to all models)

AW,GW,
MENU A G W J WW,JW
SHIP A G W J AW,GW,
WW,JW
PSC-LIMIT OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
LIMIT-PC ON ON ON ON ON
U-SCAN OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
SERVICE V-FREQ OT AUTO 60Hz 60Hz AUTO AUTO
V-FREQ VD AUTO 60Hz 60Hz AUTO AUTO
SYNCLEVEL1 TTL TTL TTL TTL TTL
SYNCLEVEL2 TTL TTL TTL TTL TTL
SUB-ORB *1 ON ON ON ON ON
PIC FREEZE *1 ON ON ON ON ON
MONITOR
MODEL NAME PX-****A PX-****G PX-****W PX-****J *2
INFORMATION
*1:PX-50XM4/50XR4,PX-61XM3/61XR3 Selies only.
*2:Monitor information when SHIP is for AW, GW, WW, JW setup
6-11
CONFIDENTIAL
PX-42VM5/42VP5/42VR5 Series: 42-WVGA

PX-42XM3/42XR3 Series: 42-WXGA,
3. Initial setting values for the Factory shipment setting menu The table shown below specifies only the items
that can be changed in the factory adjusting mode. Therefore, any setting values of the items not specified
below cannot be modified.
MENU A,AW G,GW W,WW J,JW
FUNCTION SHIP A or AW G or GW W or WW J or JW
LIMIT-PC ON ON ON ON
MONITOR SERIAL/ - - - -
INFORMATION NUMBER
6-12
CONFIDENTIAL
[Materials for reference]

1. Signal generator
(1) Digital RGB
, Component signal generator
• Equivalent to the VIDEO GENERATOR LT1615 (made by LEADER)
• Equivalent to the PANEL LINK ADAPTER LT9217 (made by LEADER)
• Equivalent to the VIDEO ENCODER LT1606 (made by LEADER)
(2) NTSC signal generator
• Equivalent to the NTSC PATTERN GENERATER LCG-403YC (made by LEADER)
(3) PAL signal generator
• Equivalent to the COLOR BAR PATTERN GENERATOR PM5518 (made by PHILIPS)
2. VIDEO input
Input: Composite video input or S-terminal input
3. DVD/HD/DTV inputs
3-1. HD: Y/Pb/Pr component inputs, ternary sync signals
Pb Pr
Y
700
350
300
300 350
2.5
21.9 18.6
5.7
25.1 25.1 21.9
( H-sync of the Y signal)
The time indication is based on the

rise time of the ternary sync signals.
3-2. DVD: Y/Cb/Cr component inputs
Cb Cr
Y
(All white level)
700
700
300
8.8
15.2 48.7 42.0
55.4 48.7
55.4
( H-sync of the Y signal)

The time indication is based on the
lowering of the Horizontal sync signal.
6-13
CONFIDENTIAL
4. RGB inputs
1) Horizontal sync period

Video signal
0.7Vp-p c d e
Sync signal
TTL level
b
Positive/negative polarity a
2) Vertical sync period

Video signal
0.7Vp-p h i j
Sync signal
TTL level
g
Positive/negative polarity f
For the respective inspection signals, the above “a” to “j” shall be listed on the next page and thereafter.
6-14
CONFIDENTIAL
5. RGB/PC signal timing table

(Caution 1) For HDCP non-application products, the signals of the PC mode 1 ~ 89 can be received. For
HDCP application products, the signals of the PC mode 1 ~ 98 can be received.
(Caution 2) The received PC mode number specified below is displayed in the memory column of the user
menu “Information.”
PC mode 1 2 3 4 5
Signal name VU-6010 VU-6010 PC98 PC98
NTSC PAL/SECAM 400@70Hz 480@60Hz
Definition 640*240 768*288 640*400 640*480
Dot clock frequency (MHz) 12.214 14.752 25.175 25.175
H frequency (kHz) 15.734 15.557 31.469 31.469
V frequency (Hz) 59.94 50.39 70.086 59.94
H total (uS) 63.534 64.262 31.778 31.778
[a] (dots) 776 948 800 800
H display period (uS) 52.4 52.06 25.422 25.422
[d] (dots) 640 768 640 640
H front porch (uS) 1.146 1.288 0.675 0.596
[c] (dots) 14 19 17 15
H sync pulse width (uS) 8.76 8.677 2.542 3.813
[b] (dots) 107 128 64 96
H back porch (uS) 1.228 2.237 NOT USED 3.138 1.946
[e] (dots) 15 33 79 49
V total (mS) 16.652 20.055 14.268 16.683
[f] (line) 262 312 449 525
V display period (mS) 15.3 18.513 12.711 15.253
[i] (line) 240 288 400 480
V front porch (mS) 0.191 0.321 0.413 0.191
[h] (line) 3 5 13 6
V sync pulse width (mS) 1.144 1.093 0.064 0.064
[g] (line) 18 17 2 2
V back porch (mS) 0.064 0.064 1.08 1.176
[j] (line) 1 1 34 37
H sync polarity Neg Neg Neg Neg
V sync polarity Neg Neg Neg Neg
Scan type Interlaced Interlaced Non Interlaced Non Interlaced
Remarks
6-15
CONFIDENTIAL
PC mode 6 7 8 9 10
Signal name MAC@13" VESA VESA VESA
480@72Hz 480@75Hz 480@85Hz
Definition 640*480 640*480 640*480 640*480
H frequency (kHz) 35 37.861 37.5 43.269
V frequency (Hz) 66.667 72.809 75 85.008
H total (uS) 28.571 26.413 26.667 23.111
(dots) 864 832 840 832
(dots) 640 640 640 640
H front porch (uS) 2.116 0.762 0.508 1.556
(dots) 64 24 16 56
(dots) 64 40 64 56
H back porch (uS) 3.175 4.064 3.81 2.222 NOT USED
(dots) 96 128 120 80
V total (mS) 15 13.735 13.333 11.764
(line) 525 520 500 509
(line) 480 480 480 480
V front porch (mS) 0.086 0.237 0.027 0.023
(line) 3 9 1 1
(line) 3 3 3 3
V back porch (mS) 1.114 0.739 0.427 0.578
(line) 39 28 16 25
H sync polarity Sync on G Neg Neg Neg
V sync polarity Sync on G Neg Neg Neg
Scan type Non Interlaced Non Interlaced Non Interlaced Non Interlaced
Remarks
6-16
CONFIDENTIAL
PC mode 11 12 13 14 15
Signal name VESA VESA VESA VESA VESA
600@56Hz 600@60Hz 600@72Hz 600@75Hz 600@85Hz
Definition 800*600 800*600 800*600 800*600 800*600
Dot clock frequency (MHz) 36 40 50 49.5 56.25
H frequency (kHz) 35.156 37.879 48.077 46.875 53.674
V frequency (Hz) 56.25 60.317 72.188 75 85.061
H total (uS) 28.444 26.4 20.8 21.333 18.631
(dots) 1024 1056 1040 1056 1048
H display period (uS) 22.222 20 16 16.162 14.222
(dots) 800 800 800 800 800
H front porch (uS) 0.667 1 1.12 0.323 0.569
(dots) 24 40 56 16 32
H sync pulse width (uS) 2 3.2 2.4 1.616 1.138
(dots) 72 128 120 80 64
H back porch (uS) 3.556 2.2 1.28 3.232 2.702
(dots) 128 88 64 160 152
V total (mS) 17.778 16.579 13.853 13.333 11.756
(line) 625 628 666 625 631
V display period (mS) 17.067 15.84 12.48 12.8 11.179
(line) 600 600 600 600 600
V front porch (mS) 0.028 0.026 0.77 0.021 0.019
(line) 1 1 37 1 1
V sync pulse width (mS) 0.057 0.106 0.125 0.064 0.056
(line) 2 4 6 3 3
V back porch (mS) 0.626 0.607 0.478 0.448 0.503
(line) 22 23 23 21 27
H sync polarity Pos. Pos. Pos. Pos. Pos.
V sync polarity Pos. Pos. Pos. Pos. Pos.
Scan type Non Interlaced Non Interlaced Non Interlaced Non Interlaced Non Interlaced
Remarks
6-17
CONFIDENTIAL
PC mode 16 17 18 19 20
Signal name MAC@16" I/O data wide VESA wide
(NEC1)
Definition 832*624 852*480 848*480
Dot clock frequency (MHz) 57.2832 34.006 33.75
H frequency (kHz) 49.725 31.722 31.02
V frequency (Hz) 74.55 59.966 60
H total (uS) 20.111 31.524 32.237
(dots) 1152 1072 1088
H display period (uS) 14.524 25.055 25.126
(dots) 832 852 848
H front porch (uS) 0.559 0.659 0.474
(dots) 32 22 16
H sync pulse width (uS) 1.117 3.764 3.319
(dots) 64 128 112
H back porch (uS) 3.91 2.047 NOT USED 3.319 NOT USED
(dots) 224 70 112
V total (mS) 13.414 16.676 16.667
(line) 667 529 517
V display period (mS) 12.549 15.132 15.474
(line) 624 480 480
V front porch (mS) 0.02 0.378 0.193
(line) 1 12 6
V sync pulse width (mS) 0.06 0.095 0.258
(line) 3 3 8
V back porch (mS) 0.784 1.072 0.741
(line) 39 34 23
H sync polarity Sync on G Neg Pos.
V sync polarity Sync on G Neg Pos.
Scan type Non Interlaced Non Interlaced Non Interlaced
Remarks
6-18
CONFIDENTIAL
PC mode 21 22 23 24 25
Signal name VESA wide VESA VESA
(NEC4) 768@60Hz 768@70Hz
Definition 1360*768 1024*768 1024*768
Dot clock frequency (MHz) 85.5 65 75
H frequency (kHz) 47.712 48.363 56.476
V frequency (Hz) 60.015 60.004 70.069
H total (uS) 20.959 20.677 17.707
(dots) 1792 1344 1328
(dots) 1360 1024 1024
H front porch (uS) 0.749 0.369 0.32
(dots) 64 24 24
(dots) 112 136 136
H back porch (uS) NOT USED 2.994 NOT USED 2.462 1.92
(dots) 256 160 144
V total (mS) 16.662 16.666 14.272
(line) 795 806 806
(line) 768 768 768
V front porch (mS) 0.063 0.062 0.053
(line) 3 3 3
(line) 6 6 6
V back porch (mS) 0.377 0.6 0.513
(line) 18 29 29
H sync polarity Pos. Neg. Neg.
V sync polarity Pos. Neg. Neg.
Scan type Non Interlaced Non Interlaced Non Interlaced
Remarks
6-19
CONFIDENTIAL
PC mode 26 27 28 29 30
Signal name VESA VESA MAC@19" VESA VESA
768@75Hz 768@85Hz 1024@60Hz 1024@75Hz
Definition 1024*768 1024*768 1024*768 1280*1024 1280*1024
Dot clock frequency (MHz) 78.75 94.5 80 108 135
H frequency (kHz) 60.023 68.677 60.24 63.981 79.976
V frequency (Hz) 75.029 84.997 74.93 60.02 75.025
H total (uS) 16.66 14.561 16.600 15.63 12.501
(dots) 1312 1376 1328 1688 1688
H display period (uS) 13 10.836 12.8 11.852 9.481
(dots) 1024 1024 1024 1280 1280
H front porch (uS) 0.203 0.508 0.4 0.444 0.119
(dots) 16 48 32 48 2
H sync pulse width (uS) 1.219 1.016 1.2 1.037 1.067
(dots) 96 96 96 112 144
H back porch (uS) 2.235 2.201 2.2 2.296 1.837
(dots) 176 208 176 248 248
V total (mS) 13.328 11.765 13.347 16.661 13.329
(line) 800 808 804 1066 1066
(line) 768 768 768 1024 1024
V front porch (mS) 0.017 0.015 0.050 0.016 0.013
(line) 1 1 3 1 1
(line) 3 3 3 3 3
V back porch (mS) 0.466 0.524 0.498 0.594 0.475
(line) 28 36 30 38 38
H sync polarity Pos. Pos. – Pos. Pos.
V sync polarity Pos. Pos. – Pos. Pos.
Remarks
6-20
CONFIDENTIAL
PC mode 31 32 33 34 35
Signal name IDC-3000G IDC-3000G HDTV-J DTV (480P) DTV (720P)
PAL 625P NTSC 525P
Definition 768*576 640*480 1920*1035 644*483 1280*720
Dot clock frequency (MHz) 29.687 24.39 74.25 24.37 74.25
H frequency (kHz) 31.389 31.47 33.75 31.469 45.000
V frequency (Hz) 50 59.9 60 59.94 60
H total (uS) 31.933 31.775 29.63 31.777 22.222
(dots) 948 775 2200 774 1650
H display period (uS) 25.87 26.24 25.86 26.427 17.239
(dots) 768 640 1920 644 1280
H front porch (uS) 0.269 0.41 0.59 0.75 0.943
(dots) 8 10 44 18 70
(dots) 75 60 44 57 80
H back porch (uS) 3.267 2.665 2.59 2.25 2.963
(dots) 97 65 192 55 220
V total (mS) 19.911 16.522 16.666 16.683 16.667
(line) 625 525 562.5 525 750
V display period (mS) 18.35 15.106 15.348 15.348 16
(line) 576 480 517/518 483 720
V front porch (mS) 0.223 0.252 0.163/0.148 0.191 0.111
(line) 7 8 5.5/5 6 5
(line) 7 7 5 6 5
V back porch (mS) 1.115 0.944 1.037/1.022 0.953 0.444
(line) 35 30 35/34.5 30 20
H sync polarity Neg Neg Neg Neg Neg
V sync polarity Neg Neg Neg Neg Neg
Scan type Non Interlaced Non Interlaced Interlaced Non Interlaced Non Interlaced
Remarks
6-21
CONFIDENTIAL
PC mode 36 37 38 39 40
Signal name HDTV-W MAC@21" VESA
1024@85Hz
Definition 1920*1080 1152*870 1280*1024
Dot clock frequency (MHz) 74.25 100 157.5
H frequency (kHz) 33.75 68.681 91.146
V frequency (Hz) 60 75.062 85.024
H total (uS) 29.630 14.560 10.971
(dots) 2200 1456 1728
(dots) 1920 1152 1280
H front porch (uS) 0.593 0.320 0.406
(dots) 44 32 64
(dots) 88 128 160
H back porch (uS) 1.993 NOT USED NOT USED 1.440 1.422
(dots) 148 144 224
V total (mS) 16.666 13.322 11.761
(line) 562.5 915 1072
(line) 540 870 1024
V front porch (mS) 0.074/0.059 0.044 0.011
(line) 2.5/2 3 1
(line) 5 3 3
V back porch (mS) 0.444/0.459 0.568 0.483
(line) 15/15.5 39 44
H sync polarity Neg Sync on G Pos.
V sync polarity Neg Sync on G Pos.
Scan type Interlaced Non Interlaced Non Interlaced
Remarks
6-22
CONFIDENTIAL
PC mode 41 42 43 44 45
Signal name I/O data I/O data I/O data I/O data I/O data
480@100Hz 480@120Hz 600@100Hz 600@120Hz 768@100Hz
Definition 640*480 640*480 800*600 800*600 1024*768
Dot clock frequency 42.506 51.008 66.022 79.942 111.987
(MHz)
H frequency (kHz) 51.089 61.307 62.998 75.703 80.451
V frequency (Hz) 100.370 120.440 99.838 119.97 100.56
H total (uS) 19.573 16.311 15.873 13.209 12.43
(dots) 832 832 1048 1056 1392
(dots) 640 640 800 800 1024
H front porch (uS) 1.506 1.255 0.606 0.300 0.214
(dots) 64 64 40 24 24
(dots) 56 56 64 80 88
H back porch (uS) 1.694 1.412 2.181 1.901 2.286
(dots) 72 72 144 152 256
V total (mS) 9.963 8.302 10.016 8.335 9.944
(line) 509 509 631 631 800
(line) 480 480 600 600 768
V front porch (mS) 0.020 0.016 0.016 0.013 0.012
(line) 1 1 1 1 1
(line) 3 3 3 3 3
V back porch (mS) 0.489 0.408 0.429 0.357 0.348
(line) 25 25 27 27 28
H sync polarity Neg Neg Pos. Pos. Neg
V sync polarity Neg Neg Pos. Pos. Neg
Remarks
6-23
CONFIDENTIAL
PC mode 46 47 48 49 50
Signal name I/O data I/O data EWS RCA-STB DTV(570P)
768@120Hz 1024@100Hz 4800@71Hz 1080A
Definition 1024*768 1280*1024 1280*1024 1920*1034 768*576
Dot clock frequency (MHz) 132.953 190.908 125 81 29.538
H frequency (kHz) 95.512 108.47 75.12 33.75 31.25
V frequency (Hz) 119.39 100.06 71.204 60 50
H total (uS) 10.47 9.219 13.312 29.630 31.993
(dots) 1392 1760 1664 2400 945
H display period (uS) 7.702 6.7 10.24 23.7 26
(dots) 1024 1280 1280 1920 768
H front porch (uS) 0.181 0.545 0.256 0.59 0.745
(dots) 24 104 32 48 22
(dots) 88 143 128 288 69
H back porch (uS) 1.925 1.22 1.792 1.78 2.9
(dots) 256 233 224 144 86
V total (mS) 8.376 9.994 14.044 16.652 20
(line) 800 1084 1055 562 625
(line) 768 1024 1024 517 576
V front porch (mS) 0.010 0.01 0.04 0.059 0.16
(line) 1 1 3 2 5
(line) 3 3 3 3 5
V back porch (mS) 0.293 0.52 0.333 1.185 1.248
(line) 28 56 25 40 39
H sync polarity Neg Pos. Neg Pos. Neg
V sync polarity Neg Pos. Neg Pos. Neg
Scan type Non Interlaced Non Interlaced Non Interlaced Interlaced Non Interlaced
Remarks
6-24
CONFIDENTIAL
PC mode 51 52 53 54 55
Signal name VESA I/O data I/O wide VESA VESA
864@75Hz W_XGA@56Hz XGA 1200@60Hz 1200@65Hz
Definition 1152*864 1280*768 1376*768 1600*1200 1600*1200
Dot clock frequency (MHz) 108 76.064 87.34 162 175.5
H frequency (kHz) 67.5 45.064 48.307 75 81.25
V frequency (Hz) 75 56.187 59.934 60 65
H total (uS) 14.815 22.192 20.701 13.333 12.308
(dots) 1600 1688 1808 2160 2160
(dots) 1152 1280 1376 1600 1600
H front porch (uS) 0.593 0.631 0.366 0.395 0.365
(dots) 64 48 32 64 64
(dots) 128 112 128 192 192
H back porch (uS) 2.37 3.26 3.114 1.877 1.732
(dots) 256 248 272 304 304
V total (mS) 13.333 17.78 16.685 16.667 15.385
(line) 900 802 806 1250 1250
V display period (mS) 12.8 17.043 15.898 16 14.769
(line) 864 768 768 1200 1200
V front porch (mS) 0.015 0.044 0.062 0.013 0.012
(line) 1 2 3 1 1
(line) 3 3 6 3 3
V back porch (mS) 0.474 0.644 0.6 0.613 0.566
(line) 32 29 29 46 46
H sync polarity Pos. Pos. Neg Pos. Pos.
V sync polarity Pos. Pos. Pos. Pos. Pos.
Remarks
6-25
CONFIDENTIAL
PC mode 56 57 58 59 60
Signal name VESA VESA VESA HP SUN
1200@70Hz 1200@75Hz 1200@85Hz 1024@72Hz 900@66Hz
Definition 1600*1200 1600*1200 1600*1200 1280*1024 1152*900
Dot clock frequency (MHz) 189 202.5 229.5 135 92.941
H frequency (kHz) 87.5 93.75 106.25 78.130 61.796
V frequency (Hz) 70 75 85 72.009 65.95
H total (uS) 11.429 10.667 9.412 12.8 16.182
(dots) 2160 2160 2160 1728 1504
(dots) 1600 1600 1600 1280 1152
H front porch (uS) 0.339 0.316 0.279 0.474 0.312
(dots) 64 64 64 64 29
(dots) 192 192 192 192 128
H back porch (uS) 1.608 1.501 1.325 1.442 2.098
(dots) 304 304 304 192 195
V total (mS) 14.286 13.333 11.765 13.887 15.163
(line) 1250 1250 1250 1085 937
(line) 1200 1200 1200 1024 900
V front porch (mS) 0.011 0.011 0.009 0.038 0.032
(line) 1 1 1 3 2
(line) 3 3 3 3 4
V back porch (mS) 0.526 0.491 0.433 0.704 0.502
(line) 46 46 46 55 31
H sync polarity Pos. Pos. Pos. SOG. Csync
V sync polarity Pos. Pos. Pos. SOG. Csync
Remarks
6-26
CONFIDENTIAL
PC mode 61 62 63 64 65
Signal name SUN SGI VESA VESA VESA
900@76Hz 768@60Hz 960@60Hz 960@60Hz 1050@60Hz
Definition 1152*900 1024*768 1280*960 1280*960 1400*1050
Dot clock frequency (MHz) 105.561 70 108 148.5 108
H frequency (kHz) 71.710 49.716 60 85.938 63.981
V frequency (Hz) 76.047 60.043 60 85.002 60.020
H total (uS) 13.945 20.114 16.667 11.636 15.630
(dots) 1472 1408 1800 1728 1688
(dots) 1152 1024 1280 1280 1400
H front porch (uS) 0.152 2.057 0.889 0.431 0.444
(dots) 16 144 96 64 48
(dots) 96 96 112 160 112
H back porch (uS) 1.97 2.507 2.889 1.508 1.185
(dots) 208 144 312 224 128
V total (mS) 13.15 16.655 16.667 11.764 16.661
(line) 943 828 1000 1011 1066
V display period (mS) 12.55 15.448 16 11.171 16.411
(line) 900 768 960 960 1050
V front porch (mS) 0.028 0.443 0.017 0.012 0.016
(line) 2 22 1 1 1
(line) 8 3 3 3 3
V back porch (mS) 0.460 0.704 0.6 0.547 0.188
(line) 33 35 36 47 12
H sync polarity Csync SOG. Pos. Pos. Neg
V sync polarity Csync SOG. Pos. Pos. Neg
Remarks
6-27
CONFIDENTIAL
PC mode 66~74
Signal name
Definition
Dot clock frequency (MHz)
H frequency (kHz)
V frequency (Hz)
H total (uS)
(dots)
H display period (uS)
(dots)
H front porch (uS)
(dots)
H sync pulse width (uS)
(dots)
H back porch (uS)
NOT USED
(dots)
V total (mS)
(line)
V display period (mS)
(line)
V front porch (mS)
(line)
V sync pulse width (mS)
(line)
V back porch (mS)
(line)
H sync polarity
V sync polarity
Scan type
Remarks
6-28
CONFIDENTIAL
PC mode 75 80 81 82 83
Signal name 1080I W_XGA 400H 350H
50Hz
Definition 1920*1080 1280*768 720*400 720*350
H frequency (kHz) 28.125 47.99 31.5 31.5
V frequency (Hz) 50 59.34 70.1 70.1
H total (uS) 35.556 20.84 31.78 31.78
(dots) 2640 1688 900 900
(dots) 1920 1280 720 720
H front porch (uS) 6.519 0.593 0.636 0.636
(dots) 484 48 18 18
(dots) 88 112 108 108
H back porch (uS) 1.993 3.06 NOT USED 1.91 1.91
(dots) 148 248 54 54
V total (mS) 10 16.713 14.269 14.269
(line) 562.5 802 449 449
(line) 540 768 400 350
V front porch (mS) 0.074/0.059 0.063 0.424 1.307
(line) 2.5/2 3 12 37
(line) 5 6 2 2
V back porch (mS) 0.444/0.459 0.521 1.112 1.907
(line) 15/15.5 25 35 60
H sync polarity Neg. Pos. Neg. Pos.
V sync polarity Neg. Neg. Pos. Neg.
Scan type Interlaced Non Interlaced Non Interlaced Non Interlaced
Remarks
6-29
CONFIDENTIAL
PC mode 84 85 86 87 88
Signal name 720P 1080P 720P 1080I
24Hz 24Hz 50Hz 48Hz
Definition 1280*720 1920*1080 1280*720 1920*1080
H frequency (kHz) 17.982 26.973 37.5 26.973
V frequency (Hz) 23.976 23.976 50 37.074
H total (uS) 55.611 37.704 26.667 37.074
(dots) 4125 2750 1980 2750
(dots) 1280 1920 1280 1920
H front porch (uS) 34.310 8.008 5.387 8.008
(dots) 2545 594 400 594
(dots) 80 88 80 88
H back porch (uS) 2.256 1.995 2.963 1.995 NOT USED
(dots) 220 148 220 148
V total (mS) 41.706 41.708 20 20.855
(line) 750 1125 750 1125
(line) 720 1080 720 1080
V front porch (mS) 0.278 0.148 0.133 0.093
(line) 5 4 5 5
(line) 5 5 5 10
V back porch (mS) 1.112 1.335 0.533 0.556
(line) 20 36 20 30
H sync polarity Neg Neg Neg Neg
V sync polarity Neg Neg Neg Neg
Scan type Non Interlaced Non Interlaced Non Interlaced Interlaced
Remarks
6-30
CONFIDENTIAL
PC mode 89 90 91 92 93
Signal name 480i(60Hz) DTV(480P) DTV(480P) DTV(720P)
Definition 720*480Hz 640*480Hz 720*480Hz 1280*720Hz
H frequency (kHz) 15.734 31.469 31.469 45.000
V frequency (Hz) 59.94 59.940 59.94 60.000
H total (uS) 16.555 31.777 31.777 22.222
(dots) 1716 800 858 1650
(dots) 1440 640 720 1280
H front porch (uS) 1.407 0.635 0.592 1.481
(dots) 38 16 16 110
(dots) 124 96 62 40
H back porch (uS) 4.222 1.906 2.222 2.963
NOT USED
(dots) 114 48 60 220
V total (mS) 16.635 16.683 19.444 10.101
(line) 262 525 525 750
(line) 240 480 480 720
V front porch (mS) 0.254 0.317 0.333 0.067
(line) 4 10 9 5
(line) 3 2 6 5
V back porch (mS) 0.953 1.049 0.953 0.444
(line) 15 33 30 20
H sync polarity Neg Neg Neg Pos
V sync polarity Neg Neg Neg Pos
Scan type Interlaced Non Interlaced Non Interlaced Non Interlaced
Remarks HDCP* HDCP HDCP HDCP
*HDCP : High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection
6-31
CONFIDENTIAL
PC mode 94 95 96 97 98
Signal name HDTV-W
Definition 1920*1080Hz
Dot clock frequency (MHz) 74.250
H frequency (kHz) 33.750
V frequency (Hz) 60.000
H total (uS) 29.629
(dots) 2200
H display period (uS) 25.859
(dots) 1920
H front porch (uS) 1.185
(dots) 88
H sync pulse width (uS) 0.592
(dots) 44
NOT USED
H back porch (uS) 1.993
(dots) 148
V total (mS) 7.582
(line) 563
V display period (mS) 16.000
(line) 540
V front porch (mS) 0.040
(line) 3
V sync pulse width (mS) 0.148
(line) 5
V back porch (mS) 0.444
(line) 15
H sync polarity Pos
V sync polarity Pos
Scan type Interlaced
Remarks HDCP
*HDCP : High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection
6-32
CONFIDENTIAL
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY
(Caution) 1. Before disassembly, turn power off the main unit and pull out the power plug from the wall outlet.
2. Use a screwdriver with a fitting size. Otherwise, the screw threads may be damaged.
3. Reassembly can be carried out in the reverse order for disassembly. Refer to the disassembly procedures and
forward reassembly in the reverse order.
4. The order for taking out the parts (or components) is indicated by the foregoing numeral that is attached to the
name of each part.
5. The wire connector symbol is indicated by two digits of Marking . Read CN- when examining the table of parts.
6. Class A or Class B in the text is applicable to the models specified below.
CLASS A: PX-50XM4J, 50XM4A, CLASS B: PX-50XR4A, 50XR4W, 50XR4G
1. Outlined method of disassembly

The outlined procedures for the disassembly of the major parts are shown below (disassembled in the direction of ).
In regard to the details of disassembly, cautions, etc., refer to the method of replacement for each part [page indicated in ( )].
SET STAND BACK COVER CHASSIS ASSY PDP BRACKET FILTER FILTER
(with a STAND) (P7-2) (P7-5) (P7-8)
(P7-3~7-4) (P7-6~7-7) (P7-8~7-9)
Modifications Modifications of FRONT PANEL SUB FRONT

of a STAND * a BACK COVER *
(P7-11) (P7-10)
(P7-12) (P7-13)
BUTTON COVER LED PWB

(P7-10) (P7-8)
SET CONTROL BUTTON CTL PWB
(without a STAND) (P7-10) (P7-8)
BACK COVER TERMINAL PANEL M SUB ASSY TERMINAL PANEL M MAIN PWB
(P7-14) (P7-15) (P7-15)
(P7-3)
CCD PWB
(P7-16)
TERMINAL PANEL S 232C PWB
* Modification means that the screws are (P7-17) (P7-17)
mounted or removed. POWER BUTTON COVER POWER BUTTON PWR PWB
(P7-18) (P7-18) (P7-18)
TERMINAL PANEL B SUB ASSY TERMINAL PANEL B AUDIO PWB
(P7-19) (P7-20~7-21) (P7-20~7-21)
POWER UNIT SENB PWB FAN AC INLET
(P7-22) (P7-23) (P7-23) (P7-20~7-21)
SEND PWB SENCPWB
(P7-23) (P7-23)
7-1
CONFIDENTIAL
2. STAND
(1)SCREW
(1)SCREW M6*50
M6*50 4p
4p
(2)STAND
(2)STAND
7-2
CONFIDENTIAL
3. BACK COVER
M02
M02 SERIAL
SERIAL LABEL
LABEL (5)BACK
(5)BACK COVER
COVER ASSY
ASSY
24L44731
24L44731
(4)SRW31 M47
M47 NAME
NAME PLATE
PLATE
(4)SRW31 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE
CBIPS*4*12*15KFE (2)M14
29N01401 (2)M14 HANDLE
HANDLE
29N01401 *31p
*31p (Caution) This
(Caution) This is
is not
not aa service
service part.
part. 29F00591
29F00591 *2p
*2p
(1)SRW33
CBIPS*5*16*15KFE
29N01411
29N01411 *4p
*4p
M34
M34 GSGS COVER
COVER
29H02782
29H02782
Under
Under of
of NAME
NAME PLATE
PLATE
M03
M03 LABEL(EARTH)
LABEL(EARTH)
M48
M48 SPEAKER
SPEAKER LABEL
LABEL 24L44791
24L44791
29L03552
29L03552
(3)SRW32
(3)SRW32 SCREW
SCREW PL-CPIMS*3*10*15KFE
PL-CPIMS*3*10*15KFE M46
M46 AC
AC IN
IN LABEL
LABEL
29N01431
29N01431 *9p
*9p 29L00491
29L00491
7-3
CONFIDENTIAL
(2)M50
(2)M50 BACK
BACK COVER(50XM4)
COVER(50XM4)
29P01391
29P01391
(1)BRR01
(1)BRR01 BARRIER
BARRIER PS(50XM4)
PS(50XM4)
29J01281
29J01281
*Adhesion
*Adhesion should
should bebe based
based onon the
the
position
position of
of heat
heat radiator
radiator holes.
holes.
The
The pattern
pattern of
of separator.
separator.
7-4
CONFIDENTIAL
4. CHASSIS ASSY
(12)CHASSIS
(12)CHASSIS ASSY
ASSY (10)SRW05
(10)SRW05 CBIPS*5*20*3GF
CBIPS*5*20*3GF
29N01511
29N01511 6p
6p
(8)SRW06
CBIPS*4*12*15KFE
29N01401
29N01401 *10p
*10p
(5)CONNECTOR
(5)CONNECTOR 4p
4p
(4)CONNECTOR
(4)CONNECTOR
(3)SRW18
(3)SRW18 TP-M3*6*3KF
TP-M3*6*3KF
24N04581
24N04581 *1p
*1p
(7)SRW22
(7)SRW22 CB2PS*4*12*15KFE
CB2PS*4*12*15KFE
29N01401
29N01401 *1p
*1p
(6)SRW21
TP-M3*6*3KF
24N04581
24N04581 *1p
*1p
(2)M26
(2)M26 SHIELD
SHIELD MAIN
MAIN (50XM4)
(50XM4)
*SRW04
*SRW04 can
can be
be seen
seen when
when aa 29H03671
29H03671
TERMINAL
TERMINAL PANEL S ASSY is
PANEL S ASSY is removed.
removed. (1)
(1) SRW30
SRW30 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE
CBIPS*4*12*15KFE
29N01401
29N01401 *8p
*8p
(9)SRW07
CBIPS*4*12*15KFE
29N01401
29N01401 *6p
*6p
(11)SRW04
(11)SRW04 PL-CPIMS*4*12*15KFE
PL-CPIMS*4*12*15KFE
29N01441
29N01441 *3pc
*3pc
7-5
CONFIDENTIAL
5. PDP
(4)CONNECTOR
(4)CONNECTOR
(1)
(1) SCREW
SCREW
(Caution) This
(Caution) This screw
screw is is used
used
to
to fasten
fasten the
the PWB
PWB of of the
the PDP.
PDP.
(3)M08
(3)M08 LUG(60)
LUG(60)
29C01471
29C01471
ItIt pulls
pulls out
out in
in the
the direction
direction of
of 4:00.
4:00.
(2)SRW34
TP-M3*6*3KF
24N04581
24N04581 *1p
*1p
(Caution) Pass
(Caution) Pass the
the PD
PD
and
and PH cables this
PH cables this hole.
hole.
(Caution) Pass
(Caution) Pass the
the SW
SW
cables
cables beneath
beneath the
the module.
module.
(4)PDP
(4)PDP PDP-NP50X6MF01
PDP-NP50X6MF01
3S350006
3S350006
7-6
CONFIDENTIAL
Positioning
Positioning pin
pin Positioning
Positioning pin
pin
When
When the
the service
service parts
parts PDP
PDP are
are delivered,
delivered, all
all the
the mounting
mounting
pieces
pieces (8 pcs.) are removed and the M57 MD spacers (50
(8 pcs.) are removed and the M57 MD spacers (50 xx
M4) 29F01071 6P are installed.
M4) 29F01071 6P are installed.
Use
Use the
the screws
screws that
that are
are furnished
furnished with
with the
the service
service parts
parts PDP.
PDP.
7-7
CONFIDENTIAL
6. BRACKET FILTER/FILTER
(1)SRW03
(1)SRW03 CPIPS*4*8*3KF
CPIPS*4*8*3KF (5)M19
(5)M19 BRACKET
BRACKET FILTER
FILTER T(50XM3)
T(50XM3)
M37
M37 CUSHION(580*10*T4)
CUSHION(580*10*T4) 29N00521
29N00521 *20p
*20p 29H02471
29H02471
29J01012
29J01012 *4p
*4p
6
5 (8)SRW02
(8)SRW02 CPIPS*4*12*15KFE
CPIPS*4*12*15KFE
29N01401 (4)M35
(4)M35 BRACKET
BRACKET FILTER
FILTER R(50XM3)
R(50XM3)
29N01401 *6p*6p
29H02821
29H02821
(Caution) The FRONT PANEL can be
(Caution) The FRONT PANEL can be taken
taken out
out when
when
this screw only has been removed.
this screw only has been removed.
However,
However, when
when you
you assemble,
assemble, assemble
assemble inin the
the order
order
within
within number. Otherwise, the gap between filters
number. Otherwise, the gap between filters
becomes
becomes large.
large.
M38
M38 CUSHION(654*10*T4)
CUSHION(654*10*T4)
29J01022
29J01022 *2p
*2p
(2)M18
(2)M18 BRACKET
BRACKET FILTER
FILTER LL (50XM3)
(50XM3) (7)A03
(7)A03 CTL
CTL PWB
PWB ASSY
ASSY
29H02461
29H02461 937F7SB1
937F7SB1
(Caution) Insert
(Caution) Insert the
the CTL
CTL PWB
PWB in
in the
the SUB
SUB FRONT
FRONT
before
before mounting
mounting thethe BRACKET
BRACKET FILTER
FILTER B.B.
(Caution) The
(Caution) The SWSW cable
cable should
should be
be
inserted
inserted in
in the
the clearance
clearance toward
toward the
the rib.
rib.
(6)A05
(6)A05 LED
LED PWB
PWB ASSY
ASSY
937F7SD1
937F7SD1
(Caution) Hook
(Caution) Hook the
the upper
upper claw
claw at
at first.
first.
3 4
2 1
(3)M20
(3)M20 BRACKET
BRACKET FILTER
FILTER BB (50XM3)
(50XM3)
29H02481
29H02481
7-8
CONFIDENTIAL
7. FILTER
(Caution) No SHIELDING TAPE has been stuck to the service part FILTER. Therefore, in the case of filter replacement,
please order the SHIELDING TAPE and stick it as illustrated below. (CLASS A)
SHIELDING TAPE (CLASS A) (Caution) Once

(Caution) Once the
the shielding
shielding tape
tape is
is removed,
removed, itit must
must not
not be
be used
used again
again because
because
its adhesive strength has been reduced.
its adhesive strength has been reduced.
1120mm
PX-50XM4
PX-50XM4 Series(Mitsui
Series(Mitsui Chemicals
Chemicals filter)only
filter)only
M05
M05 SHIELDING
SHIELDING TAPETAPE AL(25*50M)
AL(25*50M) 29C01911
29C01911
Shall
Shall be
be stuck
stuck to
to the
the four
four sides.
sides.
630mm
M41
M41
PX-50XM4
PX-50XM4 Series:
Series: FILTER(50A)
FILTER(50A) 29KS0151
29KS0151
PX-50XR4
PX-50XR4 Series: FILTER(50B) 29KS0161
Series: FILTER(50B) 29KS0161
** The
The filter
filter is
is positioned
positioned at
at bottom
bottom left.
left.
Spatter film Silver paste Cross-section diagram
FILTER
[Display side]
M05 SHIELDING TAPE AL(25MM*50M)
Black area 29C01911
7-9
CONFIDENTIAL
8. SUB FRONT
(2)M16
(2)M16 CLASS
CLASS AA :: CONTROL
CONTROL BUTTON(50XM3)
BUTTON(50XM3) :: 29G00291
29G00291
CLASS
CLASS BB :: CONTROL
CONTROL BUTTON(50XM3/S)
BUTTON(50XM3/S) :: 29G00321
29G00321
(3)M12
(3)M12 CLASS
CLASS AA :: BUTTON
BUTTON COVER(50XM3)
COVER(50XM3) :: 29F00551
29F00551
CLASS
CLASS BB :: BUTTON
BUTTON COVER(50XM3/S)
COVER(50XM3/S) :: 29F00791
29F00791
* Inserted in CONTROL BUTTON and BUTTON COVER.
(1)SRW01
(1)SRW01 CBIPS*3*8*3KF
CBIPS*3*8*3KF
24N03691
24N03691 *2p
*2p
(4)M10
(4)M10 SUB
SUB FRONT(50XM3)
FRONT(50XM3)
29D00563
29D00563
7-10
CONFIDENTIAL
9. FRONT PANEL
(1)M42
(1)M42 INDICATOR(50XM3)
INDICATOR(50XM3)
29K00421
29K00421
(Caution) For
(Caution) For removal,
removal, itit comes
comes offoff when
when itit is
is pressed
pressed
strongly from the rear side of the front panel.
strongly from the rear side of the front panel.
For
For installation,
installation, remove
remove the
the separator
separator before
before adhesion.
adhesion.
(Caution)The
(Caution) TheCLASS
CLASSBBisisstuck
stuckto
tothe
theNEC
NEClogo
logobatch.
batch.
(2)M09 IfIfititisisput
put on the stand with its front side facingdownwards,
on the stand with its front side facing downwards,
(2)M09 CLASS
CLASS AA :: FRONT
FRONT PANEL(50XM3)
PANEL(50XM3) :: 29D00554
29D00554
CLASS make
makesure surenot
notto
tohurt
hurtthis
thisside.
side.
CLASS B : FRONT PANEL ASSY(50XM3/S) : 29DS0573
B : FRONT PANEL ASSY(50XM3/S) : 29DS0573
7-11
CONFIDENTIAL
10. STAND (modification)
(1)SCREW
(1)SCREW M6*50
M6*50 4p
4p
7-12
CONFIDENTIAL
11. BACK COVER (modification)
(Caution) The illustration below shows a case when the STAND has been removed.
(1)SRW02
CBIPS*4*12*15KFE
29N01401
29N01401 *6p
*6p
(Caution) The FRONT PANEL can be taken
(Caution) The FRONT PANEL can be taken out
out when
when this
this screw
screw
only has been removed.
only has been removed. (2)FRONT
(2)FRONT PANEL
PANEL ASSY
ASSY
However,
However, when
when you
you assemble,
assemble, assemble
assemble in in the
the order
order within
within
number.
number. Otherwise, the gap between filters becomes large.
Otherwise, the gap between filters becomes large.
5 6
3 4
2 1
7-13
CONFIDENTIAL
12. TERMINAL PANEL M SUB ASSY
(5)SRW20
CBIPS*4*12*15KFE
29N01401
29N01401 *3p
*3p
(7)TERMINAL
(7)TERMINAL PANEL
PANEL M
M
SUB ASSY
SUB ASSY
(6)SRW18
TP-M3*6*3KF
24N04581
24N04581 *4p
*4p
(3)SRW18
TP-M3*6*3KF
24N04581
24N04581
(Caution) ItIt should
(Caution) should be
be tightened
tightened
together
together with the round terminal
with the round terminal (2)M26
(2)M26 SHIELD
SHIELD MAIN
MAIN (50XM4)
(50XM4)
of
of the
the AD
AD cable.
cable. 29H03671
29H03671
(4)CONNECTOR
(4)CONNECTOR 12p
12p (1)
(1) SRW30
CBIPS*4*12*15KFE
29N01401
29N01401 *8p
*8p
7-14
CONFIDENTIAL
13. TERMINAL PANEL M /MAIN PWB

(Caution) Please note that no DS connector is furnished even though the MAIN PWB is ordered.
(6)A01
(6)A01 MAIN
MAIN PWB
PWB ASSY
ASSY
(Caution) Refer to Parts List
(Caution) Refer to Parts List
** Positioning
Positioning hole
hole
Re For
For mounting,
mounting, itit should
should be
a be
sid r combined
combined with
with the
the embossed
embossed part
part
e
(5)M17 on
on the
the main
main unit
unit side.
side.
(5)M17
SHIELD
SHIELD PLATE
PLATE MAIN(42XM3)
MAIN(42XM3)
29H03541
29H03541 (Caution) After
(Caution) After sticking
sticking the
the TERMINAL
TERMINAL
SHEET
SHEET to to the
the TERMINAL
TERMINAL PANEL, PANEL, pushpush
the
the peripheral
peripheral area
area ofof the
the screw
screw hole
hole to
to
strengthen
strengthen thethe adhesion.
adhesion. (In (In 33 positions)
positions)
(2)SRW15
CBIPS*3*8*3KF
24N03691
24N03691 *7p
*7p
(1)SRW16
(1)SRW16 SCREW(UNC4-40/4-40)
SCREW(UNC4-40/4-40)
(3)M43 32990229
32990229 *4p
*4p
(3)M43 (4)M27
(4)M27 TERMINAL
TERMINAL PANEL
PANEL M(50XM3)
M(50XM3)
50XM4
50XM4 Series
Series :: TERMINAL
TERMINAL SHEETSHEET M(50XM3)W
M(50XM3)W 29K00571
29K00571 (Caution) Use
(Caution) Use aa hexagon
hexagon head
head driver
driver
29H02551
29H02551 (opposite
50XR4
50XR4 Series : TERMINAL SHEET M(50XR4)CP
Series : TERMINAL SHEET M(50XR4)CP 29K00671
29K00671 (opposite side
side distance
distance 5mm).
5mm).
** Peel
Peel off
off the
the protection
protection film.
film.
7-15
CONFIDENTIAL
14. CCD PWB (PX-50XM4A, 50XR4A)
(2)A10
(2)A10 CCD
CCD PWB
PWB
937F6C01
937F6C01
A01
A01 MAIN
MAIN PWB
PWB
937J0M01
937J0M01
** Connectors
Connectors are
are inserted
inserted
when assembling.
when assembling.
(1)NYLON
(1)NYLON RIVET(P3045B)
RIVET(P3045B)
29C01921
29C01921
7-16
CONFIDENTIAL
15. TERMINAL PANEL S/ 232C PWB
(4)A02
(4)A02 232C
232C PWB
PWB ASSY
ASSY
937F7SA1
937F7SA1
(3)SRW17
(3)SRW17 SCREW(UNC4-40/4-40)
SCREW(UNC4-40/4-40)
32990229
32990229 *2p
*2p
(Caution) Use
(Caution) Use aa hexagon
hexagon head
head driver
driver
(opposite
(opposite side
side distance
distance 5mm).
5mm).
(1)SRW21
TP-M3*6*3KF
24N04581
24N04581
(2)SRW22
CBIPS*4*12*15KFE
Rear 29N01401
29N01401
side
(Caution) After
(Caution) After sticking
sticking the
the TERMINAL
TERMINAL SHEET
SHEET to to the
the TERMINAL
TERMINAL PANEL,
PANEL,
push
push the peripheral area of the screw hole to strengthen the
the peripheral area of the screw hole to strengthen the adhesion.
adhesion.
(6)M44
(6)M44
CLASS
CLASS AA :: TERMINAL
TERMINAL SHEET
SHEET S(50XM3)W
S(50XM3)W 29H02561
29H02561
CLASS
CLASS B : TERMINAL SHEET S(50XR4)
B : TERMINAL SHEET S(50XR4) 29K00681
29K00681
(6)M28
(6)M28 TERMINAL
TERMINAL PANEL
PANEL S(50XM3)
S(50XM3)
29H02561
29H02561
** Positioning
Positioning hole
hole
For
For mounting,
should bebe
combined
combined with
with the
the embossed
embossed
part
part on
on the
the main
main unit
unit side.
side.
7-17
CONFIDENTIAL
16. POWER BUTTON COVER/POWER BUTTON/PWR PWB
(1)SRW23
TP-M3*6*3KF
24N04581
24N04581 *2p
*2p
(3)M15
(3)M15 POWER
POWER BUTTON(50XM3)
BUTTON(50XM3)
29G00281
29G00281
(2)M13
(2)M13 POWER
POWER BUTTON
BUTTON COVER(50XM3)
COVER(50XM3)
29F00561
29F00561
(4)A04
(4)A04 PWR
PWR PWB
PWB ASSY
ASSY
937F7SC1
937F7SC1
Rear
side
(Caution) Positioning
(Caution) Positioning pin
pin Use
Use
itit in
in the
the case
case of
of reassembly.
reassembly.
7-18
CONFIDENTIAL
17. TERMINAL PANEL B SUB ASSY
(1)CONNECTOR
(1)CONNECTOR 3p
3p
(4)M40
(4)M40 SILICONE
SILICONE SHEET
SHEET
(AUDIO)
(AUDIO) TT
29J01291
29J01291
** Peel
Peel off
off the
the separator
separator that
that is
is
stuck
stuck to
to the
the rear
rear side
side of
of the
the
M58
M58 AUDIO
AUDIO HEAT
HEAT SINK
SINK
29H03561.
29H03561.
(3)
(3) SRW26
SRW26 TP-M3*6*3KF
TP-M3*6*3KF (5)SRW27
TP-M3*6*3KF
24N04581
24N04581 *4p
*4p 24N04581
24N04581 *3p
*3p
(6)TERMINAL
(6)TERMINAL PANEL
PANEL BB (2)SRW28
(2)SRW28 ET-CBIMS*4*8*3KF
ET-CBIMS*4*8*3KF
SUB
SUB ASSY
ASSY 24N04001
24N04001
7-19
CONFIDENTIAL
18. TERMINAL PANEL B/AUDIO PWB/AC INLET GSK05

GSK05 SHIELDING
SHIELDING SHEET(300*4)
SHEET(300*4)
(1)CLASS A 29C01641
29C01641
CN-PI
CN-PI CABLE
CABLE 2P
2P L265
L265 ESD-R-19
ESD-R-19 (Caution) The
(Caution) The heat
heat radiator
radiator holes
holes must
must
7S530035
7S530035 not
not be
be hindered.
hindered.
(5)E02
(5)E02 AC
AC INLET
INLET 10GEEG3C
10GEEG3C
6S760013
6S760013
M29
M29 TERMINAL
TERMINAL PANEL
PANEL B(50XM3)
B(50XM3)
GND
GND CABLE
CABLE 1P
1P L360
L360 29H02571
(4)M51 29H02571
7S530015
7S530015 (4)M51 BARRIER(INLET)
BARRIER(INLET)
24J15941
24J15941 (Caution) Positioning
(Caution) Positioning hole
hole
(Caution) The side
(Caution) The side that
that is
is not
not For
bent For mounting, it should be
mounting, it should be
bent should be positioned on
should be positioned on the
the
label combined
combined with the embossed part
with the embossed part
label side
side of
of the
the INLET.
INLET. Rear on
on the
the main
main unit
unit side.
side.
side
(2)A09
(2)A09 AUDIO
AUDIO PWB
PWB ASSY
ASSY (Caution) The
(Caution) The label
label side
side is
is
937F7SH1
937F7SH1 made
made to
to face
face upwards.
upwards.
M45
M45 TERMINAL
TERMINAL SHIEET
SHIEET B(50XM3)
B(50XM3)
29K00461
29K00461
(3)SRW24
(3)SRW24
SCREW
SCREW PL-CPIMS*3*10*15KFE
PL-CPIMS*3*10*15KFE
(1)SRW25
CBIPS*3*8*3KF M29
M29 TERMINAL
TERMINAL PANEL
PANEL B(50XM3)
B(50XM3) 29N01431
29N01431 *2pcs
*2pcs
24N03691
24N03691 *2pcs
*2pcs 29H02571
29H02571
7-20
CONFIDENTIAL
(2)CLASS B
GSK05
GSK05 SHIELDING
SHIELDING SHEET(300*4)
SHEET(300*4)
29C01641
29C01641
(Caution) The
(Caution) The heat
heat radiator
radiator holes
holes must
must
GND
GND CABLE
CABLE 1P
1P L360
L360 not
not be
be hindered.
hindered.
7S530015
7S530015
CN-PI
CN-PI CABLE
CABLE 2P
2P L265
L265 ESD-R-19
ESD-R-19
7S530035
7S530035 M29
M29 TERMINAL
TERMINAL PANEL
PANEL B(61XM2)
B(61XM2)
29H03191
29H03191
(5)M36
(5)M36 BARRIER(INLET)
BARRIER(INLET) (Caution) Positioning
(Caution) Positioning hole
hole
29J01321
29J01321 For
For mounting,
should bebe
(6)E02
(6)E02 AC AC INLET
INLET 10DKDG3S(Y1)
10DKDG3S(Y1) combined with the embossed
6S760016 Rear combined with the embossed
6S760016
side part
part on
on the
the main
main unit
unit side.
side.
(Caution) Mount
(Caution) Mount itit so
so that
that its
its
label
label faces
faces upwards.
upwards.
(2)A09
(2)A09 AUDIO
AUDIO PWB
PWB ASSY
ASSY
937G0SH1
937G0SH1
(3)SRW24
(3)SRW24
CPIMS*NO.6-32UNC*8*3GF
CPIMS*NO.6-32UNC*8*3GF
29N01131*2p
29N01131*2p
(1)SRW25
CBIPS*3*8*3KF M26 (4)M59
(4)M59 INLET
INLET COLLER
COLLER
M26 TERMINAL
TERMINAL PANEL
PANEL B(61XM2)
B(61XM2)
24N03691
24N03691 *2p
*2p 29H03191 29F00481
29F00481 *2p
*2p
29H03191
** Insert
Insert itit between
between the
the screw
screw
M45
M45 TERMINAL
TERMINAL SHEETSHEET B(50XM3)
B(50XM3) and
and the TERMINAL SHEET.
the TERMINAL SHEET.
29K00461
29K00461
** Peel
Peel off
off the
the protection
protection film.
film.
7-21
CONFIDENTIAL
19. POWER UNIT
(2)PSU
(2)PSU POWER
POWER UNIT
UNIT
3S110171
3S110171
(1)SRW14
PL-CPIMS*4*12*15KFE
29N01441
29N01441 *6p
*6p
7-22
CONFIDENTIAL
20. SENB PWB/SENC PWB/SEND PWB/FAN
(7)E01
(7)E01 FAN
FAN MOTOR
MOTOR 9G1212M4D03
9G1212M4D03 3S170014 3S170014 *2 *2
(Caution) For assembly, hook the upper claw first and
(Caution) For assembly, hook the upper claw first and push
push itit in
in
while
while the name plate stays in the direction of rightward turning
the name plate stays in the direction of rightward turning by by
90°.
90°. Confirm,
Confirm, without
without fail,
fail, that
that itit is
is pulled
pulled and
and caught
caught by
by the
the claw.
claw.
(2)A06
(2)A06 SENB
SENB PWB
PWB ASSY
ASSY
937F7SE1
937F7SE1 (4)A08
(4)A08 SEND
SEND PWB
PWB
937F7SG1
937F7SG1
(1)SRW29
CBIPS*4*12*15KFE
29N01401
29N01401 (3)SRW29
CBIPS*4*12*15KFE
29N01401
29N01401
(6)A07
(6)A07 SENC
SENC PWB
PWB ASSY
ASSY
937F7SF1
937F7SF1
(5)SRW29
CBIPS*4*12*15KFE
29N01401
29N01401
7-23
CONFIDENTIAL
21. BRACKET/SHIELD
(8)SRW10
CBIPS*4*12*15KFE
(Caution) The
(Caution) The mechanical
mechanical component
component is
is provided
provided with
with an
an engraved
engraved marking
marking of
of 29N01401
the arrow ( ). Remove the screw where this arrow mark is located. 29N01401 *8p
*8p
the arrow ( ). Remove the screw where this arrow mark is located.
(9)M23
(9)M23 PS
PS BRACKET(50XM3)
BRACKET(50XM3)
(2)M21
(2)M21 PWB
PWB BASE
BASE MAIN(50XM4)
MAIN(50XM4) (11)M25
(11)M25 SHIELD
SHIELD CENTER
CENTER 29H02512
29H02512
29H03461
29H03461 29H02532
29H02532
Positioning
Positioning pin
pin
BRR02
BRR02 BARRISER
BARRISER
PS(50XM4)
PS(50XM4)
29J01281
29J01281
(1)SRW13
CBIPS*4*12*15KFE
29N01401 Stick
Stick it in the
it in the purpose
purpose of
of
29N01401 *2p
*2p
aa Back
Back stamp of
stamp of PWB
PWB
Positioning BASE
BASE MAIN.
MAIN.
Positioning pin
pin AD
AD cable
cable is
is taken
taken
out
out from
from here.
here.
Positioning
Positioning pin
pin
(6)M08
(6)M08 LUG(60)
LUG(60)
29C01471
29C01471
ItIt should
should bebe tightened
tightened
together
together with the
with the SRW11.
SRW11.
(4)M22
(4)M22 PWB
PWB BASE
BASE SUB(50XM4)
SUB(50XM4)
29H03471
29H03471
(3)
(3) SRW12
CBIPS*4*12*15KFE Positioning
Positioning pin
pin Positioning
Positioning pin
pin
29N01401
29N01401 *2p
*2p
(10)SRW09
CBIPS*4*12*15KFE (7)M24
(7)M24 SHIELD
SHIELD BOTTOM(50XM4)
BOTTOM(50XM4)
29N01401
29N01401 *1p
*1p 29H03481
29H03481
(5)SRW11
CBIPS*4*12*15KFE
29N01401
29N01401 *7p
*7p
7-24
CONFIDENTIAL
22. FRAME
(3)SRW06
CBIPS*4*12*15KFE
(2)SRW05
CBIPS*5*20*3GF (11)M11
(11)M11 FRAME(50XM3)
FRAME(50XM3) 29N01401
29N01401 *10p
*10p
29N01511
29N01511 *4p
*4p 29D00574
29D00574 (Peripheral
(Peripheral area
area of
of the
the FRAME)
FRAME)
(1)SRW04
PL-CPIMS*4*12*15KFE
29N01441
29N01441 *3p
*3p
(4)SRW08
CBIPS*4*12*15KFE
29N01401
29N01401 *8p
*8p (6)M32
(6)M32 STAND
STAND BRKT(50XM3)
BRKT(50XM3)
(8)SRW07
CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29H02602
29H02602
(5)M32 29N01401
29N01401 *11p
*11p
(5)M32 STAND
STAND BRKT(50XM3)
BRKT(50XM3)
29H02602
29H02602 (10)M31
(10)M31 PLANE
PLANE L(50XM3)
L(50XM3)
29H02592
29H02592
(9)M30
(9)M30 PLANE
PLANE R(50XM3)
R(50XM3) (7)SRW05
CBIPS*5*20*3GF
29H02582
29H02582 29N01511
29N01511 *2p
*2p
7-25
CONFIDENTIAL
23. WIRE CLAMP
M06
M06 CLAMP(MWC-2S)
CLAMP(MWC-2S)
29C01401
29C01401 *16p
*16p
M07
M07 CLAMP(WS-2W-V0)
CLAMP(WS-2W-V0)
29C01421
29C01421 *16p
*16p
7-26
CONFIDENTIAL
24. GASCKET(CLASS B)
GSK03 SHIELDING SHEET(114*8) GSK02 SHIELDING SHEET(200*8)

29C01821 *3p 29C01811 *2p
(Caution) Adhesion
(Caution) Adhesion should
should be
be done
done in
in
the state that the notch part is positioned
the state that the notch part is positioned
upwards.
upwards.
GSK01 GASKET(L140*13*T1.5)
29C01801 *4p
GSK04 SHIELDING SHEET(114*8)

29C01821 *1p
7-27
CONFIDENTIAL
25. LABELS
(1) Positions of adhesion
Stick the labels in the positions on the back cover illustrated below. Dimensions indicated are approximate figures. However, the presence of
bends and air bubbles shall be reduced to a minimum.
24L44731
Stick on the slope.
Direction of a character turns a back side up.
Direction of
adhesion
LABEL
29L00491
29L03552
Adhesion of the CCC label
Stick the furnished CCC label approximately to the position indicated on the drawing of NAMEPLATE (50X***).

7-28
CONFIDENTIAL
(2) NAME PLATE LIST
NAME PLATE(50X***) NAME PLATE(50X***)C KTL LABEL(50X***) EARTH LABEL

NAME PLATE(50XM4J) Nothing Nothing LABEL(EARTH)
PX-50XM4J
29L05691 24L044791
NAME PLATE(50XM4A) Nothing Nothing Nothing
PX-50XM4A
2905701
NAME PLATE(50XM4W) NAME KTL LABEL(50XM4W) Nothing
PX-50XM4W 29L05711 PLATE(50XM4W)C 29L05761
29L05781
NAME PLATE(50XR4A) Nothing Nothing Nothing
PX-50XR4A
29L05731
NAME PLATE(50XR4W) NAME KTL LABEL(50XR4W) Nothing
PX-50XR4W 29L05741 PLATE(50XR4W)C 29L05771
29L05791
7-29
CONFIDENTIAL
(3) Contents SERIAL LABEL printout
(24L44731)
*The model name shall be printed out at the upper stage.
*The serial number shall be printed out at the lower stage. (Manufacture number control rules CPD-Standard-B102)
The numbering system for the serial number shall conform to the following:
4 70 1234 9 S
Control symbols: S→A→M→T→Z→N→K→U→C→W→J→P
When all the symbols are used, the numbering order returns to S.
Production base: 9 (NEC Nagano)
Serial: Serial numbers of 0000 ~ 9999
To be reset to 0001 each time the month of production is changed.
Model name: Fixed to 0
Month of production: January ~ September = 1 ~ 9, October = X,
November = Y, December = Z
Year of production: The lowest digit of the year of production
7-30
CONFIDENTIAL
26. WIRING
(Caution) “Turns”
(Caution) “Turns” inin the
the illustration
illustration below
below denotes
denotes the
the number
number ofof cable
cable turns
turns to
to be
be wound
wound
(1)CLASS A around the ferrite core. (Example) 3 turns → 3 turns of a cable wound
around the ferrite core. (Example) 3 turns → 3 turns of a cable wound around. around.
PX-50XM4 Series (CLASS A) Wiring Diagram
PX-50XM4J
PX-50XM4A
PX-50XM4W x2
PX-50XM4GS Pass 2 turns of TM. Pass PH and PD.
Fix the surplus part of Fan together with TM and TR. x2

TM TR
Pass PV only. Pass
Pass PV,TM,FA and FB. TR PH/PD. TS
Pass PV and AU. Pass TM,TR
Pass AU. and FAN.
x2 Pass PV and AU.
Pass AU and PV. AU PV Pass TS and FAN.

PV FA PH PD
Pass AD. FB PM
TM x2
Pass PV,TM,FA and FB. PN
Pass PM and PN. PM PA Pass TS and FAN.
Pass PA. x2 Pass TS.
AD AD Pass PM and PN only.
Label side x2 Pass PM,PN and AU.
Fix the AD with It is made for a SW cable
Wound Lug Pass SW and AD. AD not to approach AC INLET.
PN Pass PA,AU and SW.
SW RS Pass 2 turns of PA only.
PW
AC Fix the AC with Fix the surplus
Wound Lug Pass GND,AC and SW. part of SW.
TS
RS Pass RS and PW. Pass GND and AC.
x2 PA
Pass PA,AU and SW. x5 Pass TS and SW.
AU
LD Pass the SW through
Pass SW. the groove.
PW
LD SW
Pass PW. Pass PW. Pass AU. Pass 2 turns of AU. Pass 3 turns of GND.
Fix the surplus part of LD.
Pass PW. Pass AU.
AC INLET
PARTS NAME PANTS NO. Q'TY PARTS NAME PANTS NO. Q'TY GREEN(GND)
EDGING SADDLE(EDS-1208U) 29C00461 5 LUG(L60) 29C01471 2
CLAMPER,WIRE(D11.5) 24281251 1 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-930 6S170005 6
BROWN
CLAMP(WS-2W-V0) 29C01421 16 CORE,FERRITE SFT-72SNB 6S170003 4
CLAMP(MWC-2S) 29C01401 16 FERRITE CORE ESD-R-19 6S170007 1 BLUE
CCD board of PX-50XM4A : Try to push the bush rivet

and the connector to check for the freedom from floating.
7-31
CONFIDENTIAL
(2)CLASS B
(Caution) “Turns”
(Caution) “Turns” inin the
the illustration
illustration below
below denotes
denotes the
the number
number ofof cable
cable turns
turns to
to be
be wound
wound
around the ferrite core. (Example) 3 turns → 3 turns of a cable wound
around the ferrite core. (Example) 3 turns → 3 turns of a cable wound around. around.
PX-50XR4 Series (CLASS B) Wiring Diagram
PX-50XR4A
PX-50XR4W x2
PX-50XR4GS Pass 2 turns of TM. Pass PH and PD.
Fix the surplus part of Fan together with TM and TR. x2

TM TR
Pass PV only. Pass
Pass PV,TM,FA and FB. TR PH/PD. TS
Pass PV and AU. Pass TM,TR
Pass AU. and FAN.
x2 Pass PV and AU.
Pass AU and PV. AU PV Pass TS and FAN.

PV FA PH PD
FB PM
Pass AD. TM x2
Pass PV,TM,FA and FB. PN Class B Model
PM PA Pass TR and FAN. Remove the SW connector from the
Pass PM and PN.
Pass PA. x2 Pass TS. clamper block that is located at the
Pass PM and PN only. upper level in the parentheses.
AD AD
Label side
Mount the core.
x2 Pass PM,PN and AU.
Fix the AD with It is made for a SW cable
Wound Lug Pass SW and AD. PN AD Class B Model
Pass PA,AU and SW. not to approach AC INLET.
The white accessory core (ESD-R-19)
SW RS Pass 2 turns of PA only. and the black core (SFT-72SN-O23K)
PW AC Fix the AC with located on the AC connector shall be
Fix the surplus
Wound Lug Pass GND,AC and SW. part of SW. separated from each other with the
Pass RS. TS boundary of Clamper (3).
RS Pass RS Pass GND and AC.
(Addition of cores) The white accessory core (ESD-R-19)
and PW. shall be separated from the AC power
Pass RS. supply beyond the clamper.
x3
(Addition of cores) PA
Pass PA,AU and SW. x5 Pass TS and SW.
AU
Pass the SW through Class B Model
Pass LD. LD
Pass SW. the groove. Addition of cores (3 pcs. in all)
(Addition of cores) PW
FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-930 2pcs.
FERRITE CORE ZCAT1518-0730 1pc.
LD Pass PW. Pass PW. Pass AU. SW Core position change
Pass 2 turns
Fix the surplus part of LD. of AU. Pass 3 turns of GND. FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-930 1pc.
Pass PW. Pass AU.
(Core position change)
PARTS NAME PANTS NO. Q'TY AC INLET
PARTS NAME PANTS NO. Q'TY LUG(L60) 29C01471 2
GREEN(GND)
EDGING SADDLE(EDS-1208U) 29C00461 5 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-930 6S170005 9
CLAMPER,WIRE(D11.5) 24281251 1 CORE,FERRITE SFT-72SNB 6S170003 4
BROWN
CLAMP(WS-2W-V0) 29C01421 16 FERRITE CORE ESD-R-19 6S170007 1
CLAMP(MWC-2S) 29C01401 16 FERRITE CORE ZCAT1518-0730 6S170006 1 BLUE
CCD board of PX-50XR4A : Try to push the bush rivet

and the connector to check for the freedom from floating.
7-32
CONFIDENTIAL
METHOD OF PACKAGING
PX-50XM4A
A) BRACKET SASSY
PK25 BRACKET(SAFE)
24P01591 x 2pcs.
PK24 POLYETHYLENE BAG(70*100)

24M15221
BRACKET(SAFE) and PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF in

PK26 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF a POLYETHYLENE BAG(70*100).
910E4026 x 2pcs. Roll the bag and fasten it with an adhesive tape.
B) ACCESSORY SASSY
PK18 BAG,POLYETHYLENE(150*370)
24813191
BRACKET SASSY
PK21 BATTERY,DRY CELL R03 UB Fold it into an adequate size and

fasten it with an adhesive tape.
4S490003 x2pcs.
Accommodated in the wrapped style.
PK22 CORE,FERRITE SFT-725NB

6S170003 x 2pcs.
Wire harness bandages PK20 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-930

x 2pcs. 6S170005 x 2pcs.
Attached to the core
PK19 CLAMP(RST-1N)
29C01511 x 5pcs.
8-1
CONFIDENTIAL
C) ACCESSORY BOX (W)
SUPPLEMENT SHEET
SUPPLEMENT SHEET Front paper:

Align its direction
and put it in.
SUPPLEMENT SHEET
SHT003 NOTICE SHEET US (PDP)

78038622
SHT002 OPERATION 50XM4A/61XM3A
7S801381
SHT001 INFORMATION 50XM4A
7S801361 PSC POWER CORD U3 L3.0M L
7S552001
BAG (Contained in the bagged state.)
PK17 REM-T HAND UNIT RP-114

3S120221 (Contained in a bag.)
INFORMATION
OPERATION
NOTICE SHEET
SUPPLEMENT SHEET
ACCESSORY BOX(W) Cables

and others
PK16 ACCESSORY BOX(W)

Accommodation layout diagram 29MS1641
Seen from Arrow A
Circuit Quantity
Name Titled Symbol Material Name Material Code Needed
POWER CORD U3 L3.0M L

POWER CORD
INFORMATION INFORMATION 50XM4A
OPERATION OPERATION 50XM4A/61XM3A
NOTICE SHEET NOTICE SHEET US (PDP)
Nil Nil Nil

SUPPLEMENT
SHEET Nil Nil Nil
Nil Nil Nil
8-2
CONFIDENTIAL
D) SPACER, PILLAR, CARTON BOX
PK11 CARTON BOX T(50XM4)

29MS3131
The plane with the "front" indication
shall be made to coincide with the
monitor front.
PK07 SPACER TR(50XM3)

29MS2221
Positioned on the right as seen
PK13 PILLAR T(50XM3) from the front so that the usage
29MS2371 arrow mark face the front plane
of the set.
PK06 SPACER TL(50XM3)
29MS2211 PK04
Positioned on the left as seen from PROTECTION SHEET(50XM3)
the front so that the usage arrow mark
29M00891
PK16 face the front plane of the set.
Wrap the set.
ACCESSORY BOX(W)
29MS1641 PK05
PROTECTION SHEET S(50XM3)
29M00901
Put it on 29M00891.
PK10 PK09 SPACER BR(50XM3)
SPACER BC(50XM3) 29MS2241
29MS2251 Positioned on the right as seen
PK15 from the front so that the usage
SUPPORT BC(50XM3) arrow mark face the front plane
of the set.
29MS2581
PK12
PILLAR S(50XM4)
29MS3071 To be folded inside
(6 positions)
PK08 SPACER BL(50XM3)

29MS2231
Positioned on the left as seen from
face the front plane of the set.
PK14 CARTON BOX B(50XM3)
29MS2382
PK12 PILLAR S(50XM4)
PROTECTION 29MS3071
SHEET
*Make sure not to damage Diagram of Pillar Assembly T
this portion when a spacer
is entered. Fold it in the direction indicated by the arrow,
and join the notch parts.
Rear Side
Fastened with a tape in 5 positions.
The ashesive tape to be used is:
REAR SIDE Paper adhesive tape 30mm*18mm:
92203227 or Paper adhesive tape Notch parts
19mm*18mm: 92203226
8-3
CONFIDENTIAL
E) JOINT, PP BAND, STOPPER
To be locked by inserting the joints (24CS0551) in 4 positions.
Hang the P.P band based on the marking printed on the carton box
edge line and fasten it with a stopper (P.P band) (24282431).
Markings for the P.P band
PK02 STOPPER
24282431
Same workmanship on the
150~200mm
opposite side.
The tape to be used shall be
a transparent P.P tape
60mm*50m (92203187) or
a Colorian PP tape #426
60mm*50mm (9W050001).
PP BAND
PK03 JOINT
24CS0551
CARTON BOX T CARTON BOX B
JOINT
1. Insert the JOINT 2. Rotate the hinged part. 3. Push it in until it is locked.
in a carton box.
JOINT Mounting Details
(Cross section)
F) BAR CORD SERIAL LABEL
The required items shall be printed on the barcode serial label (16761791).
Detailed contents of printing shall conform to the diagram below.
Detailed Contents of Printing for the BARCODE SERIAL LABEL
Upper stage: Print abarcode with the same contents as those of the middle stage.
Middle stage: To be printed out in the order of asterisk, merchandise code (in 8 digits),
3 spaces, serial number (in 9 digits), and asterisk. The merchandise code
is "01272276". The serial number shall be the same as the one that is
printed on the serial label (24L44731) of the set main body.
Lower stage: Print out Model No. "PX-50XM4A".
8-4
CONFIDENTIAL
G) MODEL NAME LABEL
Print out the model name, the POS code, weight, etc., on the model name label (29L05951).
Detailed contents shall conform to the diagram below. In regard to the size, character height,
line boldness, and font, refer to the model name label (61XM3G) (29L06491).
Detailed Contents of Printing for the MODEL NAME LABEL
H) Adhesion of the MODEL NAME LABEL and BAR CODE SERIAL LABEL
Stick the model name labels (29L05951) to both right and left sides shown in the diagram below.
Stick the barcode serial label (16761791) to the right side plane shown in the diagram below.
PK01
FRONT BAR CODE SERIAL LABEL
16761791
LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE
FRONT
BAR CODE SERIAL LABEL

[Label Adhesion Positioning]
For vertical adjustment, the lower plane of
the label shall be adjusted to the upper plane
of the model name label. For horizontal
adjustment, the label shall be adjusted to
the guide of the model name label.
[Horizontal Positioning for Label Adhesion]

Adjust the top and bottom markings of the label
to the edge lines of the carton box.
[Vertical Positioning for Label Adhesion]

Adjust the lower plane of the label to the
carton box line.
8-5
CONFIDENTIAL
METHOD OF PACKAGING
PX-50XM4G
A) ACCESSORY BOX(W)
SHT003 NOTICE SHEET EU (PDP)

78038632
SHT002 OPERATION 50XM4G/61XM3G
7S801541
SHT001 INFORMATION 50XM4G
7S801501 PSC POWER CORD E3 L3.0M L
7S553004
PK17
PK16
8-1
CONFIDENTIAL
B) SPACER, PILLAR, CARTON BOX

29MS3131

29MS2221
PK13 PILLAR T(50XM3)
29MS2371
29MS2211 PK04
PROTECTION SHEET(50XM3)
29M00891
PK05
29M00901

29MS2251
PK15
SUPPORT BC(50XM3)
29MS2581
PK12
PILLAR S(50XM4)
29MS3071

29MS2231

29MS2382
29MS3071
8-2
CONFIDENTIAL
C) JOINT, STOPPER
PK02
PK03
D) MODEL NAME LABEL
8-3
CONFIDENTIAL
E) ASSEMBLED IN UK LABEL DETAIL
F) ASSEMBLED IN UK LABEL APPLYING
8-4
CONFIDENTIAL
METHOD OF PACKAGING
PX-50XM4W
A) BRACKET SASSY
PK25 BRACKET(SAFE)
24P01591 x 2pcs.

24M15221

B) ACCESSORY SASSY
24813191
BRACKET SASSY

4S490003 x2pcs.

6S170003 x 2pcs.

x 2pcs. 6S170005 x 2pcs.
PK19 CLAMP(RST-1N)
29C01511 x 5pcs.
8-1
CONFIDENTIAL
SUPPLEMENT SHEET

Align its direction
and put it in.
SUPPLEMENT SHEET

78038632
SHT002 OPERATION 50XM4G/61XM3G
7S801541
SHT001 INFORMATION 50XM4W
7S553004

INFORMATION
OPERATION
NOTICE SHEET
SUPPLEMENT SHEET
ACCESSORY BOX(W) Cables

and others

Seen from Arrow A
Circuit Quantity
POWER CORD POWER CORD E3 L3.0M L
INFORMATION INFORMATION 50XM4W
OPERATION OPERATION 50XM4G/61XM3G
NOTICE SHEET NOTICE SHEET EU (PDP)
Nil Nil Nil

SUPPLEMENT
SHEET Nil Nil Nil
Nil Nil Nil
8-2
CONFIDENTIAL

29MS3131
monitor front.

29MS2221
of the set.
29MS2211 PK04
29M00891
Wrap the set.
ACCESSORY BOX(W)
29MS1641 PK05
29M00901
Put it on 29M00891.
of the set.
29MS2581
PK12
PILLAR S(50XM4)
(6 positions)

29MS2231
29MS2382
PROTECTION 29MS3071
SHEET
Rear Side
19mm*18mm: 92203226
8-3
CONFIDENTIAL
PK02 STOPPER
24282431
150~200mm
opposite side.
60mm*50m (92203187) or
60mm*50mm (9W050001).
PP BAND
PK03 JOINT
24CS0551
JOINT
in a carton box.
(Cross section)
Lower stage: Print out Model No. "PX-50XM4W".
8-4
CONFIDENTIAL
G) MODEL NAME LABEL
PK01
16761791
FRONT



carton box line.
8-5
CONFIDENTIAL
METHOD OF PACKAGING
PX-50XR4A
A) BRACKET SASSY
PK25 BRACKET(SAFE)
24P01591 x 2pcs.
PK24
POLYETHYLENE BAG(70*100)
24M15221
24813191
PK26 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF
910E4026 x 2pcs.
B) ACCESSORY SASSY
PK21 BATTERY,DRY CELL R03 UB Fold it into an adequate size
4S490003 x2pcs. and fasten it with a tape.

6S170003 x 2pcs.
PK20 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-930

6S170005 x 2pcs.
Wire harness bandages
x 2pcs.
PK19 CLAMP(RST-1N) Attached to the core
29C01511 x 5pcs.
C) HDMI-DVI CABLE
PK33 Stick it to a larger terminal (DVI).

CABLE,HDMI-DVI L2M Provide a spacing of about 40mm
7S580015 (Delivered in a bag) from the terminal root.
Label adhesion
Take it out of the (Examine the
polyethylene bag. character direction.)
PK32
HDMI-DVI CABLE
LABEL
29L06291
Polyethylene bag
to be abandoned
Put it in a new
polyethylene bag. Close the bag and fasten it with
PK18 an adhesive tape.
BAG,POLYETHYLENE(150*370) Width of the adhesive tape: 12mm
Abandon the polyethylene bag. 24813191 (Equivalent to 92203040)
*Recycling is strictly forbidden.
8-1
CONFIDENTIAL
D) ACCESSORY BOX (W)
SUPPLEMENT SHEET

Align its direction
and put it in.
SUPPLEMENT SHEET
SHT003 NOTICE SHEET US (PDP)

78038622
SHT002 OPERATION 50XR4A/61XR3A
7S801441
SHT001 INFORMATION 50XR4A
7S801421 PSC POWER CORD U3 L3.0M L
7S552001

INFORMATION
OPERATION
NOTICE SHEET
SUPPLEMENT SHEET
ACCESSORY BOX(W)
Cables
and others

Seen from Arrow A
Circuit Quantity

POWER CORD
INFORMATION INFORMATION 50XR4A
OPERATION OPERATION 50XR4A/61XR3A
NOTICE SHEET NOTICE SHEET US (PDP)
Nil Nil Nil

SUPPLEMENT
SHEET Nil Nil Nil
Nil Nil Nil
8-2
CONFIDENTIAL
E) SPACER, PILLAR, CARTON BOX
PK11 CARTON BOX T(50XR4)

29MS3141
monitor front.

29MS2221
of the set.
29MS2211 PK04
29M00891
Wrap the set.
ACCESSORY BOX(W)
29MS1641 PK05
29M00901
Put it on 29M00891.
of the set.
29MS2581
PK12
PILLAR S(50XM4)
(6 positions)

29MS2231
29MS2382
PROTECTION 29MS3071
SHEET
Rear Side
19mm*18mm: 92203226
8-3
CONFIDENTIAL
F) JOINT, PP BAND, STOPPER
PK02 STOPPER
24282431
150~200mm
opposite side.
60mm*50m (92203187) or
60mm*50mm (9W050001).
PP BAND
PK03 JOINT
24CS0551
JOINT
in a carton box.
(Cross section)
G) BAR CORD SERIAL LABEL
Lower stage: Print out Model No. "PX-50XR4A".
8-4
CONFIDENTIAL
H) MODEL NAME LABEL
I) Adhesion of the MODEL NAME LABEL and BAR CODE SERIAL LABEL
PK01
16761791
FRONT



carton box line.
8-5
CONFIDENTIAL
METHOD OF PACKAGING
PX-50XR4G
A) ACCESSORY BOX (W) PK33

78038632
SHT002 OPERATION 50XR4G/61XR3G
7S801641
SHT001 INFORMATION 50XR4G
PSC POWER CORD E3 L3.0M L
7S801601
7S553004
PK17
PK16
8-1
CONFIDENTIAL
B) SPACER, PILLAR, CARTON BOX

29MS3141

29MS2221
PK13 PILLAR T(50XM3)
29MS2371
29MS2211 PK04
PROTECTION SHEET(50XM3)
29M00891
PK05
29M00901

29MS2251
PK15
SUPPORT BC(50XM3)
29MS2581
PK12
PILLAR S(50XM4)
29MS3071

29MS2231

29MS2382
29MS3071
8-2
CONFIDENTIAL
C) JOINT, STOPPER
PK02
PK03
D) MODEL NAME LABEL
8-3
CONFIDENTIAL
E) ASSEMBLED IN UK LABEL DETAIL
F) ASSEMBLED IN UK LABEL APPLYING
8-4
CONFIDENTIAL
METHOD OF PACKAGING
PX-50XR4W
A) BRACKET SASSY
PK25 BRACKET(SAFE)
24P01591 x 2pcs.

24M15221

B) ACCESSORY SASSY
24813191
BRACKET SASSY

4S490003 x2pcs.

6S170003 x 2pcs.

x 2pcs. 6S170005 x 2pcs.
PK19 CLAMP(RST-1N)
29C01511 x 5pcs.
8-1
CONFIDENTIAL
PK33 CABLE,HDMI-DVI L2M

SUPPLEMENT SHEET 7S580015

Align its direction
and put it in.
SUPPLEMENT SHEET

78038632
SHT002 OPERATION 50XR4G/61XR3G
7S801641
SHT001 INFORMATION 50XR4W
7S553004

INFORMATION
OPERATION
NOTICE SHEET
SUPPLEMENT SHEET
ACCESSORY BOX(W)
Cables
and others

Seen from Arrow A
Circuit Quantity
POWER CORD POWER CORD E3 L3.0M L
INFORMATION INFORMATION 50XR4W
OPERATION OPERATION 50XR4G/61XR3G
NOTICE SHEET NOTICE SHEET EU (PDP)
Nil Nil Nil

SUPPLEMENT
SHEET Nil Nil Nil
Nil Nil Nil
8-2
CONFIDENTIAL

29MS3141
monitor front.

29MS2221
of the set.
29MS2211 PK04
29M00891
Wrap the set.
ACCESSORY BOX(W)
29MS1641 PK05
29M00901
Put it on 29M00891.
of the set.
29MS2581
PK12
PILLAR S(50XM4)
(6 positions)

29MS2231
29MS2382
PROTECTION 29MS3071
SHEET
Rear Side
19mm*18mm: 92203226
8-3
CONFIDENTIAL
PK02 STOPPER
24282431
150~200mm
opposite side.
60mm*50m (92203187) or
60mm*50mm (9W050001).
PP BAND
PK03 JOINT
24CS0551
JOINT
in a carton box.
(Cross section)
Lower stage: Print out Model No. "PX-50XR4W".
8-4
CONFIDENTIAL
G) MODEL NAME LABEL
PK01
16761791
FRONT



carton box line.
8-5
CONFIDENTIAL
PARTS LIST
Notes:
1. Parts orders must contain model name, parts number and parts name.
2. When you place an order for spare parts, please refer to the respective service
manual and mention the right parts number on your P.O. sheets
3. The letters NSP in the table indicate non-service parts.
4. Please refer to METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY or PACKAGING of service manual
about a parts layout.
PX-50XM4A(01272276) VER.59
SYMBOL PARTS NAME PARTS NO. Q'TY NOTE
*** PDP MODULE ***

PDP PDP-NP50X6MF01 3S350006 1
*** PWB ASSYS ***

A01 MAIN PWB ASSY 937F6M01 1
A02 232C PWB ASSY 937F7SA1 1
A03 CTL PWB ASSY 937F7SB1 1
A04 PWR PWB ASSY 937F7SC1 1
A05 LED PWB ASSY 937F7SD1 1
A06 SENB PWB ASSY 937F7SE1 1
A07 SENC PWB ASSY 937F7SF1 1
A08 SEND PWB ASSY 937F7SG1 1
A09 AUDIO PWB ASSY 937F7SH1 1
A10 CCD PWB ASSY 937F6C01 1
PSU POWER UNIT 3S110174 1
*** MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL PARTS ***

E01 FAN MOTOR 9G1212M4D03 3S170014 2
E02 AC INLET 10GEEG3C 6S760013 1
GND CABLE 1P L360 7S530015 1
CN-PI CABLE 2P L265 ESD-R-19 7S530035 1
FL30 CORE,FERRITE SFT-72SNB 6S170003 1
FL32 FERRITE CORE ESD-R-19 6S170007 1
CN-AD CABLE 31P L390 7S530036 1
CN-AU CN 7P(AU) 1060W,2791-28 7SW7W002 1
CN-LD CN 5P(LD) 175,2468-26 7SU507LD 1
CN-PA CN 6P(PA) 600,2468-26 7SU624PA 1
CN-PD CN 10P(PD) 620W,1007-20 7SW0W012 1
CN-PH CN 4P(PH) 640W,1007-20 7SW4W014 1
CN-PM CN 7P(PM) 425,2468-26 7SU717PM 1
CN-PN CN 12P(PN) 500,2468-26 7SUB20PN 1
CN-PV CN 8P(PV) 425,2468-26 7SU817PV 1
CN-PW CN 8P(PW) 250,2468-26 7SC810PW 1
CN-RS CN 12P(RS) 200,2468-26 7SCB08RS 1
CN-SW1 CN 3P(SW) 325W,2468-26 7SB3W006 1
CN-SW2 CN 3P(SW) 1150W,2468-26 7SW3W008 1
CN-TM CN 4P(TM) 525,2468-26 7SC421TM 1
CN-TR CN 4P(TR) 650,2468-26 7SC426TR 1
CN-TS CN 4P(TS) 1075,2468-26 7SC443TS 1
9-1
CONFIDENTIAL

FL21 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-930 6S170005 1
FL22 NOT USED
FL23 NOT USED
FL33 NOT USED
FL34 NOT USED
FL35 NOT USED
*** MECHANICAL PARTS ***

SRW01 CBIPS*3*8*3KF 24N03691 2
SRW02 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 6
SRW03 CBIPS*4*8*3KF 29N00521 20
SRW04 PL-CPIMS*4*12*15KFE 29N01441 3
SRW05 CBIPS*5*20*3GF 29N01511 6
SRW06 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 10
SRW07 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 11
SRW08 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 8
SRW09 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 1
SRW10 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 8
SRW11 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 7
SRW12 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 2
SRW13 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 2
SRW14 PL-CPIMS*4*12*15KFE 29N01441 6
SRW15 CBIPS*3*8*3KF 24N03691 7
SRW16 SCREW(UNC4-40/4-40) 32990229 4
SRW17 SCREW(UNC4-40/4-40) 32990229 2
SRW18 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 5
SRW19 NOT USED
SRW20 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 3
SRW21 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 1
SRW22 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 1
SRW23 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 2
SRW24 SCREW PL-CPIMS*3*10*15KFE 29N01431 2
SRW25 CBIPS*3*8*3KF 24N03691 2
SRW26 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 4
SRW27 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 3
SRW28 ET-CBIMS*4*8*3KF 24N04001 1
SRW29 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 3
SRW30 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 8
SRW31 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 31
SRW33 CBIPS*5*16*15KFE 29N01411 4
SRW34 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 1
GSK01 NOT USED
GSK02 NOT USED
GSK03 NOT USED
GSK04 NOT USED
9-2
CONFIDENTIAL

GSK05 SHIELDING SHEET(300*4) 29C01641 1
BRR01 BARRIER PS(50XM4) 29J01281 1
M01 CLAMPER,WIRE(D11.5) 24281251 1
M02 SERIAL LABEL 24L44731 1
M03 NOT USED
M04 EDGING SADDLE(EDS-1208U) 29C00461 5
M05 SHIELDING TAPE AL(25*50M) 29C01911 1roll 3500mm/SET
M06 CLAMP(MWC-2S) 29C01401 16
M07 CLAMP(WS-2W-V0) 29C01421 16
M08 LUG(L60) 29C01471 2
M09 FRONT PANEL(50XM3) 29D00554 1
M10 SUB FRONT(50XM3) 29D00563 1
M11 FRAME(50XM3) 29D00574 1
M12 BUTTON COVER(50XM3) 29F00551 1
M13 POWER BUTTON COVER(50XM3) 29F00561 1
M14 HANDLE 29F00591 2
M15 POWER BUTTON(50XM3) 29G00281 1
M16 CONTROL BUTTON(50XM3) 29G00291 1
M17 SHIELD PLATE MAIN(42XM3) 29H03541 1
M18 BRACKET FILTER L(50XM3) 29H02461 1
M19 BRACKET FILTER T(50XM3) 29H02471 1
M20 BRACKET FILTER B(50XM3) 29H02481 1
M21 PWB BASE MAIN(50XM4) 29H03461 1
M22 PWB BASE SUB(50XM4) 29H03471 1
M23 PS BRACKET(50XM3) 29H02512 1
M24 SHIELD BOTTOM(50XM4) 29H03481 1
M25 SHIELD CENTER 29H02532 1
M26 SHIELD MAIN(50XM4) 29H03671 1
M27 TERMINAL PANEL M(50XM3) 29H02551 1
M28 TERMINAL PANEL S(50XM3) 29H02561 1
M29 TERMINAL PANEL B(50XM3) 29H02571 1
M30 PLANE R(50XM3) 29H02582 1
M31 PLANE L(50XM3) 29H02592 1
M32 STAND BRKT(50XM3) 29H02602 2
M33 NOT USED
M34 GS COVER 29H02782 1
M35 BRACKET FILTER R(50XM3) 29H02821 1
M36 NOT USED
M37 CUSHION(580*10*T4.0) 29J01012 4
M38 CUSHION(654*10*T4.0) 29J01022 2
M39 NOT USED
M40 SILICONE SHEET(AUDIO)T 29J01291 1
M41 FILTER(50A) 29KS0151 1
M42 INDICATOR(50XM3) 29K00421 1
M43 TERMINAL SHEET M(50XM3)W 29K00571 1
M44 TERMINAL SHEET S(50XM3)W 29K00581 1
M45 TERMINAL SHEET B(50XM3) 29K00461 1
M46 AC IN LABEL 29L00491 1
M47 NAME PLATE(50XM4A) 29L05701 1 NSP
M48 SPEAKER LABEL 29L03552 1
M49 NOT USED
M50 BACK COVER(50XM4) 29P01391 1
9-3
CONFIDENTIAL

M51 BARRIER(INLET) 24J15941 1
M52 NOT USED
M53 NOT USED
M54 NOT USED
M55 NOT USED
M56 NOT USED
M57 MD SPACER(50XM4) 29F01071 6
M58 AUDIO HEAT SINK 29H03561 1
*** PRINTED & PACKING MATERIALS ***

SHT001 INFORMATION 50XM4A 7S801361 1
SHT002 OPERATION 50XM4A/61XM3A 7S801381 1
SHT003 NOTICE SHEET US (PDP) 78038622 1
PSC POWER CORD U3 L3.0M L 7S552001 1
PK01 BAR CODE SERIAL LABE 16761791 1
PK02 STOPPER 24282431 2
PK03 JOINT 24CS0551 4
PK04 PROTECTION SHEET(50XM3) 29M00891 1
PK05 PROTECTION SHEET S(50XM3) 29M00901 1
PK06 SPACER TL(50XM3) 29MS2211 1
PK07 SPACER TR(50XM3) 29MS2221 1
PK08 SPACER BL(50XM3) 29MS2231 1
PK09 SPACER BR(50XM3) 29MS2241 1
PK10 SPACER BC(50XM3) 29MS2251 1
PK11 CARTON BOX T(50XM4) 29MS3131 1
PK12 PILLAR S(50XM4) 29MS3071 2
PK13 PILLAR T(50XM3) 29MS2371 1
PK14 CARTON BOX B(50XM3) 29MS2382 1
PK15 SUPPORT BC(50XM3) 29MS2581 1
PK16 ACCESSORY BOX(W) 29MS1641 1
PK17 REM-T HAND UNIT RP-114 3S120221 1
PK18 BAG,POLYETHYLENE(150*370) 24813191 1
PK19 CLAMP(RST-1N) 29C01511 5
PK20 FERRITE CORE ZCAT2032-930 6S170005 2
PK21 BATTERY,DRY CELL R03 UB 4S490003 2
PK22 CORE,FERRITE SFT-725NB 6S170003 2
PK23 NOT USED
PK24 POLYETHYLENE BAG(70*100) 24M15221 1
PK25 BRACKET(SAFE) 24P01591 2
PK26 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 910E4026 2
PK27 NOT USED
PK28 NOT USED
PK29 MODEL NAME LABEL 29L05951 2
PK30 NOT USED
9-4
CONFIDENTIAL
PARTS LIST
Notes:
PX-50XM4G(01272278) VER.50
*** PDP MODULE ***

*** PWB ASSYS ***

A10 NOT USED

E01 FAN MOTOR 9G1212M4D03 3S170014 2
GND CABLE 1P L360 7S530015 1
CN-AD CABLE 31P L390 7S530036 1
CN-AU CN 7P(AU) 1060W,2791-28 7SW7W002 1
CN-LD CN 5P(LD) 175,2468-26 7SU507LD 1
CN-PA CN 6P(PA) 600,2468-26 7SU624PA 1
CN-PD CN 10P(PD) 620W,1007-20 7SW0W012 1
CN-PH CN 4P(PH) 640W,1007-20 7SW4W014 1
CN-PM CN 7P(PM) 425,2468-26 7SU717PM 1
CN-PN CN 12P(PN) 500,2468-26 7SUB20PN 1
CN-PV CN 8P(PV) 425,2468-26 7SU817PV 1
CN-PW CN 8P(PW) 250,2468-26 7SC810PW 1
CN-RS CN 12P(RS) 200,2468-26 7SCB08RS 1
CN-SW1 CN 3P(SW) 325W,2468-26 7SB3W006 1
CN-SW2 CN 3P(SW) 1150W,2468-26 7SW3W008 1
CN-TM CN 4P(TM) 525,2468-26 7SC421TM 1
CN-TR CN 4P(TR) 650,2468-26 7SC426TR 1
CN-TS CN 4P(TS) 1075,2468-26 7SC443TS 1
9-1
CONFIDENTIAL

FL22 NOT USED
FL23 NOT USED
FL33 NOT USED
FL34 NOT USED
FL35 NOT USED

SRW01 CBIPS*3*8*3KF 24N03691 2
SRW02 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 6
SRW03 CBIPS*4*8*3KF 29N00521 20
SRW04 PL-CPIMS*4*12*15KFE 29N01441 3
SRW05 CBIPS*5*20*3GF 29N01511 6
SRW06 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 10
SRW07 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 11
SRW08 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 8
SRW09 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 1
SRW10 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 8
SRW11 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 7
SRW12 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 2
SRW13 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 2
SRW14 PL-CPIMS*4*12*15KFE 29N01441 6
SRW15 CBIPS*3*8*3KF 24N03691 7
SRW16 SCREW(UNC4-40/4-40) 32990229 4
SRW17 SCREW(UNC4-40/4-40) 32990229 2
SRW18 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 5
SRW19 NOT USED
SRW20 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 3
SRW21 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 1
SRW22 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 1
SRW23 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 2
SRW25 CBIPS*3*8*3KF 24N03691 2
SRW26 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 4
SRW27 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 3
SRW28 ET-CBIMS*4*8*3KF 24N04001 1
SRW29 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 3
SRW30 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 8
SRW31 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 31
SRW33 CBIPS*5*16*15KFE 29N01411 4
SRW34 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 1
GSK01 NOT USED
GSK02 NOT USED
GSK03 NOT USED
GSK04 NOT USED
9-2
CONFIDENTIAL

M01 CLAMPER,WIRE(D11.5) 24281251 1
M03 NOT USED
M06 CLAMP(MWC-2S) 29C01401 16
M07 CLAMP(WS-2W-V0) 29C01421 16
M08 LUG(L60) 29C01471 2
M10 SUB FRONT(50XM3) 29D00563 1
M11 FRAME(50XM3) 29D00574 1
M14 HANDLE 29F00591 2
M30 PLANE R(50XM3) 29H02582 1
M31 PLANE L(50XM3) 29H02592 1
M33 NOT USED
M34 GS COVER 29H02782 1
M36 BARRIER PS(50XM3) 29J00971 1
M37 CUSHION(580*10*T4.0) 29J01012 4
M38 CUSHION(654*10*T4.0) 29J01022 2
M39 NOT USED
M41 FILTER(50A) 29KS0151 1
M43 NOT USED
M47 NOT USED
M49 NOT USED
9-3
CONFIDENTIAL

M52 NOT USED
M53 NOT USED
M54 NOT USED
M55 NOT USED
M56 NOT USED
M57 MD SPACER(50XM4) 29F01071 6

SHT001 INFORMATION 50XM4G 7S801501 1
SHT002 OPERATION 50XM4G/61XM3G 7S801541 1
SHT003 NOTICE SHEET EU(PDP) 78038632 1
PSC POWER CORD E3 L3.0M L 7S553004 1
PK02 STOPPER 24282431 2
PK23 NOT USED
PK26 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 910E4026 2
PK27 NOT USED
PK28 NOT USED
PK30 NOT USED
9-4
CONFIDENTIAL
PARTS LIST
Notes:
PX-50XM4W(01272277) VER.54
*** PDP MODULE ***

*** PWB ASSYS ***

A10 NOT USED

E01 FAN MOTOR 9G1212M4D03 3S170014 2
GND CABLE 1P L360 7S530015 1
CN-AD CABLE 31P L390 7S530036 1
CN-AU CN 7P(AU) 1060W,2791-28 7SW7W002 1
CN-LD CN 5P(LD) 175,2468-26 7SU507LD 1
CN-PA CN 6P(PA) 600,2468-26 7SU624PA 1
CN-PD CN 10P(PD) 620W,1007-20 7SW0W012 1
CN-PH CN 4P(PH) 640W,1007-20 7SW4W014 1
CN-PM CN 7P(PM) 425,2468-26 7SU717PM 1
CN-PN CN 12P(PN) 500,2468-26 7SUB20PN 1
CN-PV CN 8P(PV) 425,2468-26 7SU817PV 1
CN-PW CN 8P(PW) 250,2468-26 7SC810PW 1
CN-RS CN 12P(RS) 200,2468-26 7SCB08RS 1
CN-SW1 CN 3P(SW) 325W,2468-26 7SB3W006 1
CN-SW2 CN 3P(SW) 1150W,2468-26 7SW3W008 1
CN-TM CN 4P(TM) 525,2468-26 7SC421TM 1
CN-TR CN 4P(TR) 650,2468-26 7SC426TR 1
CN-TS CN 4P(TS) 1075,2468-26 7SC443TS 1
9-1
CONFIDENTIAL

FL22 NOT USED
FL23 NOT USED
FL33 NOT USED
FL34 NOT USED
FL35 NOT USED

SRW01 CBIPS*3*8*3KF 24N03691 2
SRW02 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 6
SRW03 CBIPS*4*8*3KF 29N00521 20
SRW04 PL-CPIMS*4*12*15KFE 29N01441 3
SRW05 CBIPS*5*20*3GF 29N01511 6
SRW06 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 10
SRW07 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 11
SRW08 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 8
SRW09 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 1
SRW10 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 8
SRW11 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 7
SRW12 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 2
SRW13 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 2
SRW14 PL-CPIMS*4*12*15KFE 29N01441 6
SRW15 CBIPS*3*8*3KF 24N03691 7
SRW16 SCREW(UNC4-40/4-40) 32990229 4
SRW17 SCREW(UNC4-40/4-40) 32990229 2
SRW18 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 5
SRW19 NOT USED
SRW20 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 3
SRW21 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 1
SRW22 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 1
SRW23 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 2
SRW25 CBIPS*3*8*3KF 24N03691 2
SRW26 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 4
SRW27 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 3
SRW28 ET-CBIMS*4*8*3KF 24N04001 1
SRW29 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 3
SRW30 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 8
SRW31 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 31
SRW33 CBIPS*5*16*15KFE 29N01411 4
SRW34 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 1
GSK01 NOT USED
GSK02 NOT USED
GSK03 NOT USED
GSK04 NOT USED
9-2
CONFIDENTIAL

M01 CLAMPER,WIRE(D11.5) 24281251 1
M03 NOT USED
M06 CLAMP(MWC-2S) 29C01401 16
M07 CLAMP(WS-2W-V0) 29C01421 16
M08 LUG(L60) 29C01471 2
M10 SUB FRONT(50XM3) 29D00563 1
M11 FRAME(50XM3) 29D00574 1
M14 HANDLE 29F00591 2
M30 PLANE R(50XM3) 29H02582 1
M31 PLANE L(50XM3) 29H02592 1
M33 NOT USED
M34 GS COVER 29H02782 1
M36 BARRIER PS(50XM3) 29J00971 1
M37 CUSHION(580*10*T4.0) 29J01012 4
M38 CUSHION(654*10*T4.0) 29J01022 2
M39 NOT USED
M41 FILTER(50A) 29KS0151 1
M43 TERMINAL SHEET M(50XM3)W 29K00571 1
M47 NAME PLATE(50XM4W) 29L05711 1 NSP
M49 NOT USED
M52 NOT USED
M53 NOT USED
M54 NOT USED
9-3
CONFIDENTIAL

M55 NOT USED
M56 NOT USED
M57 MD SPACER(50XM4) 29F01071 6

SHT001 INFORMATION 50XM4W 7S801521 1
SHT002 OPERATION 50XM4G/61XM3G 7S801541 1
PK02 STOPPER 24282431 2
PK22 CORE,FERRITE SFT-72SNB 6S170003 2
PK23 NOT USED
PK26 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 910E4026 2
PK27 NOT USED
PK28 NOT USED
PK30 NOT USED
9-4
CONFIDENTIAL
PARTS LIST
Notes:
PX-50XR4A(01272279) VER.23
*** PDP MODULE ***

*** PWB ASSYS ***

A01 MAIN PWB ASSY 937J0M01 1
A02 232C PWB ASSY 937G0SA1 1
A03 CTL PWB ASSY 937G0SB1 1
A04 PWR PWB ASSY 937G0SC1 1
A05 LED PWB ASSY 937G0SD1 1
A06 SENB PWB ASSY 937G0SE1 1
A07 SENC PWB ASSY 937G0SF1 1
A08 SEND PWB ASSY 937G0SG1 1
A09 AUDIO PWB ASSY 937G0SH1 1
A10 CCD PWB ASSY 937F6C01 1

E01 FAN MOTOR 9G1212M4D03 3S170014 2
E02 AC INLET 10DKDG3S(Y1) 6S760016 1
GND CABLE 1P L360 7S530015 1
CN-AD CABLE 31P L390 7S530036 1
CN-AU CN 7P(AU) 1060W,2791-28 7SW7W002 1
CN-LD CN 5P(LD) 175,2468-26 7SU507LD 1
CN-PA CN 6P(PA) 600,2468-26 7SU624PA 1
CN-PD CN 10P(PD) 620W,1007-20 7SW0W012 1
CN-PH CN 4P(PH) 640W,1007-20 7SW4W014 1
CN-PM CN 7P(PM) 425,2468-26 7SU717PM 1
CN-PN CN 12P(PN) 500,2468-26 7SUB20PN 1
CN-PV CN 8P(PV) 425,2468-26 7SU817PV 1
CN-PW CN 8P(PW) 250,2468-26 7SC810PW 1
CN-RS CN 12P(RS) 200,2468-26 7SCB08RS 1
CN-SW1 CN 3P(SW) 325W,2468-26 7SB3W006 1
CN-SW2 CN 3P(SW) 1150W,2468-26 7SW3W008 1
CN-TM CN 4P(TM) 525,2468-26 7SC421TM 1
CN-TR CN 4P(TR) 650,2468-26 7SC426TR 1
CN-TS CN 4P(TS) 1075,2468-26 7SC443TS 1
9-1
CONFIDENTIAL

FL22 NOT USED
FL23 NOT USED

SRW01 CBIPS*3*8*3KF 24N03691 2
SRW02 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 6
SRW03 CBIPS*4*8*3KF 29N00521 20
SRW04 PL-CPIMS*4*12*15KFE 29N01441 3
SRW05 CBIPS*5*20*3GF 29N01511 6
SRW06 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 10
SRW07 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 11
SRW08 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 8
SRW09 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 1
SRW10 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 8
SRW11 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 7
SRW12 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 2
SRW13 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 2
SRW14 PL-CPIMS*4*12*15KFE 29N01441 6
SRW15 CBIPS*3*8*3KF 24N03691 7
SRW16 SCREW(UNC4-40/4-40) 32990229 4
SRW17 SCREW(UNC4-40/4-40) 32990229 2
SRW18 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 5
SRW19 NOT USED
SRW20 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 3
SRW21 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 1
SRW22 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 1
SRW23 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 2
SRW24 CPIMS*NO.6-32UNC*8*3GF 29N01131 2
SRW25 CBIPS*3*8*3KF 24N03691 2
SRW26 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 4
SRW27 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 3
SRW28 ET-CBIMS*4*8*3KF 24N04001 1
SRW29 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 3
SRW30 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 8
SRW31 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 31
SRW33 CBIPS*5*16*15KFE 29N01411 4
SRW34 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 1
GSK01 GASKET(L140*13*T1.5) 29C01801 4
9-2
CONFIDENTIAL

M01 CLAMPER,WIRE(D11.5) 24281251 1
M03 NOT USED
M05 NOT USED
M06 CLAMP(MWC-2S) 29C01401 16
M07 CLAMP(WS-2W-V0) 29C01421 16
M08 LUG(L60) 29C01471 2
M09 FRONT PANEL ASSY(50XM3/S) 29DS0573 1
M10 SUB FRONT(50XM3) 29D00563 1
M11 FRAME(50XM3) 29D00574 1
M12 BUTTON COVER(50XM3/S) 29F00791 1
M14 HANDLE 29F00591 2
M16 CONTROL BUTTON(50XM3/S) 29G00321 1
M30 PLANE R(50XM3) 29H02582 1
M31 PLANE L(50XM3) 29H02592 1
M33 NOT USED
M34 GS COVER 29H02782 1
M37 CUSHION(580*10*T4.0) 29J01012 4
M38 CUSHION(654*10*T4.0) 29J01022 2
M39 NOT USED
M41 FILTER(50B) 29KS0161 1
M43 TERMINAL SHEET M(50XR4)CP 29K00671 1
M44 TERMINAL SHEET S(50XR4) 29K00681 1
M47 NAME PLATE(50XR4A) 29L05731 1 NSP
M49 NOT USED
M51 NOT USED
M52 NOT USED
M53 NOT USED
9-3
CONFIDENTIAL

M54 NOT USED
M55 NOT USED
M56 NOT USED
M57 NOT USED
M59 INLET COLLAR 29F00481 2
M60 MD SPACER(50XM4) 29F01071 6

SHT001 INFORMATION 50XR4A 7S801421 1
SHT002 OPERATION 50XR4A/61XR3A 7S801441 1
SHT003 NOTICE SHEET US (PDP) 78038622 1
PSC POWER CORD U3 L3.0M L 7S552001 1
PK02 STOPPER 24282431 2
PK11 CARTON BOX T(50XR4) 29MS3141 1
PK23 NOT USED
PK26 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 910E4026 2
PK27 NOT USED
PK28 NOT USED
PK30 NOT USED
PK32 HDMI-DVI CABLE LABEL 29L06291 1
PK33 CABLE,HDMI-DVI L2M 7S580015 1
9-4
CONFIDENTIAL
PARTS LIST
Notes:
PX-50XR4G(01272281) VER.19
*** PDP MODULE ***

*** PWB ASSYS ***

A10 NOT USED

E01 FAN MOTOR 9G1212M4D03 3S170014 2
GND CABLE 1P L360 7S530015 1
CN-AD CABLE 31P L390 7S530036 1
CN-AU CN 7P(AU) 1060W,2791-28 7SW7W002 1
CN-LD CN 5P(LD) 175,2468-26 7SU507LD 1
CN-PA CN 6P(PA) 600,2468-26 7SU624PA 1
CN-PD CN 10P(PD) 620W,1007-20 7SW0W012 1
CN-PH CN 4P(PH) 640W,1007-20 7SW4W014 1
CN-PM CN 7P(PM) 425,2468-26 7SU717PM 1
CN-PN CN 12P(PN) 500,2468-26 7SUB20PN 1
CN-PV CN 8P(PV) 425,2468-26 7SU817PV 1
CN-PW CN 8P(PW) 250,2468-26 7SC810PW 1
CN-RS CN 12P(RS) 200,2468-26 7SCB08RS 1
CN-SW1 CN 3P(SW) 325W,2468-26 7SB3W006 1
CN-SW2 CN 3P(SW) 1150W,2468-26 7SW3W008 1
CN-TM CN 4P(TM) 525,2468-26 7SC421TM 1
CN-TR CN 4P(TR) 650,2468-26 7SC426TR 1
CN-TS CN 4P(TS) 1075,2468-26 7SC443TS 1
9-1
CONFIDENTIAL

FL22 NOT USED
FL23 NOT USED

SRW01 CBIPS*3*8*3KF 24N03691 2
SRW02 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 6
SRW03 CBIPS*4*8*3KF 29N00521 20
SRW04 PL-CPIMS*4*12*15KFE 29N01441 3
SRW05 CBIPS*5*20*3GF 29N01511 6
SRW06 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 10
SRW07 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 11
SRW08 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 8
SRW09 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 1
SRW10 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 8
SRW11 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 7
SRW12 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 2
SRW13 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 2
SRW14 PL-CPIMS*4*12*15KFE 29N01441 6
SRW15 CBIPS*3*8*3KF 24N03691 7
SRW16 SCREW(UNC4-40/4-40) 32990229 4
SRW17 SCREW(UNC4-40/4-40) 32990229 2
SRW18 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 5
SRW19 NOT USED
SRW20 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 3
SRW21 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 1
SRW22 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 1
SRW23 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 2
SRW25 CBIPS*3*8*3KF 24N03691 2
SRW26 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 4
SRW27 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 3
SRW28 ET-CBIMS*4*8*3KF 24N04001 1
SRW29 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 3
SRW30 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 8
SRW31 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 31
SRW33 CBIPS*5*16*15KFE 29N01411 4
SRW34 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 1
GSK01 GASKET(L140*13*T1.5) 29C01801 4
9-2
CONFIDENTIAL

M01 CLAMPER,WIRE(D11.5) 24281251 1
M03 NOT USED
M05 NOT USED
M06 CLAMP(MWC-2S) 29C01401 16
M07 CLAMP(WS-2W-V0) 29C01421 16
M08 LUG(L60) 29C01471 2
M10 SUB FRONT(50XM3) 29D00563 1
M11 FRAME(50XM3) 29D00574 1
M14 HANDLE 29F00591 2
M30 PLANE R(50XM3) 29H02582 1
M31 PLANE L(50XM3) 29H02592 1
M33 NOT USED
M34 GS COVER 29H02782 1
M37 CUSHION(580*10*T4.0) 29J01012 4
M38 CUSHION(654*10*T4.0) 29J01022 2
M39 NOT USED
M41 FILTER(50B) 29KS0161 1
M43 NOT USED
M47 NOT USED
M49 NOT USED
M51 NOT USED
M52 NOT USED
M53 NOT USED
9-3
CONFIDENTIAL

M54 NOT USED
M55 NOT USED
M56 NOT USED
M57 NOT USED
M60 MD SPACER(50XM4) 29F01071 6

SHT001 INFORMATION 50XR4G 7S801601 1
SHT002 OPERATION 50XR4G/61XR3G 7S801641 1
PK02 STOPPER 24282431 2
PK23 NOT USED
PK26 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 910E4026 2
PK27 NOT USED
PK28 NOT USED
PK30 NOT USED
PK31 NOT USED
PK32 NOT USED
9-4
CONFIDENTIAL
PARTS LIST
Notes:
PX-50XR4W(01272280) VER.19
*** PDP MODULE ***

*** PWB ASSYS ***

A10 NOT USED

E01 FAN MOTOR 9G1212M4D03 3S170014 2
GND CABLE 1P L360 7S530015 1
CN-AD CABLE 31P L390 7S530036 1
CN-AU CN 7P(AU) 1060W,2791-28 7SW7W002 1
CN-LD CN 5P(LD) 175,2468-26 7SU507LD 1
CN-PA CN 6P(PA) 600,2468-26 7SU624PA 1
CN-PD CN 10P(PD) 620W,1007-20 7SW0W012 1
CN-PH CN 4P(PH) 640W,1007-20 7SW4W014 1
CN-PM CN 7P(PM) 425,2468-26 7SU717PM 1
CN-PN CN 12P(PN) 500,2468-26 7SUB20PN 1
CN-PV CN 8P(PV) 425,2468-26 7SU817PV 1
CN-PW CN 8P(PW) 250,2468-26 7SC810PW 1
CN-RS CN 12P(RS) 200,2468-26 7SCB08RS 1
CN-SW1 CN 3P(SW) 325W,2468-26 7SB3W006 1
CN-SW2 CN 3P(SW) 1150W,2468-26 7SW3W008 1
CN-TM CN 4P(TM) 525,2468-26 7SC421TM 1
CN-TR CN 4P(TR) 650,2468-26 7SC426TR 1
CN-TS CN 4P(TS) 1075,2468-26 7SC443TS 1
9-1
CONFIDENTIAL

FL22 NOT USED
FL23 NOT USED

SRW01 CBIPS*3*8*3KF 24N03691 2
SRW02 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 6
SRW03 CBIPS*4*8*3KF 29N00521 20
SRW04 PL-CPIMS*4*12*15KFE 29N01441 3
SRW05 CBIPS*5*20*3GF 29N01511 6
SRW06 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 10
SRW07 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 11
SRW08 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 8
SRW09 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 1
SRW10 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 8
SRW11 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 7
SRW12 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 2
SRW13 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 2
SRW14 PL-CPIMS*4*12*15KFE 29N01441 6
SRW15 CBIPS*3*8*3KF 24N03691 7
SRW16 SCREW(UNC4-40/4-40) 32990229 4
SRW17 SCREW(UNC4-40/4-40) 32990229 2
SRW18 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 5
SRW19 NOT USED
SRW20 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 3
SRW21 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 1
SRW22 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 1
SRW23 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 2
SRW25 CBIPS*3*8*3KF 24N03691 2
SRW26 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 4
SRW27 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 3
SRW28 ET-CBIMS*4*8*3KF 24N04001 1
SRW29 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 3
SRW30 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 8
SRW31 CBIPS*4*12*15KFE 29N01401 31
SRW33 CBIPS*5*16*15KFE 29N01411 4
SRW34 TP-M3*6*3KF 24N04581 1
GSK01 GASKET(L140*13*T1.5) 29C01801 4
9-2
CONFIDENTIAL

M01 CLAMPER,WIRE(D11.5) 24281251 1
M03 NOT USED
M05 NOT USED
M06 CLAMP(MWC-2S) 29C01401 16
M07 CLAMP(WS-2W-V0) 29C01421 16
M08 LUG(L60) 29C01471 2
M10 SUB FRONT(50XM3) 29D00563 1
M11 FRAME(50XM3) 29D00574 1
M14 HANDLE 29F00591 2
M30 PLANE R(50XM3) 29H02582 1
M31 PLANE L(50XM3) 29H02592 1
M33 NOT USED
M34 GS COVER 29H02782 1
M37 CUSHION(580*10*T4.0) 29J01012 4
M38 CUSHION(654*10*T4.0) 29J01022 2
M39 NOT USED
M41 FILTER(50B) 29KS0161 1
M43 TERMINAL SHEET M(50XR4)CP 29K00671 1
M47 NAME PLATE(50XR4W) 29L05741 1 NSP
M49 NOT USED
9-3
CONFIDENTIAL

M51 NOT USED
M52 NOT USED
M53 NOT USED
M54 NOT USED
M55 NOT USED
M56 NOT USED
M57 NOT USED
M60 MD SPACER(50XM4) 29F01071 6

SHT001 INFORMATION 50XR4W 7S801621 1
SHT002 OPERATION 50XR4G/61XR3G 7S801641 1
PK02 STOPPER 24282431 2
PK23 NOT USED
PK26 PL-CPIMS*4*10*3KF 910E4026 2
PK27 NOT USED
PK28 NOT USED
PK30 NOT USED
PK31 NOT USED
PK32 NOT USED
9-4
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS CONFIDENTIAL
TEMP-SENSOR3 TEMP-SENSOR2 TEMP-SENSOR1
SENC PWB SEND PWB SENB PWB
PDP
FAN-CTL
FAN-CTL
PCB-5042F PCB-5042G PCB-5042E
F-ALM1
F-ALM1
ALARM
D.GND
D.GND
D.GND
D.GND
D.GND
D.GND
VDD+5
D+170
D+170
SCL5 1 1 SCL5 SCL5 1 TR 1 SCL5
PX-42VM5/42VP5/42VR5/42XM3/42XR3 Series
GND
GND
SDA5
D+60
D+60
SCL5
SDA5 2 TS
GND
D+5
D+5
2 SDA5 SDA5 2 2 SDA5
NC
PX-50XM4/50XR4 Series VDD+5V 3 3 VDD+5V VDD+5V 3 3 VDD+5V
V
GND 4 4 GND
29
30
31
10
GND 4 4 GND
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
.
.
.
AD
AU:SHIELD-WIRE
PH PD
AU
PV TM FA FB
10
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
1
2
3
M+7V M+7V
ALARM
D.GND
D.GND
MUTE
A.GND
A.GND
A.GND
GND
GND
D.GND
D.GND
D.GND
D.GND
VDD+5V
1 1
SDA7
NC
NC
D+5
D+5
GND
SCL7
A+12
D+170
D+170
AU-R
NC
A+6
A+6
D+60
D+60
SDA5
SCL5
AU-L
GND
GND
D.GND D.GND
F-ALM1
F-ALM2
CTL
CTL
FAN-
FAN-
2 2
POWER 3 3 POWER
D.GND 4
PM 4 D.GND
1,3,5,6,7pin:shield
POMUT POMUT
5 5
E E
6 6
SW7 SW7
7 7
NC NC
D+3.3 1 1 D+3.3
FAN-A FAN-B D+3.3 2 2 D+3.3
D+3.3 3 3 D+3.3
D.GND 4 4 D.GND
PX-42V series D.GND 5 5 D.GND
D.GND 6 PN 6 D.GND
D+2.5 7 7 D+2.5
PX-42X series D+2.5 8 8 D+2.5
D+2.5 9 9 D+2.5
D.GND 10 10 D.GND
PX-50X series D.GND 11 11 D.GND
D.GND 12 12 D.GND POWER SUPPLY
CCD PWB 1 A+12
PCB-5044 2 A.GND
1 GND 21 RCLK- 1
PX-42XM3A,PX-42XR3A 2 GND 22 GND 2 3 A+6
PX-50XM4A,PX-50XR4A only 3 ALARM 23 RC+ 3
PV 4 A+6
24 RC- . 5 A.GND
MAIN PWB 4 GND AD 6 A.GND
1 1 5 PS+ 25 RB+ .
2 2 PCB-5040 6 PS- 26 RB- . 7 NC
1 CC3 2 CC1 8 NC
3 CC4 4 CC2 3 3 7 MSEL 27 RA+ 29
5 3.3V 6 3.3V . . 8 GND 28 RA- 30 1 S+12
. CCD . 29 GND 31
7 D(9) 8 A_D(9) 9 RH+ 2 S+12
9 D(8)
11 D(7)
10 A_D(8)
12 A_D(7)
. . 10 RH- 30 GND PA 3 S+12
38 38 11 RG+ 31 GND 4 GND
13 D(6) 14 A_D(6)
39 39 12 RG- 5 GND
15 D(5) 16 A_D(5)
17 D(4) 18 A_D(4)
40 40 13 RF+ 6 GND
14 RF-
N
L
19 D(3) 20 A_D(3)
21 D(2) 22 A_D(2) 15 GND
1
2
23 D(1) 24 A_D(1) 16 RE+
25 D(0) 26 A_D(0) 17 RE-
27 GND 28 GND 18 RD+
29 CLK 30 A_S_CLK
19 RD- AU:SHIELD-WIRE
31 S_HSI 32 A_S_HSI
20 RCLK+
33 S_VSI 34 A_S_VSI PA
35 S_DEI 36 A_S_DEI
AC INLET
1
2
3
4
5
6
37 GND 38 GND AUDIO PWB AU-L 1
REMIN2/RXD1
S+12
S+12
S+12
39 VID_CCD 40 6V
GND
GND
GND
PCB-5042H GND 2 42VM5,42VP5 MODEL:
RESET SW
AU-R 3 06GEEG3E or 06GEEG3E-R

LEDCTL1
LEDCTL2
PLE_CTL
REMIN1
GND 4
42XM3,50XM4 MODEL:
M+5V
M+7V
M+7V
M+5V
TXD1
5
POIN
MUTE
1 CTL1
2 CTL2
GND
GND
GND
GND
REM
SW7
RXD
3 GND
TXD
SCL7 6 10GEEG3C or 10GEEG3C-R
ROUT+
LOUT+
ROUT-
LOUT-
PWR PWB SW7 1 SDA7 7 AU
42VR5,42XR3,50XR4 MODEL:
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PCB-5042C POIN 2 10DKDG3S(Y1)

GND 3
SW
LEDCTL1
LEDCTL2
1
2
3
4
M+5V 4 PW RS
REMIN1
M+7V 5
M+5V
AC
GND
REMIN1 6
LEDCTL1 7
LEDCTL2 8 232C PWB M+7V 1
1
2
3
4
5
PCB-5042A TXD 2 SPEAKER_OUT

GND 3
LD RXD 4
M+5V 5
1
2
3
4
5
GND 6
RS
REMIN1
GND
LEDCTL1
LEDCTL2
M+5V
REMIN2/RXD1 7
CTL1 CTL PWB
RESET SW 8
SW 1
PLE_CTL 9
LED PWB 2 CTL2 PCB-5042B
TXD1 10
PCB-5042D 3 GND
GND 11
REM 12
10-1
CONFIDENTIAL
CONNECTOR PIN EXPLANATION
PX-42VM5/42VP5/42VR5/42XM3/42XR3/50XM4/50XR4/61XM3/61XR3 Series
(Caution) The operating voltages specified below are used in common irrespective of the presence of signals. In this case, however, part of the operating voltages (red characters) may change according
to the signal conditions when the main power supply is turned on (POWER button ON).
Status of LED lighting: ★ for lighting in green, ★★ for unlighting, and ★★★ for lighting in red. Vol.1
Basic operation (Numerical unit: Vdc; except for the case when units are individually indicated)
AC power ON Main power ON AC power OFF
(Power cord (POWER button ON) ★ Power Main power (Power cord
Name Pin No. Pin name Function connected to Standby pulled out of Signal direction
management OFF
the wall outlet) ★★ ★★★ ★★ the wall outlet)
No signal With signal
★★ ★★
PN 1 D+3.3 3.3V power supply for digital circuits 0 3.3 3.3 0 0 0 - POWER→MAIN
2 D+3.3 3.3V power supply for digital circuits 0 3.3 3.3 0 0 0 - POWER→MAIN
4 D.GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
5 D.GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
6 D.GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
10 D.GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
11 D.GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
12 D.GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
PM 1 M+7 7V power supply for microcomputer 6.8 6.8 6.8 6.8 6.8 6.8 - POWER→MAIN
2 D.GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
3 POWER Power control 0 4.9 4.9 0 0 0 - MAIN→POWER
4 D.GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
5 POMUTE Mute signal for AC power OFF 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8→- POWER→MAIN
6 SW7 Power start control 0 6.8 6.8 6.8 6.8 0 - POWER→MAIN
7 ＮＣ Non-connection terminal - - - - - - - -
PV 1 A+12 12V power supply for analog circuits 0 12 12 0 0 0 - POWER→MAIN
2 A.GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
3 A+6 6V power supply for analog circuits 0 6 6 0 0 0 - POWER→MAIN
4 A+6 6V power supply for analog circuits 0 6 6 0 0 0 - POWER→MAIN
5 A.GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
6 A.GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
7 NC Non-connection terminal - - - - - - - -
8 NC Non-connection terminal - - - - - - - -
AU 1 AU_L Audio signal L 0 Selected input Selected input 0 0 0 - MAIN→AUDIO
CH signals are signals are
output. output.
2 GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
3 AU_R Audio signal R 0 Selected input Selected input 0 0 0 - MAIN→AUDIO
CH signals are signals are
output. output.
4 GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
5 MUTE Mute signal of audio output 3.5 3.5→0 3.5→0 3.5 3.5→0 3.5 3.5→- MAIN→AUDIO
6 SCL7 Clock line of the I2C bus 0 Clock signal Clock signal 0 0 0 - MAIN→AUDIO
(5Vac) when (5Vac) when
data are data are
received; 5Vdc received; 5Vdc
when no data when no data
are received. are received.
7 SDA7 Data line of the I2C bus 0 Clock signal Clock signal 1 1 0 - MAIN→AUDIO
(5Vac) when (5Vac) when
data are data are
received; 5Vdc received; 5Vdc
when no data when no data
are received. are received.
RS 1 M+5V 5V power supply for microcomputer 0 5 5 5 5 0 - MAIN→RS232C
2 TXD RS232 driver output 0 Clock signal Clock signal Clock signal Clock signal 0 MAIN→RS232C
used during used during used during used during
data data data data
transmission transmission transmission transmission
(3.3Vac) (3.3Vac) (3.3Vac) (3.3Vac)
3.3Vdc when 3.3Vdc when 3.3Vdc when 3.3Vdc when
no data are no data are no data are no data are
received. received. received. received. -
3 GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
4 RXD RS232 receiver input 0 Clock signal Clock signal Clock signal Clock signal 0 - RS232C→MAIN
(3.3Vac) when (3.3Vac) when (3.3Vac) when (3.3Vac) when
data are data are data are data are
received; received; received; received;
received. received. received. received.
5 M+3.3V 3.3V power supply for microcomputer 0 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 0 - MAIN→RS232C
6 GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
7 REMIN2/RXD Data signal of 42VM5 0 Clock signal Clock signal Clock signal Clock signal 0 - RS232C→MAIN
1 wired remote 42VP5 (3.3Vac) when (3.3Vac) when (3.3Vac) when (3.3Vac) when
control 42XM3 data are data are data are data are
50XM4 received; received; received; received;
61XM3 3.3Vdc when 3.3Vdc when 3.3Vdc when 3.3Vdc when
received. received. received. received.
42VR5 0 0 0 0 0 0 -
42XR3
50XR4
61XR3
8 RESET SW NC - - - - - - - -
9 PLE_CTL PLE control 42VM5 0 3.3V duning 3.3V duning 3.3V duning 0 0 - MAIN→RS232C
42VP5 data data data
42XM3 transmission transmission transmission
50XM4 for Video for Video for Video
61XM3 WOLL WOLL WOLL
0V when no 0V when no 0V when no
data are data are data are
transmitted transmitted transmitted
42VR5 0 0 0 0 0 0 -
42XR3
50XR4
61XR3
10 TXD1 RS232 driver 42VM5 0 Clock signal Clock signal Clock signal 0 0 - MAIN→RS232C
output 42VP5 used during used during used during
42XM3 data data data
50XM4 transmission transmission transmission
61XM3 (5Vac) 5Vdc (5Vac) 5Vdc (5Vac) 5Vdc
when no data when no data when no data
are are are
transmitted. transmitted. transmitted.
11-1
CONFIDENTIAL
management OFF
★★ ★★
42VR5 0 0 0 0 0 0 -
42XR3
50XR4
61XR3
11 232C_SHUT ON/OFF control for TXD0 driver 0 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 0 - MAIN→RS232C
12 REM Insertion 42VM5 0 3.3V when a 3.3V when a 3.3V when a 3.3V when a 0 - RS232C→MAIN
detection for 42VP5 wired remote wired remote wired remote wired remote
wired remote 42XM3 control is control is control is control is
control input 50XM4 connected/ connected/ connected/ connected/
61XM3 When not When not When not When not
connected. connected. connected. connected.
42VR5 - - - - - - - (NC for Model R)
42XR3
50XR4
61XR3
TM 1 SCL5 Clock line of the I2C bus 0 Clock signal Clock signal 0 0 0 - MAIN→SENB
used during used during
data data
transmission transmission
(3.3Vac) (3.3Vac)
3.3Vdc when 3.3Vdc when
no data are no data are
transmitted. transmitted.
2 GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
3 VDD+3.3V 3.3V power supply for analog signals 0 3.3 3.3 0 0 0 - MAIN→SENB
4 SDA5 Data line of the I2C bus 0 During data During data 0 0 0 MAIN←→SENB
exchange: exchange:
Clock signal Clock signal
(3.3Vac), Data (3.3Vac), Data
not not
exchanged: exchanged:
3.3Vdc 3.3Vdc -
TR 1 SCL5 Clock line of the I2C bus 0 Clock signal Clock signal 0 0 0 - SENB→SENＤ
data data
(3.3Vac) (3.3Vac)
2 GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
3 VDD+3.3V 3.3V power supply for analog signals 0 3.3 3.3 0 0 0 - SENB→SENＤ
4 SDA5 Data line of the I2C bus 0 During data During data 0 0 0 SENB←→SEND
exchange: exchange:
not not
3.3Vdc 3.3Vdc -
TS 1 SCL5 Clock line of the I2C bus 0 Clock signal Clock signal 0 0 0 - SEND→SENC
data data
(3.3Vac) (3.3Vac)
2 GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
3 VDD+3.3V 3.3V power supply for analog signals 0 3.3 3.3 0 0 0 - SEND→SENC
4 SDA5 Data line of the I2C bus 0 During data During data 0 0 0 SEND←→SENC
exchange: exchange:
not not
3.3Vdc 3.3Vdc -
FA 1 FAN-CTL Voltage- 42VM5 - - - - - - - -
controllable 42VP5
power supply 42VR5
42XM3 0 11.5Vdc 11.5Vdc 0 0 0 - MAIN→FAN
42XR3 during high- during high-
speed speed
revolution revolution
(Fan mode H); (Fan mode H);
8.5Vdc during 8.5Vdc during
medium speed medium speed
(Fan mode M); (Fan mode M);
low-speed low-speed
(Fan mode L) (Fan mode L)
50XM4 0 11.6Vdc 11.6Vdc 0 0 0 -
speed speed
low-speed low-speed
61XM3 0 9.3Vdc during 9.3Vdc during 0 0 0 -
61XR3 high-speed high-speed
low-speed low-speed
2 GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
3 ALARM FAN lock detect 42VM5 - - - - - - - -
signal output 42VP5
42VR5
11-2
CONFIDENTIAL
management OFF
★★ ★★
42XM3 0 0V during 0V during 0 0 0 - FAN→MAIN

42XR3 normal fan normal fan
50XM4 operation;3.3V operation;3.3V
50XR4 dc while the dc while the
61XM3 fan is stopped. fan is stopped.
61XR3
FB 1 FAN-CTL Voltage- 42VM5 - - - - - - - -
controllable 42VP5
power supply 42VR5
42XM3 0 11.5Vdc 11.5Vdc 0 0 0 - MAIN→FAN
speed speed
low-speed low-speed
50XM4 0 11.6Vdc 11.6Vdc 0 0 0 -
speed speed
low-speed low-speed
61XM3 0 9.3Vdc during 9.3Vdc during 0 0 0 -
low-speed low-speed
2 GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
signal output 42VP5
42VR5
50XM4 operation;3.3V operation;3.3V
50XR4 dc while the dc while the
61XM3 fan is stopped. fan is stopped.
61XR3
FC 1 FAN-CTL Voltage- 42VM5 - - - - - - - -
controllable 42VP5
power supply 42VR5
42XM3
42XR3
50XM4
50XR4
61XM3 0 9.3Vdc during 9.3Vdc during 0 0 0 - FAN→MAIN
low-speed low-speed
2 GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
signal output 42VP5
42VR5
42XM3
42XR3
50XM4
50XR4
operation;3.3V operation;3.3V
dc while the dc while the
fan is stopped. fan is stopped.
AD 1 GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
2 GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
3 ALARM Module alarm signal 0 5Vdc during 5Vdc during 0 0 0 - PDP→MAIN
normal PDP normal PDP
operation; 0V operation; 0V
when the PDP when the PDP
is out of order. is out of order.
4 GND GND 00 0 0 0 0 - -
11-3
CONFIDENTIAL
management OFF
★★ ★★
5 PS+ PSS input PS+ 0 PSS LVDS PSS LVDS 0 0 0 - PDP→MAIN

serial differen serial differen
tial PS+ input tial PS+ input
0Vac; Bias 0.3Vac; Bias
1.1Vdc 1.25Vdc
6 PS- PSS input PS- 0 PSS LVDS PSS LVDS 0 0 0 - PDP→MAIN

serial differen serial differen
tial PS+ input tial PS+ input
0Vac; Bias 0.3Vac; Bias
1.4Vdc 1.25Vdc
7 MSEL 42V5 compatible interface OFF 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -

8 GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
9 RH+ OSD system output H+ 0 OSD LVDS OSD LVDS 0 0 0 - MAIN→PDP
serial serial
differential H+ differential H+
output 0Vac; output 0Vac;
Bias 1.1Vdc Bias 1.1Vdc
10 RH- OSD system output H– 0 OSD LVDS OSD LVDS 0 0 0 - MAIN→PDP

serial serial
differential H- differential H-
11 RG+ OSD system output G+ 0 OSD LVDS OSD LVDS 0 0 0 - MAIN→PDP

serial serial
differential G+ differential G+
output 0.3Vac; output 0.3Vac;
12 RG- OSD system output G- 0 OSD LVDS OSD LVDS 0 0 0 - MAIN→PDP

serial serial
differential G- differential G-
13 RF+ Mode system output F+ 0 Video mode Video mode 0 0 0 - MAIN→PDP

LVDS serial LVDS serial
differential F+ differential F+
14 RF- Mode system output F- 0 Video mode Video mode 0 0 0 - MAIN→PDP

differential F- differential F-
15 GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
16 RE+ Video system output E+ 0 Video mode Video mode 0 0 0 - MAIN→PDP
differential E+ differential E+
* Only for the
PX-42VP4
Series, 0.3Vac
and bias 1.25
Vdc in theater
mode when
60Hz motion
pictures are
displayed.
17 RE- Video system output E- 0 Video mode Video mode 0 0 0 - MAIN→PDP
differential E- differential E-
output 0Vac; output 0.3Vac;
* Only for the
PX-42VP4
Series, 0.3Vac
and bias 1.25
Vdc in theater
mode when
60Hz motion
pictures are
displayed.
18 RD+ Video system output D+ 0 Video mode Video mode 0 0 0 - MAIN→PDP
differential D+ differential D+
19 RD- Video system output D– 0 Video mode Video mode 0 0 0 - MAIN→PDP

differential D- differential D-
11-4
CONFIDENTIAL
management OFF
★★ ★★
20 RCLK+ Video system output clock+ 0 Video data Video data 0 0 0 - MAIN→PDP
clock LVDS clock LVDS
serial serial
differential differential
clock+ output clock+ output
0.3Vac; Bias 0.3Vac; Bias
1.25Vdc 1.25Vdc
21 RCLK- Video system output clock– 0 Video data Video data 0 0 0 - MAIN→PDP
clock LVDS clock LVDS
serial serial
differential differential
clock- output clock- output
0.3Vac; Bias 0.3Vac; Bias
1.25Vdc 1.25Vdc
22 GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
23 RC+ Video system output C+ 0 Video data Video data 0 0 0 - MAIN→PDP
differential C+ differential C+
24 RC- Video system output C– 0 Video data Video data 0 0 0 - MAIN→PDP

differential C- differential C-
25 RB+ Video system output B+ 0 Video data Video data 0 0 0 - MAIN→PDP

differential B+ differential B+
26 RB- Video system output B– 0 Video data Video data 0 0 0 - MAIN→PDP

differential B- differential B-
27 RA+ Video system output A+ 0 Video data Video data 0 0 0 - MAIN→PDP

differential A+ differential A+
28 RA- Video system output A– 0 Video data Video data 0 0 0 - MAIN→PDP

differential A- differential A-
29 GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
30 GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
31 GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
LD 1 REMIN1 Infrared remote control data 0 Clock signal Clock signal Clock signal Clock signal 0 LED→PWR
(5Vac) when (5Vac) when (5Vac) when (5Vac) when
received; 5Vdc received; 5Vdc received; 5Vdc received; 5Vdc
when no data when no data when no data when no data
are received. are received. are received. are received. -
2 LEDCTL1 Standby red LED control 0 0 0 3.3 3.3 0 - PWR→LED
3 LEDCTL2 POWER ON green LED control 0 3.3 3.3 0 0 0 - PWR→LED
4 GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
5 M+5V 5V power supply for microcomputer 0 5 5 5 5 0 - PWR→LED
PW 1 SW7 Power start control 0 6.8 6.8 6.8 6.8 0 - PW→MAIN
2 POIN Power start detection 0 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 0 - PW→MAIN
3 GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
4 M+5V 5V power supply for microcomputer 0 5 5 5 5 0 - MAIN→PW
5 M+7V 7V power supply for microcomputer 0 6.8 6.8 6.8 6.8 6.8 - MAIN→PW
6 REMIN1 Infrared remote control data 0 Clock signal Clock signal Clock signal Clock signal 0 - PW→MAIN
(5Vac) when (5Vac) when (5Vac) when (5Vac) when
received; 5Vdc received; 5Vdc received; 5Vdc received; 5Vdc
when no data when no data when no data when no data
are received. are received. are received. are received.
7 LEDCTL1 Standby red LED control 0 0 0 3.3 3.3 0 - MAIN→PW
8 LEDCTL2 POWER ON green LED control 0 3.3 3.3 0 0 0 - MAIN→PW
SW 1 CTL1 Key input detection 0 0.7~2.8Vdc 0.7~2.8Vdc 0.7~2.8Vdc 0.7~2.8Vdc 0 - SW→MAIN
when key when key when key when key
inputs are inputs are inputs are inputs are
entered; entered; entered; entered;
no key inputs no key inputs no key inputs no key inputs
are entered. are entered. are entered. are entered.
2 CTL2 Key input detection 0 0.7~2.8Vdc 0.7~2.8Vdc 0.7~2.8Vdc 0.7~2.8Vdc 0 - SW→MAIN
when key when key when key when key
inputs are inputs are inputs are inputs are
entered; entered; entered; entered;
no key inputs no key inputs no key inputs no key inputs
are entered. are entered. are entered. are entered.
3 GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
PA 1 S+12 +12V power supply for audio circuits 0 12 12 0 0 0 - POWER→AUDIO
2 S+12 +12V power supply for audio circuits 0 12 12 0 0 0 - POWER→AUDIO
3 S+12 +12V power supply for audio circuits 0 12 12 0 0 0 - POWER→AUDIO
4 GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
11-5
CONFIDENTIAL
management OFF
★★ ★★
5 GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
6 GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
PD 1 ALARM PDP alarm signal 42VM5 0 5Vdc when the 5Vdc when the 0 0 0 - PDP→POWER
42VP5 PDP is normal; PDP is normal;
42VR5 0V when it is 0V when it is
42XM3 abnormal. abnormal.
2 D.GND GND 42XR3 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
50XM4
3 D.GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
50XR4
4 D.GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
5 D.GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
6 D+60 Vd power supply 0 60Vdc 60Vdc 0 0 0 - PDWER→PDP
for PDP (changeable (changeable
according to according to
the PDP) the PDP)
7 D+60 digital circuits 0 60Vdc 60Vdc 0 0 0 - PDWER→PDP
(changeable (changeable
the PDP) the PDP)
8 NC digital circuits - - - - - - - -
9 D+170 Vs power supply 0 170Vdc 170Vdc 0 0 0 PDWER→PDP
for PDP high- (changeable (changeable
voltage circuits according to according to
the PDP) the PDP) -
10 D+170 Vs power supply 0 170Vdc 170Vdc 0 0 0 - PDWER→PDP
the PDP) the PDP)
1 ALARM PDP alarm signal 61XM3 0 5Vdc when the 5Vdc when the 0 0 0 - PDP→POWER
61XR3 PDP is normal; PDP is normal;
0V when it is 0V when it is
abnormal. abnormal.
2 D.GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
3 D.GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
4 D+5 5V power supply 0 5.15 5.15 0 0 0 POWER→PDP
for digital circuits -
5 D.GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
6 D.GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
7 D+65 Vd power supply 0 65Vdc 65Vdc 0 0 0 - POWER→PDP
the PDP) the PDP)
8 NC digital circuits - - - - - - - -
9 D+175 Vs power supply 0 175Vdc 175Vdc 0 0 0 POWER→PDP
the PDP) the PDP) -
10 D+175 Vs power supply 0 175Vdc 175Vdc 0 0 0 - POWER→PDP
the PDP) the PDP)
PH 1 D+5 5V power supply 42VM5 0 5.15 5.15 0 0 0 PDWER→PDP
for digital circuits 42VP5 -
2 D+5 5V power supply 42VR5 0 5.15 5.15 0 0 0 PDWER→PDP
for digital circuits 42XM3 -
3 D.GND GND 42XR3 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
4 D.GND GND 50XM4 0 0 0 0 0 0 -
50XR4 -
1 D+175 Vs power supply 61XM3 0 175Vdc 175Vdc 0 0 0 POWER→PDP
for PDP high- 61XR3 (changeable (changeable
the PDP) the PDP) -
2 D+175 Vs power supply 0 175Vdc 175Vdc 0 0 0 POWER→PDP
the PDP) the PDP) -
3 NC Non-connection - - - - - - - -
4 D+65 Vd power supply 0 65Vdc 65Vdc 0 0 0 POWER→PDP
the PDP) the PDP) -
5 D.GND digital circuits 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
6 D.GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
7 D+5 5V power supply 0 5.15 5.15 0 0 0 POWER→PDP
for digital circuits -
8 D.GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
9 D.GND GND 0 0 0 0 0 0 - -
11-6
BLOCK DIAGRAM CONFIDENTIAL
PX-50XM4/61XM3 Series
VIDEO1 Video SW Video SW Video chroma CPU

(BNC) (for Loop) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)
LPF1 A/D1 Digital signal

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2 Double pic processing
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1 Video SW
(D-Sub) (for Loop)
RGB3 TMDS
(DVI) Receiver : Analog signal line
: Digital signal line
: Control signal line
12-1
BLOCK DIAGRAM CONFIDENTIAL
PX-50XR4/61XR3 Series
VIDEO1 Video SW Video chroma CPU

(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2 Double pic processing
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
12-1
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS (PX-50XM4/61XM3 Series) CONFIDENTIAL
getmanual.com
13-1
CONFIDENTIAL
getmanual.com
13-2
CONFIDENTIAL
13-3
CONFIDENTIAL
13-4
CONFIDENTIAL
13-5
CONFIDENTIAL
13-6
CONFIDENTIAL
getmanual.com
13-7
CONFIDENTIAL
13-8
CONFIDENTIAL
getmanual.com
13-9
CONFIDENTIAL
13-10
CONFIDENTIAL
getmanual.com
13-11
CONFIDENTIAL
13-12
CONFIDENTIAL
13-13
CONFIDENTIAL
13-14
CONFIDENTIAL
13-15
CONFIDENTIAL
getmanual.com
13-16
CONFIDENTIAL
getmanual.com
13-17
CONFIDENTIAL
13-18
CONFIDENTIAL
13-19
CONFIDENTIAL
13-20
CONFIDENTIAL
13-21
CONFIDENTIAL
13-22
CONFIDENTIAL
13-23
CONFIDENTIAL
13-24
CONFIDENTIAL
13-25
CONFIDENTIAL
(PX-*****A only)
13-26
P OWER U N IT (for PX-50XM4/50XR4) CONFIDENTIAL
13-27
P O W E R U N I T (for PX-61XM3/61XR3) CONFIDENTIAL
13-28
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS (PX-50XR4/61XR3 Series) CONFIDENTIAL
13-1
CONFIDENTIAL
13-2
CONFIDENTIAL
13-3
CONFIDENTIAL
13-4
CONFIDENTIAL
13-5
CONFIDENTIAL
13-6
CONFIDENTIAL
13-7
CONFIDENTIAL
13-8
CONFIDENTIAL
13-9
CONFIDENTIAL
13-10
CONFIDENTIAL
13-11
CONFIDENTIAL
13-12
CONFIDENTIAL
13-13
CONFIDENTIAL
13-14
CONFIDENTIAL
13-15
CONFIDENTIAL
13-16
CONFIDENTIAL
13-17
CONFIDENTIAL
13-18
CONFIDENTIAL
13-19
CONFIDENTIAL
13-20
CONFIDENTIAL
13-21
CONFIDENTIAL
13-22
CONFIDENTIAL
13-23
CONFIDENTIAL
13-24
CONFIDENTIAL
13-25
CONFIDENTIAL
(PX-*****A only)
13-26
getmanual.com
13-27
getmanual.com
13-28
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION CONFIDENTIAL
Power supply (Common to all models)

When the power cord is connected to a wall outlet, M+7V (7Vdc) begins to be fed to IC9503 (M+3.3V) from
Pin 1 of the PM connector. When the main power switch (S2601) is turned on, IC9503 is turned on by
means of SW7 (M+7V) and M+3.3V (3.3Vdc) is fed to the CPU (IC9501). With the power supply of M+3.3V,
the CPU feeds the POWER signal [H] to the power unit from Pin 3 of the PM connector. As a result,
power supplies of the signal system (D+5V, D+3.3V, D+2.5V, A+12V, A+6V, S+12V) are turned on so that
power can be fed to the respective circuits of the signal system. After the power has been fed to the signal
system, the power supplies for the high-voltage system [Vs, Vd (Caution 1) ] are generated and fed to
the PDP (plasma display panel). AC IN
(AC Connector 1, 2pin)
POMUTE
(PM Connector 5pin)
Sequence
circuit
M+7V
POWER (PM Connector 1pin)
M+3.3V
SW7(PM Connector
6pin) (S2601)
S2601
M+3.3V
(PW Connector 4pin)
T1 M+7V
POWER
(PM Connector 3pin)
D+5V
(PH Connector 1,2pin)
A+12V * PX-61XM2 Series only
(PD Connector 4pin, PH Connector 7pin)
Input A+12V
Rectifier
PowerF S+12V (PV Connector 1pin)
Filter Circuit
actor
AC Circuit
Input S+12V
A+6V (PA Connector 1~3pin)
T2
A+6V (PV Connector
3,4pin) VDD+5V
(TM Connector 3pin)
(Caution 1) The standard voltages of Vd
D+5V
and Vs for each model are specified D+2.5V
below. These values can, however, differ D+2.5V
according to the PDP specifications. (PN Connector 7~9pin)
PX-42VP4 Series Vs=170V, Vd=60V
D+3.3V
PX-42XM2 Series Vs=190V, Vd=65V
D+3.3V
PX-50XM3 Series Vs=195V, Vd=64V (Caution 2)
(PN Connector 1~3pin)
PX-61XM2 Series Vs=175V, Vd=65V Vs
T4 (PD Connector 9,10pin)
(Caution2) T5 VS
* PX-61XM2 Series only
PX-42VP4 Series T4
(PD Connector 9, 10pin, PH Connector 1, 2pin)
PX-42XM2 Series T4
PX-50XM3 Series T4/5 Vd Vd
PX-61XM2 Series T4/5 T3 (PD Connector 6, 7pin)
* PX-61XM2 Series only
(PD Connector 7pin, PH Connector 4pin)
GND ALARM 14-1
(PD Connector 1pin)
CONFIDENTIAL
■Video signal processing
1. Basic configuration diagram

(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
Double picture processing
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-2
CONFIDENTIAL
2. Single screen display
(1) Video 1, 2, 3 inputs
 Block operation diagram: Red lines show the flow of signals.

(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-3
CONFIDENTIAL
 Operational descriptions
• The signal out of Video1,2,3, selected with Video SW, is entered in the Video chroma decoder.
• When the entered input is a Composite signal (Video1,2), Y/C separation is carried out in the Video chroma decoder. No Y/C separation is carried out in the case of
an S signal (Video3) input.
• The Y/C-separated signal is converted into a chroma signal in the Video chroma decoder. The converted signal is further digitized.
• The digitized signal input is entered in the digital signal processing block, where various processing of I-P conversion, scaling, γ correction, and others is carried
out.
• After passing through these processes, the signal is entered in the LVDS transmitter and the LVDS signal is generated there. This signal is then applied to the
module.
14-4
CONFIDENTIAL
(2) Chroma signal inputs (RCA input)


(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-5
CONFIDENTIAL
• The chroma signal entered from the DVD/HD1 is output from the out1 side through the Video/sync SW.
• The signal output from out1 passes through the LPF1 and is entered in the A/D1 where it is digitized.
out.
module.
14-6
CONFIDENTIAL
(3) PC signal inputs (RGB1 (D-Sub) input)


(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-7
CONFIDENTIAL
• The PC signal entered from the RGB1 is output from the out2 side through the Video/sync SW.
• The signal output from out2 is entered in the A/D2 and it is digitized there.
• The digitized signal input is entered in the digital signal processing block, where various processing of scaling, γ correction, and others is carried out.
module.
14-8
CONFIDENTIAL
(4) PC signal inputs (RGB2 (5BNC) input)


(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-9
CONFIDENTIAL
• The signal output from out2 is entered in the A/D2 and it is digitized there.
• After passing through these processes, the signal is entered in the LVDS transmitter and the LVDS signal is
generated there. This signal is then applied to the module.
14-10
CONFIDENTIAL
(5) Chroma signal inputs (DVD/HD2 (5BNC) input)


(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-11
CONFIDENTIAL
out.
module.
14-12
CONFIDENTIAL
(6) PC signal inputs [RGB3 (DV1) input]


(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-13
CONFIDENTIAL
• The PC signal entered from the RGB3 is processed in the TMDS receiver for the conversion from the serial digital signal to the parallel digital signal.
• The processed signal input is entered in the digital signal processing block, where various processing of scaling, γ correction, and others is carried out.
module.
14-14
CONFIDENTIAL
3. Dual screen display
(1) Basic combination diagram
DVD/HD1 DVD/HD2 RGB1 RGB2 RGB3

Main Video1,2,3
(3RCA) (5BNC) (D-Sub) (5BNC) (DVI)
Sub
Video1,2,3 OK OK OK OK OK
DVD/HD1
OK OK OK OK OK
(3RCA)
DVD/HD2
OK OK OK NG OK
(5BNC)
RGB1
OK OK OK OK OK
(D-Sub)
RGB2
OK OK NG OK OK
(5BNC)
RGB3
OK OK OK OK OK
(DVI)
The flow of signals in relation to the above-mentioned combinations is described below.
14-15
CONFIDENTIAL
3-1. Video 1, 2, 3 for Main
(1) When Sub is for chroma signal (DVD/HD1 (3RCA)) input
 Block operation diagram: Red lines show the flow of Main signals. Blue lines indicate the Sub signals and green lines show the flow of synthesized signals.

(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-16
CONFIDENTIAL
Main side
• The digitized signal input is entered in the digital signal processing block, where various processing of I-P conversion, scaling, g correction, and others is carried
out.
Sub side
out.
Dual screen synthesis
• The signals processed in Main and Sub respectively are then synthesized in the digital signal processing block.
module.
14-17
CONFIDENTIAL
(2) When Sub is for chroma signal (DVD/HD2 (5BNC)) input


(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-18
CONFIDENTIAL
Main side
out.
Sub side
out.
module.
14-19
CONFIDENTIAL
(3) When Sub is for PC signal (RGB1 (D-Sub)) input


(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-20
CONFIDENTIAL
Main side
out.
Sub side
• The signal output from out2 is entered in the A/D2 where it is digitized.
module.
14-21
CONFIDENTIAL
(4) When Sub is for PC signal (RGB2 (5BNC)) input


(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-22
CONFIDENTIAL
Main side
out.
Sub side
module.
14-23
CONFIDENTIAL
(5) When Sub is for PC signal (RGB3 (DVI)) input


(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-24
CONFIDENTIAL
Main side
out.
Sub side
• After passing through these processes, the signal is entered in the LVDS transmitter and the LVDS signal is
generated there. This signal is then applied to the module.
14-25
CONFIDENTIAL
3-2. Chroma signal (DVD/HD1) input for Main
(1) When Sub is for Video 1, 2, 3 input

(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-26
CONFIDENTIAL
Main side
out.
Sub side
out.
module.
14-27
CONFIDENTIAL


(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-28
CONFIDENTIAL
Main side
out.
Sub side
out.
module.
14-29
CONFIDENTIAL


(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-30
CONFIDENTIAL
Main side
out.
Sub side
module.
14-31
CONFIDENTIAL


(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-32
CONFIDENTIAL
Main side
out.
Sub side
• The digitized signal input is entered in the digital signal processing block, where various processing of scaling, g correction, and others is carried out.
module.
14-33
CONFIDENTIAL


(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-34
CONFIDENTIAL
Main side
out.
Sub side
module.
14-35
CONFIDENTIAL
3-3. Chroma signal (DVD/HD2) input for Main

(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-36
CONFIDENTIAL
Main side
out.
Sub side
out.
module.
14-37
CONFIDENTIAL


(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-38
CONFIDENTIAL
Main side
out.
Sub side
out.
module.
14-39
CONFIDENTIAL

Block operation diagram: Red lines show the flow of Main signals. Blue lines indicate the Sub signals and green lines show the flow of synthesized signals.

(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-40
CONFIDENTIAL
Main side
out.
Sub side
module.
14-41
CONFIDENTIAL


(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-42
CONFIDENTIAL
Main side
out.
Sub side
module.
14-43
CONFIDENTIAL
3-4. PC signal (RGB1) input for Main

(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-44
CONFIDENTIAL
Main side
Sub side
out.
module.
14-45
CONFIDENTIAL
(2) When Sub is for chroma signal (DVD/HD1 (3RCA) input


(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-46
CONFIDENTIAL
Main side
Sub side
• The signal output from out1 passes through the LP1 and is entered in the A/D1 where it is digitized.
out.
module.
14-47
CONFIDENTIAL


(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-48
CONFIDENTIAL
Main side
Sub side
• The signal output from out1 passes through the LP1 and is entered in the A/D1 where it is digitized.
out.
• After passing through these processes, the signal is entered in the LVDS transmitter and the LVDS signal isgenerated there. This signal is then applied to the
module.
14-49
CONFIDENTIAL
(4) When Sub is for chroma signal (RGB2 (5BNC)) input


(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-50
CONFIDENTIAL
Main side
Sub side
module.
14-51
CONFIDENTIAL


(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-52
CONFIDENTIAL
Main side
out.
Sub side
module.
14-53
CONFIDENTIAL

(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-54
CONFIDENTIAL
Main side
Sub side
out.
module.
14-55
CONFIDENTIAL


(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-56
CONFIDENTIAL
Main side
Sub side
out.
module.
14-57
CONFIDENTIAL


(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-58
CONFIDENTIAL
Main side
Sub side
module.
14-59
CONFIDENTIAL


(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-60
CONFIDENTIAL
Main side
out.
Sub side
module.
14-61
CONFIDENTIAL

(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-62
CONFIDENTIAL
Main side
Sub side
out.
module.
14-63
CONFIDENTIAL


(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-64
CONFIDENTIAL
Main side
Sub side
out.
module.
14-65
CONFIDENTIAL


(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-66
CONFIDENTIAL
Main side
Sub side
out.
module.
14-67
CONFIDENTIAL

Block operation diagram: Red lines show the flow of Main signals. Blue lines indicate the Sub signals and green lines show the flow of synthesized signals.

(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-68
CONFIDENTIAL
Main side
Sub side
module.
14-69
CONFIDENTIAL


(BNC) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1
(D-Sub)
RGB3 TMDS
14-70
CONFIDENTIAL
Main side
Sub side
out.
module.
14-71
CONFIDENTIAL
(6)Loop out
Flow of loop output signals : Red lines show the flow of signals.
• PX-50VM4/61XM3 Series only
VIDEO1 Video SW Video SW Video chroma CPU

(BNC) (for Loop) Decoder
VIDEO2
(RCA)
VIDEO3
(S)

DVD/HD1 Out1
Processing block
(3RCA) LVDS
Transmitter
I-P converter
Video/sync
Scaling
SW
γ correction
RGB2/
Double pic processing
DVD/HD2
(5BNC)
LPF2 A/D2
Out2
To Module
RGB1 Video SW
(D-Sub) (for Loop)
RGB3 TMDS
14-72
CONFIDENTIAL
• When the loop output is turned on, the VIDEO1 and RGB1 terminals become available as the appropriative terminals for loop output with the effect of the VIDEO
SW (for loop).
• The signal input from the VIDEO2 is obtained from the VIDEO1 terminal, while the signal input from the RGB2 is obtained from the RGB1 terminal.
14-73
CONFIDENTIAL
■Audio signal processing
The L/R AUDIO signals entered from the three systems of M5006, M5007, and M5008 are generated from the RCA
terminals located on the monitor side. These signals are controlled and selected by the AUDIO SELECTOR circuit
incorporated in the MAIN PWB. The selected AUDIO signals are output from the AU connector to the AUDIO PWB.
The L/R signals output on the AUDIO PWB side are controlled at the CONTROLLER for their sound volume, balance,
bass, and treble. Since then, the signals are power-amplified at the AUDIO AMPLIFIRE and output to the SPEAKER
TERMINAL. The rated speaker load impedance is 6Ω.
The POWER UNIT feeds the DC power from its PA connector to the AUDIO PWB.
M5006 PA
AUDIO 1 L
AUDIO 1 R AUDIO
M5007 SELECTOR (L)
AUDIO
AUDIO 2 L AU CONTROLLER AMPRIFIRE
AUDIO 2 R AUDIO
M5008 SELECTOR (R)
L R
AUDIO 3 L
AUDIO 3 R MAIN PWB
PCB-5040/5041 AUDIO PWB PCB-5042H
+ – – +
SPEAKER TERMINAL
14-74
CONFIDENTIAL
• PX-50XM4/61XM3 only for the gray block PCB-5040 / MAIN PWB : PX-50XM4/61XM3
■CPU
1. Basic configuration diagram • PX-*****A only for the CCD PWB PCB-5041 / MAIN PWB : PX-50XR4/61XR3
Loop out SW
Extension FAN control
Video SW Port IC
ALARM
Video/sync
SW PCB-5044/ CCD PWB
CCD IC
AUDIO control Mix PLD

PCB-5042H/ AUDIO PWB
Module
POWER unit ALARM
PCB-5042D/ LED PWB LED OSD IC
PCB-5042B/ CTL PWB KEY control

E2PROM
PCB-5042E/ SENB PWB
PCB-5042F/ SENC PWB TEMP IC control
PCB-5042G/ SEND PWB LPF1 Digital signal Processing block1
I-P converter/Scaling
γ correction
LPF2 Double pic processing
REMOTE CONTROLL CPU
PCB-5042A / 232C PWB
RS232C control A/D1

Digital signal Processing block2
I-P converter/Scaling
A/D2 γ correction
Double pic processing
RESET IC
RTC IC Video chroma Decoder
3.3V detect ALARM
14-75
CONFIDENTIAL
Operation in each CPU block:
• For the purpose of signal changeover via the Extension Port IC based on the input mode, the Video SW and the Video/sync SW are set up.
• For the purpose of audio control (sound volume, balance, and sound quality), the audio control is set up.
• For the power control, power ON/OFF control is conducted for the Power unit.
• LED lighting is set up.
• The key codes are received from the Key control circuit. The key codes are A/D converted in the CPU for code recognition.
• The thermal data from the TEMP IC are received at the CPU. Based on these thermal data, the fan driving voltage is controlled via the Extension Port IC to regulate the fan speed.
• The remote control codes are received from the Remote Control.
• Communication is maintained with the external equipment via the RS232C control block.
• When the power supply is turned on, the CPU is reset with the reset signal sent from the RESET IC.
• During timer function control, the time-related information is received from the RTC IC. At that time, present time is also set up.
• According to the input signal, setting is made for the module. Based on the APL information, brightness control is also carried out.
• During the OSD display, the OSD display data and the OSD position data are set up for the OSD IC.
• Various setup data (input mode, power ON/OFF status, setup values of various user controls, and so on) are stored in the E2PROM.
• For each signal mode, the signal frequency division ratio, clock phase, and signal level are set up for A/D1,2.
• For motion picture signals, the D/A-converted DC voltage information from the CPU is put in the LPF 1,2 in order to set up the cutoff frequency.
• For the purpose of video signal processing (I-P conversion, scaling, gamma correction, and others), the digital signal processing block is set up for each input signal.
• Color system identification is performed by the Video chroma decoder and setting is made based on the color signal for the Video chroma decoder.
• A changeover action is taken between the closed caption mode and the text mode for the CCD IC.
Alarm detection:
• Temperature alarm
If the correct thermal data are not transmitted from the TEMP IC control circuit to Pin 2 (IC2 data) and Pin 1 (IC2 clock) of the TM connector (in such a case, [-] appears in the
column of the any temperature sensor T1 ~ T3 where FAN SET is faulty in the service menu), the CPU identifies this condition as a fault in the temperature sensor PWB and
causes the LED to blink in green at the intervals of approximately 2 seconds so that the power system can stay in the standby state. In addition, if the internal temperature of the set
should exceed about 75°C the LED makes [blinking in red] and the power supply assumes the standby state. To reset the alarming condition, it is necessary to turn [OFF] the main
power circuit of the set main unit once and then turn it [ON] again. When the temperature inside the set should exceed the levels specified below, the LED makes [blinking in red]
and the power supply assumes the standby state. To reset the alarm condition, it is necessary to turn OFF the mains power supply once in the main unit and turn it ON again.
42VP5/VM5/VR5: Approx. 95°C, 42XM3/XR3: Approx. 82°C, 50XM4/XR4: Approx. 80°C, 61XM3/XR3: Approx. 75°C
14-76
CONFIDENTIAL
• FAN alarm
When an “L” level signal input is applied from the FAN to Pin 3 of any one of the FA, FB, and FC connectors, the CPU identifies this condition that any of the
fans has stopped. The LED is then made to blink in green at the intervals of about 0.5 seconds so that the power standby state is assumed. To reset the
alarming condition, it is necessary to turn [OFF] the main power circuit of the set main unit once and then turn it [ON] again.
• Module alarm
When an “L” level signal input is applied from the Module to pin 3 of the AD, the CPU identifies this condition as an error detected in the module. The LED is
then made to light in red and green reciprocally so that the power standby state is assumed. To reset the alarming condition, it is necessary to turn [ON] the
main power circuit of the main unit while the [Input Selector] key is kept pressed at the set main unit. At that time, the [Input Selector] key of the main unit
must be kept pressed for more than 2 seconds.
• Source voltage alarm
When voltage at pin 1 (D3.3V) of the PN connector should remain to be “2.5V or below” for about 30 seconds, the CPU identifies this condition as a source
voltage error and causes the LED to light in red so that the power standby state is assumed. To reset the alarming condition, it is necessary to turn [OFF]
the main power circuit of the set main unit once and then turn it [ON] again.
14-77

Service Manual: Model PX-50XM4 Series PX-50XR4 Series Plasma Monitor

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Service Manual: Model PX-50XM4 Series PX-50XR4 Series Plasma Monitor

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

CONFIDENTIAL

MODEL PX-50XM4 series

NEC Plasma Display Corporation

INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................ 2-1

(2) For North America PX-50XM4A

(3) For European countries PX-50XM4G

(4) For countries other than the above areas PX-50XM4W

(2) CLASS B No applicable model

(2) For North America PX-50XR4A

(3) For European countries PX-50XR4G

(4) For countries other than the above areas PX-50XR4W

(1) CLASS A No applicable model

(2) CLASS B PX-50XR4A,PX-50XR4W,PX-50XR4G

If this display is disregarded and equipment is handled

WARNING wrongly, this can be a cause of physical injury and a

If this display is disregarded and equipment is

This icon indicates a dangerous place where an electric shock is anticipated.

• Be careful of an electric shock or a burn.

fume, dust, and dew condensation?

Is the product disassembled to the grade where troubleshooting is possible?

Not to dislodge the back cabinet.

• Do not give shocks and vibration.

• Do not put anything.

• Transportation must be done by enough personnel.

■Miscellaneous caution matters

panel surface does not get any shock or stress.

PlasmaSync Plasma Monitor

NEC Solutions (America), Inc.

core (small) core (small)

Power cable (supplied)

noyau (petit) noyau (petit)

Table of Signals Supported

What is HDCP/HDCP technology?

Copyright © by NEC Plasma Display Corporation

PlasmaSync Plasma Monitor

For the specifications of your plasma monitor,

NEC Solutions (America), Inc.

Ventilation Requirements for How to use the safety metal fittings

Screw or Hook etc.

Safty metal fittings

Creating a video wall

RGB2 / DVD2 / HD2

control OUT Remote

Caution on when the plasma monitor is installed vertically Top side

• Rotate 90° clockwise as seen from the front when installing.

from the front. SEL. MENU/ENTER OK

• Be sure to set “OSM ANGLE” to “V” when using.

with the proper polarity. Bottom side

Using the wired remote control mode

• When not using the remote control for a long period,

• Do not use new and old batteries together, or use different

* The 1/8 Stereo Mini cable must be purchased separately. 8

VOLUME INPUT SELECT

VOLUME INPUT SELECT

q Power t LEFT/– and RIGHT/+

Rear View/ Terminal Board

RGB2 / DVD2 / HD2

A AC IN G RGB1 (mini D-Sub 15pin)

C VIDEO1, 2, 3 (BNC, RCA, S-Video) I EXTERNAL CONTROL

D AUDIO1, AUDIO2, AUDIO3 J REMOTE IN

F RGB2/ DVD2/ HD2

Remote Control u EXIT

When viewing videos or digital video discs